![HNXGL)NL]Q N=G
+NNMUKHNXGZMNV
1, 1ÊÊ Ê-/ , -
1$7,21$/%8,/',1*2'(
2),1',$
+NNMUGKMN9K
+NRXIXHN=NODIJUN
92/80(
N0
Supplied
by
Book
Supply
Bureau
Under
the
License
from
BIS
for
LARSEN
AND
TOUBRO
CONSTRUCTION
-
MANAPAKKAM,
CHENNAI
ON
17-03-2017
09:00:59
(123.63.24.35)
valid
upto31-12-2017
ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/nationalbuildingcode-240401165105-f4e9283c/85/NBC-National-Building-Code-volume-1-and-2-1-320.jpg)
![PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — SECTION 1 WATER SUPPLY 5
2.1.7 Backflow
a) The flow of water or other liquids, mixtures
or substances into the distributing pipes of a
system of supply of potable water from any
source or sources other than its intended
source.
b) The flow of a liquid in a direction reverse of
that intended.
2.1.8 Backflow Prevention Device — Any approved
measure or fitting or combination of fittings specifically
designed to prevent backflow or back siphonage in a
water service.
2.1.9 Back Pressure Back Flow — Due to an increased
pressure above the supply pressure, which may be due
to pumps, other equipment, gravity or other source of
pressure.
2.1.10 Back Siphonage — The flowing back of used,
contaminated, or polluted water from a plumbing fixture
or vessel into a water supply due to a reduced pressure
in such pipe (see 2.1.7).
2.1.11 Barrel — This portion of a pipe in which the
diameter and wall thickness remain uniform throughout.
2.1.12 Base — The lowest portion or lowest point of a
stack of vertical pipe.
2.1.13 Bath Room Group — Group of fixtures
consisting of water closet, lavatory, bath tub or shower
and other fittings with a floor drain located together.
2.1.14 Bedding — The material on which the pipe is
laid and which provides support for the pipe. Bedding
can be concrete, granular material or the prepared
trench bottom.
2.1.15 Chair — A bed of concrete or other suitable
material on the trench floor to provide a support for
the pipes at intervals.
2.1.16 Channel — The open waterway through which
sewage, storm water or other liquid wastes flow at the
invert of a manhole or an inspection chamber.
2.1.17 Communication Pipe — That part of a service
pipe which vests in the water undertakes. It starts at
the water main and terminate at a point which differs
according to the circumstances of the case.
2.1.18 Consumer — Any person who uses or is supplied
1 SCOPE
1.1 This Code (Part 9/Section 1) covers the basic
requirements of water supply for residential, business
and other types of buildings, including traffic terminal
stations. This Section also deals with general
requirements of plumbing connected to public water
supply and design of water supply systems along with
general guidelines about expansion in piping systems,
and swimming pools.
1.1.1 This Section does not take into consideration the
requirements of water supply for industrial plants and
processes, which have to be provided for separately. It
also does not provide the requirements of water supply
for other purposes, such as firefighting and street
cleaning.
2 TERMINOLOGY
For the purpose of this Section, the following definitions
shall apply in addition to the definitions given in
accepted standards [9-1(1)].
2.1 Definitions Relating to Water Supply
2.1.1 Access Panel — A removable panel mounted in a
frame, normally secured with screws and mounted in a
wall or ceiling, to provide access to concealed valves
or items which may require maintenance.
2.1.2 Air Gap, Water Distribution — Unobstructed
vertical distance through the free atmosphere between
the lowest opening from any pipe or faucet conveying
water to a tank or plumbing fixture and flood level rim
of the receptacle.
2.1.3 Air Valve — A valve that releases air from a
pipeline automatically without loss of water, or
introduce air into a line automatically if the internal
pressure becomes less than that of the atmosphere.
2.1.4 Authority Having Jurisdiction — The authority
which has been created by a statute and which for the
purpose of administering the Code/Part may authorize
a committee or an official to act on its behalf; hereinafter
called the ‘Authority’.
2.1.5 Available Head — The head of water available
at the point of consideration due to mains’ pressure or
overhead tank or any other source of pressure.
2.1.6 Anti-Siphon— A device or mechanism to prevent
siphonage.
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES
(INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT)
Section 1 Water Supply
Supplied
by
Book
Supply
Bureau
Under
the
License
from
BIS
for
LARSEN
AND
TOUBRO
CONSTRUCTION
-
MANAPAKKAM,
CHENNAI
ON
17-03-2017
09:00:59
(123.63.24.35)
valid
upto31-12-2017
ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/nationalbuildingcode-240401165105-f4e9283c/85/NBC-National-Building-Code-volume-1-and-2-9-320.jpg)
![PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — SECTION 1 WATER SUPPLY 11
3.3.1.1 No individual, firm, partnership or
corporation shall engage in the business of installing,
repairing or altering plumbing unless the plumbing
work performed in the course of such business is
under the direct supervision of a licensed/registered
plumber.
3.3.2 Examination and Certification
The Authority shall establish standards and procedure
for the qualification, examination and licensing/
registration of plumbers and shall issue licences to such
persons who meet the qualifications thereof and
successfully pass the examination.
3.3.3 For guidelines for registration of plumbers
including the minimum standards for qualifications for
the grant of licences/registration, reference may be
made to good practice [9-1(2)]. The Authority may also
utilize the services of the certified plumbers who are
certified for the required skill level under the
appropriate scheme of the Government.
4 WATER SUPPLY
4.1 Water Supply Requirements for Buildings
The total quantity of water per day is estimated based
on the proposed occupancy and activities catered.
Designer has to identify all the possible sources for
augmenting the shortfall in water supply. The
analysis of available water is done to decide the
treatment for consumption and treatment process
depends on the quality of water and the purpose for
which it is used.
Projection of population for each building shall be made
on the basis of its usage. Population for each type of
building shall be estimated on the basis of information
obtained from the users. Alternatively, population may
be worked on the following basis, for different type of
buildings:
a) Residential buildings:
Accommodation Population
Requirements
1 bedroom dwelling unit 4
2 bedroom dwelling unit 5
3 bedroom dwelling unit 6
4 bedroom dwelling unit
and above
7
NOTES
1 The above figures consider a domestic house-
hold including support personnel, wherever
applicable.
2 For plotted development, the population may be
arrived at after due consideration of the expected
number and type of domestic household units.
3 Dwelling unit under EWS category shall have
population requirement of 4 and studio apartment
shall have population requirement of 2.
b) Other than residential buildings:
Occupancy Population Requirement
Offices 1 person per 10 m2
of floor
area (see Note 1)
Schools Strength of school +
Teaching and non-teaching
staff
Hostels Number of beds + 4.5 x
(warden’s residence) +
staff
Hotels Number of beds + Staff +
Requirement of restaurant
seats
Hospitals Number of beds + Staff +
Patient attendants (generally
population density per bed
in secondary care hospital is
5, tertiary care is 7 and
quaternary care is 9)
Mercantile 1 person per 3 m2
of street
floor and sales basement
areas + 1 person per 6 m2
of upper sale floors
(Total population may be
segregated into 10 percent
for fixed and 90 percent
for floating/visitors)
Traffic
terminal
stations
Average number of users
per day (Total annual
passenger traffic/365) +
Staff + Vendors
NOTES
1 Wherever there are multiple work shifts, the
number of users within a 24 h period may be
considered as per actuals.
2 Population of 5 to 15 percent, depending on the
usage of building, shall be considered for visitors
and floating population likely to use the
buildings facilities.
4.1.1 Water Supply for Residences
A minimum of 70 to 100 litre per head per day may be
considered adequate for domestic needs of urban
communities, apart from non-domestic needs as
flushing requirements (which varies based on type of
building occupancy). As a general rule the following
rates per capita per day may be considered for domestic
and non-domestic needs:
a) For communities with population up to 20 000:
1) Water supply through stand: 40 lphd (Min)
post
2) Water supply through house: 70 to 100 lphd
service connection
b) For communities with: 100 to 135 lphd
population 20 000 to 100 000
together with full flushing system
Supplied
by
Book
Supply
Bureau
Under
the
License
from
BIS
for
LARSEN
AND
TOUBRO
CONSTRUCTION
-
MANAPAKKAM,
CHENNAI
ON
17-03-2017
09:00:59
(123.63.24.35)
valid
upto31-12-2017
ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/nationalbuildingcode-240401165105-f4e9283c/85/NBC-National-Building-Code-volume-1-and-2-15-320.jpg)
![PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — SECTION 1 WATER SUPPLY 13
The water demand for the laboratory facilities will
depend on actual requirements based on functional
point of view.
4.1.3 Water Supply Requirements of Traffic Terminal
Stations
The water supply requirements of traffic terminal stations
(railway stations, bus stations, harbours, airports, etc)
include provisions for waiting rooms and waiting halls.
They do not, however, include requirements for retiring
rooms. Requirements of water supply for traffic terminal
stations shall be as per Table 1.
4.1.4 Water Supply for Fire Fighting Purposes
4.1.4.1 The Authority shall make provision to meet the
water supply requirements for fire fighting in the city/
area, depending on the population density and types of
occupancy. See also Part 4 ‘Fire and Life Safety’ of the
Code.
4.1.4.2 Provision shall be made by the owner of the
building for water supply requirements for fire fighting
purposes within the building, depending upon the height
and occupancy of the building, in conformity with the
requirements laid down in Part 4 ‘Fire and Life Safety’
of the Code.
4.1.4.3 The requirements regarding water supply in
storage tanks, capacity of fire pumps, arrangements of
wet riser-cum-down comer and wet riser installations
for buildings, depending upon the occupancy use and
other factors, shall be in accordance with Part 4 ‘Fire
and Life Safety’ of the Code.
4.1.5 Water Supply for Other Purposes
4.1.5.1 Water supply in many buildings is also required
for many other applications other than domestic use,
which shall be identified in the initial stages of
planning so as to provide the requisite water quantity,
storage capacity and pressure as required for each
application. In such instances information about the
water use and the quality required may be obtained
from the users. Some typical uses other than domestic
use and fire fighting purposes are air conditioning,
swimming pools and water bodies, and gardening.
Treated water from sewage treatment plant, with
suitable tertiary treatment, should be used for flushing
purpose (with dual piping system), gardening purpose,
cooling tower make up, and/or for other non potable
usage.
4.1.5.2 The water demand for landscaping purposes is
generally taken as 6 to 8 litre/m2
/day for lawns. For
shrubs and trees the above value can be reduced
considerably.
4.2 Water Sources and Quality
4.2.1 Sources of Water
The origin of all sources of water is rainfall. Water can
be collected as it falls as rain before it reaches the
ground; or as surface water when it flows over the
ground or is pooled in lakes or ponds; or as ground
water when it percolates into the ground and flows or
collects as ground water; or from the sea.
Contamination of water supplies can occur in the source
water as well as in the distribution system after water
treatment has already occurred. There are many sources
of water contamination, including naturally occurring
chemicals and minerals (for example, arsenic, radon,
uranium), local land use practices (fertilizers,
pesticides, concentrated animal feeding operations),
manufacturing processes, and sewer overflows or
wastewater releases. The presence of contaminants in
water can lead to adverse health effects, including
gastrointestinal illness, reproductive problems, and
neurological disorders.
4.2.2 The water supplied shall be free from pathogenic
organisms, clear, free from undesirable taste and odour,
neither corrosive nor scale forming and free from
minerals which could produce undesirable
physiological effects. The quality of water to be used
for drinking shall be as per accepted standard [9-1(3)].
4.2.3 For purposes other than drinking water if
supplied separately, shall be absolutely safe from
bacteriological contamination so as to ensure that there
is no danger to the health of the users due to such
contaminants.
For purposes other than drinking, where there is an
overall risk of legionella growth, it is advisable that
for cold water supplies, the temperature does not exceed
20°C and a minimum temperature of 55°C for hot water
supplies be maintained at all points of network so as to
ensure that it is absolutely safe from bacteriological
contamination and there is no danger to the health of
the users due to such contaminants.
4.2.4 Waste Water Reclamation
Treated sewage or other waste water of the community
may be utilized for non-domestic purposes such as
water for flushing, landscape irrigation, cooling towers
of HVAC system, in fountains and recreational lakes
where swimming is not allowed, and for certain
industrial purposes after its necessary treatment to suit
the nature of the use. This supply system shall be
allowed in residences only if proper provision is made
to avoid any cross-connection of this treated waste
water with domestic water supply system. During use
of treated waste water, it is recommended to have dual
piping system to avoid cross-contamination.
4.2.4.1 Treatment of waste water and usage of recycled
water
Waste water is generated by residential and other
establishments like institutional, business, mercantile
Supplied
by
Book
Supply
Bureau
Under
the
License
from
BIS
for
LARSEN
AND
TOUBRO
CONSTRUCTION
-
MANAPAKKAM,
CHENNAI
ON
17-03-2017
09:00:59
(123.63.24.35)
valid
upto31-12-2017
ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/nationalbuildingcode-240401165105-f4e9283c/85/NBC-National-Building-Code-volume-1-and-2-17-320.jpg)
![14 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
and industrial. It includes household waste liquid from
toilets, baths, showers, kitchens and sinks that is
disposed of via sewers. Waste water treatment is the
process of removing contaminants from wastewater,
including household sewage and runoff (effluents). It
includes physical, chemical, and biological processes
to remove contaminants. Treatment of waste water and
usage of recycled waste water may be done to make it
usable for appropriate applications. The objective is to
produce an environmentally safe fluid waste stream (or
treated effluent) and a solid waste (or treated sludge)
suitable for disposal or reuse.
Separation of household waste into grey water and black
water (and draining of black water into sewerage system)
is becoming more common with grey water being
permitted to be used for watering plants or recycled for
flushing toilets after proper treatment. Waste water
collection and treatment is typically subject to statutory
regulations. Treatment depends on the characteristics of
influent and the treatment requirements that are needed
for treating the same. Waste water treatment generally
involves the following three stages:
a) Primary treatment — It consists of
temporarily holding the wastewater for
settlement of heavy solids at the bottom while
oil, grease and lighter solids float to the
surface.
b) Secondary treatment — It removes dissolved
and suspended biological matter.
c) Tertiary treatment — It is more intensive
treatment done in order to allow rejection into
a highly sensitive or fragile ecosystem. The
tertiary treatment is generally followed by
disinfection.
4.2.5 Water Conservation, Water Balance and Use of
Recycled Water
Water conservation encompasses the policies, strategies
and activities to manage fresh water as a sustainable
resource, to protect the water environment and to meet
current and future demand. Population, household size,
and growth and affluence all affect the quantity of water
used. Water balance studies should be carried out to
study the availability of water from different sources
and its usage for different purposes.
4.2.6 Whenever a building is used after long intervals,
the water quality of the stored water shall be checked
so as to ensure that the water is safe for use as per
water quality requirements specified in this Code.
4.3 Estimate of Demand Load
4.3.1 Estimates of total water supply requirements for
buildings shall be based on the occupant load consistent
with the provisions of 4.1.
4.3.2 In making assessment of water supply
requirements of large complexes, the future occupant
load shall be kept in view. The following methods may
be used for estimating future requirements:
a) Demographic method of population
projection,
b) Arithmetic progression method,
c) Geometrical progression method,
d) Method of varying increment or incremental
increase,
e) Logistic method,
f) Graphical projection method, or
g) Graphical comparison method.
4.4 Storage of Water
4.4.1 In a building, provision is required to be made
for storage of water for the following reasons:
a) To provide against interruptions of the supply
caused by repairs to mains, etc;
b) To reduce the maximum rate of demand on
the mains;
c) To tide over periods of intermittent supply;
and
d) To maintain a storage for the fire fighting
requirement of the building
4.4.2 The water may be stored in overhead tanks (OHT)
and/or underground tanks (UGT).
4.4.3 Materials Used
Reservoirs and tanks for the storage of water shall be
constructed of reinforced concrete, brick masonry,
ferrocement, mild steel, stainless steel, plastic or glass
reinforced panels.
4.4.3.1 Tanks made of steel may be of welded, riveted
or panel/pressed construction. The metal shall be
galvanized or coated externally with a good quality anti-
corrosive weather-resisting paint. Lead-based paint
shall not be used in the tank. Lead-lined tanks shall not
be used. Rectangular pressed steel tanks shall conform
to good practice [9-1(4)].
4.4.4 Each tank shall be provided with the following:
a) Manholes — Adequate number of manholes
for access and repair. The manholes shall be
made of corrosion resistant material (for
example, cast iron, reinforced cement
concrete, steel fibre reinforced concrete,
galvanized steel, high density polyethylene,
fibre glass reinforced plastic or such other
materials) acceptable to the Authority.
Manholes shall be provided with locking
arrangement to avoid misuse and tampering.
Supplied
by
Book
Supply
Bureau
Under
the
License
from
BIS
for
LARSEN
AND
TOUBRO
CONSTRUCTION
-
MANAPAKKAM,
CHENNAI
ON
17-03-2017
09:00:59
(123.63.24.35)
valid
upto31-12-2017
ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/nationalbuildingcode-240401165105-f4e9283c/85/NBC-National-Building-Code-volume-1-and-2-18-320.jpg)
![PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — SECTION 1 WATER SUPPLY 17
c) Ductile iron, internally lined;
d) Reinforced concrete;
e) Prestressed concrete;
f) Galvanized mild steel tubes;
g) Copper;
h) Brass;
j) Wrought iron;
k) Stainless steel;
m) Polyethylene;
n) Unplasticized PVC;
p) Chlorinated PVC;
q) Polypropylene-random copolymer (PPR);
r) Composite pipes (PE-AL-PE) or any other
combination;
s) Cross-linked polyethylene (PEX); or
t) Polybutylene pipe.
4.6.2.1 The material chosen shall be resistant to
corrosion, both inside and outside or shall be suitably
protected against corrosion.
4.6.2.2 Polyethylene and unplasticized PVC pipes shall
not be installed near hot water pipes or near any other
heat sources. For temperature limitations in the use of
polyethylene and unplasticized PVC pipes to convey
water, reference may be made to accepted standards
[9-1(5)].
4.7 Design of Distribution Systems
4.7.1 General
For designing the distribution system, the following
guidelines, in addition to those given in 4.7.2 to 4.7.6
shall be followed:
a) Allplumbingsystemsinbuildingsshallconform
to the general requirements given in 3.1.
b) Peak factor for calculation in case of
intermittent flows may generally be adopted
in design as 2 to 3.
c) The residual head at consumer’s tap shall be
as per 3.1.2.
4.7.2 Rate of Flow
One of the important items that needs to be determined
before the sizes of pipes and fittings for any part of the
water piping system may be decided upon, is the rate
of flow in the service pipe which in turn depends upon
the number of hours for which the supply is available
at sufficiently high pressure. If the number of hours for
which the supply is available is less, there will be large
number of fittings in use simultaneously and the rate
of flow will be correspondingly large.
The data required for determining the size of the
communication and service pipes are,
a) the maximum rate of discharge required;
b) the length of the pipe; and
c) the head loss by friction in pipes, fittings and
meters.
4.7.3 Discharge Computation
4.7.3.1 Design of consumer’s pipes based on fixture units
The design of the consumers’ pipes or the supply pipe
to the fixtures is based on,
a) the number and kind of fixtures installed;
b) the fixture unit flow rate; and
c) the probable simultaneous use of these
fixtures.
The rates at which water is desirably drawn into
different types of fixtures are known. These rates
become whole numbers of small size when they are
expressed in fixture unit.
The water supply fixture units (WSFU) for different
sanitary appliances or groups of appliances are given
in Table 2.
4.7.3.2 Probable simultaneous demand
The possibility that all water supply taps in any system
in domestic and commercial use will draw water at the
same time is extremely remote. Designing the water
mains for the gross flow will result in bigger and
uneconomical pipe mains and may not be necessary. A
probability study made by Hunter suggests the
relationship shown in Fig. 2 and Table 3. In the absence
of similar studies in India, the curves based on Hunter’s
study may be followed. In making use of these curves,
special allowances are made as follows:
a) Demands for service sinks are ignored in
calculating the total fixture demand.
b) Demands of supply outlets such as hose
connections and air conditioners through
which water flows more or less continuously
over a considerable length of time shall be
added to the probable flow rather than the
fixture demand.
c) Fixtures supplied with both hot and cold water
exert reduced demands upon main hot water
and cold water branches (not fixture branches).
4.7.3.3 The maximum flow rate and flush volumes shall
be as given below:
Plumbing Fixtures/Fittings Maximum
Flow Rate
Water closets 6 litre/flush
Urinals 3.8 litre/flush
Lavatory, metered faucet (Public) 1 litre/use
Lavatory, faucet (Private) 8 litre/min
Sink, faucet 8 litre/min
Bidet, hand held spray 8 litre/min
Shower head 10 litre/min
NOTE — The maximum flow rates of plumbing fixtures
and fittings provided are at the pressure of 0.42 N/mm 2
.
Water closet with dual flush cistern and urinals with
reduced flush volumes are recommended. Further, users/
designers are encouraged to use low flow fixtures.
Supplied
by
Book
Supply
Bureau
Under
the
License
from
BIS
for
LARSEN
AND
TOUBRO
CONSTRUCTION
-
MANAPAKKAM,
CHENNAI
ON
17-03-2017
09:00:59
(123.63.24.35)
valid
upto31-12-2017
ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/nationalbuildingcode-240401165105-f4e9283c/85/NBC-National-Building-Code-volume-1-and-2-21-320.jpg)
![PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — SECTION 1 WATER SUPPLY 19
4.8 Distribution Systems in Multi-Storeyed
Buildings
4.8.1 There are following four basic methods of
distribution of water to a multi-storeyed buildings:
a) Direct supply system from mains — public or
private.
b) Gravity distribution system.
c) Pressurized distribution system (Hydro-
pneumatic pumping system).
d) Combined distribution system.
4.8.2 Direct Supply System from Mains — Public or
Private
This system is adopted when adequate pressure is
available in the mains to supply water at adequate
pressure at the topmost floor. With limited pressure
available in most city mains, water from direct supply
is normally not available above two or three floors.
However, in gated communities or large campuses, this
system can be adopted for taller buildings by
incorporating design parameters such as elevated
centralized water tank(s) or central hydro-pneumatic
pumping system(s). For details of this system, reference
may be made to good practice [9-1(6)] may be referred.
4.8.3 Gravity Distribution System
This is the most common water distribution system.
The system comprises pumping water to one or more
overhead water tanks. Water transferred to overhead
tank(s) is distributed by gravity to various parts of the
building by the system of piping network.
4.8.4 Pressurized Distribution System (Hydro-
pneumatic Pumping System)
4.8.4.1 Pressurized distribution system is a direct
pumping system incorporating a recharge diaphragm
vessel.
2A GRAPH FOR PROBABLE DEMAND UP TO 10 000 FU
2B GRAPH FOR PROBABLE DEMAND UP TO 1 000 FU
Curve 1 — System With Flush Valves
Curve 2 — System With Flush Tanks
FIG. 2 GRAPH FOR PROBABLE DEMAND
Supplied
by
Book
Supply
Bureau
Under
the
License
from
BIS
for
LARSEN
AND
TOUBRO
CONSTRUCTION
-
MANAPAKKAM,
CHENNAI
ON
17-03-2017
09:00:59
(123.63.24.35)
valid
upto31-12-2017
ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/nationalbuildingcode-240401165105-f4e9283c/85/NBC-National-Building-Code-volume-1-and-2-23-320.jpg)
![26 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
consequent danger of contamination and
depletion of storage capacity. It might also
result in pipes and fittings being subjected to
a pressure higher than that for which they are
designed, and in flooding from overflowing
cisterns.
b) No pipe for conveyance or in connection with
water supplied by the Authority shall
communicate with any other receptacle used
or capable of being used for conveyance other
than water supplied by the Authority.
c) Where storage tanks are provided, no person
shall connect or be permitted to connect any
service pipe with any distributing pipe.
d) No service or supply pipe shall be connected
directly to any water-closet or a urinal. All
such supplies shall be from flushing cisterns/
flush valves which shall be supplied from
storage tank.
e) No service or supply pipe shall be connected
directly to any hot water system or to any other
apparatus used for heating other than through
a feed cistern thereof.
4.10 Jointing of Pipes
4.10.1 Cast Iron Pipes
Jointing may be done by any of the following methods:
a) Spigot and socket joints, or
b) Flanged joints.
in accordance with good practice [9-1(7)]. The lead
shall conform to the accepted standards
[9-1(8)].Alternative jointing materials which are found
to be equally effective, may be used in place of lead
joints, with the approval of the Authority.
4.10.2 Steel Pipes
Plain-ended steel pipes may be jointed by welding.
Electrically welded steel pipes shall be jointed in
accordance with good practice [9-1(9)].
4.10.3 Wrought Iron and Steel Screwed Pipes
Screwed wrought iron or steel piping may be jointed
with screwed and socketed joints. Care shall be taken
to remove any burr from the end of the pipes after
screwing. A jointing compound approved by the
Authority and containing no red lead composition shall
be used. Screwed wrought iron or steel piping may also
be jointed with screwed flanges.
4.10.4 Asbestos Cement Pipes
Asbestos cement pipes may be jointed in accordance
with good practice [9-1(10)].
4.10.5 Copper Pipes
Copper pipes shall be jointed by internal solder ring
joint, end-brazing joint or by use of compression fitting.
The flux used shall be non-toxic and the solder used
shall be lead free. The use of dezincification fittings
shall be made in case of jointing of copper pipe and
steel pipe. The jointing technology shall be used as per
good engineering practice and as per manufacturers
recommendations.
4.10.6 Concrete Pipes
Concrete pipes shall be jointed in accordance with good
practice [9-1(11)].
4.10.7 Polyethylene and Unplasticized PVC Pipes
Polyethylene and unplasticized PVC pipes shall be
jointed in accordance with good practice[9-1(12)].
4.11 Backflow Prevention
4.11.1 The installation shall be such that water delivered
is not liable to become contaminated or that
contamination of the public water supply does not
occur.
4.11.2 The various types of piping and mechanical
devices acceptable for backflow protection are:
a) Barometric loop,
b) Air gap,
c) Atmosphere vacuum breaker,
d) Pressure vacuum breaker,
e) Double check valve, and
f) Reduced pressure backflow device.
4.11.3 The installation shall not adversely affect
drinking water,
a) by materials in contact with the water being
unsuitable for the purpose;
b) as a result of backflow of water from water
fittings, or water using appliances into
pipework connected to mains or to other
fittings and appliances;
c) by cross-connection between pipes conveying
water supplied by the water undertaker with
pipes conveying water from some other
source; and
d) by stagnation, particularly at high
temperatures.
4.11.4 No pump or similar apparatus, the purpose of
which is to increase the pressure in or rate of flow from
a supply pipe or any fitting or appliance connected to a
supply pipe, shall be connected unless the prior written
permission of the water supplier has been obtained in
each instance.
Supplied
by
Book
Supply
Bureau
Under
the
License
from
BIS
for
LARSEN
AND
TOUBRO
CONSTRUCTION
-
MANAPAKKAM,
CHENNAI
ON
17-03-2017
09:00:59
(123.63.24.35)
valid
upto31-12-2017
ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/nationalbuildingcode-240401165105-f4e9283c/85/NBC-National-Building-Code-volume-1-and-2-30-320.jpg)
![28 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
smooth as possible inside. Methods of jointing shall
be such as to avoid internal roughness and projection
at the joints, whether of the jointing materials or
otherwise.
4.12.9Changeindiameterandindirectionshallpreferably
be gradual rather than abrupt to avoid undue loss of head.
No bend or curve in piping shall be made which is likely
to materially diminish or alter the cross-section.
4.12.10 No boiler for generating steam or closed
boilers of any description or any machinery shall be
supplied direct from a service or supply pipe. Every
such boiler or machinery shall be supplied from a feed
cistern.
4.13 Laying of Mains and Pipes on Site
4.13.1 The mains and pipes on site shall be laid in
accordance with good practice [9-1(13)]. The pipes laid
in buildings situated in seismic zone and across large
building expansion joints should be installed with
suitable expansion bellows and expansion loops to
mitigate expansion of piping system for its intended
function without failures.
4.13.2 Excavation and Refilling
The bottoms of the trench excavations shall be so
prepared that the barrels of the pipes, when laid, are
well bedded for their whole length on a firm surface
and are true to line and gradient. In the refilling of
trenches, the pipes shall be surrounded with fine
selected material, well rammed so as to resist
subsequent movement of the pipes. No stones shall be
in contact with the pipes; when resting on rock, the
pipes shall be bedded on fine-selected material or
(especially where there is a steep gradient) on a layer
of concrete.
4.13.2.1 The pipes shall be carefully cleared of all
foreign matter before being laid.
4.13.3 Laying Underground Mains
Where there is a gradient, pipe laying shall proceed in
‘uphill’ direction to facilitate joint making.
4.13.3.1 Anchor blocks shall be provided to withstand
the hydraulic thrust.
4.13.4 Iron surface boxes shall be provided to give
access to valves and hydrants and shall be supported
on concrete or brickwork which shall not be allowed
to rest on pipes.
4.13.5 Laying Service Pipes
4.13.5.1 Service pipes shall be connected to the mains
by means of right-hand screw down ferrule or
T-branches. The ferrules shall conform to accepted
standards [9-1(14)].
4.13.5.2 Precaution against contamination of the mains
shall be taken when making a connection and, where
risk exists, the main shall be subsequently disinfected.
The underground water service pipe and the building
sewer or drain shall be kept at a sufficient distance apart
so as to prevent contamination of water. Water service
pipes or any underground water pipes shall not be run
or laid in the same trench as the drainage pipe. Where
this is unavoidable, the following conditions shall be
fulfilled:
a) The bottom of the water service pipe, at all
points, shall be at least 300 mm above the top
of the sewer line at its highest point.
b) The water service pipe shall be placed on a
solid shelf excavated on one side of the
common trench.
c) The number of joints in the service pipe shall
be kept to a minimum.
d) The materials and joints of sewer and water
service pipe shall be installed in such a manner
and shall possess such necessary strength and
durability as to prevent the escape of solids,
liquids and gases there from under all known
adverse conditions, such as corrosion strains
due to temperature changes, settlement,
vibrations and superimposed loads.
4.13.5.3 The service pipe shall pass into or beneath the
buildings at a depth of not less than 750 mm below the
outside ground level and, at its point of entry through
the structure, it shall be accommodated in a sleeve
which shall have previously been solidly built into the
wall of the structure. The space between the pipe and
the sleeve shall be filled with bituminous or other
suitable material for a minimum length of 150 mm at
both ends.
4.13.6 Pipes Laid through Ducts, Chases, Notches or
Holes
Ducts or chases in walls for piping shall be provided
during the building of the walls. If they are cut into
existing walls, they shall be finished sufficiently smooth
and large enough for fixing the piping.
4.13.6.1 Piping laid in notches or holes shall not be
subjected to external pressure.
4.13.7 Lagging of Pipes
Where lagged piping outside buildings is attached to
walls, it shall be entirely covered all round with water-
proof and fire insulating material and shall not be in
direct contact with the wall. Where it passes through a
wall, the lagging shall be continued throughout the
thickness of the wall.
Supplied
by
Book
Supply
Bureau
Under
the
License
from
BIS
for
LARSEN
AND
TOUBRO
CONSTRUCTION
-
MANAPAKKAM,
CHENNAI
ON
17-03-2017
09:00:59
(123.63.24.35)
valid
upto31-12-2017
ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/nationalbuildingcode-240401165105-f4e9283c/85/NBC-National-Building-Code-volume-1-and-2-32-320.jpg)
![PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — SECTION 1 WATER SUPPLY 31
and not lower than the immersion heater.
e) Dual heater installations — If desired, the
principle of the dual heater may be adopted.
In this case, one heater and its thermostat shall
be installed at a low level as indicated in (b)
and (c). The second heater and its thermostat
shall be similarly disposed in the upper half
of the cylinder at a level depending on the
reserve of hot water desired for ordinary
domestic use. The bottom heater shall be under
separate switch control.
f) Clearance around storage vessel — Adequate
clearance shall be provided between the tank
and the cupboard, door or walls to allow
convenient insertion and adjustment of the
immersion heater and thermostat and to give
space for thermal insulation.
4.14.8.2 Rating of immersion heaters
The rating of an immersion heater shall be determined
according to the following factors:
a) Proposed hot water storage capacity (the
maximum with cold water as indicated
in 4.14.3 shall be taken into account),
b) Rate of utilization (draw off frequency),
c) Permissible recovery period, and
d) Inlet water temperature.
For details regarding rated input of water, refer to good
practice [9-1(15)].
4.14.9 Thermal Insulation
The hot water storage vessel and pipes shall be
adequately insulated, wherever necessary to minimize
heat loss. The whole external surface of the storage
vessel including the cover to the man hole shall also be
duly insulated.
Insulation may be provided by wrapping storage vessel
and pipes with fibre glass, mineral wool or closed cell
flexible elastomeric foam based materials of desired
thickness, covered with cladding for protection from
damage or from weather in case of external use.
4.14.10 Cold Water Supply to Heaters
4.14.10.1 A storage water heater (pressure type) shall
be fed from a cold water storage tank and under no
circumstances connected directly to the water main,
except the type which incorporates a feed tank with
ball valves and overflow pipe arrangement (cistern type
heaters) or non-pressure type heaters.
4.14.10.2 Storage cisterns
4.14.10.2.1 The storage capacity of a cold water tank
shall be at least twicethe capacity of the hot water heater.
The capacity of the storage tank may, however, be 1.5
times when the number of heaters connected to one
common tank exceeds 10.
4.14.10.2.2 The storage tank for supply of cold water
to hot water heaters shall be separate, if practicable. In
the case of a common tank which also supplies cold
water to the fixtures, this cold water supply connection
shall be so arranged that 50 percent of the net capacity,
worked out as in 4.14.10.2.1, shall be available for
supply to the hot water heaters.
4.14.10.2.3 In the case of multi-storeyed buildings
where a common overhead tank over the stair/lift well
is generally installed, it is advisable to have one or more
local tanks for supply to the hot water heaters or a
compartment in the tank with required storage always
available for hot water heater.
4.14.10.2.4 In tall multi-storeyed buildings where the
static pressure increases with the height, the total static
pressure on the hot water heaters on the lowest floor
shall not exceed the rated working pressure of the hot
water heater installed. Should the height of the building
so require, additional tanks shall be provided on the
intermediate floors to restrict the static head to
permissible limits or the pressure shall be reduced to
working pressure by providing pressure reducing
valves.
4.14.10.2.5 As an alternative to the arrangements stated
in 4.14.10.2.3 and 4.14.10.2.4, an individual storage
tank in each flat may be provided for supply to hot
water heaters.
4.14.11 Cold Water Feed
4.14.11.1 The feed pipe connecting cold water tank with
the hot water heater shall not be of less than 20 mm
bore and it shall leave the cold water tank at a point not
less than 50 mm above the bottom of the tank and shall
connect into the hot water heater near its bottom. The
feed pipe shall not deliver cold water to any other
connection, but into the hot water cylinders only.
4.14.11.2 In the case of multi-storeyed buildings, a
common cold water feed pipe may be installed, but
each hot water heater shall be provided with a check
valve (horizontal type check valve shall be preferred
to vertical type for easy maintenance).
4.14.11.3 Care shall be taken in installing the piping to
prevent air locks in the piping and negative pressure in
the hot water heater. Cold water feed pipe shall not be
cross-connected with any other source of supply under
pressure.
4.14.12 Hot Water Piping
4.14.12.1 Expansion pipe or vent pipe
4.14.12.1.1 Each non-pressure type hot water heater
or cylinder shall be provided with a vent pipe of not
Supplied
by
Book
Supply
Bureau
Under
the
License
from
BIS
for
LARSEN
AND
TOUBRO
CONSTRUCTION
-
MANAPAKKAM,
CHENNAI
ON
17-03-2017
09:00:59
(123.63.24.35)
valid
upto31-12-2017
ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/nationalbuildingcode-240401165105-f4e9283c/85/NBC-National-Building-Code-volume-1-and-2-35-320.jpg)
![PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — SECTION 1 WATER SUPPLY 33
2) Centrally banked heated system.
d) Central hot water system:
1) Oil fired,
2) Gas fired,
3) Electrical coil type, and
4) Heat Pump.
4.14.13.1 The quality and construction of the different
types of hot water heaters shall be in accordance with
good practice [9-1(16)].
4.14.13.2 Requirements in regard to inspection and
maintenance of hot water supply installations shall be
in accordance with 4.15.1 to 4.15.4.
4.15 Inspection and Testing
4.15.1 Testing of Mains before Commencing Work
All pipes, fittings and appliances shall be inspected,
before delivery at the site to see whether they conform
to accepted standards. All pipes and fittings shall be
inspected and tested by the manufacturers at their
factory and shall comply with the requirements of this
Section. They shall be tested hydraulically under a
pressure equal to twice this maximum permissible
working pressure or under such greater pressure as may
be specified. The pipes and fittings shall be inspected
on site before laying and shall be sounded to disclose
cracks. Any defective items shall be clearly marked as
rejected and forthwith removed from the site.
4.15.2 Testing of Mains after Laying
After laying and jointing, the main shall be slowly and
carefully charged with water by providing a 25 mm
inlet with a stop-cock, so that all air is expelled from
the main. The main is then allowed to stand full of water
for a few days if time permits, and then tested under
pressure. The test pressure shall be 0.5 N/mm2
or double
the maximum working pressure, whichever is greater.
The pressure shall be applied by means of a manually
operated test pump, or, in the case of long mains or
mains of a large diameter, by a power-driven test pump,
provided the pump is not left unattended. In either case,
due precaution shall be taken to ensure that the required
test pressure is not exceeded. Pressure gauges shall be
accurate and shall preferably have been recalibrated
before the test. The pump having been stopped, the
test pressure shall maintain itself without measurable
loss for at least 5 min. The mains shall be tested in
sections as the work of laying proceeds; it is an
advantage to have the joints exposed for inspection
during the testing. The open end of the main may be
temporarily closed for testing under moderate pressure
by fitting a water-tight expanding plug of which several
types are available. The end of the main and the plug
shall be secured by struts or otherwise, to resist the
end thrust of the water pressure in the mains.
4.15.2.1 If the section of the main tested terminates
into a sluice valve, the wedge of the valve shall not be
used to retain the water; instead the valve shall be
temporarily fitted with a blank flange, or, in the case of
a socketed valve, with a plug, and the wedge placed in
the open position while testing. End support shall be
given as in 4.15.2.
4.15.3 Testing of Service Pipes and Fittings
When the service pipe is complete, it shall be slowly
and carefully charged with water, allowing all air to
escape, care being taken to avoid all shock or water
hammer. The service pipe shall then be inspected under
working conditions of pressure and flow. When all
draw-offs taps are closed, the service pipe shall be
absolutely water-tight. All piping, fittings and
appliances shall be checked for satisfactory support,
and protection from damage, corrosion and frost.
Because of the possibility of damage in transit, cisterns
shall be re-tested for water-tightness on arrival at the
site, before fixing.
4.15.4 In addition to the provisions given in 4.15.1,
provisions given in 4.15.4.1 to 4.15.4.3 shall also apply
to hot water supply installations in regard to inspection
and testing.
4.15.4.1 Testing of the system after installation
After the hot water system, including the hot water
heaters, has been installed, it shall be carefully charged
with water, so that all air is expelled from the system.
The entire system shall then be hydraulically tested to
a pressure of 0.5 N/mm2
or twice the working pressure,
whichever is greater, for a period of at least 30 min
after a steady state is reached. The entire installation
shall then be inspected visually for leakages, and
sweating. All defects found shall be rectified by
removing and remaking the particular section. Caulking
of threads, hammering and welding of leaking joints
shall not be allowed.
4.15.4.2 Hot water testing
After the system has been proved water-tight, the hot
water heaters shall be commissioned by connecting the
same to the electrical supply. The system shall then be
observed for leakage in pipes due to expansion or
overheating. The temperature of water at outlets shall
be recorded. The thermostats of the appliances shall
be checked and adjusted to temperatures specified
in 4.14.2.1.
4.15.4.3 Electrical connection
For relevant provisions regarding general and safety
requirements for household and similar electrical
appliances, reference may be made to good practice
Supplied
by
Book
Supply
Bureau
Under
the
License
from
BIS
for
LARSEN
AND
TOUBRO
CONSTRUCTION
-
MANAPAKKAM,
CHENNAI
ON
17-03-2017
09:00:59
(123.63.24.35)
valid
upto31-12-2017
ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/nationalbuildingcode-240401165105-f4e9283c/85/NBC-National-Building-Code-volume-1-and-2-37-320.jpg)
![34 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
[9-1(15)]. The metal work of the water heating
appliances and installation other than current carrying
parts shall be bonded and earthed in conformity with
the good practice [9-1(15)]. It should be noted that
screwing of an immersion heater into a tank or cylinder
cannot be relied upon to effect a low resistance earth
connection, a satisfactory separate earthing of heater
should be effected.
4.16 Cleaning and Disinfection of the Supply System
4.16.1 All water mains communications pipes, service
pipes and pipes used for distribution of water for
domestic purposes shall be thoroughly and efficiently
disinfected before being taken into use and also after
every major repair. The method of disinfection shall be
subject to the approval of the Authority. The pipes shall
also be periodically cleaned at intervals, depending upon
thequalityofwater,communicationpipesandthestorage
cisterns shall be thoroughly cleaned at least once every
year in order to remove any suspended impurities that
may have settled in the pipes or the tanks.
4.16.2 Disinfection of Storage Tanks and Down Take
Distribution Pipes
The storage tanks and pipes shall first be filled with
water and thoroughly flushed out. The storage tank shall
then be filled with water again and a disinfecting
chemical containing chlorine added gradually while the
tanks are being filled, to ensure thorough mixing.
Sufficient quantities of chemicals shall be used to give
the water a dose of 50 parts of chlorine to one million
parts of water. If ordinary bleaching powder is used,
the proportions will be 150 g of powder to 1 000 litre
of water. The powder shall be mixed with water to a
creamy consistency before being added to the water in
the storage tank. When the storage tank is full, the
supply shall be stopped and all the taps on the
distributing pipes opened successively working
progressively away from the storage tank. Each tap shall
be closed when the water discharged begins to smell
of chlorine. The storage tank shall then be topped up
with water from the supply pipe and with more
disinfecting chemical in the recommended proportions.
The storage tank and pipes shall then remain charged
for at least 3 h. Finally, the tank and pipes shall be
thoroughly flushed out before any water is used for
domestic purposes.
4.17 Water Supply Systems in High Altitudes and/
or Sub-Zero Temperature Regions
4.17.1 Selection and Source
In general, the site selected for a water source shall be
such as to minimize the length of transmission line so
as to reduce the inspection and upkeep. Attempt shall
be made, where feasible, to locate the source near the
discharge of waste heat, such as of power plants
provided it does not affect the potability of water.
4.17.2 Pumping Installation
Pump and pumping machinery shall be housed inside
well-insulated chambers. Where necessary,
arrangements shall be made for heating the inside of
pump houses. Pump houses, as far as possible, should
be built directly above the water intake structures.
4.17.3 Protection of Storage Water and Treatment
Where ambient temperatures are so low as to cause
danger of freezing, proper housing, insulation and
protection shall be provided for all processes and
equipment. If necessary, means shall be provided for
proper heating of the enclosure.
4.17.4 Transmission and Distribution
Freezing of the buried pipe may be avoided primarily
by laying the pipe below the level of the frost line; well
consolidated bedding of clean earth or sand, under,
around or over the pipe should be provided. For the
efficient operation and design of transmission and
distribution work, the available heat in the water shall
be economically utilized and controlled. If the heat which
is naturally present in water is made equate to satisfy
heat losses from the system, the water shall be warmed.
Where economically feasible, certain faucets on the
distribution system may be kept in a slightly dripping
condition so as to keep the fluid in motion and thus
prevent is freezing. If found unsuitable for drinking
purposes, such water may be used for heating purposes.
Heat losses shall be reduced by insulation, if necessary.
Any material that will catch, absorb or hold moisture
shall not be used for insulation purposes. Adequate
number of break pressure water tanks and air release
valves shall be provided in the distribution system.
NOTE — The level of frost line is generally found to be between
0.9 m and 1.2 m below ground level in the northern regions of
India, wherever freezing occurs.
4.17.4.1 Materials for pipes
Distribution pipes shall be made of any of the following
materials conforming to Part 5 ‘Building Materials’ of
the Code:
a) High density polyethylene pipes,
b) Asbestos cement pipes,
c) Galvanized iron pipes,
d) Cast iron pipes,
e) Copper pipes,
f) Chlorinated PVC pipes,
g) Unplasticized PVC pipes (where it is laid
before frost line), and
h) Stainless steel pipes.
Supplied
by
Book
Supply
Bureau
Under
the
License
from
BIS
for
LARSEN
AND
TOUBRO
CONSTRUCTION
-
MANAPAKKAM,
CHENNAI
ON
17-03-2017
09:00:59
(123.63.24.35)
valid
upto31-12-2017
ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/nationalbuildingcode-240401165105-f4e9283c/85/NBC-National-Building-Code-volume-1-and-2-38-320.jpg)
![PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — SECTION 1 WATER SUPPLY 35
4.17.4.2 Materials for insulation of pipes
Insulation of pipes may be provided by wrapping the pipe
with fibre glass, mineral wool or closed cell flexible
elastomeric foam based insulation materials of desired
thickness covered with cladding for protection from
damage or from weather in case of external use/pipes laid
in exposed conditions; other materials, like 85 percent
magnesia,preformedpipesections,etc,mayalsobeused.
4.17.4.3 Distribution methods
Distribution by barrels or tank trucks shall be employed,
where the water requirements are temporary and small.
Utmost care shall be exercised for preventing the water
from being contaminated by maintaining a residual of
disinfecting agent at all times. Hoses, pails and the tank
shall be kept free from dust and filth during all period of
operation. Where winter temperatures are low, making
frost penetration depths greater during the winter and
where adequate facilities for heating the water in the
distribution system do not exist, the use of tank trucks
or barrels for delivery of water shall be considered only
forcoldweather;duringthewarmweather,pipingsystem
for seasonal use may be supplemented.
4.17.4.4Intheconventionaldistributionsysteminvolving
the use of a network of pipelines requiring no auxiliary
heat,it isessential that the pipelinesare buriedwell below
thefrostline.Adequatefacilitiesfordrainingthepipelines
shall be provided where there is a danger of frost.
4.17.4.5 House service connections
House service connections shall be kept operative by the
use of adequate insulation at exposed places extending
belowthefrostline.Figure7showsatypicalarrangement
for providing insulation for house service connections.
4.17.5 For detailed information on planning and
designing water supply system peculiar to high altitudes
and/or sub-zero temperature regions of the country,
reference may be made to good practice [9-1(17)].
4.18 Guidelines to Maintenance
4.18.1 Storage tanks shall be regularly inspected and
shall be cleaned out periodically, if necessary. Tanks
showing signs of corrosion shall be emptied, thoroughly
wire brushed to remove loose material (but not
scraped), cleaned and coated with suitable bituminous
compositions or other suitable anti-corrosive material
not liable to impart taste or odour or otherwise
contaminate the water. Before cleaning the cistern, the
outlets shall be plugged to prevent debris from entering
the pipes. Tanks shall be examined for metal wastage
and water tightness after cleaning.
4.18.2 Record drawings showing pipe layout and valve
positions shall be kept up to date and inspection
undertaken to ensure that any maintenance work has
not introduced cross-connections or any other
undesirable feature. Any addition or alterations to the
systems shall be duly recorded from time-to-time.
4.18.3 Any temporary attachment fixed to a tap or outlet
shall never be left in such a position that back-siphonage
of polluted water may occur into the supply system.
4.18.4 All valves shall periodically be operated to
maintain free movement of the working parts.
4.18.5 All taps and ball valves shall be watertight,
glands shall be made good, washers shall be replaced
and the mechanism of spring operated taps and ball
FIG. 7 INSULATION DETAILS AT SERVICE CONNECTION
Supplied
by
Book
Supply
Bureau
Under
the
License
from
BIS
for
LARSEN
AND
TOUBRO
CONSTRUCTION
-
MANAPAKKAM,
CHENNAI
ON
17-03-2017
09:00:59
(123.63.24.35)
valid
upto31-12-2017
ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/nationalbuildingcode-240401165105-f4e9283c/85/NBC-National-Building-Code-volume-1-and-2-39-320.jpg)
![PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — SECTION 1 WATER SUPPLY 37
pool, such as diving boards and slides, shall be designed
to carry the anticipated load. Any obstruction creating
a safety hazard shall not extend into or above the pool,
or shall not protrude from the floor of the pool.
Designers may refer good practice [9-1(18)] for
providing the guidance on the procedures and the
precautions to be taken during construction of
swimming pool to ensure the water tightness of the
structure.
4.19.2.2 Material
Any suitable material that is non-toxic and provides a
rigid watertight shell with a smooth, impervious, light
colour finish should be used to construct the pool. The
floor of shallow areas shall have a slip-resistant finish.
Sand or earth shall not be permitted to use as an interior
finish in a swimming pool.
4.19.2.3 Dimensions
The shape and size of a pool largely depend on the
usage. Shape should be considered from the standpoint
of safety and circulation of the pool water.
NOTES
1 A long and rectangular pool may be ideal for sports and
exercise as it gives length and breadth, but the shape of a pool
for recreation largely depend on the choice of the owners,
available space for making the pool and the design of the house.
2 In sports, normally the swimming pools are 50 m long,
minimum 21 m wide and 1.8 m overall depth.
4.19.2.4 Floor slopes
Slope of the floor of the pool should be made downward
toward the main drain. All slopes should be uniform.
The slope in shallow areas should not exceed 300 mm
vertical in 3.6 m horizontal except for a slope directed
downward from a transition point, which shall not
exceed 300 mm vertical in 1m horizontal. In portions
of the pool with a depth greater than 1.5 m, the front
slope of the deep area shall not be steeper than 300 mm
in 1 m.
4.19.2.5 Transition point
Transition points should be marked with a stripe on
the pool floor having a width of at least 100 mm and a
colour that contrasts with that of the floor, and with a
buoyed safety rope with colour buoys, installed at least
300 mm on the shallow side of the transition point. In
other pools having adjoining shallow and deep areas, a
safety rope with colour buoys shall be installed where
the water depth reaches 1.5 m.
4.19.2.6 Pool walls
Where the pool depth is 1 m or less, pool walls shall be
vertical to the floor and the junction of the wall with
the floor shall consist of a cove with a radius not
exceeding 150 mm. Where the pool depth exceeds 1 m,
pool walls shall meet one of the following criteria:
a) The wall shall be vertical for a depth of at
least 1.5 m below the water level, below which
the wall may angle to the floor; or
b) The wall shall be vertical for a depth of at
least 1 m below the water level, below which
the wall shall form a curve to the floor. The
curve shall be tangent to the pool wall.
4.19.2.7 Water depth
The depth of a swimming pool depends on the purpose
of the pool, and whether it is open to the public or
strictly for private use. If it is a private casual, relaxing
pool, it may go from 1.0 m to 1.5 m deep. If it is a
public pool designed for diving, it may slope from 3.5 m
to 5.0 m in the deep end. A children’s play pool may be
from 0.3 m to 0.6 m deep. Public pools may have
differing depths to accommodate different swimmer
requirements. Water depths may be clearly marked on
the pool walls.
The width between handrails of the pool stairs should
be between 500 mm and 600 mm.
4.19.2.8 Walkways and deck areas
Pools shall be completely surrounded by a deck that is
at least 1.2 m in width and extends completely around
and adjacent to the pool. There shall be no obstructions
or interruptions of the pool deck within the 1.2 m
adjacent to the pool other than necessary structural
supports, or appurtenances such as diving boards,
slides, perimeter overflow systems, or handrails. A
clear, unobstructed walkway at least 1.2 m in width
shall be maintained at such obstructions or
interruptions. A wheelchair turning space of minimum
1.5 m × 1.5 m shall be provided at key places in the
walkway.
Structural supports located within the minimum
required deck width or within 1.2 m of the swimming
pool shall be no closer than 3 m apart measured parallel
to the adjacent perimeter of the pool, with the dimension
of any single support in a plane parallel to the adjacent
pool perimeter not greater than 1 m and the sum of all
such support dimensions not greater than 10 percent of
the pool perimeter.
The deck between two adjacent swimming pools shall
be at least 2.5 m wide. All decks and walkways shall
have an unobstructed overhead clearance of at
least 2 m.
Synthetic material which meets the following criteria
may be installed for deck coverings:
a) Non-fibrous and allows drainage such that it
will not remain wet or retain moisture;
b) Inert and will not support bacterial or fungal
growth;
Supplied
by
Book
Supply
Bureau
Under
the
License
from
BIS
for
LARSEN
AND
TOUBRO
CONSTRUCTION
-
MANAPAKKAM,
CHENNAI
ON
17-03-2017
09:00:59
(123.63.24.35)
valid
upto31-12-2017
ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/nationalbuildingcode-240401165105-f4e9283c/85/NBC-National-Building-Code-volume-1-and-2-41-320.jpg)
![PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — SECTION 1 WATER SUPPLY 39
4.19.4.4 Outlets
Pools shall be provided with a minimum of two drains
(outlets) at the deepest point. Centre-to-centre distance
between drains shall not exceed 2.0 m. Drains shall not
be more than 3.0 m away from the pool walls. The main
drain may be connected to the recirculation system.
Openings shall be covered by grating which cannot be
removed without the use of tools. Openings of the grating
shall be at least four times the area of the main drain pipe
or have an open area. The maximum width of grate
openingsshallnotexceed8mm.Maindrainsandallother
suction outlets installed in the pool shall be designed to
preventbatherentrapmentandshallbeofanti-vortextype.
The velocity at outlet pipe shall not be more than 0.3 m/s.
4.19.4.5 Velocities
Maximum permissible velocities for various
components of the pools are as follows:
a) Suction pipe — less than 1.5 m/s
b) Return pipe — 1.5 to 2 m/s
c) Return/inlet fittings — 2.4 to 2.75 m/s in
private pools and 1.5 to 2 m/s in public pools
4.19.4.6 Balancing (surge) tank
Overflow system shall be designed for effective surge
capacity. Balancing tank should be provided of capacity
to accommodate surge storage and storage for make
up water. The volume of the balancing tank shall be
the total of the above with equal proportions.
4.19.4.7 Make-up water
Make-up water shall be added through a fixed air gap
of at least 15 cm to the pool, surge tank, vacuum filter
tank, or other receptacle. When make-up water is added
directly to the pool, the fill-spout should be located
under a low diving board or immediately adjacent to a
ladder rail, grab rail, or fixed lifeguard chair.
4.19.4.8 Filtration
The design filtration rate in the particular application
in which the filter is utilized shall not exceed the
maximum design filtration rate for which the filter was
installed. Wash or backwash water from diatomaceous
earth filters shall be passed through a separation tank
designed for removal of suspended diatomaceous earth
and solids, prior to disposal.
NOTE — Filtration rates for various types of filters are:
a) Low rate filter — 10 m3
/m2
/h
b) Medium rate filter — 11 to 30 m3
/m2
/h
c) High rate filter — 31 to 50 m3
/m2
/h
d) Minimum flow rate for filter back wash — 30 m3
/ m2
/h
4.19.4.9 Disinfection
The pool water shall be continuously disinfected by
suitable disinfecting agent that imparts easily measured
residual. Gaseous chlorine, chlorine compounds,
bromine compounds or other bactericidal agents should
be used to maintain the quality parameters of water.
4.19.5 Water Quality
4.19.5.1 Disinfectant residual
Where chlorine is used as a disinfectant, the chlorine
residual shall be maintained between 1.0 and 4.0 ppm.
as free chlorine residual. A free chlorine residual of at
least 2.0 ppm shall be maintained when the pool water
temperature exceeds 30ºC.
Where bromine is used as a disinfectant, a bromine
residual shall be maintained between 2.0 and 8.0 ppm
as total bromine. A bromine residual of at least 4.0 ppm
shall be maintained when the pool water temperature
exceeds 30ºC.
Where chlorinated cyanurates are used, the cyanuric
acid concentration shall not exceed 100 ppm.
Where silver/copper or copper ion generators are used,
the concentration of copper shall not exceed 1.3 ppm
andthe concentrationofsilvershall not exceed0.05 ppm.
Where ozone isused,the ambient airozone concentration
shall be less than 0.1 ppm. at all times either in the
vicinity of the ozonator or at the pool water surface.
For all other physical, chemical and bacteriological
parameters, the quality of water used in swimming pools
in continuous circulation type shall conform to good
practices [9-1(19)].
4.20 Allowance for Expansion
4.20.1 The allowances for expansion of the water pipes
are recommended as given below:
a) All pipes should be installed at ambient
temperature.
b) Pipes carrying hot fluids such as water or
steam operate at higher temperatures. It
follows that they expand, especially in length,
with an increase from ambient to working
temperatures. This will create stress upon
certain areas within the distribution system,
such as pipe joints, which, in the extreme,
could cause fracture.
c) The pipe work system shall be sufficiently
flexible to accommodate the movements of
the components as they expand. In many cases,
the flexibility of the pipe work system, due to
the length of the pipe and number of bends
and supports, means that no undue stresses
are imposed. In other installations, however,
it will be necessary to incorporate some means
of achieving this required flexibility.
d) The expansion fitting is one method of
accommodating expansion. These fittings are
placed within a line and are designed to
accommodate the expansion without the total
lengthofthe line changing.Theyare commonly
called expansion bellows, due to the bellows
construction of the expansion sleeve.
Supplied
by
Book
Supply
Bureau
Under
the
License
from
BIS
for
LARSEN
AND
TOUBRO
CONSTRUCTION
-
MANAPAKKAM,
CHENNAI
ON
17-03-2017
09:00:59
(123.63.24.35)
valid
upto31-12-2017
ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/nationalbuildingcode-240401165105-f4e9283c/85/NBC-National-Building-Code-volume-1-and-2-43-320.jpg)
![40 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
e) Other expansion fittings can be made from the
pipe work itself. This can be a cheaper way to
solve the problem, but more space is needed
to accommodate the pipe.
4.20.2 Full Loop
a) This is simply one complete turn of the pipe
and, on steam pipe work, should preferably
be fitted in a horizontal rather than a vertical
position to prevent condensate accumulating
on the upstream side.
b) The downstream side passes below the
upstream side and great care shall be taken
that it is not fitted wrong way round, as
condensate can accumulate in the bottom.
Sl
No.
Particulars Ground
Colour
First
Colour Band
Second
Colour Band
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
i) Cooling water Sea green French blue —
ii) Boiler feed water Sea green Gulf red —
iii) Condensate water Sea green Light brown —
iv) Drinking Sea green French blue Signal red
v) Treated Sea green Light orange —
vi) Fire water Fire red Crimson red —
vii) Water with central heating below 60°C Sea green Canary yellow —
viii) Water with central heating between 60 to 100°C Sea green Dark violet —
ix) Water with central heating above 100°C Sea green Dark violet Signal red
x) Cold water from storage tanks Sea green French blue Canary yellow
xi) Domestic, hot water Sea green Light grey —
xii) Hydraulic power water Sea green Black —
xiii) Untreated sea/river water Sea green white —
xiv) Filtered water Sea green Light brown —
xv) Soft water Sea green Light brown Signal red
xvi) Warm water Sea green Light grey Canary yellow
xvii) Chilled water Sea green Black Canary yellow
xviii) Sprinkler and hydrant water Sea green White Signal red
xix) Waste water Sea green Canary yellow Signal red
When full loops are to be fitted in a confined
space, care shall be taken to specify that
wrong-handed loops are not supplied.
c) The full loop does not produce a force in
opposition to the expanding pipe work as in
some other types, but with steam pressure
inside the loop, there is a slight tendency to
unwind, which puts an additional stress on the
flanges.
4.21 Colour Codes for Different Types of Water
Pipes
The following colour codes are recommended for pipes
{see also accepted standard [9-1(20)]}:
Supplied
by
Book
Supply
Bureau
Under
the
License
from
BIS
for
LARSEN
AND
TOUBRO
CONSTRUCTION
-
MANAPAKKAM,
CHENNAI
ON
17-03-2017
09:00:59
(123.63.24.35)
valid
upto31-12-2017
ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/nationalbuildingcode-240401165105-f4e9283c/85/NBC-National-Building-Code-volume-1-and-2-44-320.jpg)
![PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 5
SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION
2.8 Bed Pan Washer — A washer which is to be used
for disposing human waste and sterilizing the Bed Pan
for reuse. Bed pan washer requires water connection
and electrical heating arrangement. This is to be
considered as soil appliance.
2.9 Benching — Sloping surfaces constructed on either
side of channels at the base of a manhole or inspection
chamber for the purpose of confining the flow of
sewage, avoiding the accumulation of deposits and
providing a safe working platform.
2.10 Branch
a) Special form of sewer pipe used for making
connections to a sewer or water main. The
various types are called ‘T’, ‘Y’, ‘T-Y’, double
Y and V branches, according to their
respective shapes.
b) Any part of a piping system other than a main
or stack.
2.11 Branch Soil Pipe (BSP) — A pipe connecting
one or more soil appliances to the main soil pipe.
2.12 Branch Soil Waste Pipe (BSWP) — A pipe
connecting one or more soil and/or waste appliances
to the main soil waste pipe (one pipe system).
2.13 Branch Vent Pipe (BVP) — A pipe, one end of
which is connected to the system adjacent to the trap
of an appliance and the other to a main vent pipe or a
drain-vent pipe. It is fitted to prevent loss of water
seal from a trap owing to partial vacuum, back-
pressure, or surging caused by air movement within
the pipe system. It also provides ventilation for the
branch waste pipe.
2.14 Branch Waste Pipe (BWP) — A pipe
connecting one or more waste appliances to the main
waste pipe.
2.15 Building Drain-Combined — A building drain
which conveys both sewage and storm water or other
drainage.
2.16 Building Drain-Sanitary — A building drain
which conveys sewage and sullage only.
2.17 Building Drain-Storm — A building drain which
conveys storm water or other drainage but no sewage
or sullage.
1 SCOPE
1.1 This Code (Part 9/Section 2) covers the design,
layout, construction and maintenance of drains for foul
water, surface water, subsoil water and sewage together
with all ancillary works, such as connections, manholes
and inspection chambers used within the building and
from building to the connection to a public sewer,
private sewer, individual sewage-disposal system, cess-
pool, soakaway or to other approved point of disposal/
treatment work.
NOTE — A sanitary drainage system consists of a building
sewer, a building drain, a soil and/or waste stack, horizontal
branches or fixture drain, and vents. The sanitary drainage of a
large building may have a number of primary and secondary
branches, and several soil and/or waste stacks, each of them in
turn may have a number of horizontal branches.
2 TERMINOLOGY
For the purpose of this Section, the following definitions
shall apply in addition to the definitions given in
accepted standards [9-2(1)].
2.1 Air Admittance Valve — One way valves designed
to allow air to enter drainage system when negative
pressure develops in the system. The purpose is to
provide a method of allowing air to enter the drainage
system for prevention of siphonage of traps.
2.2 Air Break — Physical separation which may be a
low inlet into the indirect waste receptor from the fixture
or device indirectly connected.
2.3 Air Gap, Drainage — Unobstructed vertical
distance through the free atmosphere between the
lowest opening from any pipe, plumbing fixture or
appurtenance conveying waste to flood level of the
receptor.
2.4 Back Up — A condition where the waste water
may flow back into another fixture or compartment but
not back into the potable water system.
2.5 Back Water Valve — Device installed in a drainage
system to prevent reverse flow.
2.6 Bath Room Group — Group of fixtures consisting
of water closet, lavatories bath tub or shower and other
fittings with a floor drain located together.
2.7 Battery of Fixtures — Any group of two or more
similar adjacent fixtures which discharge into a
common horizontal waste or soil pipe.
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES
(INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT)
Section 2 Drainage and Sanitation
Supplied
by
Book
Supply
Bureau
Under
the
License
from
BIS
for
LARSEN
AND
TOUBRO
CONSTRUCTION
-
MANAPAKKAM,
CHENNAI
ON
17-03-2017
09:00:59
(123.63.24.35)
valid
upto31-12-2017
ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/nationalbuildingcode-240401165105-f4e9283c/85/NBC-National-Building-Code-volume-1-and-2-53-320.jpg)
![PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 7
SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION
2.43 French Drain or Rubble Drain — A shallow
trench filled with coarse rubble, clinker, or similar
material with or without field drain pipes.
2.44 Frost Line — The line joining the points of
greatest depths below ground level up to which the
moisture in the soil freezes.
2.45 Grease Interceptor (or Grease Trap) — A
chamber, on the line of a drain or waste pipe, for
preventing grease from passing into the drainage
system. It reduces non-petroleum fats, oils and grease
in effluent by separation and volume reduction to
improve sewage treatment efficiency.
As it is used to intercept fats, oils and grease (FOG)
from a waste water discharge, it is also known as FOG
interceptor.
2.46 Gully Chamber — The chamber built of masonry
round a gully trap for housing the same.
2.47 Gully Trap — A trap provided in a drainage
system with a water seal fixed in a suitable position to
collect waste water from the scullery, kitchen sink, wash
basins, baths and rainwater pipes.
2.48 High Altitudes — Elevations higher than 1 500 m
above mean sea level (MSL).
2.49 Highway Authority — The public body in which
is vested, or which is the owner of, a highway repairable
by the inhabitants collectively; otherwise the body or
persons responsible for the upkeep of the highway.
2.50 Horizontal Pipe — Any pipe of fitting which
makes an angle of more than 45° with the vertical.
2.51 Indirect Waste Pipe — The pipe that does not
connect directly with the drainage system, but conveys
liquid wastes by discharging into a plumbing fixture/
interceptor that is directly connected to the drainage
system.
2.52 Inlet Fittings — An arrangement of connecting
the internal waste branch pipe from wash basin, sinks
and shower drains to the main deep seal trap with the
help of hopper extension.
2.53 Inlet Hopper — A receptacle fitting for receiving
refuse from each floor and dropping it into the chute.
2.54 Insanitary — Condition that is contrary to sanitary
principles or is injurious to health.
2.55 Inspection Chamber — A water-tight chamber
constructed in any house-drainage system which takes
wastes from gully traps and disposes to manhole with
access for inspection and maintenance.
2.56 Interceptor — A device designed and installed
so as to separate and retain deleterious, hazardous or
undesirable matter from normal wastes and permit
normal sewage or liquid wastes to discharge into the
disposal terminal by gravity.
2.57 Interceptor Manhole or Interceptor
Chamber — A manhole incorporating an intercepting
trap and providing means of access thereto.
2.58 Invert — The lowest point of the internal surface
of a pipe or channel at any cross-section.
2.59 Junction Pipe — A pipe incorporating one or
more branches.
2.60 Lagging — Thermal insulation or pipes.
2.61 Licensed (or Registered) Plumber — A person
licensed (or registered) under the provisions of this Code.
2.62 Main Soil Pipe (MSP) — A pipe connecting one
or more branch soil pipes to the drain.
2.63 Main Soil and Waste Pipe (MSWP) — A pipe
connecting one or more branch soil and waste pipes to
the drain.
2.64 Main Vent Pipe (MVP) — A pipe which receives
a number of branch vent pipes.
2.65 Main Waste Pipe (MWP) — A pipe connecting
one or more branch waste pipes to the drain.
2.66 Manhole — An opening by which a man may
enter or leave a drain, a sewer or other closed structure
for inspection, cleaning and other maintenance
operations, fitted with suitable cover.
2.67 Manhole Chamber — A Chamber constructed
on a drain or sewer so as to provide access thereto for
inspection, testing or clearance of obstruction.
2.68 Offset — A pipe fitting used to connect two pipes
whose axes are parallel but not in line.
2.69 Pipe System — The system to be adopted will
depend on the type and planning of the building in which
it is to be installed and will be one of the following:
a) Single stack system (see Fig. 1) — The piping
system in which there is no trap ventilation
and the stack itself acts as vent through roof.
In this system care shall be taken for proper
sizing of the pipes and the trap arm distance,
specially the horizontal distance of sanitary
fixtures from the drainage stack and vertical
distance between connection of branches from
fixtures to drainage stack.
b) One pipe — Partially ventilated system
(see Fig. 2) — The piping system in which
soil and waste pipes are connected to a single
vertical stack [as explained in 2.69 (a)] with
additional vent pipe for ventilation of traps of
water closets. It is also sometimes known as
single stack — partially ventilated system.
Supplied
by
Book
Supply
Bureau
Under
the
License
from
BIS
for
LARSEN
AND
TOUBRO
CONSTRUCTION
-
MANAPAKKAM,
CHENNAI
ON
17-03-2017
09:00:59
(123.63.24.35)
valid
upto31-12-2017
ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/nationalbuildingcode-240401165105-f4e9283c/85/NBC-National-Building-Code-volume-1-and-2-55-320.jpg)
![PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 15
SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION
a) Every floor of the building in which the pipes
or drains are to be used;
b) The position, forms, level and arrangement of
the various parts of such building, including
the roof thereof;
c) All new drains as proposed with their sizes
and gradients;
d) Invert levels of the proposed drains with
corresponding ground levels;
e) The position of every manhole, gully, soil and
waste pipe, vent pipe, rainwater pipe, water
closet, urinal, latrine, bath, lavatory, sink, trap
or other appliances in the premises proposed
to be connected to any drain and the following
colours are recommended for indicating
sewers, waste water pipes, rainwater pipes an
existing work:
Description of Work Colour
Sewers Red
Waste water pipes and Blue
rainwater pipes
Existing work Black
f) The position of refuse chute, inlet hopper and
collection chamber.
3.2.3.1 In the case of an alteration or addition to an
existing building, this clause shall be deemed to be
satisfied if the plans as furnished convey sufficient
information for the proposals to be readily identified
with previous sanctioned plans and provided the
locations of tanks and other fittings are consistent with
the structural safety of the building.
3.2.3.2 The plans for the building drainage shall in every
case be accompanied by specifications for the various
items of work involved. This information shall be
supplied in the prescribed form given in Annex B.
3.2.4 In respect of open drains, cross-sectional details
shall be prepared to a scale not smaller than 1 in 50
showing the ground and invert levels and any
arrangement already existing or proposed for the
inclusion of any or exclusion of all storm water from
the sewers.
3.2.5 Completion Certificate
At the completion of the plumbing installation work,
the licensed/registered plumber shall give a completion
certificate in the prescribed form, which is given in
Annex C.
3.3 Licensing/Registration of Plumbers
3.3.1 Execution of Work
The work which is required to be carried out under the
provisions of this section, shall be executed only by a
licensed/registered plumber under the control of the
Authority and shall be responsible to carry out all lawful
directions given by the Authority. No individual shall
engage in the business of plumbing unless so licensed/
registered under the provisions of this Section.
3.3.1.1 No individual, firm, partnership or corporation
shall engage in the business of installing, repairing or
altering plumbing unless the plumbing work performed
in the course of such business is under the direct
supervision of a licensed/registered plumber from
approved Authority.
3.3.2 Examination and Certification
The Authority shall establish standards and procedure
for the qualification, examination and licensing/
registration of plumbers and shall issue licences to such
persons who meet the qualifications thereof and
successfully pass the examination.
3.3.3 For guidelines for registration of plumbers
including the minimum standards for qualifications for
the grant of licences, reference may be made to good
practice [9-2(2)]. The Authority may also utilize the
services of the certified plumbers who are certified for
the required skill level under the appropriate scheme
of the Government.
4 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION
4.1 Types of Sanitary Appliances
4.1.1 Soil Appliances
4.1.1.1 Water closet
It shall essentially consist of a closet consisting of a
bowl to receive excretory matter, trap and a flushing
apparatus. It is recommended to provide ablution tap
adjacent to the water closet, preferably on right hand
side wall. The various types/style of water closets may
be:
a) Squatting Indian type water closet,
b) Washdown type water closet,
c) Siphonic washdown type water closet, and
d) Universal or Anglo-Indian water closet.
4.1.1.2 Bidet
Bidet is an ablution appliance for cleansing excretory
organs with water for personnel hygiene. It may be
pedestal type or wall hung with a shallow bowl. Hot
and cold water supplied through a mixer is discharged
from a spray installed over the rim of the appliance.
The bidet outlet should essentially connect to soil pipe
in a system.
Supplied
by
Book
Supply
Bureau
Under
the
License
from
BIS
for
LARSEN
AND
TOUBRO
CONSTRUCTION
-
MANAPAKKAM,
CHENNAI
ON
17-03-2017
09:00:59
(123.63.24.35)
valid
upto31-12-2017
ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/nationalbuildingcode-240401165105-f4e9283c/85/NBC-National-Building-Code-volume-1-and-2-63-320.jpg)
![16 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
4.1.1.3 Urinal
It is a soil appliance for urination and is connected to
soil pipe after a suitable trap. Urinal should have
adequate provision of flushing apparatus. The various
types/style of urinal may be:
a) Bowl type urinal: flat back or angle back.
b) Slab (single) type urinal.
c) Stall (single) type urinal.
d) Squatting plate type urinal.
e) Syphon jet urinal with integral trap.
f) Water less (non-water) urinal
4.1.1.4 Slop sink
Slop sink is a large sink, generally of square shape. the
appliance is used in hospitals and is installed in the
dirty utility room, sluice room and similar locations
for disposal of excreta and other foul waste and for
washing bed pans and urine bottles/pans. It is provided
with a flushing mechanism. It is also provided in
Janitor’s closet where it is used for cleaning the
housekeeping mops, etc.
4.1.1.5 Bed pan sink
Bed pan sink, also known as bedpan washer and
disinfector, is a part of medical equipment inventory
which is used to clean manually or automatically, the
hospital bedpans, urine bottles and other containers
used for collecting body fluids. It is provided in dirty
utility room, sluice room, similar locations for disposal
of excreta and other foul waste and for washing bed
pans, urine bottles/pans. It is a soil appliance and is
connected to soil pipe after a suitable trap. In manual
models, it has a flushing arrangement.
Provision for installing a bedpan washer and
disinfector should be made in all intensive care units
in hospitals.
4.1.2 Waste Appliances
4.1.2.1 Wash basin
It is of one-piece construction having a combined
overflow and preferably should have soap holding
recess or recesses that should properly drain into the
bowl. Each basin shall have circular waste hole
through which the liquid content of the basin shall
drain.
4.1.2.2 Wash-trough
It is a linear trough for simultaneous use by number of
persons.
4.1.2.3 Sink
It is used in kitchen and laboratory for the purpose of
cleaning utensils/ apparatus and also serve the purpose
of providing water for general usage. The sink may be
made with or without overflow arrangement. The sink
shall be of one-piece construction including combined
over flow, where provided. The sink shall have a
circular waste hole into which the interiors of the sink
shall drain.
4.1.2.4 Bath tub
Bath tub may be of enameled steel, cast iron, gel-coated,
glass fibre reinforced plastic or may be cast in-situ. It
shall be stable, comfortable, easy to get in and out, water
tight, with anti-skid base, and easy to install and
maintain. The bath tub shall be fitted with overflow
and waste pipe of nominal diameter of not less than
32 mm and 40 mm, respectively.
4.1.2.5 Drinking fountain
It is a bowl fitted with a push button tap and a water
bubbler or a tap with a swan neck outlet fitting. It has
a waste fitting, a trap and is connected to the waste
pipe.
4.1.3 The requirements of various soil appliances and
waste appliances shall be in accordance with accepted
standards [9-2(3)].
4.2 Drainage and Sanitation Requirements
4.2.1 General
There should be at least one water tap and arrangement
for drainage in the vicinity of each water closet or group
of water closet in all the buildings.
4.2.2 Each dwelling unit on premises (abutting on a
sewer or with a private sewage disposal system) shall
have at least one water closet, one kitchen wash place
or a sink, and one bathing place or shower to meet
the basic requirements of sanitation and personal
hygiene.
In case of a group housing, the requirements relating
to toilet or sanitary room and kitchen as given in 13
and B-9 of Part 3 ‘Development Control Rules and
General Building Requirements’ of the Code shall also
be complied with.
4.2.3 All other structures for human occupancy or use
on premises (abutting on a sewer or with a private
sewage disposal system) shall have adequate sanitary
facilities, but in no case less than one water closet and
one other fixture for cleaning purposes.
Supplied
by
Book
Supply
Bureau
Under
the
License
from
BIS
for
LARSEN
AND
TOUBRO
CONSTRUCTION
-
MANAPAKKAM,
CHENNAI
ON
17-03-2017
09:00:59
(123.63.24.35)
valid
upto31-12-2017
ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/nationalbuildingcode-240401165105-f4e9283c/85/NBC-National-Building-Code-volume-1-and-2-64-320.jpg)
![PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 25
SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION
installation suited to the need of a specific
building. For example, schools should be
provided with toilet facilities on each floor.
Similarly, toilet facilities shall be provided for
temporary workmen employed in any
establishment according to the needs; and in
any case one WC and one wash basin shall be
provided.
f) All buildings used for human habitation for
dwelling, work, occupation, medical care or
any purpose detailed in the various tables,
abutting a public sewer or a private sewage
disposal system, shall be provided with
minimum sanitary facilities as per the schedule
in the tables. In case the disposal facilities are
not available, they shall be provided as a part
of the building design for ensuring high
standards of sanitary conditions in accordance
with this section.
g) Workplaces where crèches are provided, they
shall be provided with one WC for 10 persons
or part thereof, one wash basin for 15 persons
or part thereof, one kitchen sink with floor trap
for preparing food/milk preparations. The sink
provided shall be with a drinking water tap.
h) In all types of buildings, individual toilets and
pantry should be provided for executives, and
for meeting/seminar/conference rooms, etc, as
per the user requirement.
j) Where food is consumed indoors, water
stations may be provided in place of drinking
water fountains.
4.3 Materials, Fittings and Appliances
4.3.1 Standards for Materials, Fittings and Sanitary
Appliances
All materials, fittings and sanitary appliances shall
conform to Part 5 ‘Building Materials’ of the Code.
4.3.2 Choice of Material for Pipes
4.3.2.1 Salt glazed stoneware pipe
For all sewers and drains in all soils, except where
supports are required as in made-up ground, glazed
stoneware pipe shall be used as far as possible in
preference to other types of pipes. These pipes are
particularly suitable where acid effluents or acid subsoil
conditions are likely to be encountered. Salt glazed
stoneware pipes shall conform to accepted standards
[9-2(4)].
4.3.2.2 Cement concrete pipes
When properly ventilated, cement concrete pipes with
spigot and socket or collar joints present an alternative
to glazed stoneware sewers of over 150 mm diameter.
These shall not be used to carry acid effluents or sewage
under conditions favourable for the production of
hydrogen sulphide and shall not be laid in those subsoils
that are likely to affect adversely the quality or strength
of concrete. Where these pipes are employed for
conveying liquid containing sulphates, the pipes used
shall be manufactured using sulphate resisting Portland
cement. Owing to the longer lengths of pipes available,
the joints would be lesser in the case of cements
concrete pipes. These pipes may be used for surface
water drains in all diameters. Cement concrete pipes
shall conform to accepted standards [9-2(5)].
4.3.2.3 Cast iron pipes
4.3.2.3.1 These pipes shall be used in the following
situation:
a) In bed or unstable ground where soil
movement is expected;
b) In made-up or tipped ground;
c) To provide for increased strength where a
sewer is laid at insufficient depth, where it is
exposed or where it has to be carried on piers
or above ground;
d) Under buildings and where pipes are
suspended in basements and like situations;
e) In reaches where the velocity is more than
2.4 m/s; and
f) For crossings of watercourses.
NOTE — In difficult foundation condition such a in the case
of black cotton soil, the cast iron pipes shall be used only when
suitable supporting arrangements are made.
4.3.2.3.2 It shall be noted that cast iron pipes even when
given a protective paint are liable to severe external
corrosion in certain soils; among such soils are:
a) Soils permeated by peaty waters; and
b) Soils in which the subsoil contains appreciable
concentrations of sulphates. Local experiences
shall be ascertained before cast iron pipes are
used where corrosive soil conditions are
suspected. Where so used, suitable measures
for the protection of the pipes may be resorted
to as an adequate safeguard.
4.3.2.3.3 Cast iron pipes shall conform to accepted
standards [9-2(6)].
4.3.2.4 Asbestos cement pipes
Asbestos cement pipes are commonly used for house
drainage systems and they shall conform to accepted
standards [9-2(7)]. They are not recommended for
underground situations. However, asbestos cement
pressure pipes conforming to accepted standards
[9-2(7)] may be used in underground situations also,
provided they are not subject to heavy superimposed
Supplied
by
Book
Supply
Bureau
Under
the
License
from
BIS
for
LARSEN
AND
TOUBRO
CONSTRUCTION
-
MANAPAKKAM,
CHENNAI
ON
17-03-2017
09:00:59
(123.63.24.35)
valid
upto31-12-2017
ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/nationalbuildingcode-240401165105-f4e9283c/85/NBC-National-Building-Code-volume-1-and-2-73-320.jpg)
![26 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
loads. These shall not be used to carry acid effluents or
sewage under conditions favourable for the production
of hydrogen sulphide and shall not be laid in those
subsoils which are likely to affect adversely the quality
or strength of asbestos cement pipes. Where so desired,
the life of asbestos cement pipes may be increased by
lining inside of the pipe with suitable coatings like
epoxy/polyester resins, etc.
4.3.2.5 PVC pipes
Unplasticized PVC pipes may be used for drainage
purposes; however, where hot water discharge is
anticipated, the wall thickness shall be minimum 3 mm
irrespective of the size and flow load.
PVC and HDPE pipes shall conform to accepted
standards [9-2(8)].
NOTE — Where possible, high density polyethylene pipes
(HDPE) and PVC pipes may be used for drainage and sanitation
purposes, depending upon the suitability.
4.3.2.6 Corrugated pipes
These pipes (externally corrugated) are used for
sewerage and drainage applications. They are light
weight and have long life. The leakage and infiltration
at joints are less. The operational cost is low and can
easily withstand natural settlements without suffering
cracks or leakages. They consume fewer raw material
and have less carbon dioxide emission.
4.3.2.7 Low noise pipes
Waste water systems encompass the system of drainage
and pressure relief pipes within a building and terminate
0.5 m outside the external wall. Waste water systems
are based on the primary pressure-relief system in which
water and air-flow occurs in the same pipe. The waste
water system shall be separated from the roof drainage
system.
Noise is a variance in air pressure that spreads like a
wave. If quick changes in pressure occur between
20 and 20 000 times a second (frequency 20 Hz and
20 kHz), they are audible to humans. The loudness of
noise is determined by the amplitude of the wave, which
is measured in decibels (dB).
The main cause of noise in indoor drainage systems
(primarily focused on the downpipe) are the choice of
the pipe system, the bracket type and the design of
drainage system. Optimizing these factors will therefore
have the best influence on noise reduction.
4.3.2.8 Under slung pipes
In under slung plumbing, the toilet slab is built at the
same level as the slabs outside the toilet. Holes/core
cuts are punctured through the slab wherever pipes have
to pass through, and the plumbing is clamped to the
bottom of the slab. It is then concealed above a false
ceiling, which is accessible above the false ceiling for
routine maintenance. In this type of plumbing, any leaks
will drip onto the false ceiling which is easily detectable
thus allow quick maintenance without much damage
to the structure or occupied premises
4.4 Preliminary Data for Design
4.4.1 General
Before the drainage system for a building or group of
buildings is designed and constructed, accurate
information regarding the site conditions is essential.
This information may vary with the individual scheme
but shall, in general, be covered by the following:
a) Site plan (see 3.2.2).
b) Drainage plan (see 3.2.3).
c) Use — A description of the use for which the
building is intended and periods of occupation
in order that peak discharges may be
estimated;
d) Nature of waste — While dealing with sewage
from domestic premises, special problems
under this head may not arise; however, note
shall be taken of any possibility of trade
effluents being discharged into the pipes at a
future date;
e) Outlet connection — The availability of
sewers or other outlets;
f) Cover — The depth (below ground) of the
proposed sewers and drains and the nature and
weight of the traffic on the ground above them;
g) Subsoil condition
1) The approximate level of the subsoil
water, and any available records of flood
levels shall be ascertained, as also the
depth of the water table relative to all
sewer connections, unless it is known to
be considerably below the level of the
latter.
2) In the case of deep manholes, this
information will influence largely the type
of construction to be adopted. The
probable safe bearing capacity of the
subsoil at invert level may be ascertained
in the case of a deep manhole.
3) Where work of any magnitude is to be
undertaken, trial pits or boreholes shall
be put at intervals along the line of the
proposed sewer or drain and the data
therefrom tabulated, together with any
information available from previous
works carried out in the vicinity. In
general, the information derived from
Supplied
by
Book
Supply
Bureau
Under
the
License
from
BIS
for
LARSEN
AND
TOUBRO
CONSTRUCTION
-
MANAPAKKAM,
CHENNAI
ON
17-03-2017
09:00:59
(123.63.24.35)
valid
upto31-12-2017
ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/nationalbuildingcode-240401165105-f4e9283c/85/NBC-National-Building-Code-volume-1-and-2-74-320.jpg)
![28 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
disposed of by adequate treatment approved by the
Authority on the site. The effluent from the plant shall
be discharged after meeting the norms specified by the
statutory authority into a natural watercourse or on the
surface of the ground or disposed of subsoil dispersion
preferably draining to a suitable outlet channel.
4.4.3.2 In the case of dilution into a natural stream
course, the quality of the effluent shall conform and
the requirements of the Authority controlling the
prevention of pollution of streams.
4.4.3.3 In the case of subsoil dispersion, the
requirements of the Authority for water supply shall be
observed to avoid any possible pollution of local water
supplies or wells.
4.4.3.4 The general subsoil water level and the subsoil
conditions shall be ascertained, including the absorptive
capacity of the soil.
4.4.3.5 A subsoil dispersion is not desirable near a
building or in such positions that the ground below the
foundations is likely to be affected.
4.4.3.6 Where no other method of disposal is possible,
foul water may be diverted to cesspools and
arrangements made with the Authority for satisfactory
periodical removal and conveyance to a disposal works.
4.4.3.7 Under the separate system, drainage of the
building shall be done through septic tanks of different
sizes or by stabilization ponds or by any other treatment
methods such as extended aeration activated process,
sequential batch process, fluidized bio-reactors,
membrane bio-reactor, submerged aerobic fixed film,
rotating biological contactor, electrolyte process, etc,
as approved by the Authority.
For detailed information on the design and construction
of septic tanks and waste stabilization ponds, sewage
treatment plants reference may be made to good
practice [9-2(9)].
4.4.3.8 Bio-toilet (or eco-toilet)
It is useful in situations where no suitable water supply
or sewer system and sewage treatment plant is available
to capture the nutrients in human excreta.
The toilet is made of a structure, generally of
prefabricated type, above the ground, a bio-digester tank
below the ground and in case of sub-zero temperature
regions, a solar panel. Bio-toilet involves complete
sludge free disposal of human waste and eliminates need
for manual scavenging. It decomposes solid waste to
water and bio-gas. It is eco-friendly, hazard free,
requiring least maintenance and is capable of functioning
efficiently at sub-zero temperatures (see Fig. 5)
4.4.4 Disposal of Surface and Subsoil Waters
All information which may influence the choice of
methods of disposal of surface and/or subsoil waters
shall be obtained. In the absence of surface water
drainage system, and if practicable and permissible,
disposal into a natural water-course or soakaway may
be adopted. The location and flood levels of the water
course as also the requirements of the Authority
controlling the river or the waterway shall be
ascertained.
4.5 Planning and Design Considerations
4.5.1 Aim
The efficient disposal of foul and surface water from a
building is of great importance to public health and is
FIG. 5 BIO-TOILET OR ECO-TOILET
Supplied
by
Book
Supply
Bureau
Under
the
License
from
BIS
for
LARSEN
AND
TOUBRO
CONSTRUCTION
-
MANAPAKKAM,
CHENNAI
ON
17-03-2017
09:00:59
(123.63.24.35)
valid
upto31-12-2017
ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/nationalbuildingcode-240401165105-f4e9283c/85/NBC-National-Building-Code-volume-1-and-2-76-320.jpg)
![30 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
4.5.2 Layout
4.5.2.1 General
Rainwater should preferably be dealt separately from
sewage and sullage. Sewage and sullage shall be
connected to sewers. However, storm water from the
courtyard may be connected to the sewer where it is
not possible to drain otherwise; after obtaining
permission of the Authority.
4.5.2.2 Additional requirements
The following requirements are suggested to be
considered in the design of drainage system:
a) The layout shall be as simple and direct as
practicable.
b) The pipes should be laid in straight lines, as
far as possible, in both vertical and horizontal
planes.
c) Anything that is likely to cause irregularity of
flow, such as abrupt changes of direction, shall
be avoided.
d) The pipes should be non-absorbent, durable,
smooth in bore and of adequate strength.
e) The pipes should be adequately supported
without restricting movement.
f) Drains should be well ventilated, to prevent
the accumulation of foul gases and fluctuation
of air pressure within the pipe, which could
lead to unsealing (siphoning) of gully or water
closet traps.
g) All the parts of the drainage system should be
accessible for feasibility of inspection and
practical maintenance.
h) No bends and junctions whatsoever shall be
permitted in sewers except at manholes and
inspection chambers.
j) Sewer drain shall be laid for self-cleaning
velocity of 0.75 m/s and generally should not
flow more than half-full.
k) Pipes crossing in walls and floors shall be
through mild steel sleeves of diameter leaving
an annular space of 5 mm around the outer
diameter of the pipe crossing the wall.
m) Pipes should not be laid close to building
foundation.
n) Pipes should not pass near large trees because
of possibility of damage by the roots.
p) Branch connections should be swept in the
direction of flow.
q) Sewer pipes should be at least 900 mm below
road and at least 600 mm below fields and
gardens.
r) Pipes should not pass under a building unless
absolutely necessary. Where it is necessary to
lay pipes under a building, the following
conditions shall be observed:
1) Pipes shall be centrifugally cast (spun)
iron pressure pipe as per good practice
[9-2(10)];
2) The pipe shall be laid in straight line and
at uniform gradient;
3) Means of access in form of manholes/
inspection chamber shall be provided at
each end, immediately outside the
building;
4) In case the pipe or any part of it is laid
above the natural surface of the ground,
it shall be laid on concrete supports, the
bottom of which goes at least 150 mm
below the ground surface.
NOTE — It is desirable that pipe/drains should
not be taken through a living room or kitchen and
shall preferably be taken under a staircase room
or passage.
s) Consideration shall be given to alternative
layouts so as to ensure that the most
economical and practical solution is
adopted. The possibility of alterations shall
be avoided by exercising due care and
forethought.
4.5.2.3 Protection against vermin and dirt
The installation of sanitary fittings shall not introduce
crevices which are not possible to inspect and clean
readily.
Pipes, if not embedded, shall be run well clear of the
wall. Holes through walls to lay pipes shall be made
good on both sides to prevent entry of insects. Materials
used for embedding pipes shall be rodent-proof.
Passage of rodents from room-to-room or from floor-
to-floor shall be prevented by suitable sealing. The
intermediate lengths of ducts and chases shall be
capable of easy inspection. Any unused drains, sewers,
etc, shall be demolished or filled in to keep them free
from rodents.
All pipe shafts shall be plastered before any pipes are
installed in the shaft. It is advisable to lay pipes on the
steel supports with adequate gap between plastered wall
and support structure. This will provide a smooth
surface and prevent location for survival of insects and
vermins.
4.5.2.4 Choice of plumbing system
4.5.2.4.1 In selecting one or more of the type of piping
systems, the building and the layout of toilets/fixtures,
relationship with other services, acceptability to the
Authority, and any special requirements of users, shall
be studied.
Supplied
by
Book
Supply
Bureau
Under
the
License
from
BIS
for
LARSEN
AND
TOUBRO
CONSTRUCTION
-
MANAPAKKAM,
CHENNAI
ON
17-03-2017
09:00:59
(123.63.24.35)
valid
upto31-12-2017
ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/nationalbuildingcode-240401165105-f4e9283c/85/NBC-National-Building-Code-volume-1-and-2-78-320.jpg)
![PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 31
SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION
a) Single stack system [see 2.69 (a)]
1) The single stack system is ideal when the
toilet/fixture layouts are repetitive and
there is less space for pipes on the wall.
2) In any system so selected there should be
not more than two toilet connections per
floor.
3) The system requires minimum 100 mm
diameter stack for a maximum of 5 floors
in a building.
4) In this system, care shall be taken of the
horizontal distance of sanitary fixtures
from the drainage stack and vertical
distance between connections of branches
from fixtures to drainage stack.
5) All the safeguards for the use of this
system given in 4.5.2.4.2 shall be
complied with.
b) One pipe — partially ventilated system
[see 2.69 (b)]
The system and the applicable safeguards
under this system are the same as for single
stack system. The prime modification is to
vent the soil appliance(s).
c) One pipe — fully ventilated system
[see 2.69 (c)]
1) This system is suitable for buildings
where the toilet/fixture layouts and the
shafts are repetitive. It requires less shaft
space, and is economical.
2) Continuous flow of water in the pipe from
waste appliances makes it less prone to
blockage and makes the system more
efficient.
3) The system eliminates the need for a gully
trap which requires constant cleaning.
4) This system requires individual vent pipes
installed either in suspended ceiling or in
the wall above the floor level in the toilet,
provided construction details of the
building allow provision of vent pipes for
individual fixtures and routing of vent
pipes to remote shafts where main vent
stacks may have been located.
5) The system requires minimum 100 mm
diameter stack.
6) The system is ideal when the main pipes
run at the ceiling of the lowest floor or in
a service floor.
d) Two pipe system [see 2.69 (d)]
1) This system provides safety and
flexibility in layouts for larger toilets and
for buildings having higher requirement
of performance due to its height and type
of occupancy.
2) In large buildings and houses with open
ground and gardens, the sullage water
from the waste system can be suitably
treated and usefully utilized for gardening
and agriculture.
3) In larger and multi-storeyed buildings, the
sullage is treated within the building for
reuse as makeup water for cooling towers
for air conditioning system and is also
used for flushing water closets provided
it has absolutely no connection with any
water supply line, tank or system used for
domestic and drinking supply.
For detailed information regarding design and
installation of soil, waste and vent pipes, reference may
be made to good practice [9-2(11)].
4.5.2.4.2 Safeguards for single stack system
a) As far as practicable,the fixtures on a floor shall
be connected to stack in order of increasing
discharge rate in the downward direction.
b) The size of the vent pipe (terminating to the
outdoor) shall be same as the size of drainage
stack in the case of single stack system.
c) Water closets shall be connected to the stack
through a sanitary tee; the maximum horizontal
distance from the stack being 2 400 mm.
d) For fixtures other than water closets, the
maximum horizontal distance from the stack
shall be 3 500 mm.
e) The vertical distance between the waste
branch (from floor trap or from the individual
appliance) and the soil branch connection,
when soil pipe is connected to stack above
the waste pipe, shall be not less than 200 mm.
f) Depth of water seal traps from different
fixtures shall be as per 4.5.3.6.1.6.
g) Branches and stacks which receive
discharges from WC pans should not be less
than 100 mm, except where the outlet from
the siphonic water closet is 80 mm, in which
case a branch pipe of 80 mm may be used.
For outlet of floor traps 75 mm dia pipes may
be used.
h) The horizontalbranchdistancefor fixturesfrom
stack, bend(s) at the foot of stack to avoid back
pressure as well as vertical distance between
the lowest connection and the invert of drain
shall be as per good practice [9-2(11)].
j) For tall buildings, ground floor appliances are
recommended to be connected directly to
manhole/inspection chamber.
Supplied
by
Book
Supply
Bureau
Under
the
License
from
BIS
for
LARSEN
AND
TOUBRO
CONSTRUCTION
-
MANAPAKKAM,
CHENNAI
ON
17-03-2017
09:00:59
(123.63.24.35)
valid
upto31-12-2017
ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/nationalbuildingcode-240401165105-f4e9283c/85/NBC-National-Building-Code-volume-1-and-2-79-320.jpg)
![42 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
sources shall be made to the building drainage system
indirectly through a trap. It should be ensured in
advance that the building drain or a sump with a pump
has the capacity to receive to rate of flow. In case the
capacity is less the rate of discharge from the appliances
should be regulated to meet the capacity of the disposal.
Under no circumstances shall any waste water described
above shall be disposed of in any storm water drains.
4.5.10 Manholes
4.5.10.1 General
A manhole or inspection chamber shall be capable of
sustaining the loads which may be imposed on it,
exclude subsoil water and be water tight. The size of
the chamber should be sufficient to permit ready access
to the drain or sewer for inspection, cleaning and
rodding and should have a removable cover of adequate
strength, constructed of suitable and durable material.
Where the depth of the chamber so requires, access
rungs, step irons, ladders or other means should be
provided to ensure safe access to the level of the drain
or sewer. If the chamber contains an open channel,
benching should be provided having a smooth finish
and formed so as to allow the foul matter to flow
towards the pipe and also ensure a safe foothold.
No manhole or inspection chamber shall be permitted
inside a building or in any passage therein. The
minimum depth of the manhole shall not be less than
800 mm to facilitate gully trap connection. Further,
ventilating covers shall not be used for domestic drains.
At every change of alignment, gradient or diameter of
a drain, there shall be a manhole or inspection chamber.
Bends and junctions in the drains shall be grouped
together in manholes as far as possible.
Alternative materials of manholes using RCC rings and
PVC in sewer lines are being used in some sites. These
may be considered subject to ensuring their proper
design, keeping in view the lateral and vertical loads at
the place of installation.
The holes over the surfaces of covers/gratings of
various manholes, gullys and other chambers/drains
shall comply with the requirements given in 13 of Part 3
‘Development Control Rules and General Building
Requirements’ of the Code.
4.5.10.2 Spacing of manholes
The spacing of manholes for a given pipe size should
be as follows:
Sl
No.
Pipe Diameter
mm
Spacing of Manhole
m
i) Up to 300 45
ii) 301 to 500 75
iii) 501 to 900 90
iv) Beyond 900 Spacing shall depend
upon local condition and
shall be gotten approved
by the Authority
Where the diameter of a drain is increased, the crown
of the pipes shall be fixed at the same level and the
necessary slope given in the invert of the manhole
chamber. In exceptional cases and where unavoidable,
the crown of the branch sewer may be fixed at a lower
level, but in such cases the peak flow level of the two
sewers shall be kept the same.
4.5.10.3 Size of manhole
The manhole or chamber shall be of such size as will
allow necessary examination or clearance of drains. The
size of shall be adjusted to take into account any
increase in the number of entries into the chamber.
4.5.10.3.1 Manholes may be rectangular, arch or circular
type. The minimum internal size of manholes, chambers
(between faces of masonry) shall be as follows:
a) Rectangular manholes:
1) For depths less than 900 mm ×
0.90 m 800 mm
2) For depths from 0.90 m 1 200 mm ×
and up to 2.5 m 900 mm
NOTE — For depths upto 0.60 m, 600 mm × 600 mm manhole
may be used.
b) Arch type manholes:
For depths of 2.5 m and 1 400 mm ×
above 900 mm
NOTE — The width of manhole chamber shall be suitably
increased more than 900 mm on bends, junctions or pipes with
diameter greater than 450 mm so that benching width in either
side of channel is minimum 200 mm.
c) Circular manholes:
1) For depths above 0.90 m 900 mm
and up to 1.65 m diameter
2) For depths above 1.65 m 1 200 mm
and up to 2.30 m diameter
3) For depths above 2.30 m 1 500 mm
and up to 9.00 m diameter
4) For depths above 9.00 m 1 800 mm
and up to 14.00 m diameter
NOTES
1 In adopting the above sizes of chambers, it should be ensured
that these sizes accord with full or half bricks with standard
thickness of mortar joints so as to avoid wasteful cutting of
bricks.
2 The sizes of the chambers/manhole may be adjusted to suit
the availability of local building materials, economics of
construction and to meet local authority approval.
3 The access shaft shall be corbelled inwards on three sides
at the top to reduce its size to that of the cover frame to be
fitted or alternatively the access shaft shall be covered over
by a reinforced concrete slab of suitable dimensions with an
opening for manhole cover and frame.
4 The minimum sewer pipe diameter is 200 mm based on
good practice [9-2(12)].
4.5.10.4 Construction
4.5.10.4.1 Excavation
The manhole shall be excavated true to dimensions and
Supplied
by
Book
Supply
Bureau
Under
the
License
from
BIS
for
LARSEN
AND
TOUBRO
CONSTRUCTION
-
MANAPAKKAM,
CHENNAI
ON
17-03-2017
09:00:59
(123.63.24.35)
valid
upto31-12-2017
ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/nationalbuildingcode-240401165105-f4e9283c/85/NBC-National-Building-Code-volume-1-and-2-90-320.jpg)
![PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 43
SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION
levels as shown on the plan. The excavation of deep
manholes shall be accompanied with safety measures
like timbering, staging, etc. In areas where necessary,
appropriate measures for dewatering should be made.
4.5.10.4.2 Bed concrete
The manhole shall be built on a bed of concrete 1:4:8 (1
cement : 4 coarse sand : 8 graded stone aggregate 40
mm nominal size). The thickness of bed concrete shall
be at least 150 mm for manholes up to 0.9 m in depth, at
least 200 mm for manholes from 0.90 m up to 2.5 m in
depth and at least 300 mm for manholes of greater depth,
unless the structural design demands higher thickness.
This thickness may be verified considering the weight
of wall, cover, the wheel loads, impact of traffic which
are transmitted through cover and the shaft walls and
for water pressure, if any. In case of weak soil, special
foundation as suitable shall be provided
4.5.10.4.3 Brickwork
The thickness of walls shall be designed depending
upon its shape and taking onto account all loads coming
over it, including earth pressure and water pressure.
Generally, the brickwork shall be with first class bricks
in cement mortar 1: 5 (1 cement : 5 coarse sand). All
brickwork in manhole chambers and shafts shall be
carefully built in English Bond, the jointing faces of
each brick being well ‘buttered’ with cement mortar
before laying, so as to ensure a full joint. The
construction of walls in brickwork shall be done in
accordance with good practice [9-2(13)].
For various depths the recommended thickness of wall
may be as follows:
Depth of the chamber thickness of wall
a) Up to 2.25 m : 200 mm
(one brick length)
b) From 2.25 m up to : 300 mm (one and
3.0 m half brick length)
c) From 3.00 m up to : 400 mm (two brick
5.0 m length)
d) From 5.00 m up to : 500 mm (two and
9.0 m half brick length)
e) Above 9.00 m : 600 mm (three brick
length)
The actual thickness in any case shall be calculated on
the basis of engineering design. Typical sections of the
manholes are illustrated in Figs. 7, 8 and 9.
NOTES
1 Rich mix of cement mortar, not weaker than 1:3, should be
used in brick masonry, where subsoil water conditions are
encountered.
2 For arched type of manholes, the brick masonry in arches
and arching over pipes shall be in cement mortar 1:3.
FIG. 7 DETAIL OF MANHOLE (DEPTH LESS THAN 0.90 m)
Supplied
by
Book
Supply
Bureau
Under
the
License
from
BIS
for
LARSEN
AND
TOUBRO
CONSTRUCTION
-
MANAPAKKAM,
CHENNAI
ON
17-03-2017
09:00:59
(123.63.24.35)
valid
upto31-12-2017
ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/nationalbuildingcode-240401165105-f4e9283c/85/NBC-National-Building-Code-volume-1-and-2-91-320.jpg)
![PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 45
SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION
Channels shall be rendered smooth and benchings shall
have slopes towards the channel.
4.5.10.4.6 Rungs
Rungs shall be provided in all manholes over 0.8 m in
depth and shall be of cast iron, or PVC encapsulated
or composite non-corrosive materials, and of suitable
dimensions, conforming to accepted standards
[9-2(14)]. These rungs may be set staggered in two
vertical rungs which may be 300 mm apart horizontally
as well as vertically and shall project a minimum of
100 mm beyond the finished surface if the manhole
wall. The top rung shall be 450 mm below the manhole
cover and the lowest not more than 300 mm above the
benching.
4.5.10.4.7 Manhole covers and frames
The size of manhole covers shall be such that there
shall be a clear opening of at least 500 mm in diameter
for manholes exceeding 0.90 m in depth. The manhole
covers and frames used shall conform to accepted
standards [9-2(15)].
The frame of manhole shall be firmly embedded to
concrete alignment and level in plain concrete on the
top of masonry.
4.5.10.5 Drop manhole
Where it is uneconomic or impracticable to arrange
the connection within 600 mm height above the invert
of the manholes, the connection shall be made by
constructing a vertical shaft outside the manhole
All dimensions in centimetres.
FIG. 9 DETAIL OF MANHOLE (DEPTH 2.5 m AND ABOVE)
Supplied
by
Book
Supply
Bureau
Under
the
License
from
BIS
for
LARSEN
AND
TOUBRO
CONSTRUCTION
-
MANAPAKKAM,
CHENNAI
ON
17-03-2017
09:00:59
(123.63.24.35)
valid
upto31-12-2017
ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/nationalbuildingcode-240401165105-f4e9283c/85/NBC-National-Building-Code-volume-1-and-2-93-320.jpg)
![46 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
chamber, as shown in Fig. 10. If the difference in level
between the incoming drain and the sewer does not
exceed 600 mm, and there is sufficient room in the
manhole, the connecting pipe may be directly brought
through the manhole wall and the fall accommodated
by constructing a ramp in the benching of the manhole.
For detailed information regarding manholes in
sewerage system, reference may be made to good
practice [9-2(16)].
All dimensions in centimetres.
NOTE — Wall thickness have been indicated in brick length to provide for use of modular bricks or traditional bricks.
In the figure, B = one brick length, 1.5 B = one an a half brick length, etc.
FIG. 10 DROP MANHOLE
Supplied
by
Book
Supply
Bureau
Under
the
License
from
BIS
for
LARSEN
AND
TOUBRO
CONSTRUCTION
-
MANAPAKKAM,
CHENNAI
ON
17-03-2017
09:00:59
(123.63.24.35)
valid
upto31-12-2017
ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/nationalbuildingcode-240401165105-f4e9283c/85/NBC-National-Building-Code-volume-1-and-2-94-320.jpg)
![PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 47
SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION
4.5.10.6 Manhole covers and recommended locations
Manhole covers were traditionally and presently
manufactured from concrete, steel fibre reinforced
concrete, cast iron and ductile iron or PVC materials
and these materials are used based on the load carrying
capacity and for the following type of applications:
a) Inspection chambers for sewerage;
b) Underground electrical cabling;
c) Telecom cabling;
d) Water, gas and petroleum installations; and
e) Beautification of gardens and landscapes.
Recommended locations conforming to load capacity
shall be as per accepted standard [9-2(15)].
4.5.11 Storm Water Drainage
4.5.11.1 General
The object of storm water drainage is to collect and
carry, the rainwater collected within the premises of
the building, for suitable disposal.
4.5.11.2 Design factors
Estimate of the quantity that reaches the storm water
drain (runoff) depends on the following factors:
a) Type of soil and its absorption capacity
determined by its soil group.
b) Ground slope and the time in which the area
is drained.
c) Intensity of the rainfall for a design period.
d) Duration of the rain/storm.
The runoff reaching the sewer may be given by the
expression:
Q = 10 C.i.A
where
Q = runoff, m3
/h;
C = coefficient of runoff;
i = intensity of rainfall, mm/h; and
A = area of the drainage district, hectares.
Coefficient of runoff for various surfaces may be taken
as:
Type of Surface Coefficient of Runoff
Concrete roof area 0.9
Paved podium areas and asphalted roads 0.8
Unpaved ground 0.3
Lawns and parks 0.15
4.5.11.2.1 Imperviousness
The soil conditions and the ground slope determine the
impermeability factor. Impermeability factor is the
proportion of the total rainfall received on the surface
which will be discharging into a storm water drain after
allowing for initial abstraction (in local pond and lakes),
ground absorption by evaporation, vegetation and other
losses. The net flow reaching the storm water drain is
called runoff.
The percentage of imperviousness of the drainage area
may be obtained from available data for a particular
area. In the absence of such data, the following figures
may serve as a guide:
Type of Area Imperviousness Factor
Percent
Commercial and industrial areas 70 - 90
Residential areas (high density) 60 - 75
Residential areas (low density) 35 - 60
Parks and underdeveloped areas 10 - 20
4.5.11.2.2 Terrain modelling
Areas planned for urbanization from agricultural land,
forest or low grade land for example, low lying areas
prone to flooding, marshy or abandoned quarries, etc,
need detailed and careful consideration with respect to
its drainage. A detailed contour survey shall be carried
out not only with respect to the site but also the
surrounding areas to verify the quantity/area
contributing runoff, presence of any low lying and
natural water body acting as holding pond or any natural
drain passing through the area and beyond whose filling
up or diversion may cause water logging problem on
the site or to the surrounding areas.
The planning of the area should ensure that,
a) all areas become self draining by gravity with
respect to the high flood level of the area or
the drainage channels passing, whichever is
higher;
b) as far as possible, natural drainage pattern with
respect to the whole area be maintained except
when low lying areas need to be filled up for
grading purposes;
c) the drainage in the area shall be planned in
accordance with the natural slopes; and
d) levels of the main highway or road connecting
to the property shall be determined to ensure
proper drainage and protection of the site.
The formation levels of the entire area shall be prepared
to determine proposed formation levels by preparing a
terrain model which will show the proposed site
contours, ground and road levels and connections to
all services including storm water disposal system.
4.5.11.2.3 Rainfall intensity
The intensity of rainfall is the amount of rain falling in
Supplied
by
Book
Supply
Bureau
Under
the
License
from
BIS
for
LARSEN
AND
TOUBRO
CONSTRUCTION
-
MANAPAKKAM,
CHENNAI
ON
17-03-2017
09:00:59
(123.63.24.35)
valid
upto31-12-2017
ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/nationalbuildingcode-240401165105-f4e9283c/85/NBC-National-Building-Code-volume-1-and-2-95-320.jpg)
![50 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
etc, with a low population base. Two major systems
that are ideal for urban and semi-urban developed areas
are:
a) Artificial ground water recharge, and
b) Roof top rainwater harvesting.
NOTE — Type and number of recharge pits and roof top
rainwater harvesting capacity shall be provided as per the local/
state bye-laws.
4.5.12.2 Artificial ground water recharge
With increase in the impermeable surfaces in modern
built up areas, there is gross reduction in the original
catchment area. This prevents the natural percolation
that would have recharged the area in the normal course
if the ground was in its natural condition, for example
a farm, open ground, forest, etc. This results in a large
quantity of water, normally percolating into the ground,
running off to the natural drains and into the rivers,
causing increased runoff and flooding of downstream
areas.
It is therefore essential to catch the runoff and use it
for augmentation of ground water reservoir by
modifying the natural movement of surface water by
recharging it by artificial means, for example
construction of recharge structures (see Fig. 11). The
main objectives achieved may be:
a) Enhancement of sustainable yield in areas
where over development and depletion of the
aquifers.
b) Conservation and storage of excess surface
water in the aquifers.
c) Improve the quality of the existing ground
water through dilution.
d) Remove bacteriological and suspended
impurities during the surface water transition
within the subsoil.
e) Maintain the natural balance of the ground
water and its usage as the rainwater is a
renewable supply source. A well managed
and controlled tapping of the aquifers will
provide constant, dependable and safe water
supply.
In planning and designing the ground water recharge
structures, following should be taken into
consideration:
1) Annual rainfall (for estimating approximately
rainwater recharge per year).
2) Peak intensity and duration of each storm.
3) Type of soil and subsoil conditions and their
permeability factor.
4) Ground slopes and run off which cannot be
caught.
5) Location of recharge structures and its
overflow outfall.
6) Rainwater measuring devices for finding the
flow of water in the system.
For artificial recharge to ground water code for
guidelines for artificial recharge to ground water
[9-2(17)] may be referred.
NOTE — Rainwater harvesting with underground recharging
will depend from region to region as per the climatic,
topography, soil conditions and data about intensity of rainfall
and retention time for calculating the capacity of recharge
wells to be obtained from reference documents from the
Authority.
4.5.12.3 Roof top rainwater harvesting
4.5.12.3.1 Harvesting in regular rainfall areas
In areas having rainfall over a large period in a year,
for example in hilly areas, coastal regions, etc constant
and regular rainfall can be usefully harvested and
stored in suitable water tanks. Water shall be collected
through roof gutters and down take pipes. Provision
should be made to divert the 1st rainfall after a dry
spell so that ant dust, soot and leaves, etc, are drained
away before the water is collected into the water tank.
The capacity of the water tank should be enough for
storing water required for consumption between two
dry spells. The water tank shall be located in a well
protected area and shall not be exposed to any hazards
of water contamination from any other sources. The
water shall be chlorinated using chlorine tablets or
solution to maintain a residual chlorine of
approximately 1 mg/l. The tank shall have an overflow
leading to natural water courses or to any additional
tanks (see Table 24).
4.5.12.3.2 Harvesting in limited rainfall areas
In areas with the rainfall limited during the monsoon
period (usually from 15-90 days), roof top rainwater
can be stored and used for non-potable purposes, after
proper treatment, in the premises itself as mentioned
above; excess water, if any, is best used for recharging
the ground water. For individual properties and plots
the roof top rainwater can be diverted to underground
or above ground water storage tank(s), pretreated,
stored and used for non-potable purposes. Excess water,
if any, may be discharged to existing open or abandoned
tube wells. In a well-planned building complex, a
system should be laid out so that the runoff is collected
in underground or above ground water storage tank(s),
pretreated, stored, and used for non-potable purposes.
Excess water, if any, shall be discharged in bore-wells
as per designs specified by the Central Ground Water
Board, Government of India.
For roof top rainwater harvesting, reference may be
made to good practice [9-2(18)].
Supplied
by
Book
Supply
Bureau
Under
the
License
from
BIS
for
LARSEN
AND
TOUBRO
CONSTRUCTION
-
MANAPAKKAM,
CHENNAI
ON
17-03-2017
09:00:59
(123.63.24.35)
valid
upto31-12-2017
ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/nationalbuildingcode-240401165105-f4e9283c/85/NBC-National-Building-Code-volume-1-and-2-98-320.jpg)
![56 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
expected are required to be given adequate insulation.
Where feasible, sewers shall be so located that the
trench line is not in shadow, when the sun is shining.
Concrete, cast iron and stoneware pipes conduct heat
relatively rapidly and as such should be adequately
insulated.
4.5.14.5.2 Septic tanks
Septic tanks can function only when it can be ensured
that the contents inside these do not freeze at low
temperature. For this purpose, the septic tanks shall be
located well below the frost line. The location of
manhole openings shall be marked by staves. Fencing
around the septic tanks shall be provided for
discouraging traffic over them. As the rate of biological
activity is reduced by 50 percent for every 10°C fall in
temperature, the capacity of septic tanks shall be
increased by 100 percent for operation at 10°C over that
for operation at 20°C.
The construction of septic tanks is preferred in rural
and fringe areas of suburban and isolated buildings
where underground system may neither be feasible nor
economical. Septic tanks are only recommended for
small communities and institutions whose contributory
population does not exceed 300.
For other details, see good practice [9-2(9)].
4.5.14.5.3 Seepage pits
Seepage pits can function only when the soil and subsoil
conditions are favourable. Frozen soil extending to a
great depth would preclude the use of such disposal
devices in view of the lower water absorption capacity.
The discharge of effluent should be made below the
frost line.
4.5.14.5.4 Sewage treatment plants
Suitable design modifications for sedimentation,
chemical and biological processes shall be applied to
sewage treatment plants for satisfactory functioning
(see also 4.13).
NOTE — Lavatories and bathrooms shall be kept heated to
avoid freezing of water inside traps and flushing cisterns.
4.6 Construction Relating to Conveyance of
Sanitary Wastes
4.6.1 Excavation
4.6.1.1 General
The safety precautions as given in Part 7 ‘Construction
Management, Practices and Safety’ of the Code shall
be ensured.
4.6.1.2 Turf, topsoil or other surface material shall be
set aside, turf being carefully rolled and stacked for
use in reinstatement. All suitable broken surface
material and hard-core shall be set on one side for use
in subsequent reinstatement.
4.6.1.3 Excavated material shall be stacked sufficiently
away from the edge of the trench and the size of the
spoil bank shall not be allowed to become such as to
endanger the stability of the excavation. Spoil may be
carried away and used for filling the trench behind the
work.
4.6.1.4 Excavation shall proceed to within about 75 mm
of the finished formation level. This final 75 mm is to
be trimmed and removed as a separate operation
immediately prior to the laying of the pipes or their
foundations.
4.6.1.5 Unless specified otherwise by the Authority,
the width at bottom of trenches for pipes of different
diameters laid at different depths shall be as given
below:
a) For all diameters, up to an average depth of
1 200 mm,
Width of trench, in mm = Diameter of pipe +
300 mm;
b) For all diameters for depths above 1 200 mm,
Width of trench, in mm = Diameter of pipe +
400 mm; and
c) Notwithstanding (a) and (b), the total width
of trench at the top should not be less than
750 mm for depths exceeding 900 mm.
4.6.1.6 Excavation in roads shall be so arranged, in
agreement with the proper authority, as to cause the
minimum obstruction to traffic. The methods to be
adopted shall depend on local circumstances.
4.6.1.7 All pipes, ducts, cables, mains or other services
exposed in the trench shall be effectively supported by
timber and/or chain or rope-slings.
4.6.1.8 All drainage sumps shall be sunk clear of the
work outside the trench or at the sides of manholes.
After the completion of the work, any pipes or drains
leading to such sumps or temporary subsoil drains under
permanent work shall be filled in properly with sand
and consolidated.
4.6.2 Laying of Pipes
Laying of pipes shall be done in accordance with good
practice [9-2(19)].
4.6.3 Jointing
All soil pipes, waste pipes, vent pipes and other such
pipes above ground shall be gas-tight. All sewers and
drains laid below the ground shall be water-tight.
Jointing shall be done in accordance with good practice
[9-2(19)].
Supplied
by
Book
Supply
Bureau
Under
the
License
from
BIS
for
LARSEN
AND
TOUBRO
CONSTRUCTION
-
MANAPAKKAM,
CHENNAI
ON
17-03-2017
09:00:59
(123.63.24.35)
valid
upto31-12-2017
ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/nationalbuildingcode-240401165105-f4e9283c/85/NBC-National-Building-Code-volume-1-and-2-104-320.jpg)
![58 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
4.6.5 Connection to Existing Sewers
The connection to an existing sewer shall, as far as
possible, be done at the manholes. Where it is
unavoidable to make connection in between two
manholes, the work of breaking into the existing sewer
and forming the connection shall be carried out by the
Authority or under its supervision.
4.6.5.1 Breaking into the sewer shall be effected by
the cautious enlargement of a small hole and every
precaution shall be taken to prevent any material from
entering the sewer. No connection shall be formed in
such a way as to constitute a projection into the sewer
or to cause any diminution in its effective size.
4.6.6 Back Filling
4.6.6.1 Filling of the trench shall not be commenced
until the length of pipes therein has been tested and
passed (see 4.10.2).
4.6.6.2 All timber which may be withdrawn with safety
shall be removed as filling proceeds.
4.6.6.3 Where the pipes are unprotected by concrete
haunching, the first operation in filling shall be carefully
done to hand-pack and tamp selected fine material
around the lower half of the pipes so as to buttress them
to the sides of the trench.
4.6.6.4 The filling shall then be continued to 150 mm
over the top of the pipe using selected fine hand-packed
material, watered and rammed on both sides of the pipe
with a wooden rammer. On no account shall material
be tipped into the trench until the first 150 mm of filling
has been completed. The process of filling and tamping
shall proceed evenly so as to maintain an equal pressure
on both sides of the pipeline.
4.6.6.5 Filling shall be continued in layers not
exceeding 150 mm in thickness, each layer being
watered and well rammed.
4.6.6.6 In roads, surface materials previously excavated
shallbereplacedasthetoplayerofthefilling,consolidated
and maintained satisfactorily till the permanent
reinstatement of the surface is made by the Authority.
4.6.6.7 In gardens, the top soil and turf, if any, shall be
carefully replaced.
4.7 Construction Relating to Conveyance of Rain
or Storm Water
4.7.1 Roof Gutters
Roof gutters shall be of any material of suitable
thickness. All junctions and joints shall be water-tight.
4.7.2 RainWater Pipes
Rainwater pipes shall conform to the accepted standards
[9-2(20)].
4.7.3 Subsoil Drain Pipes
4.7.3.1 Field drain pipes
Suitable pipes for this purpose are plain cylindrical
glazed water pipes, or concrete porous pipes, though
the latter may prove unsuitable where subsoil water
carries sulphates or is acidic owing to the presence of
peat. Trenches for these pipes need be just wide enough
at the bottom to permit laying the pipes, which shall be
laid with open joints to proper lines and gradients.
It is advisable to cover the pipes with clinker free from
fine ash, brick ballast or other suitable rubble, or a layer
of inverted turf, brush-wood or straw before refilling the
trench, in order to prevent the infiltration of silt through
the open joints. Where the subsoil drain is also to serve
the purpose of collecting surface water, the rubble shall
be carried up to a suitable level and when required for a
lawn or playing field, the remainder of the trench shall
be filled with pervious top soil. When refilling the
trenches, care shall be taken to prevent displacement of
pipes in line of levels. When they pass near trees or
through hedges, socket pipes with cement or bitumen
joints shall be used to prevent penetration by roots.
4.7.3.2 French drain
A shallow trench is excavated, the bottom neatly
trimmed to the gradient and the trench filled with broken
stone, gravel or clinker, coarse at the bottom and finer
towards the top.
4.8 Selection and Installation of Sanitary Appliances
Selection, installation and maintenance of sanitary
appliances shall be done in accordance with good
practice [9-2(21)].
4.9 Refuse Chute System
The refuse chute system provided shall be in accordance
with Part 9 ‘Plumbing Services, Section 3 Solid Waste
Management’ of the Code.
4.10 Inspection and Testing
4.10.1 Inspection
4.10.1.1 All sanitary appliances and fitments shall be
carefully examined for defects before they are installed
and also on the completion of the work.
4.10.1.2 Pipes are liable to get damaged in transit and,
not withstanding tests that may have been made before
despatch, each pipe shall be carefully examined on
arrival on the site. Preferably, each pipe shall be rung
with a hammer or mallet and those that do not ring true
and clear shall be rejected. Sound pipes shall be
carefully stored to prevent damage. Any defective pipes
shall be segregated, marked in a conspicuous manner
and their use in the works prevented.
Supplied
by
Book
Supply
Bureau
Under
the
License
from
BIS
for
LARSEN
AND
TOUBRO
CONSTRUCTION
-
MANAPAKKAM,
CHENNAI
ON
17-03-2017
09:00:59
(123.63.24.35)
valid
upto31-12-2017
ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/nationalbuildingcode-240401165105-f4e9283c/85/NBC-National-Building-Code-volume-1-and-2-106-320.jpg)
![PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 61
SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION
be located in basement floors and leading the sewage
to onsite treatment plants. Submersible centrifugal
pumps are used for pumping the sewage. The sump
capacity depends on effective holding capacity
considering the flow from drainage fixtures. Usually,
retention period of 15 min is adopted. The size of
sump depends on the availability of space. Minimum
size of discharge pipe may be 80 mm with a velocity
of 1 m/s and pumps are sized for 100 percent design
flow.
NOTE — For other details reference to good practice [9-2(12)]
shall be made.
4.13 Sewage Treatment Systems
4.13.1 Sewage treatment is the process of removing
contaminants from waste water, primarily from
household sewage. It includes physical, chemical and
biological processes to remove these contaminants and
produce environmentally safe treated waste water
(or treated effluent).
The by-product of sewage treatment is usually a
semisolid waste or slurry, called sewage sludge, that
has to undergo further treatment before being suitable
for disposal or further application (see Fig. 17).
4.13.2 The main objective of treating waste water is to
stabilize decomposable organic matter present in the
sewage so as to produce treated effluent and sludge,
which can be disposed of in the environment without
causing health hazards or nuisance.
The microbial population in treatment process can be
cultured using the following systems:
a) Suspended growth system — In this system,
microorganisms remain in suspension and
their concentration is related to mixed liquor
suspended solids (MLSS).
b) Attached growth system — In this system,
microorganisms are developed over mobile or
immobile solid covered in biomass (slime).
c) Combined growth system — In this system,
both systems are used to attain the shock
loads.
Suspended growth system is generally proposed due
to its merits and excellent performance.
4.13.3 Technologies
Following technologies for sewage treatment shall be
considered based on the requirement:
a) Extended aeration with activated sludge
process (EAASP) — Activated sludge process
is the biological process by which non-
settleable substances occurring in dissolved
and colloidal forms are converted into
settleable sludge which is removed from the
liquid carrier (water).
This process is well suitable for completely
populated community and does not require
skilled labour for handling the plant. It is time
tested and requires more number of units to
achieve biological oxygen demand (BOD) less
than 10 ppm, like coagulants required for
better quality.
b) Sequential batch reactor (SBR) — It is an
activated sludge process designed to operate
under non-steady state conditions. An SBR
operates in a true batch mode with aeration
and sludge settlement both occurring in the
same tank. There is a degree of flexibility
associated with working in a time rather than
in a space sequence.
Plant for this process requires less space due
to batch process, well suitable for modular
growth. It can handle smallest flows and the
desired quality can be achieved without
coagulants. It requires good quality of
decanters, and skilled labour as the process is
timer-based automation.
c) Membrane bio-reactor (MBR) — It is a
continuous process of activated sludge
treatment, but solids separation is done
through pressurised system or through media.
As there is physical barrier for solid
separation, quality of treatment is good.
It is suitable for any type of growth pattern
and can handle smaller flows. It requires less
space, and skilled labours to handle.
d) Rotating bio-bed reactor (RBBR) — It is
combined growth process. Bacteria are
allowed to grow on media, which is exposed
to atmospheric air. It is also known as rotating
biological contactor (RBC).
It is suitable for smaller capacities and does
not require skilled labour to handle. The
quality of treatment is good.
e) Fluidized bio-bed reactor (FBBR) — In this
process, cells are immobilized in small
particles which move with the fluid. The small
particles create a large surface area for cells
to stick and enable a high rate of transfer of
oxygen and nutrients to the cells. It is also
known as moving bed bio reactor (MBBR). It
is suitable for all type of communities, does
not require skilled labour and requires less
space. It can be installed for all capacities and
the quality of treatment is good.
f) Submerged aerobic fixed film reactor
(SAFF) — It is a combined growth process in
Supplied
by
Book
Supply
Bureau
Under
the
License
from
BIS
for
LARSEN
AND
TOUBRO
CONSTRUCTION
-
MANAPAKKAM,
CHENNAI
ON
17-03-2017
09:00:59
(123.63.24.35)
valid
upto31-12-2017
ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/nationalbuildingcode-240401165105-f4e9283c/85/NBC-National-Building-Code-volume-1-and-2-109-320.jpg)
![PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 5
SECTION 3 SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT
emissions, slope instability and erosion.
2.11 Leachate — Liquid that seeps through solid
wastes or other medium and has extracts of dissolved
or suspended material from it.
2.12 Municipal Authority — Municipal Corporation,
Municipality, Nagar Palika, Nagar Nigam, Nagar
Panchayat, Municipal Council including notified area
committee (NAC) or any other local body constituted
under the relevant statutes and, where the management
and handling of municipal solid waste is entrusted to
such agency.
2.13 Municipal Solid Waste — Commercial and
residential wastes generated in municipal or notified
areas in either solid or semi-solid form, excluding
industrial hazardous wastes and construction and
demolition waste but including treated bio-medical
wastes.
2.14 Operator of a Facility — A person who owns or
operates a facility for collection, segregation, storage,
transportation, processing and disposal of municipal
solid wastes and also includes any other agency
appointed as such by the municipal authority for the
management and handling of municipal solid wastes
in the respective areas.
2.15 Pelletization — A process whereby pellet are
prepared which are small cubes or cylindrical pieces
made out of solid wastes and includes fuel pellets which
are also referred as refuse derived fuel.
2.16 Processing — The process by which solid wastes
are transformed into new or recycled products.
2.17 Recycling — The process of transforming
segregated solid wastes into raw materials for producing
new products, which may or may not be similar to the
original products.
2.18 Segregation — To separate the municipal solid
wastes into the groups of organic, inorganic, recyclables
and hazardous wastes.
2.19 Storage — The temporary containment of
municipal solid wastes in a manner so as to prevent
littering, attraction to vectors, stray animals and
excessive foul odour.
2.20 Transportation — Conveyance of municipal solid
wastes from place to place hygienically through
1 SCOPE
This Code (Part 9/Section 3) covers the solid waste
management systems, assessment of per capita solid
waste quantities and treatment of solid waste within
the building, building complexes and their built
environments.
2 TERMINOLOGY
For the purpose of this Section, the following definitions
shall apply, and for other terms those given in the
accepted standard [9-3(1)] shall apply.
2.1 Anaerobic Digestion — A controlled process
involving microbial decomposition of organic matter
in the absence of oxygen.
2.2 Authorization — The consent given by the State
Pollution Control Board or Pollution Control
Committee, as the case may be, to the operator of a
facility.
2.3 Biodegradable Substance — A substance that can
be degraded by microorganisms into simpler stable
compounds.
2.4 Biomethanation — A process which entails
enzymatic decomposition of the organic matter by
microbial action to produce methane rich biogas.
2.5 Collection — Lifting and removal of solid wastes
from collection points or any other location.
2.6 Composting — A controlled process involving
microbial decomposition of organic matter.
2.7 Construction and Demolition Waste — Wastes
from building materials debris and rubble resulting from
construction, re-modelling, repair and demolition
operation.
2.8 Disposal — Final disposal of municipal solid wastes
in accordance with the specified measures to prevent
contamination of groundwater, surface water and
ambient air quality.
2.9 Generator of Wastes — Persons or establishments
generating municipal solid wastes.
2.10 Landfilling — Disposal of residual solid wastes
on land in a facility designed with protective measures
against pollution of groundwater, surface water and air
fugitive dust, wind-blown litter, bad odour, fire hazard,
bird menace, pests or rodents, greenhouse gas
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES
(INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT)
Section 3 Solid Waste Management
Supplied
by
Book
Supply
Bureau
Under
the
License
from
BIS
for
LARSEN
AND
TOUBRO
CONSTRUCTION
-
MANAPAKKAM,
CHENNAI
ON
17-03-2017
09:00:59
(123.63.24.35)
valid
upto31-12-2017
ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/nationalbuildingcode-240401165105-f4e9283c/85/NBC-National-Building-Code-volume-1-and-2-135-320.jpg)
![PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 9
SECTION 3 SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT
a) Sanitation system for internal cleaning of
chutes, with sprinklers at every floor intake
level, with disinfectant cleaning, which may
preferably be automatic in operation;
b) Exhaust system with 25 to 35 air changes per
hour;
c) Discharge end fire resistant door;
d) Chute may be of masonry, R.C.C. pipe,
asbestos cement pipe or suitable non-corrosive
material, preferably stainless steel. It should
be rigid with smooth internal finish, high
ductility and alkali/acid resistant properties
{see also good practice [9-3(2)]};
e) Fire rating shall comply with 3.4.8.3 of Part 4
‘Fire and Life Safety’ of the Code;
f) Fire sprinklers shall be provided inside chute;
g) Vent shall be installed at roof level to remove
foul smell and gases generated;
h) Chute should discharge to trolley directly;
j) Necessary automation of the system may be
planned to avoid malfunction by manual
operation; and
k) All care shall be taken for ensuring
accessibility to the chute for persons with
disabilities. The opening of the chute shall not
be higher than 700 mm and there shall be a
clear space of minimum 1 500 mm ×
1 500 mm in front of the chute opening to gain
easy access even for persons using
wheelchairs. There may be high colour
contrast provided around the chute opening
to make it easy to identify it. The flooring in
front of the chute opening may be texturally
highly different from the rest of the floor.
4.3.3 Refuse Collection Chamber
The collection chamber may be located in ground floor
or basement level, provided appropriate arrangement
is made for drainage of the collection pit by gravity
flow to ensure its dryness, an appropriate ramp access
is provided for convenient removal of garbage from
the collection pit, and satisfactory ventilation is
provided for escape of gas and odour.
The floor of the chamber shall be provided with
drainage through a 100 mm diameter trap and screen
to prevent any solid matters flowing into the drain and
the drain shall be connected to the sewer line. The floor
shall be finished with smooth hard surface for
convenient cleaning.
The height of the collection chamber and vertical
clearance under the bottom level of garbage chute shall
be such that the garbage trolley can be conveniently
placed.
The collection chamber shall be provided with
appropriate shutter to prevent access of scavenging
animals like cattle, dogs, cats and rats.
4.3.4 Refuse Collection Room
The refuse collection room should be planned in ground
or basement level with appropriate ventilation and
proper drainage. The room should have access for
vehicle or trolley transfer of garbage.
4.3.5 See also accepted standards [9-3(3)].
4.4 Dumb-Waiter or Service Lift
In high rise buildings with more than 5 storeys,
electrically operated dumb-waiters may be used for
carrying domestic garbage in packets or closed
containers. For handling of garbage by dumb-waiters
in a building, a garbage chamber shall have to be
provided either at ground floor or basement level and
the provisions of garbage collection chamber for chute
as given in 4.3 shall apply.
5 ASSESSMENT OF PER CAPITA WASTE
QUANTITY
5.1 For purposes of this Section, the following
municipal refuse generation rates are recommended:
a) Residential refuse : 0.3 to 0.6 kg/capita/day
b) Commercial refuse : 0.1 to 0.2 kg/capita/day
c) Street sweepings : 0.05 to 0.2 kg/capita/
day
d) Institutional refuse : 0.05 to 0.2 kg/capita/
day
Out of the total solid waste generated, 40 percent may
be taken as organic waste and 60 percent as inorganic
waste. The knowledge of chemical characteristics of
waste is important for selecting and designing the waste
processing and disposal facilities.
5.2 These generation rates are subject to considerable
site-specific factors and are required to be supported
by field data. The waste contains a high percentage of
ash and fine earth. The calorific value of Indian solid
waste varies between 800 and 1 000 kcal/kg and the
density varies between 300 and 500 kg/m3
.
5.3 Other than municipal solid waste, the following
types of waste may also be generated in urban centers:
a) Industrial waste — Hazardous and non-
hazardous waste from industrial areas within
municipal limits.
b) Bio-medical waste — Waste from hospitals,
slaughter houses, etc.
c) Thermal power plant waste — Fly ash from
coal-based electricity generating plant within
municipal limits.
Supplied
by
Book
Supply
Bureau
Under
the
License
from
BIS
for
LARSEN
AND
TOUBRO
CONSTRUCTION
-
MANAPAKKAM,
CHENNAI
ON
17-03-2017
09:00:59
(123.63.24.35)
valid
upto31-12-2017
ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/nationalbuildingcode-240401165105-f4e9283c/85/NBC-National-Building-Code-volume-1-and-2-139-320.jpg)
![PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 11
SECTION 3 SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT
Sorted garbage free from inert and toxic matters shall
be applied in the composting pit in layers of 75 mm
and spread, and covered with a layer of 75 mm thick
dry leaves, followed by sprinkling of water.
The compost may be removed from the bottom of the
compost pit after intervals of 3 to 6 months. The
compost so made may be used in appropriate
horticultural and related applications.
See also accepted standard [9-3(4)] for manure grade
municipal solid waste compost.
6.3 Thermal Processes
Thermal treatment involves conversion of waste into
gaseous, liquid and solid conversion products with
concurrent or subsequent release of heat energy.
Three types of systems can be adopted, namely:
a) Combustion systems (Incinerators) — Thermal
processing with excess amounts of air.
b ) Pyrolysis systems — Thermal processing in
complete absence of oxygen (low
temperature).
c) Gasification systems — Thermal processing
with less amount of air (high temperature).
6.4 Land Filling
6.4.1 Disposal of waste on lands identified for the
purpose is typical of this method of waste disposal.
The depth of filling depends upon the site topography
and location and varies from deep to shallow filling. A
municipal solid waste landfill plant is an engineered
facility used for disposal of solid waste. Landfills in
which municipal waste is placed are designated as
‘MSW landfills’. The main considerations in respect
of landfill sites are:
a) Specifications for landfill sites,
b) Site selection,
c) Facilities at site, and
d) Specification of land filling.
6.4.2 Improper landfill generally impacts the
environment in the following ways:
a) Groundwater contamination by the leachate
generated by the waste dump;
b) Surface water contamination by the run-off
from the waste dump;
c) Bad odour, pests, rodents and wind-blown
litter in and around the waste dump;
d) Generation of inflammable gas (for example,
methane) within the waste dump;
e) Bird menace above the waste dump which
affects flight of aircraft;
f) Fires within the waste dump;
g) Erosion and stability problems relating to
slopes of the waste dump;
h) Epidemics through stray animals;
j) Acidity to surrounding soil; and
k) Release of greenhouse gas.
6.5 Some recycling/treatment methods for food waste
are given in Annex B for guidance.
6.6 See also accepted standards [9-3(5)] for solid waste
management, and for analysis and testing of solid
wastes.
6.7 Other/special wastes shall be dealt with in
accordance with the statutory provisions in respect of
the same (see 3.4).
Supplied
by
Book
Supply
Bureau
Under
the
License
from
BIS
for
LARSEN
AND
TOUBRO
CONSTRUCTION
-
MANAPAKKAM,
CHENNAI
ON
17-03-2017
09:00:59
(123.63.24.35)
valid
upto31-12-2017
ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/nationalbuildingcode-240401165105-f4e9283c/85/NBC-National-Building-Code-volume-1-and-2-141-320.jpg)
![PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — SECTION 4 GAS SUPPLY 7
d) If any condition exists which threatens
interruption of gas supply which may cause
burner outage or otherwise prove dangerous.
7.2 It shall be the duty of the installing agency when
the gas supply is to be turned off to notify all affected
consumers.
7.3 Before turning off the gas at the meter, for the
purpose of installation, repair, replacement or
maintenance of piping or appliance, all burner and pilot
valves on the premises supplied with gas through the
meter shall be turned off and the meter test hand
observed for a sufficient length of time to ascertain that
there is no gas passing through the meter. Where there
is more than one meter on the premises, precaution shall
be exercised to ensure that the concerned meter is turned
off.
8 INSTALLATION OF GAS PIPES
8.1 Installation, repair and replacement of gas piping
or appliances shall be performed only by a qualified
installing agency.
8.2 Piping
8.2.1 Piping shall be of wrought iron, steel, copper,
stainless steel or cast iron when the gas pressure is less
than 7 kN/m2
; with higher gas pressure use of cast iron
shall be prohibited.
8.2.1.1 SS 316/304/321 and flexible PE coated flexible
pipe in rolls shall be permitted in low pressure system
provided the pipe meets the required standard, to avoid
the bends, fittings and leakages from the joint which
are potential leakage points. Also, reference may be
made to accepted standard [9-4(1)]. Heavy rubber
flexible tube shall be permitted only as direct
connection to burner from appliance valve.
8.2.1.2 For details regarding medical gas pipeline
systems, a reference may be made to good practice
[9-4(2)].
8.2.2 Size of Gas Piping
Gas piping shall be of such size and so installed as to
provide supply of gas sufficient to meet the maximum
demand without undue loss of pressure between the
meter or service regulator when a meter is not provided,
and the appliance(s).
8.2.2.1 The size of gas piping depends upon the
following factors:
a) Allowable loss in pressure from meter or
service regulator, when a meter is not
provided, to appliance;
b) Maximum consumption to be provided;
c) Length of piping and number of fittings; and
d) Specific gravity of gas.
8.2.2.2 No gas pipe smaller than 8 mm shall be used.
8.2.3 As far as possible, straight lengths of piping should
be used. Where there are bends in the pipe line, these
should have a radius of at least five times the diameter
of the pipe.
8.2.4 For any thread joint proper sealant shall be used
on male threads only.
8.3 The gas piping shall be of the colour stipulated by
explosive authority to distinguish it from other piping
and the piping shall be painted silver grey with red band
of 150 mm width. The gas pipeline shall be painted
canary yellow in case of natural gas.
8.4 Piping Underground
8.4.1 Protection of Piping
Piping shall be buried to a minimum depth of 1 m or
covered in a manner so as to protect the piping from
physical damage.
8.4.2 Protection Against Corrosion
Generally all the piping within the premises where it
has to run on the wall shall be exposed and should not
be in contact with wall to ensure that no corrosion takes
place. Epoxy sealant or polyethylene conduit shall be
used to ensure no contact of pipe with the wall in the
situation of pipe crossing the wall. Underground or
concealed gas pipeline in contact with earth or other
materials which may corrode the piping shall be
protected against corrosion by application of adequate
corrosion resistant coating backed up by cathodic
protection system.
8.5 The building shall not be weakened by the
installation of any gas piping.
8.6 Gas piping in building shall be supported with pipe
hooks, metal pipe straps, bonds or hangers suitable for
the size of piping and of adequate strength and quality
and located at proper intervals so that the piping may
not be moved accidentally from the installed position.
8.7 Pipe Entrance to Buildings
Where gas pipe enters a building through a wall or floor
of masonry or concrete, any gas piping or other piping
entering the walls or floors shall be suitably sealed
against the entrance of water/moisture or gas.
The openings or imperfection of fit or design are also
source of possible fire and smoke passing through them.
Fire stops shall be provided to fill the openings around
penetrating items such as gas pipes, etc, through the
wall or floor openings. Non-combustible sleeving may
Supplied
by
Book
Supply
Bureau
Under
the
License
from
BIS
for
LARSEN
AND
TOUBRO
CONSTRUCTION
-
MANAPAKKAM,
CHENNAI
ON
17-03-2017
09:00:59
(123.63.24.35)
valid
upto31-12-2017
ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/nationalbuildingcode-240401165105-f4e9283c/85/NBC-National-Building-Code-volume-1-and-2-153-320.jpg)
![PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — SECTION 4 GAS SUPPLY 9
10 LEAKAGE CHECK
10.1 Before turning gas under pressure into any piping,
all openings from which gas may escape shall be closed.
10.2 Checking for Gas Leakage
No matches, flame or other sources of ignition shall be
employed to check for gas leakage from meters, piping
or appliances. Checking for gas leakage with soap and
water solution is recommended.
10.3 Use of Lights
Artificial illumination used in connection with a search
of gas leakage shall be restricted to electric hand flash
lights (preferably of the safety type) or approved safety
lamps. In searching for leaks, electric switches should
not be operated. If electric lights are already turned
on, they should not be turned off.
10.4 Checking for Leakage with Meter
Immediately after turning gas into the piping, the system
shall be checked to ascertain that no gas is escaping.
This may be done by carefully watching the test dial of
the meter to determine whether gas is passing through
the meter. In no case should a leakage test be made
using a gas meter unless immediately prior to the test it
has been determined that the meter is in operating
condition.
10.5 Checking of Leakage Without Using a Meter
This may be done by attaching to an appliance, orifice
or a manometer or equivalent device and momentarily
turning on the gas supply and deserving the gauging
device for pressure drop with the gas supply shut-off.
No discernible drop in pressure shall occur during a
period of 3 min.
10.6 After piping has been checked, all gas piping shall
be fully purged. Piping shall not be purged into the
combustion chamber of an appliance. A suggested
method for purging the gas piping to an appliance is to
disconnect the pilot piping at the outlet of the pilot
valve.
10.7 After the gas piping has been effectively purged,
all appliances shall be purged and the pilots lighted.
10.8 In addition to the checking of gas leakage with
soap and water solution, a suitable gas detector is also
recommended for use.
11 USE OF LIQUEFIED PETROLEUM GAS
(LPG)
11.1 The cylinders used for the storage and
transportation of liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) shall
conform to accepted standards [9-4(3)] approved by
the statutory authority.
11.2 The handing, use, storage and transportation of
liquefied petroleum gas in cylinders exceeding 500 ml
water capacity shall be done in accordance with good
practice [9-4(4)].
11.3 LPG Cylinder Installation
The following recommendations apply to installation
in commercial, industrial, educational and institutional
premises.
11.3.1 General Recommendations
11.3.1.1 Those responsible for the installation of
cylinders, equipment and piping should understand the
characteristics of LPG and be trained in good practice
of handling, installing and maintaining installations.
11.3.1.2 The jointing compound used at different joints
in the system shall be decided by the Qualified Installing
Agency. Hemp and similar materials shall not be used
at the joint. In any joint in which the thread provides a
gastight seal, jointing compound shall be used only on
the male thread.
11.3.1.3 Fire extinguishers of dry powder type or carbon
dioxide type conforming to accepted standards [9-4(5)]
shall be provided in places where LPG cylinder
installations are situated and shall be located near such
installations. Two buckets filled with sand and two with
water shall also be installed nearby. The number, type
and size of the fire extinguishers shall be as follows:
Number Type Capacity
a) For installations
with LPG 40 kg
to 200 kg
2 Dry
powder
9 kg
b) For installations
with LPG more
than 200 kg and
up to 320 kg
3 Dry
powder
9 kg
c) For installations
with LPG more
than 320 kg and
up to 1 000 kg
4 Dry
powder
9 kg
NOTE — For electrical installations, one number CO 2 fire
extinguisher (4.5 kg capacity) shall be provided.
11.3.1.4 Liquefied petroleum gas shall not be
transferred from the cylinders in which it is received to
any other container.
11.3.2 Cylinder Location
11.3.2.1 Stationary installations
a) Stationary installation not exceeding 50 kg of
LPG may be installed indoors on any floor. It
is recommended to have a minimum floor area
of 5 m2
for such an installation.
Supplied
by
Book
Supply
Bureau
Under
the
License
from
BIS
for
LARSEN
AND
TOUBRO
CONSTRUCTION
-
MANAPAKKAM,
CHENNAI
ON
17-03-2017
09:00:59
(123.63.24.35)
valid
upto31-12-2017
ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/nationalbuildingcode-240401165105-f4e9283c/85/NBC-National-Building-Code-volume-1-and-2-155-320.jpg)
![10 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
b) Stationary installations each not exceeding
50 kg of LPG may be installed indoors on any
floor and within the same workspace provided
the minimum distance between two such
installations is 3 m, the proportion of such
installations to floor area is one installation
per 5 m2
and the aggregate quantity of gas of
all such installations does not exceed 200 kg.
c) Stationary installation not exceeding 100 kg
of LPG may be installed indoors on any floor
provided the floor area for such an installation
is not less than 12 m2
.
d) Stationary installations each not exceeding
100 kg of LPG may be installed indoors on
any floor and within the same workspace
provided the minimum distance between two
such installations is 3 m, the proportion of such
installations to floor area is one installation
per 12 m2
and the aggregate quantity of gas of
all such installations does not exceed 200 kg.
e) Stationary installation not exceeding 400 kg
of LPG may be installed indoors in an
enclosed section of a building or a room
reserved exclusively for this purpose and
ventilated at low level directly to the outside
air.
f) Stationary installations above 400 kg [200 kg
in case provision as in (e) is not possible] but
not exceeding 1 000 kg shall be installed
outdoors on ground floor level only. A
minimum distance of 3 m shall be maintained
between an installation and any building,
public place, roadways, and other
surroundings. The installation shall be
protected from excessive weathering by sun,
rain, etc, and from tampering by unauthorized
persons. A lean-to roof with expanded metal
on angle-iron framework on the sides is
considered suitable for this purpose. In any
case, adequate ventilation at ground level to
the outside air shall be provided.
g) If the storage per installation is more than
1 000 kg, installations in multiples of 1 000 kg
with manifold, safety devices, change over
mechanism may be provided with minimum
inter distance of 3 m from all sides. Total
number of such installations shall not exceed
4 including stand by installation. If more than
two installations are used, then number of
cylinders per installations should not
exceed 30.
h) For storage installations of 1 000 kg or
installations in multiple of 1 000 kg the
number of cylinders to be connected per
manifold shall not exceed 15 and for each
1 000 kg installation two such manifolds shall
be provided.
j) Cylinders shall be installed upright with the
valves uppermost.
k) Cylinder containing more than 20 kg of gas
shall not be located on floors above ground
level.
m) Cylinders shall be located on a concrete or
brick floor, preferably raised in case of
outdoor installations.
n) In order to prevent the hazardous collection
of gas, cylinders shall be placed at least 1 m
away from culverts, depressions, or openings
leading to below ground level compartment
and drains.
p) Cylinders which have safety relief valves or
similar devices incorporated in them shall be
so positioned so that if the relief device
operates, escaping gas is not hazardous.
q) Cylinder installation for commercial/
industrial/domestic/residential complexes, etc,
or at any public place shall meet the following
requirements:
1) For commercial and industrial cylinder
installation for any public places like
mall, buildings, industries, hotels, etc, the
sum total of all stationery installations
inside the building shall not exceed
400 kg of LPG in any case. In case sum
total of net weight of all the cylinders
installed indoors exceed 400 kg provision
for outdoor installations shall be made.
For installations where the sum total is
less than 400 kg of LPG provisions of (b)
to (e) shall apply.
2) For commercial and industrial cylinder
installation for any public place, industry,
etc, if the net weight of all the cylinders
installed is more than 400 kg but less than
1 000 kg, than the installation shall be
provided outdoors in line with (f). The
cylinder installation shall be provided in
a covered industrial shed but open from
all sides for proper ventilation. In case
the installed capacity increases more than
1 000 kg, than the installation shall be
provided in line with (g). Two separate
installations shall be provided and
distance between each of the installations
shall be minimum 3 m (this distance shall
be between the outer edge of the two
sheds).
3) For multi-storeyed buildings, flats
housing society the reticulated installation
of any capacity shall be provided at a safe
Supplied
by
Book
Supply
Bureau
Under
the
License
from
BIS
for
LARSEN
AND
TOUBRO
CONSTRUCTION
-
MANAPAKKAM,
CHENNAI
ON
17-03-2017
09:00:59
(123.63.24.35)
valid
upto31-12-2017
ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/nationalbuildingcode-240401165105-f4e9283c/85/NBC-National-Building-Code-volume-1-and-2-156-320.jpg)
![12 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
a) The sum total of capacity of the cylinders
connected to each manifold shall not exceed
100 kg of LPG. The total quantity of gas thus
installed in a workspace shall not exceed
200 kg.
b) If cylinders are mounted on a trolley, the
trolley shall be stable. Where necessary, the
cylinders shall be secured to prevent them
from falling.
c) The regulator shall be connected directly to
the cylinder valve or to a manifold which shall
be connected to the cylinder valves by means
of rigid connections to give adequate support
to the regulator. The only exception to this
requirement is where cylinders are mounted
on a trolley and the manifold is rigidly
supported on the trolley. In such a case flexible
or semi-flexible connections may be used
between the cylinder valves and the manifold
but not between the manifold and the
regulator.
d) Anytime the total quantity of gas at portable
installations shall be in proportion to the floor
area as specified in 11.3.2.1 (a) to (f).
e) At any time the provisions at 11.3.2.1 (a) to
(r) shall be ensured for all installations.
11.3.3 Cylinder Manifolds
11.3.3.1 All materials, fittings, etc, used in cylinder
manifold systems shall comply with the statutory
provisions or relevant Indian Standards. In absence of
any such provisions or Indian Standards, equivalent
international norms shall be followed.
11.3.3.2 The individual component parts of manifolds,
that is piping, fittings, pigtails, etc, which are subject
to cylinder pressure shall be capable of withstanding a
test pressure without bursting of 2.5 N/mm2
or one and
a half times the developed pressure at 65o
C, whichever
is more.
11.3.3.3 Where cylinder installations are made up with
service and reserve batteries of cylinders, suitable
change-over devices or valves shall be incorporated in
the manifold header to prevent undue escape of the
gas when cylinders are changed.
11.3.3.4 In case pressure regulators, manifold headers
and automatic change-over devices are connected to
cylinder by semi-flexible connectors, these shall be
rigidly supported. Copper tube pigtails are considered
to be semi-flexible for this purpose.
11.3.3.5 It is recommended that joints in manifold
headers which do not have to be broken in normal use
should be welded or brazed using a material which shall
have a melting point of at least 540°C.
11.3.3.6 All joints between manifold headers and
cylinder connectors shall be readily accessible.
11.3.3.7 All joints in the manifold should be welded
(except for valve fixation) and be easily accessible for
inspection/repairs, etc.
11.3.3.8 Each manifold arm shall be fabricated in such
a way that minimum joints are provided. Only seamless
pipes are recommended for use in manifolds. There
should be a minimum gap of 300 mm between the
manifold and valve protection ring of the LPG
cylinders.
11.3.3.9 The cylinders connected to a manifold shall
be safely spaced for easy and safe replacement of
cylinder when empty. A minimum distance of 400 mm
shall be maintained between two nipples provided on
the manifold for connecting the cylinders to the
manifold. In case the diameter of the cylinder is higher
than 400 mm then the distance between the two nipples
shall be diameter of the cylinder plus 100 mm.
11.3.3.10 A pressure gauge of 100 mm dial shall be
provided in the manifold to indicate the gas pressure
in the manifold. The pressure gauge shall be suitable
for a pressure range 0 to 1.0 N/mm2
.
11.3.4 Pressure Regulators
11.3.4.1 Pressure regulators and other devices used to
control the gas shall comply with the distributing
company’s stipulations and accepted standards [9-4(6)].
11.3.4.2 Pressure regulator fitted with a safety valve
shall be either,
a) installed in the open air; or
b) vented to the open by means of a metal vent
pipe connected to the safety valve outlet.
11.3.4.3 Care shall be taken that safety valve outlets
do not become choked with dust or other foreign matter.
11.3.4.4 If the regulator is fitted with a relief valve,
care should be taken in positioning the regulator to
avoid unnecessary hazards if the relief valve functions.
11.3.4.5 Pressure regulators and other control devices
shall be adequately supported.
11.3.5 Instructions to Consumers
Consumers shall be instructed by the distribution
company on the following, through appropriate written
instructions:
a) Operation of the whole system;
b) How to recognize gas leaks;
c) Action to be taken in case of leakage;
d) Action to be taken in case of fire; and
e) Action to be taken in case of damage to, or
failure of, any part of the installation.
Supplied
by
Book
Supply
Bureau
Under
the
License
from
BIS
for
LARSEN
AND
TOUBRO
CONSTRUCTION
-
MANAPAKKAM,
CHENNAI
ON
17-03-2017
09:00:59
(123.63.24.35)
valid
upto31-12-2017
ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/nationalbuildingcode-240401165105-f4e9283c/85/NBC-National-Building-Code-volume-1-and-2-158-320.jpg)
![PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — SECTION 4 GAS SUPPLY 13
11.3.6 For detailed information regarding installation
of LPG cylinders in commercial, industrial, educational
and institutional premises, reference may be made to
good practice [9-4(7)].
11.4 LPG Bulk Storage Installations
The following recommendations apply to LPG bulk
storage installations where storage tanks over 450 litre
water capacity are used at industrial, commercial and
domestic consumers’ premises.
The maximum capacity of an individual tank and group
of tanks at industrial, commercial and domestic
premises shall be as follows:
Premises Maximum Water
Capacity of an
Individual Tank
Maximum
Water Capacity
of Group of
Tanks
Industrial 130 000 260 000
Commercial 40 000 80 000
Domestic 20 000 80 000
11.4.1 Location and Spacing of Storage Tanks
11.4.1.1 Storage tanks shall be located outside the
buildings and shall not be installed one above the other.
11.4.1.2 Each individual tank shall be located with
respect to the nearest important building or group of
buildings or line of adjoining property which may be
built in accordance with Table 1. The distances given
refer to the horizontal distance in plan between the
nearest point of the storage tank and building/property
line.
11.4.1.3 In heavily populated or congested areas the
authority may determine the need for other reasonable
protective methods to be taken, such as provision of
fire walls, etc. If fire walls are to be provided, the
authority may determine the extent to which the safety
distances for above ground tanks may be reduced.
11.4.1.4 No LPG tank(s) shall be located within the
bunded enclosures of any petroleum installation. The
minimum distance of separation between LPG storage
tanks and any petroleum installation shall be as
prescribed under the Petroleum Rules, 1976 or as
specified in Table 1, whichever is more.
11.4.1.5 The number of storage tanks in one storage
installation shall not exceed six. In case there are more
than one storage installations, the safety distance
between two installations shall be the same as the
distance between the tanks and the property line in
accordance with Table 1.
11.4.2 Bunding
Since LPG is heavier than air, storage tank shall not be
enclosed within bund walls. The accumulation of
flammable liquid under LPG tanks shall be prevented
by suitably slopping the ground.
11.4.3 Protection
11.4.3.1 To prevent trespassing or tampering, the area
which includes tanks, direct fired vapourisers, pumping
equipment and loading and unloading facilities shall
be enclosed by an industrial type fence at least 2 m
high along the perimeter of the safety zone. Any fence
shall have at least two means of exit. Gates shall open
outwards and shall not be self-locking.
11.4.3.2 When damage to LPG systems from the LPG
tank lorry is a possibility, precautions against such
damage shall be taken.
Table 1 Minimum Safety Distances
(Clauses 11.4.1.2, 11.4.1.4 and 11.4.1.5)
Distance from Building/
Property Line
Distance between Tanks
Sl
No.
LPG Storage Water Capacity of
Individual Tank
Above
Ground
m
Under Ground
m
Above
Ground
m
Under
Ground
m
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
i) Up to 2 000 5 5 1 1.5
ii) Above 2 000 and up to 10 000 10 7.5 1 1.5
iii) Above 10 000 and up to 20 000 15 10 1.5 1.5
iv) Above 20 000 and up to 40 000 adjacent 20 15 2 0.25 × diameter of
vessel or 1.5 m (Min)
v) Above 40 000 and above adjacent 30 15 2 0.25 × diameter of vessel or
1.5 m (Min)
NOTE — If the aggregate water capacity of a multi-tank installation is 40 000 litre or greater, the above minimum safety distances shall
apply to the aggregate storage capacity rather than the capacity per individual storage tank.
l l
l
Supplied
by
Book
Supply
Bureau
Under
the
License
from
BIS
for
LARSEN
AND
TOUBRO
CONSTRUCTION
-
MANAPAKKAM,
CHENNAI
ON
17-03-2017
09:00:59
(123.63.24.35)
valid
upto31-12-2017
ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/nationalbuildingcode-240401165105-f4e9283c/85/NBC-National-Building-Code-volume-1-and-2-159-320.jpg)
![14 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
11.4.3.3 Underground tanks shall be protected from
above ground loading by providing a suitable curb to
prevent a possible accidental damage to the tank and
its fittings by LPG tank lorry.
11.4.4 Grass and Weed Removal
Road ignitable material, such as weeds, long grass or
any combustible material shall be removed from an area
within 3 m from the shell of any LPG tank of up
to 2 000 litre water capacity, and within 6 m from the
shell of larger tanks. If weed killers are used, chemicals
which are a potential source of fire hazard shall not be
selected for this purpose.
11.4.5 Warning Signs
No smoking or naked flames shall be permitted within
the safety zone of the installation. Prominent notices
to this effect shall be posted at access point. From
accessibility point of view, the signs shall be in
accordance with 13 of Part 3 ‘Development Control
Rules and General Building Requirements’ of the Code.
11.4.6 Fire Protection
The possibility of a major fire outbreak, leading to
direct flame impingement of the storage tank, shall be
minimized by sound engineering in plant design and
layout, good operating practice, and proper education
and training of personnel on both routine operations
and on action to be taken in an emergency.
11.4.6.1 Water supply
Provision shall be made for an adequate supply of water
and fire protection in the storage area according to the
local hoses and mobile equipment, fixed monitors or
by fixed spray systems which may be automatic.
Control of water flow should be possible from outside
any danger area.
11.4.6.2 Fire extinguishers
At least two dry chemical powder type fire
extinguishers of 9 kg capacity each, conforming to the
quality requirements in accordance with the accepted
standards [9-4(5)], shall be installed at points of access
to the storage installations. The fire extinguishers shall
be mounted keeping in view the ease of accessibility
in accordance with good practice [9-4(8)] and Part 4
‘Fire and Life Safety’ of the Code.
11.4.7 For detailed information regarding LPG bulk
storage installations reference may be made to good
practice [9-4(9)].
12 USE OF PIPED NATURAL GAS (PNG)
12.1 The PNG infrastructure shall be in complete
compliance with all the requirements of Petroleum and
Natural Gas Regulatory Board (Technical Standards
and Specifications including Safety Standards for City
or Local Natural Gas Distribution Network)
Regulations, 2008.
12.1.1 The user-group/housing society concerned
(referred hereinafter in these clauses as ‘society’)
should contact the local city gas distribution (CGD)
entity at the stage of the design of the building. This
ensures that all the adequate provisions are incorporated
in the design itself, as also the compliance with all the
safety standards stipulated/required by the regulations/
gas entities, as applicable from time-to-time. This
ensures avoidance/mitigation of any rework at a later
stage, or even situations where incorporation of any
changes may become impractical or not possible,
thereby rendering the building devoid of PNG
infrastructure.
12.1.2 The entire gas pipeline infrastructure proposed
to be laid in the premises of the society shall be easily
accessible in future by the representatives of the CGD
entity. Provision should be made by the builder for the
same. Builder/society should ensure communication of
the same to the future customer and should incorporate
it in their agreements with the customer.
12.1.3 No permanent/temporary structure shall be
erected on the ground along the paths where gas pipeline
exists underground.
12.2 The PNG infrastructure inside the premises of
societies primarily comprises the following:
a) Underground medium pressure (MP) pipeline
networks, comprising mainly polyethylene
pipes and fittings;
b) Underground low pressure (LP) pipeline
networks, comprising mainly polyethylene
(PE) pipes and fittings;
c) Service regulator modules;
d) Above ground riser and lateral system,
comprising mainly ERW GI pipes and fittings;
and
e) Pipeline inside premise and/or kitchen of
individual customer, comprising various
components like meter regulator, diaphragm
gas meter, copper pipe, brass fittings, brass
valves, etc.
The guidelines mentioned under 12.3 to 12.6 give the
minimum requirements to be complied with.
12.3 Guidelines for MP and LP Pipeline Networks
12.3.1 Gas pipelines are required to be laid at a
minimum top cover of 1 m from the finished surface
level. Underground PE pipeline shall not be laid
through the basement.
12.3.2 A minimum clearance of at least 300 mm is
Supplied
by
Book
Supply
Bureau
Under
the
License
from
BIS
for
LARSEN
AND
TOUBRO
CONSTRUCTION
-
MANAPAKKAM,
CHENNAI
ON
17-03-2017
09:00:59
(123.63.24.35)
valid
upto31-12-2017
ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/nationalbuildingcode-240401165105-f4e9283c/85/NBC-National-Building-Code-volume-1-and-2-160-320.jpg)
![PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — SECTION 4 GAS SUPPLY 17
Use and storage of medical gases is governed by Indian
Drugs and Cosmetics Act, 1940.
13.2 Design and Installation
13.2.1 Pipelines Systems for Compressed Medical
Gases and Vacuum
The design, installation, performance, documentation,
testing and commissioning of pipeline systems for
compressed medical gases, gases for driving surgical
tools and vacuum in healthcare facilities to ensure
continuous delivery of the correct gas and the provision
of vacuum from the pipeline system, shall be in
accordance with the good practice [9-4(10)]. This is
inclusive of the requirements for supply systems, pipeline
distribution systems, control systems, monitoring and
alarm systems and non-interchangeability between
components of different gas systems.
13.2.2 Anaesthetic Gas Scavenging Disposal Systems
The design, installation, performance, documentation,
testing and commissioning of anaesthetic gas
scavenging disposal systems to ensure patient safety
and to minimize exposure of the operator and other
persons to anaesthetic gases and vapours, shall be in
accordance with the good practice [9-4(11)]. This is
inclusive of requirements for the power device,
pipeline system, performance, non-interchangeability
between key components and avoidance of cross
connections between anaesthetic gas scavenging
(AGS) disposal systems and medical gas and vacuum
pipeline systems.
LIST OF STANDARDS
The following list records those standards which are
acceptable as ‘good practice’ and ‘accepted standards’
in the fulfillment of the requirements of the Code. The
latest version of a standard shall be adopted at the time
of enforcement of the Code. The standards listed may
be used by the Authority for conformance with the
requirements of the referred clauses in the Code.
In the following list, the number appearing in the first
column within parantheses indicates the number of the
reference in this Section.
IS No. Title
(1) 14885 : 2001 Specification for polyethylene
pipe for the supply gaseous fuel
(2) IS/ISO 7396-1 : Medical gas pipelines systems :
2007 Pipelines systems for
compressed medical gases and
vacuum
IS/ISO 7396-2 : Anaesthetic gas scavenging
2007 disposal systems
(3) 3196 (Part 1) : Specification for welded low
2013 carbon steel cylinders exceeding
5 litres water capacity for low
pressureliquefiablegases:Part 1
Cylindersforliquefiedpetroleum
gases (LPG) (sixth revision)
7142 : 1995 Specification for welded low
carbon steel cylinders for low
pressure liquefiable gases not
exceeding 5 litre water capacity
(first revision)
(4) 8198 (Part 5) : Code of practice for steel
1984 cylinders for compressed gases:
Part 5 Liquefied petroleum gas
(LPG) (first revision)
(5) 15683 : 2006 Specification for portable fire
extinguishers — Performance
and construction
(6) 9798 : 2013 Low pressure regulators for use
with liquefied petroleum gas
(LPG) mixtures
4786 : 2014 Specification for variable high
pressure regulators for use with
liquefied petroleum gas
(7) 6044 (Part 1) : Liquefied petroleum gas
2013 storage installations — Code of
practice: Part 1 Residential,
commercial and industrial
cylinder installations (second
revision)
(8) 2190 : 2010 Code of practice for selection,
installation and maintenance of
first-aid fire extinguishers
(fourth revision)
(9) 6044 (Part 2) : Code of practice for liquefied
2001 petroleum gas storage install-
ations : Part 2 Commercial,
industrial and domestic bulk
storage installations (first
revision)
(10) IS/ISO 7396-1 : Medical gas pipelines systems :
2007 Pipelines systems for
compressed medical gases and
vacuum
(11) IS/ISO 7396-1 : Anaesthetic gas scavenging
2007 disposal systems
IS No. Title
Supplied
by
Book
Supply
Bureau
Under
the
License
from
BIS
for
LARSEN
AND
TOUBRO
CONSTRUCTION
-
MANAPAKKAM,
CHENNAI
ON
17-03-2017
09:00:59
(123.63.24.35)
valid
upto31-12-2017
ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/nationalbuildingcode-240401165105-f4e9283c/85/NBC-National-Building-Code-volume-1-and-2-163-320.jpg)
NBC - National Building Code volume 1 and 2
- 1. HNXGL)NL]Q N=G +NNMUKHNXGZMNV 1, 1ÊÊ Ê-/ , - 1$7,21$/%8,/',1*2'( 2),1',$ +NNMUGKMN9K +NRXIXHN=NODIJUN 92/80( N0 Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 2. Hkkjr dh jkVªh; Hkou fuekZ.k lafgrk 2016 [k.M 2 NATIONALBUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 VOLUME 2 BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS Hkkjrh; ekud C;wjks Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 3. SP 7 : 2016 FIRST PUBLISHED 1970 FIRST REVISION 1983 SECONDREVISION2005 THIRDREVISION2016 © BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS ICS 01.120; 91.040.01 PRICE ` PUBLISHED BY BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS, MANAK BHAVAN, 9 BAHADUR SHAH ZAFAR MARG, NEW DELHI 110002; TYPESETAT SUNSHINE GRAPHICS, 263, TELIWARA, SHAHDARA, DELHI 110032; PRINTEDATJ. J. OFFSET PRINTERS,A-24, SECTOR 68, NOIDA, GAUTAM BUDH NAGAR, UTTAR PRADESH (INDIA). Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 4. (iii) C O N T E N T S Volume 1 FOREWORD ... (v) COMMITTEE COMPOSITION ... (ix) IMPORTANT EXPLANATORY NOTE FOR USERS OF THE CODE ... (xxx) INFORMATION FOR THE USERS ABOUT AVAILABILITY OF THE CODE IN GROUPS ... (xxxi) Total Pages PART 0 INTEGRATED APPROACH — PREREQUISITE FOR APPLYING PROVISIONS OF THE CODE ... 12 PART 1 DEFINITIONS ... 28 PART 2 ADMINISTRATION ... 32 PART 3 DEVELOPMENT CONTROL RULES AND GENERAL BUILDING REQUIREMENTS ... 150 PART 4 FIRE AND LIFE SAFETY ... 116 PART 5 BUILDING MATERIALS ... 46 PART 6 STRUCTURAL DESIGN Section 1 Loads, Forces and Effects ... 134 Section 2 Soils and Foundations ... 60 Section 3 Timber and Bamboo 3A Timber ... 56 3B Bamboo ... 30 Section 4 Masonry ... 86 Section 5 Concrete 5A Plain and Reinforced Concrete ... 118 5B Prestressed Concrete ... 52 Section 6 Steel ... 138 Section 7 Prefabrication, Systems Building and Mixed/Composite Construction 7A Prefabricated Concrete ... 42 7B Systems Building and Mixed/Composite Construction ... 12 Section 8 Glass and Glazing ... 80 Volume 2 IMPORTANT EXPLANATORY NOTE FOR USERS OF THE CODE ... (iv) INFORMATION FOR THE USERS ABOUT AVAILABILITY OF THE CODE IN GROUPS ... (v) Total Pages PART 7 CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT, PRACTICES AND SAFETY ... 76 PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES Section 1 Lighting and Natural Ventilation ... 56 Section 2 Electrical and Allied Installations ... 172 Section 3 Air Conditioning, Heating and Mechanical Ventilation ... 86 Section 4 Acoustics, Sound Insulation and Noise Control ... 46 Section 5 Installation of Lifts, Escalators and Moving Walks 5A Lifts ... 96 5B Escalators and Moving Walks ... 44 Section 6 Information and Communication Enabled Installations ... 28 PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) Section 1 Water Supply ... 44 Section 2 Drainage and Sanitation ... 82 Section 3 Solid Waste Management ... 16 Section 4 Gas Supply ... 18 PART 10 LANDSCAPE DEVELOPMENT, SIGNS AND OUTDOOR DISPLAY STRUCTURES Section 1 Landscape Planning, Design and Development ... 34 Section 2 Signs and Outdoor Display Structures ... 24 PART 11 APPROACH TO SUSTAINABILITY ... 98 PART 12 ASSET AND FACILITY MANAGEMENT ... 98 Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 5. NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) Section 1 Water Supply BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 6. 2 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 C O N T E N T S FOREWORD 3 1 SCOPE 5 2 TERMINOLOGY 5 3 GENERAL 9 4 WATER SUPPLY 11 ANNEX A APPLICATION FORM FOR TEMPORARY/PERMANENT SUPPLY 41 OF WATER/FOR ADDITIONS AND/OR ALTERATIONS FOR SUPPLY OF WATER ANNEX B FORM FOR LICENSED/REGISTERED PLUMBER’S COMPLETION 42 CERTIFICATE ANNEX C NOMOGRAM OF HAZEN AND WILLIAM’S EQUATION 43 LIST OF STANDARDS 44 Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 7. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — SECTION 1 WATER SUPPLY 3 National Building Code Sectional Committee, CED 46 FOREWORD This Code (Part 9/Section 1) covers the requirements of water supply in buildings. The water supply provisions covered in this Section encompass the requirements of water supply, plumbing connected to public water supply, design of water supply systems, principles of conveyance and distribution of water within the premises, hot water supply system, inspection and maintenance of water supply systems. It also covers design of water supply systems in high altitudes and/or sub-zero temperature regions. In the first version of the Code formulated in 1970, three separate sections of Part 9 Plumbing Services were brought out, namely, Section 1 Water supply, Section 2 Drainage and sanitation, and Section 3 Gas supply. These sections were subsequently revised in 1983. The major changes incorporated in the first revision in Section 1 Water supply, were: rationalization of definitions and addition of definitions for more terms; addition of universal pipe friction diagram and nomogram of Hazen and Willam’s equation for discharge computation, deleting the discharge curves based on Chezy’s formula; introduction of a detailed clause giving guidance on the design of water supply system for multi-storeyed buildings; modification to indicate that no separate storage need be provided for flushing and domestic purposes for health reasons and a single storage tank may be provided; modification/ amplification of provisions relating to domestic hot water supply installations; introduction of a detailed clause covering recommendations to be considered while planning and designing water supply systems peculiar to high altitude and/or sub-zero temperature regions of the country; and addition of requirements relating to inspection, testing and maintenance applicable to hot water supply system. As a result of experience gained in implementation of 1983 version of the Code and feedback received as well as revision of some of the standards based on which this Section was formulated, a need to revise this Section was felt. The last revision was therefore formulated to take care of these. In the last revision, the erstwhile two sections were merged and a combined and comprehensive Section, namely Section 1 Water supply, drainage and sanitation (including solid waste management), was brought out. Gas supply was brought out as Section 2. Following significant changes were incorporated in the last revision of Section 1 on water supply, drainage and sanitation, in respect to water supply: modification of provision of water supply requirement; addition of a new clause on water supply for other than residential purposes; addition of a new clause on quality of water, also including therein a sub-clause on waste water reclamation; modification of the provision regarding storage of water and introduction of guidelines for calculating storage capacity; modification, in the design of distribution system provisions for discharge computation, to include designed consumer pipes based on fixtures unit also taking into account probable simultaneous demand instead of earlier computation based on Reynold’s Number; introduction of an alternative option of variable speed drive pumping system to hydro pneumatic system; addition of a new clause on backflow prevention; addition of provision for suitability of galvanized mild steel tanks on the basis of pH of the water; detailing of types of hot water heater; and restructuring of the section was done to make it more user friendly. The last revision also incorporated for the first time the provisions on solid waste management. In this revision, to address the various and distinct features related to the plumbing aspects and solid waste management comprehensively, this Part 9 has been rearranged as follows: Section 1 Water supply Section 2 Drainage and sanitation Section 3 Solid waste management Section 4 Gas supply Further, in this revision of the Section 1, the following significant changes/modifications have been incorporated: 1) Provisions on water supply requirements for buildings have been related to the estimated occupancy in the chosen type of building. 2) Table 1 on water requirements for buildings other than residences has been updated with respect to type Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 8. 4 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 of buildings and it now also includes domestic and flushing requirements separately. 3) Water demand for landscaping purposes has been included. 4) Requirements related to treatment of waste water and usage of recycled waste water have been included. 5) Materials used for storage water tanks have been updated. 6) Provisions related to quantity of water to be stored have been updated. 7) Provisions have been included for protection of water supply by avoiding cross-connection between treated and raw water supplies and back flow prevention, and securing identification of non-potable water supply pipes. 8) List of materials used to manufacture pipes has been updated. 9) General requirements for design of distribution systems have been included. 10) Table 2 on fixture unit for different types of fixtures has been updated. 11) Table 3 on probable simultaneous demand has been updated with demand values included various intermediate and up to 10 000 fixture units, along with graphs for probable demand. 12) Maximum flow rate and flush volumes have been included. 13) Provisions related to inadequate and excessive water pressure have been included. 14) Guidance on water hammer effects have been included. 15) Provisions for distribution systems in multi-storeyed buildings have been updated along with illustrations therefor. 16) Provisions related to zoning of distribution systems have been included. 17) Hot water supply systems have been included under the existing clause on hot water supply installations. 18) Detailed provisions related to swimming pools have been included. 19) Guidance on allowance for expansion of water pipes have been included. 20) A new clause on colour coding for different types of water pipes has been included. 21) Provisions have been reviewed and updated from the point of view of accessibility by elderly and persons with disabilities, also, in this context, duly giving cross-reference to 13 of Part 3 ‘Development Control Rules and General Building Requirements’. 22) Certain terminologies have been included and some have been updated. 23) Cross-references to Indian Standards have been updated. This Section is largely based on the following Indian Standards: IS 1172 : 1993 Code of basic requirements for water supply, drainage and sanitation (fourth revision) IS 2065 : 1983 Code of practice for water supply in buildings (second revision) IS 6295 : 1986 Code of practice for water supply and drainage in high altitudes and or sub-zero temperature regions (first revision) IS 7558 : 1974 Code of practice for domestic hot water installations IS 12183 (Part 1) : 1987 Code of practice for plumbing in multi-storeyed buildings : Part 1 Water supply A reference to SP 35 : 1987 ‘Handbook on Water Supply and Drainage’ may be useful, from where also, assistance has been derived. All standards, whether given herein above or cross-referred to in the main text of this Section, are subject to revision. The parties to agreement based on this Section are encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying the most recent editions of the standards. In the formulation of this Section, reference has also been made to the following: International Plumbing Code 2015, International Code Council, and Uniform Plumbing Code 2015, International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials For the purpose of deciding whether a particular requirement of this Section is complied with, the final value, observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded off in accordance with IS 2 : 1960 ‘Rules for rounding off numerical values (revised)’. The number of significant places retained in the rounded off value should be the same as that of the specified value in this Section. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 9. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — SECTION 1 WATER SUPPLY 5 2.1.7 Backflow a) The flow of water or other liquids, mixtures or substances into the distributing pipes of a system of supply of potable water from any source or sources other than its intended source. b) The flow of a liquid in a direction reverse of that intended. 2.1.8 Backflow Prevention Device — Any approved measure or fitting or combination of fittings specifically designed to prevent backflow or back siphonage in a water service. 2.1.9 Back Pressure Back Flow — Due to an increased pressure above the supply pressure, which may be due to pumps, other equipment, gravity or other source of pressure. 2.1.10 Back Siphonage — The flowing back of used, contaminated, or polluted water from a plumbing fixture or vessel into a water supply due to a reduced pressure in such pipe (see 2.1.7). 2.1.11 Barrel — This portion of a pipe in which the diameter and wall thickness remain uniform throughout. 2.1.12 Base — The lowest portion or lowest point of a stack of vertical pipe. 2.1.13 Bath Room Group — Group of fixtures consisting of water closet, lavatory, bath tub or shower and other fittings with a floor drain located together. 2.1.14 Bedding — The material on which the pipe is laid and which provides support for the pipe. Bedding can be concrete, granular material or the prepared trench bottom. 2.1.15 Chair — A bed of concrete or other suitable material on the trench floor to provide a support for the pipes at intervals. 2.1.16 Channel — The open waterway through which sewage, storm water or other liquid wastes flow at the invert of a manhole or an inspection chamber. 2.1.17 Communication Pipe — That part of a service pipe which vests in the water undertakes. It starts at the water main and terminate at a point which differs according to the circumstances of the case. 2.1.18 Consumer — Any person who uses or is supplied 1 SCOPE 1.1 This Code (Part 9/Section 1) covers the basic requirements of water supply for residential, business and other types of buildings, including traffic terminal stations. This Section also deals with general requirements of plumbing connected to public water supply and design of water supply systems along with general guidelines about expansion in piping systems, and swimming pools. 1.1.1 This Section does not take into consideration the requirements of water supply for industrial plants and processes, which have to be provided for separately. It also does not provide the requirements of water supply for other purposes, such as firefighting and street cleaning. 2 TERMINOLOGY For the purpose of this Section, the following definitions shall apply in addition to the definitions given in accepted standards [9-1(1)]. 2.1 Definitions Relating to Water Supply 2.1.1 Access Panel — A removable panel mounted in a frame, normally secured with screws and mounted in a wall or ceiling, to provide access to concealed valves or items which may require maintenance. 2.1.2 Air Gap, Water Distribution — Unobstructed vertical distance through the free atmosphere between the lowest opening from any pipe or faucet conveying water to a tank or plumbing fixture and flood level rim of the receptacle. 2.1.3 Air Valve — A valve that releases air from a pipeline automatically without loss of water, or introduce air into a line automatically if the internal pressure becomes less than that of the atmosphere. 2.1.4 Authority Having Jurisdiction — The authority which has been created by a statute and which for the purpose of administering the Code/Part may authorize a committee or an official to act on its behalf; hereinafter called the ‘Authority’. 2.1.5 Available Head — The head of water available at the point of consideration due to mains’ pressure or overhead tank or any other source of pressure. 2.1.6 Anti-Siphon— A device or mechanism to prevent siphonage. NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) Section 1 Water Supply Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 10. 6 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 FIG. 1 IDENTIFICATION OF DIFFERENT TYPES OF WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM water or on whose application such water is supplied by the Authority. 2.1.19 Consumer’s Pipe — The portion of service pipe used for supply of water and which is not the property of the Authority (see Fig. 1). 2.1.20 Cover a) A removable plate for permitting access to a pipe, fitting, vessel or appliance. b) The vertical distance between the top of the barrel of a buried pipe or other construction and the surface of the ground. 2.1.21 Cross-Connection — A connection between two normally independent pipelines which permits flow from either pipeline into the other. 2.1.22 Direct Tap — A tap which is connected to a supply pipe and is subject to pressure from the water main. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 11. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — SECTION 1 WATER SUPPLY 7 2.1.23 Down Take Tap — A tap connected to a system of piping not subject to water pressure from the water main. 2.1.24 Effective Opening — The minimum cross- sectional area at the point of water supply, measured or expressed in terms of, a) the diameter of a circle; and b) the diameter of a circle of equivalent cross- sectional area, if the opening is not circular. 2.1.25FeedCistern—Astoragevesselusedforsupplying cold water to a hot water apparatus, cylinder or tanks. 2.1.26 Fittings — The appurtenances such as coupling, flange, branch, bend, tees, elbows, unions, waste (with or without plug), P or S trap (with or without vent), stop ferrule, bib tap, pillar tap, bath faucet, water meter, garden hydrant, valves and any other article used in connection with water supply, drainage and sanitation. 2.1.27 Fixture Unit — A quantity in terms of which the load producing effects on the plumbing system of different kinds of plumbing fixtures is expressed on some arbitrarily chosen scale. 2.1.28 Float Operated Valve — Ball valves or ball taps and equilibrium valves operated by means of a float. 2.1.29 Flushing Cistern — A cistern provided with a device for rapidly discharging the contained water and used in connection with a sanitary appliance for the purpose of cleaning the appliance and carrying away its contents into a drain. NOTE — The nominal size of a cistern is the quantity of water discharged per flush. 2.1.30 Flushometer Tank –A tank integrated with an air accumulator vessel that is designed to discharge a predetermined quantity of water to fixtures for flushing purposes. 2.1.31 Formation — The finished level of the excavation at the bottom of a trench or heading prepared to receive the permanent work. 2.1.32 Frost Line — The line joining the points of greatest depths below ground level up to which the moisture in the soil freezes. 2.1.33 General Washing Place — A washing place provided with necessary sanitary arrangement and common to more than one tenement. 2.1.34 Geyser — An apparatus for heating water with supply control on the inlet side and delivering it from an outlet. 2.1.35 Haunching — Outward sloping concrete support to the sides of a pipe or channel above the concrete bedding. 2.1.36 Heel Rest Bend or Duck-Foot Bend — A bend, having a foot formed integrally in its base, used to receive a vertical pipe. 2.1.37 High Altitudes — Elevations higher than 1 500 m above mean sea level (MSL). 2.1.38 Highway Authority — The public body in which is vested, or which is the owner of, a highway repairable by the inhabitants collectively; otherwise the body or persons responsible for the upkeep of the highway. 2.1.39 Horizontal Pipe — Any pipe of fitting which makes an angle of more than 45° with the vertical. 2.1.40 Hot Water Tank — A vessel for storing hot water under pressure greater than atmospheric pressure. 2.1.41 Hydro-Pneumatic System–The water supply pumping system which operates automatically in conjunction with pump(s), pressure vessel and pressure switch. 2.1.42 Junction Pipe — A pipe incorporating one or more branches. 2.1.43 Lagging — Thermal insulation or pipes. 2.1.44 Licensed (or Registered) Plumber — A person licensed (or registered) under the provisions of this Code. 2.1.45 Offset — A pipe fitting used to connect two pipes whose axes are parallel but not in line. 2.1.46 Period of Supply — The period of the day or night during which water supply is made available to the consumer. 2.1.47 Pipe Work — Any installation of piping with its fittings. 2.1.48 Plumbing a) The pipes, fixtures and other apparatus inside a building for bringing in the water supply and removing the liquid and water borne wastes. b) The installation of the foregoing pipes, fixtures and other apparatus. 2.1.49 Plumbing System — The plumbing system shall include the water supply and distribution pipes; plumbing fittings and traps; soil, waste, vent pipes and anti-siphonage pipes; building drains and building sewers including their respective connections, devices and appurtenances within the property lines of the premises; and water-treating or water-using equipment. 2.1.50 Potable Water — Water which is satisfactory for drinking, culinary and domestic purposes and meets the requirements of the Authority. 2.1.51 Premises — Premises shall include passages, buildings and lands of any tenure, whether open or enclosed, whether built on or not, and whether public or private in respect of which a water rate or charge is payable to the Authority or for which an application is made for supply of water. 2.1.52 Pressure Balancing Valve – Mixing valve that senses incoming hot and cold water pressures and compensates for fluctuations. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 12. 8 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 2.1.53 Residual Head — The head available at any particular point in the distribution system. 2.1.54 Residual Pressure — The pressure available at the fixture after allowance is made for pressure drop due to friction loss and head in the system during maximum demand periods. 2.1.55 Saddle — A purpose made fitting, so shaped as to fit over a hole cut in a sewer or drain used to form connections. 2.1.56 Service Pipe — Pipe that runs between the distribution main in the street and the riser in case of a multi-storeyed building or the water meter in the case of an individual house and is subject to water pressure from such main. 2.1.57 Static Pressure — The pressure exerted by a fluid that is not moving or flowing. 2.1.58 Stop-Cock — A cock fitted in a pipe line for controlling the flow of water. 2.1.59 Stop Tap — Stop tap includes stop-cock, stop valve or any other device for stopping the flow of water in a line or system of pipes at will. 2.1.60 Storage Tank — A container used for storage of water which is connected to the water main or tube- well by means of supply pipe. 2.1.61 Studio Apartment— An apartment unit consisting of a single room and a bathroom, the single room functioning as living room, bedroom and kitchen. 2.1.62 Subsoil Water— Water occurring naturally in the subsoil. 2.1.63 Subsoil Water Drain a) A drain intended to collect and carry away subsoil water. b) A drain intended to disperse into the subsoil from a septic tank. 2.1.64 Sub-Zero Temperature Regions — Regions where temperatures fall below 0°C and freezing conditions occur. 2.1.65 Supply Pipe — So much of any service pipe as is not a communication pipe. 2.1.66 Supports — Hangers and anchors or devices for supporting and securing pipe and fittings to walls, ceilings, floors or structural members. 2.1.67 Surface Water — Natural water from the ground surface, paved areas and roofs. 2.1.68 Surface Water Drain — A drain conveying surface water including storm water. 2.1.69 Thermostatic/Pressure Balancing Valve— Mixing valve that senses outlet temperature and incoming hot and cold water pressure and compensates for fluctuations for stabilization. 2.1.70 Vertical Pipe – Any pipe or fitting which is installed in a vertical position or which makes an angle or not more than 45º with the vertical. 2.1.71 Warning Pipe — An overflow pipe so fixed that its outlet, whether inside or outside a building, is in a conspicuous position where the discharge of any water there from can be readily seen. 2.1.72 Wash-Out Valve — A device located at the bottom of the tank for the purpose of draining a tank for cleaning, maintenance, etc. 2.1.73 Water Hammer Arrestor — A device designed to provide protection against hydraulic shock in the building water supply system. 2.1.74 Water Main (Street Main) — A pipe laid by the water undertakers for the purpose of giving a general supply of water as distinct from a supply to individual consumers and includes any apparatus used in connection with such a pipe. 2.1.75 Water Outlet — A water outlet, as used in connection with the water distributing system, is the discharge opening for the water: (a) to a fitting; (b) to atmospheric pressure (except into an open tank which is part of the water supply system); and (c) to any water- operated device or equipment requiring water to operate. 2.1.76 Water Supply System — Water supply system of a building or premises consists of the water service pipe, thewaterdistributionpipes,andthenecessaryconnecting pipes, fittings, control valves, and all appurtenances in or adjacent to the building or premises. 2.1.77 Waterworks — Waterworks for public water supply include a lake, river, spring, well, pump with or without motor and accessories, reservoir, cistern, tank, duct whether covered or open, sluice, water main, pipe, culvert, engine and any machinery, land, building or a thing used for storage, treatment and supply of water. 2.2 Definitions Relating to Swimming Pool 2.2.1 Appurtenance — An accessory facility or feature at a swimming pool, such as a diving board, slide, wading pool, plunge pool, spray pool. 2.2.2 Bather Load — The maximum number of persons that may be allowed in the pool area at one time without creating undue health or safety hazards. 2.2.3 Deep Area — An area of a swimming pool in which the water depth exceeds 1.5 m. 2.2.4 Diving Pool — A pool designed and intended for use exclusively for diving. 2.2.5 Inlet — An opening or fitting through which filtered water enters the pool. 2.2.6 Main Drain –The outlet or outlets for drain provided in the pool. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 13. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — SECTION 1 WATER SUPPLY 9 2.2.7 Make-Up Water — The water added to a pool to replace that which is lost. 2.2.8 Pool — A swimming pool or other recreational water basin utilized in conjunction with or as an appurtenance to a swimming pool. NOTE — The term does not refer to spas and therapy pools not designed or intended for swimming or to basins for individual use that are drained after each use. 2.2.9 Pool Depth — The vertical distance between the pool floor and the water level. 2.2.10 Shallow Area — An area in a swimming pool, in which the water depth does not exceed 1.5 m at any point. 2.2.11 Skimmer — A mechanical device connected to the recirculationpipingwhichisusedtoskimthepoolsurface. 2.2.12 Swimming Pool User Load — The number of bathers using the pool in a 24 h period for which a certain per capita capacity is often considered. NOTE — The capacity of a swimming pool in terms of its user load is dictated by the capacity of water treatment equipment. 2.2.13 Transition Point — A location in a shallow area of a swimming pool where an area, having a floor slope of no more than 300 mm vertical in 3.65 m horizontal, adjoins an area where the floor slope exceeds 1 in 12. 2.2.14 Turnover Period — The time required to recirculate a volume of water equivalent to the water volume of the pool through the filtration system. 2.2.15 Wading Pool — A pool having a maximum water depth not exceeding 76 cm. 2.2.16 Water Level — The level of the overflow lip of a perimeter overflow system or the mid-level of surge weirs, if present, or the mid-level of the skimmer operating range. 2.2.17 Zero-Depth Edge — That portion of the perimeter of a zero-depth pool where the pool floor intersects the pool water surface. 2.2.18 Zero-Depth Pool — A swimming pool where the pool floor intersects the water surface along a portion of its perimeter. 3 GENERAL 3.1 Basic Principles The design of water supply takes the following into consideration: a) Number of occupants; b) Minimum water requirements for different purposes; c) Treatment of water based on the quality of water; d) Quantity of water stored; and e) Sizing of pipes. The basic principles of water supply, drainage and sanitation are given below, and the design of water supply should in general be guided by the applicable principles. 3.1.1 Potable Water All premises intended for human habitation, occupancy, or use shall be provided with supply of potable water. Thiswatersupplyshallnotbeconnectedwithunsafewater resources,norshallitbesubjecttothehazardsofbackflow. 3.1.2 Water Provision Plumbing fixtures, devices and appurtenances shall be provided with water in sufficient volume and at pressures adequate to enable them to function properly and without undue noise under normal conditions of use. There should be at least a residual head of 0.018 N/mm2 at the consumer’s tap. There may be certain fixtures or appliances in the installation that may require a higher pressure, such as 0.05 N/mm2 or even higher (such as 0.1 N/mm2 in case of flush valves), in which case the system shall be designed using pumps, tanks or both to achieve the required minimum pressure. NOTE — The residual head shall be taken at the highest/farthest outlets in the building. 3.1.3 Water Efficiency Plumbing system shall be designed, installed and adjusted to use the optimum quantity of water consistent with proper performance and cleaning. 3.1.4 Safety Devices Plumbing system shall be designed and installed with safety devices to safeguard against dangers from contamination, explosion, overheating, etc. 3.1.5 Minimum Water Amenities It is recommended that each dwelling unit should have at least one water closet, one lavatory, one kitchen wash place or a sink, and one bathing place or shower to meet the basic requirements of sanitation and personal hygiene. In case of a group housing, the requirements relating to toilet or sanitary room and kitchen as given in 13 and B-9 of Part 3 ‘Development Control Rules and General Building Requirements’ of the Code shall also be complied with. 3.1.6 Drainage System The drainage system shall be designed, installed and maintained to guard against fouling, deposit of solids and clogging and with adequate cleanouts so arranged that the pipes may be readily cleaned. 3.1.7 Materials and Workmanship Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 14. 10 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 The plumbing system shall have durable material, free from defective workmanship and so designed and installed as to give satisfactory service for its reasonable expected life. The accessories of the plumbing system should be of such specifications as to meet the functional requirements of the installation, so as to also avoid any inconsistency leading to leakage and resultant seepage. 3.1.8 Fixture Traps and Vent Pipes Each fixture directly connected to the drainage system shall be equipped with a liquid seal trap. Trap seals shall be maintained to prevent sewer gas, other potentially dangerous or noxious fumes, or vermin from entering the building. Further, the drainage system shall be designed to provide an adequate circulation of air in all pipes with no danger of siphonage, aspiration, or forcing of trap seals under conditions of ordinary use by providing vent pipes throughout the system. 3.1.9 Foul Air Exhaust Each vent terminal shall extend to the outer air and be so installed as to minimize the possibilities of clogging and thereturnoffoulairtothebuilding,asitconveyspotentially noxious or explosive gases to the outside atmosphere. All vent pipes shall be provided with a cowl. 3.1.10 Testing The plumbing system shall be subjected to required tests to effectively disclose all leaks and defects in the work or the material. 3.1.11 Exclusion from Plumbing System No substance that will clog or accentuate clogging of pipes, produce explosive mixtures, destroy the pipes or their joints, or interfere unduly with the sewage-disposal process shall be allowed to enter the drainage system. 3.1.12 Light and Ventilation Wherever water closet or similar fixture is located in a room or compartment, it should be properly lighted and ventilated. 3.1.13 Individual Sewage Disposal Systems If water closets or other plumbing fixtures are installed in buildings where connection to public sewer is not possible, suitable provision shall be made for acceptable treatment and disposal. 3.1.14 Maintenance Plumbing systems shall be maintained in a safe and serviceable condition. 3.1.15 Approach for Use and Cleaning All plumbing fixtures shall be so installed with regard to spacing as to be approachable for their intended use and for cleaning. All doors, windows and any other device needing access within the toilet shall be so located that they have proper approach. 3.1.16 Accessibility for Persons with Disabilities All doors, windows and fixtures, including WC, urinals, grab bars, washbasin, mirror and all other accessories for use by persons with disabilities shall be so installed/ located that they have proper access with appropriate width, height, space, centerlines, and ease of operation (see 13 of Part 3 ‘Development Control Rules and General Building Requirements’ of the Code). 3.1.17 Structural Safety Plumbing system shall be installed with due regard to preservation of the structural members and prevention of damage to walls and other surfaces. 3.1.18 Protection of Ground and Surface Water Sewage or other waste shall not be discharged into surface or sub-surface water without acceptable form of treatment. 3.2 Water Supply Connection 3.2.1 Application for Obtaining Supply Connection Every consumer, requiring a new supply of water or any extension or alteration to the existing supply shall apply in writing in the prescribed form (see Annex A) to the Authority. 3.2.2 Bulk Supply In the case of large housing colonies or campuses, or where new services are so situated that it will be necessary for the Authority to lay new mains or extend an existing main, full information about the proposed scheme shall be furnished to the Authority. Information shall also be given regarding their phased requirements of water supply with full justification. Such information shall include site plans, showing the layout of roads, footpaths, building and boundaries and indicating thereon the finished line and level of the roads or footpaths and water supply lines and appurtenances. 3.2.3 Completion Certificate On completion of the plumbing work for the water supply system, the licensed/registered plumber shall give a completion certificate in the prescribed form (see Annex B) to the Authority for getting the water connection from the mains. 3.3 Licensing/Registration of Plumbers 3.3.1 Execution of Work The work which is required to be carried out under the provisions of this Section, shall be executed only by a licensed/registered plumber under the control of the Authority and shall be responsible to carry out all lawful directions given by the Authority. No individual shall engage in the business of plumbing unless so licensed/ registered under the provisions of this Section. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 15. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — SECTION 1 WATER SUPPLY 11 3.3.1.1 No individual, firm, partnership or corporation shall engage in the business of installing, repairing or altering plumbing unless the plumbing work performed in the course of such business is under the direct supervision of a licensed/registered plumber. 3.3.2 Examination and Certification The Authority shall establish standards and procedure for the qualification, examination and licensing/ registration of plumbers and shall issue licences to such persons who meet the qualifications thereof and successfully pass the examination. 3.3.3 For guidelines for registration of plumbers including the minimum standards for qualifications for the grant of licences/registration, reference may be made to good practice [9-1(2)]. The Authority may also utilize the services of the certified plumbers who are certified for the required skill level under the appropriate scheme of the Government. 4 WATER SUPPLY 4.1 Water Supply Requirements for Buildings The total quantity of water per day is estimated based on the proposed occupancy and activities catered. Designer has to identify all the possible sources for augmenting the shortfall in water supply. The analysis of available water is done to decide the treatment for consumption and treatment process depends on the quality of water and the purpose for which it is used. Projection of population for each building shall be made on the basis of its usage. Population for each type of building shall be estimated on the basis of information obtained from the users. Alternatively, population may be worked on the following basis, for different type of buildings: a) Residential buildings: Accommodation Population Requirements 1 bedroom dwelling unit 4 2 bedroom dwelling unit 5 3 bedroom dwelling unit 6 4 bedroom dwelling unit and above 7 NOTES 1 The above figures consider a domestic house- hold including support personnel, wherever applicable. 2 For plotted development, the population may be arrived at after due consideration of the expected number and type of domestic household units. 3 Dwelling unit under EWS category shall have population requirement of 4 and studio apartment shall have population requirement of 2. b) Other than residential buildings: Occupancy Population Requirement Offices 1 person per 10 m2 of floor area (see Note 1) Schools Strength of school + Teaching and non-teaching staff Hostels Number of beds + 4.5 x (warden’s residence) + staff Hotels Number of beds + Staff + Requirement of restaurant seats Hospitals Number of beds + Staff + Patient attendants (generally population density per bed in secondary care hospital is 5, tertiary care is 7 and quaternary care is 9) Mercantile 1 person per 3 m2 of street floor and sales basement areas + 1 person per 6 m2 of upper sale floors (Total population may be segregated into 10 percent for fixed and 90 percent for floating/visitors) Traffic terminal stations Average number of users per day (Total annual passenger traffic/365) + Staff + Vendors NOTES 1 Wherever there are multiple work shifts, the number of users within a 24 h period may be considered as per actuals. 2 Population of 5 to 15 percent, depending on the usage of building, shall be considered for visitors and floating population likely to use the buildings facilities. 4.1.1 Water Supply for Residences A minimum of 70 to 100 litre per head per day may be considered adequate for domestic needs of urban communities, apart from non-domestic needs as flushing requirements (which varies based on type of building occupancy). As a general rule the following rates per capita per day may be considered for domestic and non-domestic needs: a) For communities with population up to 20 000: 1) Water supply through stand: 40 lphd (Min) post 2) Water supply through house: 70 to 100 lphd service connection b) For communities with: 100 to 135 lphd population 20 000 to 100 000 together with full flushing system Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 16. 12 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 c) For communities with population: 150 to 200 lphd above 100 000 together with full flushing system NOTE — The value of water supply given as 150 to 200 litre per head per day may be reduced to 135 litre per head per day for houses for Medium Income Group (MIG) and Lower Income Groups (LIG) and Economically Weaker Section of Society (EWS), depending upon prevailing conditions and availability of water. 4.1.1.1 Out of the 150 to 200 litre per head per day, 45 litre per head per day may be taken for flushing requirements and the remaining quantity for other domestic purposes. 4.1.2 Water Supply for Buildings Other than Residences Minimum requirements for water supply for buildings other than residences shall be in accordance with Table 1. Table 1 Water Requirements for Buildings Other than Residences (Clause 4.1.2) Sl No. Type of Building Domestic Per Day litre Flushing Per Day litre Total Consumption Per Day litre (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) i) Factories including canteen where bath rooms are required to be provided 30 per head 15 per head 45 per head ii) Factories including canteen where no bath rooms are required to be provided 20 per head 10 per head 30 per head iii) Hospital (excluding laundry and kitchen) (see Note 2): a) Number of beds not exceeding 100 b) Number of beds exceeding 100 c) Out patient department (OPD) 230 per head 300 per head 10 per head 110 per head 150 per head 5 per head 340 per head 450 per head 15 per head iv) Nurses’ homes and medical quarters 90 per head 45 per head 135 per head v) Hostels 90 per head 45 per head 135 per head vi) Hotel (up to 3 star) excluding laundry, kitchen, staff and water bodies 120 per head 60 per head 180 per head vii) Hotel (4 star and above) excluding laundry, kitchen, staff and water bodies 260 per head 60 per head 320 per head viii) Offices (including canteen) 25 per head 20 per head 45 per head ix) Restaurants and food court including water requirement for kitchen: a) Restaurants b) Food court 55 per seat 25 per seat 15 per seat 10 per seat 70 per seat 35 per seat x) Clubhouse 25 per head 20 per head 45 per head xi) Stadiums 4 per head 6 per head 10 per head xii) Cinemas, concert halls and theatres and multiplex 5 per seat 10 per seat 15 per seat xiii) Schools/Educational institutions: a) Without boarding facilities b) With boarding facilities 25 per head 90 per head 20 per head 45 per head 45 per head 135 per head xiv) Shopping and retail (mall) a) Staff 25 per head 20 per head 45 per head b) Visitors 5 per head 10 per head 15 per head xv) Traffic terminal stations (see Notes 3 and 4) a) Airports 40 per head 30 per head 70 per head b) Railway stations (Junctions) with bathing facility 40 per head 30 per head 70 per head c) Railway stations (Junctions) without bathing facility 30 per head 15 per head 45 per head d) Railway Stations (Intermediate) with bathing facility 25 per head 20 per head 45 per head e) Railway Stations (Intermediate) without bathing facility 15 per head 10 per head 25 per head f) Interstate bus terminals 25 per head 20 per head 45 per head g) Intrastate Bus Terminals/Metro Stations 10 per head 5 per head 15 per head NOTES 1 For calculating water demand for visitors, consumption of 15 litre per head per day may be taken. 2 The water demand includes requirement of patients, attendants, visitors and staff. Additional water demand for kitchen, laundry and clinical water shall be computed as per actual requirements. 3 The number of persons shall be determined by average number of passengers handled by stations, with due considerations given to the staff and vendors who are using these facilities. 4 Consideration should be given for seasonal average peak requirements. 5 The hospitals may be categorized as Category A (25 to 50 beds), Category B (51 to 100 beds), Category C (101 to 300 beds), Category D (301 to 500) and Category E (501 to 750 beds). Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 17. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — SECTION 1 WATER SUPPLY 13 The water demand for the laboratory facilities will depend on actual requirements based on functional point of view. 4.1.3 Water Supply Requirements of Traffic Terminal Stations The water supply requirements of traffic terminal stations (railway stations, bus stations, harbours, airports, etc) include provisions for waiting rooms and waiting halls. They do not, however, include requirements for retiring rooms. Requirements of water supply for traffic terminal stations shall be as per Table 1. 4.1.4 Water Supply for Fire Fighting Purposes 4.1.4.1 The Authority shall make provision to meet the water supply requirements for fire fighting in the city/ area, depending on the population density and types of occupancy. See also Part 4 ‘Fire and Life Safety’ of the Code. 4.1.4.2 Provision shall be made by the owner of the building for water supply requirements for fire fighting purposes within the building, depending upon the height and occupancy of the building, in conformity with the requirements laid down in Part 4 ‘Fire and Life Safety’ of the Code. 4.1.4.3 The requirements regarding water supply in storage tanks, capacity of fire pumps, arrangements of wet riser-cum-down comer and wet riser installations for buildings, depending upon the occupancy use and other factors, shall be in accordance with Part 4 ‘Fire and Life Safety’ of the Code. 4.1.5 Water Supply for Other Purposes 4.1.5.1 Water supply in many buildings is also required for many other applications other than domestic use, which shall be identified in the initial stages of planning so as to provide the requisite water quantity, storage capacity and pressure as required for each application. In such instances information about the water use and the quality required may be obtained from the users. Some typical uses other than domestic use and fire fighting purposes are air conditioning, swimming pools and water bodies, and gardening. Treated water from sewage treatment plant, with suitable tertiary treatment, should be used for flushing purpose (with dual piping system), gardening purpose, cooling tower make up, and/or for other non potable usage. 4.1.5.2 The water demand for landscaping purposes is generally taken as 6 to 8 litre/m2 /day for lawns. For shrubs and trees the above value can be reduced considerably. 4.2 Water Sources and Quality 4.2.1 Sources of Water The origin of all sources of water is rainfall. Water can be collected as it falls as rain before it reaches the ground; or as surface water when it flows over the ground or is pooled in lakes or ponds; or as ground water when it percolates into the ground and flows or collects as ground water; or from the sea. Contamination of water supplies can occur in the source water as well as in the distribution system after water treatment has already occurred. There are many sources of water contamination, including naturally occurring chemicals and minerals (for example, arsenic, radon, uranium), local land use practices (fertilizers, pesticides, concentrated animal feeding operations), manufacturing processes, and sewer overflows or wastewater releases. The presence of contaminants in water can lead to adverse health effects, including gastrointestinal illness, reproductive problems, and neurological disorders. 4.2.2 The water supplied shall be free from pathogenic organisms, clear, free from undesirable taste and odour, neither corrosive nor scale forming and free from minerals which could produce undesirable physiological effects. The quality of water to be used for drinking shall be as per accepted standard [9-1(3)]. 4.2.3 For purposes other than drinking water if supplied separately, shall be absolutely safe from bacteriological contamination so as to ensure that there is no danger to the health of the users due to such contaminants. For purposes other than drinking, where there is an overall risk of legionella growth, it is advisable that for cold water supplies, the temperature does not exceed 20°C and a minimum temperature of 55°C for hot water supplies be maintained at all points of network so as to ensure that it is absolutely safe from bacteriological contamination and there is no danger to the health of the users due to such contaminants. 4.2.4 Waste Water Reclamation Treated sewage or other waste water of the community may be utilized for non-domestic purposes such as water for flushing, landscape irrigation, cooling towers of HVAC system, in fountains and recreational lakes where swimming is not allowed, and for certain industrial purposes after its necessary treatment to suit the nature of the use. This supply system shall be allowed in residences only if proper provision is made to avoid any cross-connection of this treated waste water with domestic water supply system. During use of treated waste water, it is recommended to have dual piping system to avoid cross-contamination. 4.2.4.1 Treatment of waste water and usage of recycled water Waste water is generated by residential and other establishments like institutional, business, mercantile Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 18. 14 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 and industrial. It includes household waste liquid from toilets, baths, showers, kitchens and sinks that is disposed of via sewers. Waste water treatment is the process of removing contaminants from wastewater, including household sewage and runoff (effluents). It includes physical, chemical, and biological processes to remove contaminants. Treatment of waste water and usage of recycled waste water may be done to make it usable for appropriate applications. The objective is to produce an environmentally safe fluid waste stream (or treated effluent) and a solid waste (or treated sludge) suitable for disposal or reuse. Separation of household waste into grey water and black water (and draining of black water into sewerage system) is becoming more common with grey water being permitted to be used for watering plants or recycled for flushing toilets after proper treatment. Waste water collection and treatment is typically subject to statutory regulations. Treatment depends on the characteristics of influent and the treatment requirements that are needed for treating the same. Waste water treatment generally involves the following three stages: a) Primary treatment — It consists of temporarily holding the wastewater for settlement of heavy solids at the bottom while oil, grease and lighter solids float to the surface. b) Secondary treatment — It removes dissolved and suspended biological matter. c) Tertiary treatment — It is more intensive treatment done in order to allow rejection into a highly sensitive or fragile ecosystem. The tertiary treatment is generally followed by disinfection. 4.2.5 Water Conservation, Water Balance and Use of Recycled Water Water conservation encompasses the policies, strategies and activities to manage fresh water as a sustainable resource, to protect the water environment and to meet current and future demand. Population, household size, and growth and affluence all affect the quantity of water used. Water balance studies should be carried out to study the availability of water from different sources and its usage for different purposes. 4.2.6 Whenever a building is used after long intervals, the water quality of the stored water shall be checked so as to ensure that the water is safe for use as per water quality requirements specified in this Code. 4.3 Estimate of Demand Load 4.3.1 Estimates of total water supply requirements for buildings shall be based on the occupant load consistent with the provisions of 4.1. 4.3.2 In making assessment of water supply requirements of large complexes, the future occupant load shall be kept in view. The following methods may be used for estimating future requirements: a) Demographic method of population projection, b) Arithmetic progression method, c) Geometrical progression method, d) Method of varying increment or incremental increase, e) Logistic method, f) Graphical projection method, or g) Graphical comparison method. 4.4 Storage of Water 4.4.1 In a building, provision is required to be made for storage of water for the following reasons: a) To provide against interruptions of the supply caused by repairs to mains, etc; b) To reduce the maximum rate of demand on the mains; c) To tide over periods of intermittent supply; and d) To maintain a storage for the fire fighting requirement of the building 4.4.2 The water may be stored in overhead tanks (OHT) and/or underground tanks (UGT). 4.4.3 Materials Used Reservoirs and tanks for the storage of water shall be constructed of reinforced concrete, brick masonry, ferrocement, mild steel, stainless steel, plastic or glass reinforced panels. 4.4.3.1 Tanks made of steel may be of welded, riveted or panel/pressed construction. The metal shall be galvanized or coated externally with a good quality anti- corrosive weather-resisting paint. Lead-based paint shall not be used in the tank. Lead-lined tanks shall not be used. Rectangular pressed steel tanks shall conform to good practice [9-1(4)]. 4.4.4 Each tank shall be provided with the following: a) Manholes — Adequate number of manholes for access and repair. The manholes shall be made of corrosion resistant material (for example, cast iron, reinforced cement concrete, steel fibre reinforced concrete, galvanized steel, high density polyethylene, fibre glass reinforced plastic or such other materials) acceptable to the Authority. Manholes shall be provided with locking arrangement to avoid misuse and tampering. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 19. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — SECTION 1 WATER SUPPLY 15 b) Ladders — Tanks higher than 900 mm deep shall be provided with corrosion resistant ladders according to the depth to enable a person to reach the bottom of the tank. c) Overflow pipe — Each tank shall be provided with an overflow pipe terminating above the ground/terrace level to act as a ‘Warning Pipe’ to indicate overflow conditions. The size of the overflow pipe shall be adequate to accept the flow. Normally the overflow pipe size shall be one size higher than the inlet pipe. When the inlet pipe diameter is large, two or more overflow pipes of equivalent cross-section may be provided. d) Vent pipes — Tanks larger than 5 000 litre capacity shall be provided with vent pipes to prevent development pressure in the tank which might result in ‘NO FLOW’ condition or inward collapse of the tank. e) Scour pipe — Each tank shall be provided with a scour pipe with an accessible valve for emptying the tank. f) Connection of overflow and scour pipe — Under no circumstances tank overflow and scour pipe shall be connected to any drain, gully trap or manhole to prevent back flow and contamination of the water. All such connections shall be discharged over a grating with an air gap of 50 mm. All overflow and vent pipes shall be provided with a mosquito proof brass grating to prevent ingress of mosquito, vermin and other insects. g) The top slab of the tank shall be suitably sloped away from its centre for proper drainage of the rainwater. h) Tanks on terraces and above ground shall be supported by appropriate structural members so as to transfer the load of the tank and the water directly on the structural members of the building. 4.4.5 Every storage tank shall be easily accessible and placed in such a position as to enable thorough inspection and cleaning to be carried out. If the storage capacity required is more than 5 000 litre, it is advantageous to arrange it in a series of tanks so interconnected that each tank can be isolated for cleaning and inspection without interfering with the supply of water. In large storage tanks, the outlet shall be at the end opposite the inlet to avoid stagnation of the water. 4.4.6 The outlet pipe shall be fixed 50 mm to 75 mm above the bottom of the tank and fitted with a strainer, preferably of brass. 4.4.7 In the case of underground storage tanks, the design of the tank shall be such as to provide for the draining of the tank when necessary and water shall not be allowed to collect around the tank. The tank shall be perfectly water-proof and shall be provided with a cement concrete cover, having a manhole opening, with a properly fitting hinged cast iron cover on a leak-proof cast iron frame. The underground tanks should not be located in low lying areas or near any public or private sewer, septic tank, leaching pool or soakage pit to prevent any contamination. The overflow of the tank should be well above (preferably 600 mm) the external surface level and terminate as a warning pipe with a mosquito proof grating. Care shall be taken to prevent backflow of local surface water into the tank in case of local flooding. Otherwise the overflow shall be terminated in a safer manner as per the site conditions. For tanks with at least one side exposed to a basement, it is safer to discharge the overflow into the basement level. The tank top slab shall also be designed to carry the load due to fire tender movement where anticipated as in the case of an extended basement. There should be no common wall between the tanks storing safe water and tanks storing water from unsafe sources. 4.4.8 In case of overhead tanks, bottom of the tanks shall be placed clear off the terrace slab such that the elevation difference between the outlet pipe of the tank and the highest fixture at the top floor of the building is minimum 2 m, which shall also prevent leakage into the structural slab. In tall buildings, the top of the tank shall be provided with the safe ladder or staircase. The top slab shall be provided with railing or a parapet wall. 4.4.9 For jointing steel pipe to a storage tank, the end of the pipe shall be screwed, passed through a hole in the tank and secured by backnuts, both inside and outside. The pipe end shall be flush with the face of the inside backnut. For jointing copper pipe to steel or copper tank, a connector of non-ferrous material shall be used. The connector shall have a shoulder to bear on the outside of the tank and shall be secured by a backnut inside. 4.4.10 The quantity of water to be stored shall be calculated taking into account the following factors: a) Hours of supply at sufficiently high pressure to fill up the overhead storage tanks; b) Frequency of replenishment of overhead tanks, during the 24 h; c) Rate and regularity of supply; and d) Consequences of exhausting storage particularly in case of public buildings like hospitals. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 20. 16 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 In case of intermittent water supply, the following guidelines should be adopted for calculation of capacity: 1) When the supply is from main OHT, the capacity of individual OHT may be taken as half a day demand. 2) In case of all the other buildings (apartments, hotels, hospitals, and commercial), the capacity of UGT and OHT may be taken as one and a half days and half a day demand. Wherever raw water and treated water are stored in separate UGTs, the combined storage capacity shall be of one and a half days demand. 3) In case of sewage treatment plant, for treated water storage in respect of flushing, one day flushing demand shall be stored in UGT or treated effluent storage tank which is part of the plant, and half a day demand shall be stored in OHT. For additional requirement of water storage for fire fighting purposes, reference may be made to Part 4 ‘Fire and Life Safety’ of the Code. NOTE — Minimum requirements for calculation of capacity of these storage tanks are as follows: a) In case only OHT is provided, it may be taken as 33.33 to 50 percent of one day’s requirement; b) In case only UGT is provided, it may be taken as 50 to 150 percent of one day’s requirement; and c) In case combined storage is provided, it may be taken as 66.6 percent UGT and 33.33 percent OHT of one day’s requirement. 4.4.11 Where the water supply distribution system is catering for separate potable water and flushing water supply, and where reclaimed or recycled treated water is being used within the building, it shall be considered as dual water supply system. In such cases, storages for flushing/reclaimed/recycled water shall be separated proportionately. Adequate measures and precautions shall be taken for physical segregation for sanitary purposes and to avoid cross-contamination in the distribution system and to prevent back contamination of water supply sources (see 4.5). 4.4.12 When only one communication pipe is provided for water supply to a building, it is not necessary to have separate storage for flushing and sanitary purposes for health reasons. In such cases when only one storage tank has been provided, tapping of water may be done at two different levels (the lower tapping for flushing) so that a part of the water will be exclusively available for flushing purposes. 4.5 Protection of Water Supply 4.5.1 General The water supply system shall be designed, installed and maintained in such a manner so as to prevent contamination from non-potable liquids, solids or gases being introduced into the potable water supply system through cross-connections or any other connection to the system. 4.5.2 Plumbing Fixtures The water supply lines and fittings for plumbing fixtures shallbeinstalledsoastopreventbackflowandshallprovide required back flow protections in accordance with 4.11. The devices, appurtenance intended for special function such as sterilization, processing, distillation, etc, shall be provided with back flow protection devices. The water supply for hospital fixtures shall be protected against backflow with a reduced pressure principle back flow assembly, an atmospheric or spill resistant vacuum breaker assembly, or an air gap. Vacuum breakers for bed pan washer hoses shall not be located less than 1 525 mm above floor. Vacuum breakers for hose connections in health care or laboratory areas shall not be less than 1 800 mm above floor. 4.5.3 Cross-Connection Control Cross-connections shall be prohibited, except where approved back flow prevention assemblies/devices are installed to protect the potable water supply (see 4.11). Potable water outlets and combination stop and waste valves shall not be installed underground or below grade. Freeze proof yard hydrants that drain the riser into the ground are considered to be stop and waste valves. Back flow prevention can be achieved by means of providing proper air gap, reduced pressure principle back flow prevention assemblies, back flow preventer with intermediate atmospheric vent, barometric loop, pressure vacuum breaker assemblies, atmospheric type vacuum breakers, double check back flow prevention assemblies, spill resistant pressure vacuum breaker, dual check back flow preventer, etc. 4.5.4 Identification of Non-Potable Water Systems Where non-potable water systems are installed, the piping conveying the non-potable water shall be identified either by colour marking, metal tags or tapes in accordance with the relevant standards and good engineering practices. 4.6 Materials, Fittings and Appliances 4.6.1 Standards for Materials, Fittings and Appliances All materials, water fittings and appliances shall conform to Part 5 ‘Building Materials’ of the Code. 4.6.2 Materials for Pipes Pipes may be of any of the following materials: a) Cast iron, vertically cast or centrifugally (spun) cast; b) Steel (internally lined or coated with bitumen or a bituminous composition, and out-coated with cement concrete or mortar, where necessary); Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 21. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — SECTION 1 WATER SUPPLY 17 c) Ductile iron, internally lined; d) Reinforced concrete; e) Prestressed concrete; f) Galvanized mild steel tubes; g) Copper; h) Brass; j) Wrought iron; k) Stainless steel; m) Polyethylene; n) Unplasticized PVC; p) Chlorinated PVC; q) Polypropylene-random copolymer (PPR); r) Composite pipes (PE-AL-PE) or any other combination; s) Cross-linked polyethylene (PEX); or t) Polybutylene pipe. 4.6.2.1 The material chosen shall be resistant to corrosion, both inside and outside or shall be suitably protected against corrosion. 4.6.2.2 Polyethylene and unplasticized PVC pipes shall not be installed near hot water pipes or near any other heat sources. For temperature limitations in the use of polyethylene and unplasticized PVC pipes to convey water, reference may be made to accepted standards [9-1(5)]. 4.7 Design of Distribution Systems 4.7.1 General For designing the distribution system, the following guidelines, in addition to those given in 4.7.2 to 4.7.6 shall be followed: a) Allplumbingsystemsinbuildingsshallconform to the general requirements given in 3.1. b) Peak factor for calculation in case of intermittent flows may generally be adopted in design as 2 to 3. c) The residual head at consumer’s tap shall be as per 3.1.2. 4.7.2 Rate of Flow One of the important items that needs to be determined before the sizes of pipes and fittings for any part of the water piping system may be decided upon, is the rate of flow in the service pipe which in turn depends upon the number of hours for which the supply is available at sufficiently high pressure. If the number of hours for which the supply is available is less, there will be large number of fittings in use simultaneously and the rate of flow will be correspondingly large. The data required for determining the size of the communication and service pipes are, a) the maximum rate of discharge required; b) the length of the pipe; and c) the head loss by friction in pipes, fittings and meters. 4.7.3 Discharge Computation 4.7.3.1 Design of consumer’s pipes based on fixture units The design of the consumers’ pipes or the supply pipe to the fixtures is based on, a) the number and kind of fixtures installed; b) the fixture unit flow rate; and c) the probable simultaneous use of these fixtures. The rates at which water is desirably drawn into different types of fixtures are known. These rates become whole numbers of small size when they are expressed in fixture unit. The water supply fixture units (WSFU) for different sanitary appliances or groups of appliances are given in Table 2. 4.7.3.2 Probable simultaneous demand The possibility that all water supply taps in any system in domestic and commercial use will draw water at the same time is extremely remote. Designing the water mains for the gross flow will result in bigger and uneconomical pipe mains and may not be necessary. A probability study made by Hunter suggests the relationship shown in Fig. 2 and Table 3. In the absence of similar studies in India, the curves based on Hunter’s study may be followed. In making use of these curves, special allowances are made as follows: a) Demands for service sinks are ignored in calculating the total fixture demand. b) Demands of supply outlets such as hose connections and air conditioners through which water flows more or less continuously over a considerable length of time shall be added to the probable flow rather than the fixture demand. c) Fixtures supplied with both hot and cold water exert reduced demands upon main hot water and cold water branches (not fixture branches). 4.7.3.3 The maximum flow rate and flush volumes shall be as given below: Plumbing Fixtures/Fittings Maximum Flow Rate Water closets 6 litre/flush Urinals 3.8 litre/flush Lavatory, metered faucet (Public) 1 litre/use Lavatory, faucet (Private) 8 litre/min Sink, faucet 8 litre/min Bidet, hand held spray 8 litre/min Shower head 10 litre/min NOTE — The maximum flow rates of plumbing fixtures and fittings provided are at the pressure of 0.42 N/mm 2 . Water closet with dual flush cistern and urinals with reduced flush volumes are recommended. Further, users/ designers are encouraged to use low flow fixtures. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 22. 18 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 Table 2 Water Supply Fixture Units (WSFU) for Different Fixtures with Minimum Pipe Sizes (Clause 4.7.3.1) Application Sl No. Type of Fixture Private Public Minimum Pipe Size mm (1) (2) (3) (4) (6) i) Bathtub 4 – 15 ii) Ablution faucet/Bidet 1 1 15 iii) Clothes washer 4 4 (see Note 7) 15 iv) Dishwasher 1.5 1.5 15 v) Drinking fountain – 0.5 (0.75) 15 vi) Hose bib 2.5 2.5 15 vii) Wash basin (with metered faucet) 1 1 15 viii) Wash basin (with standard faucet) 1.5 1.5 (2) 15 ix) Service sink 1.5 3 15 x) Kitchen sink 2 4 15 xi) Surgical sink – 2 15 xii) Scrub station in hospital (per outlet) – 3 15 xiii) Shower 2 3 15 xiv) Bathroom group (flush tank) 5 6 20 xv) Bathroom group (flush valve) 8 10 25/32 xvi) Urinal (flush valve) 3 5 (6) 20 xvii) Urinal (flush tank) 2 2 (3) 15 xviii) Urinal (sensor operated) 2 2 (3) 15 xix) Water closet (flush valve) 6 8 (10) 25/32 xx) Water closet (flush tank) 2 3 (5) 15 xxi) Combination fixture (faucet) 3 – 15 xxii) Laundry trays (faucet) 3 – 15 NOTES 1 The above table is based on Hunter’s method. 2 Hunter’s method of estimating load in plumbing systems is based on assigning a fixture unit (FU) weight to the plumbing fixtures and then converting these to equivalent litre per minute, based on the theory of probability of usage and based on the observation that all fixtures are not used simultaneously. 3 The fixture unit concept is a method of calculating maximum probable water demand within large buildings based on theory of probability. The method is based on assigning a fixture unit (FU) value to each type of fixture based on its rate of water consumption, on the length of time it is normally in use and on the average period between successive uses. 4 The values of probable demand will not change in respect of systems with flush valves and flush tanks for fixture units more than 1 000. 5 The fixtures or appliances which are not included in the above table may be sized referring to fixtures having similar flow rate and frequency of usage. 6 The minimum supply branch pipe sizes for individual fixtures are nominal sizes. 7 The clothes washer for public does not include large washer extractors, and in such cases the pipe sizing shall be determined as per manufacturer’s recommendations. 8 For more information on bathroom groups, reference may be made to specialist literature. 9 The fixture units listed in the above table represent the load for cold water service. The separate cold and hot water fixture unit value for fixtures having both hot and cold water connections may each be taken as three quarter of the listed total value of fixture. 10 A shower head over a bath tub does not increase the fixture unit value. 11 The values given in parentheses pertain to such public use buildings (congregation halls) where an enhanced requirement is expected to be encountered as compared to the normal maximum use in public use buildings. 4.7.4 Pipe Size Computation Commercially available standard sizes of pipes are only to be used against the sizes arrived at by actual design. Therefore, several empirical formulae are used, even though they give less accurate results. The Hazen and William’s formula and the charts based on the same may be used without any risk of inaccuracy in view of the fact that the pipes normally to be used for water supply are of smaller sizes. Nomogram of Hazen and William’s equation has been provided in Annex C. 4.7.5 Adequate and Excessive Water Pressure The requirements shall be as follows: a) Adequate water pressure — A minimum water pressure in accordance with 3.1.2 shall be ensured in the distribution system. The maximum pressure shall be maintained at 0.42 N/mm2 . Also, while designing, the maximum/minimum pressure required for operation of special fixtures and fittings is to be maintained as per the technical data sheet. b) Excessive water pressure — Whenever pressure exceeds 0.42 N/mm2 , and the distribution system may not be able to withstand the same, pressure reducing valves shall be installed for reduction of pressure. 4.7.6 Water Hammer Effects Water hammer is recognized by the noise that is heard when valves are shut off. This occurs when flow of moving water is suddenly stopped due to closure of valve. Water hammer arrestors may be used to absorb high pressures resulting from sudden closure of valves. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 23. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — SECTION 1 WATER SUPPLY 19 4.8 Distribution Systems in Multi-Storeyed Buildings 4.8.1 There are following four basic methods of distribution of water to a multi-storeyed buildings: a) Direct supply system from mains — public or private. b) Gravity distribution system. c) Pressurized distribution system (Hydro- pneumatic pumping system). d) Combined distribution system. 4.8.2 Direct Supply System from Mains — Public or Private This system is adopted when adequate pressure is available in the mains to supply water at adequate pressure at the topmost floor. With limited pressure available in most city mains, water from direct supply is normally not available above two or three floors. However, in gated communities or large campuses, this system can be adopted for taller buildings by incorporating design parameters such as elevated centralized water tank(s) or central hydro-pneumatic pumping system(s). For details of this system, reference may be made to good practice [9-1(6)] may be referred. 4.8.3 Gravity Distribution System This is the most common water distribution system. The system comprises pumping water to one or more overhead water tanks. Water transferred to overhead tank(s) is distributed by gravity to various parts of the building by the system of piping network. 4.8.4 Pressurized Distribution System (Hydro- pneumatic Pumping System) 4.8.4.1 Pressurized distribution system is a direct pumping system incorporating a recharge diaphragm vessel. 2A GRAPH FOR PROBABLE DEMAND UP TO 10 000 FU 2B GRAPH FOR PROBABLE DEMAND UP TO 1 000 FU Curve 1 — System With Flush Valves Curve 2 — System With Flush Tanks FIG. 2 GRAPH FOR PROBABLE DEMAND Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 24. 20 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 4.8.4.2 The system may incorporate multiple pumps with suction and discharge manifolds and a control panel to facilitate automatic operation. Total discharge capacity required may be shared by a number of pumps, where the pumps operate in duty, assist and standby configuration. 4.8.4.3 The system shall also incorporate automatic sequencing of pumps to ensure even wear and tear also a low level cutoff, to prevent dry run of the pumps. The system shall be provided with continuous power supply with provision of emergency power backup. 4.8.4.4 Modern hydro-pneumatic systems are available with variable frequency drive, where the pump is efficiently used to deliver water at rates of flow as required by the system, by varying its speed with the assistance of an electronic device, thereby meeting the demand flow through variation in speed of the motor from 960 rpm to 3 000 rpm. With this arrangement, the same pump is able to deliver water at required pressure and flow as required at different times of the day. The system consumes energy in proportion to the work done and also helps in controlling the water surge in the distribution line. 4.8.4.5 Hydro-pneumatic system generally eliminates the need of an overhead tank. As a good engineering practice and to take care of emergencies, an overhead of smaller capacity should be provided which feeds by gravity to the system (see Fig. 3). 4.8.5 Combined Distribution System 4.8.5.1 In this system, a combination of gravity and pressurized distribution is adopted. A few upper floors are provided with a pressure booster pumping system to achieve the desired residual pressure, while the lower floors are fed by gravity supply. 4.8.5.2 Water collected in the overhead tank is distributed to the various parts of the building. To achieve required residual pressure for top 2 to 4 floors for proper functioning of the fixtures, a pressure booster pumping system is installed on the dedicated outlet from overhead tank with its own distribution piping serving the top 2 to 4 floors. For lower floors, water is distributed by gravity system. 4.8.5.3 Water distribution is accomplished by providing down take pipes in the shaft from the terrace ring mains (see Fig. 4). 4.8.6 Zoning of Distribution Systems The zoning of water distribution network may be adopted for 7 to 9 floors, while conforming to the adequate pressure requirements and excessive pressure limitations in the hydraulic design (see 4.7.5). See Fig. 5 and Fig. 6 for zoning of gravity distribution system and pressurized distribution system (hydro- pneumatic pumping system), respectively. The recommended maximum permissible velocity is 2.4 m/s for water distribution. In case of hot water distribution through copper pipes, the velocity is restricted to 1.5 m/s due to concern of erosion of the piping material. 4.9 General Requirements for Pipe Work 4.9.1 Mains The following principles shall apply for the mains: Table 3 Probable Simultaneous Demand (Clause 4.7.3.2) Sl No. Demand in Fixture Units Demand with Flush Tanks litre/min Demand with Flush Valves litre/min (1) (2) (3) (4) i) 1 0 — ii) 2 3.8 — iii) 3 11.4 — iv) 4 15.1 — v) 5 22.7 — vi) 6 25.5 — vii) 8 28.1 — viii) 10 30.3 102.20 ix) 20 53.0 132.48 x) 30 75.7 155.19 xi) 40 94.6 177.90 xii) 50 109.8 196.82 xiii) 60 121.1 208.18 xiv) 70 132.5 223.32 xv) 80 143.8 234.67 xvi) 90 155.2 246.03 xvii) 100 166.5 257.38 xviii) 140 200.6 295.23 xix) 180 230.9 329.30 xx) 200 246.0 348.22 xxi) 250 283.9 382.29 xxii) 300 321.7 416.35 xxiii) 400 397.4 476.91 xxiv) 500 473.1 537.47 xxv) 750 643.5 673.73 xxvi) 1 000 787.3 787.28 xxvii) 1 250 908.4 908.40 xxviii) 1 500 1 010.6 1 010.60 xxix) 1 750 1 112.8 1 112.79 xxx) 2 000 1 215.0 1 214.99 xxxi) 2 500 1 419.4 1 419.38 xxxii) 3 000 1 635.1 1 635.12 xxxiii) 3 500 1 811.1 1 811.12 xxxiv) 4 000 1 987.1 1 987.13 xxxv) 4 500 2 115.8 2 115.82 xxxvi) 5 000 2 244.5 2 244.51 xxxvii) 5 500 2 312.6 2 312.64 xxxviii) 6 000 2 380.8 2 380.77 xxxix) 6 500 2 411.0 2 411.05 xl) 7 000 2 479.2 2 479.18 xli) 7 500 2 547.3 2 547.31 xlii) 8 000 2 615.4 2 615.44 xliii) 8 500 2 683.6 2 683.57 xliv) 9 000 2 751.7 2 751.70 xlv) 9 500 2 831.2 2 831.18 xlvi) 1 0000 2 910.7 2 910.67 Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 25. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — SECTION 1 WATER SUPPLY 21 NOTES 1 Hot water supply to be planned as per requirement by provision of geyser and hot water piping. 2 Flushing water supply from WC to be planned in case availability of recycled waste water. 3 For large and commercial buildings, water supply to be based on zone-based distribution for domestic and flushing water supply. 4 Presentation of layout and location of fixtures/appliances are only typical in nature. FIG. 3 HYDRO-PNEUMATIC SYSTEM Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 26. 22 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 NOTES 1 Pump operation to be by level controller or air vessel/pressure switch at motorized valve at OHT. 2 Hot water supply to be planned as per requirement by provision of geyser and hot water piping. 3 Flushing water supply from WC to planned in case of availability of recycled waste water. 4 For large and commercial buildings, water supply to be based on zone-based distribution for domestic and flushing water supply. 5 Presentation of layout and location of fixtures/appliances are only typical in nature. FIG. 4 OVER HEAD TANK DISTRIBUTION Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 27. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — SECTION 1 WATER SUPPLY 23 NOTES 1 Appurtenance, such as PRV should be planned in main piping network or branch piping, as required, to restrain pressure to upper limits. 2 Requirements for storage and usage of fire water shall be as per Part 4 ‘Fire and Life Safety’ of the Code. FIG. 5 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM SHOWING THE DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM IN RESPECT OF GRAVITY SYSTEM FOR A MULTI-STOREYED BUILDING Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 28. 24 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 a) Service mains shall be of adequate size to give the required rate of flow. b) Mains shall be divided into sections by the provisions of sluice valves and other valves so that water may be shut off for repairs. c) To avoid dead ends, the mains shall be arranged in a grid formation or in a network. d) Where dead ends are unavoidable, a hydrant shall be provided to act as a wash-out. e) Wash-out valve shall not discharge directly into a drain or sewer, or into a manhole or chamber directly connected to it; an effectively trapped chamber shall be interposed, into which the wash-out shall discharge. f) Air valves shall be provided at all summits, and wash-out at low points between summits. g) Mains need not be laid at unvarying gradients, NOTES 1 The given example is for 16 storeyed building with concept of upfeed and down feed ringmains. The choice of ringmain is on designer proposal. For taller building, zones and ringmains shall be planned to meet maximum and minimum pressure requirements. Appurtenance, such as PRV should be planned in main piping network or branch piping, as required, to restrain pressure to upper limits. 2 Requirements for storage and usage fo fire water shall be as per Part 4 ‘Fire and Life Safety’ of the Code. FIG. 6 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM SHOWING THE DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM IN RESPECT OF HYDRO-PNEUMATIC SYSTEM FOR A MULTI-STOREYED BUILDING Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 29. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — SECTION 1 WATER SUPPLY 25 but may follow the general contour of the ground. They shall, however, fall continuously towards the washout and rise towards the air valves. The gradient shall be such that there shall always be a positive pressure at every point under working conditions. h) Cover for the mains shall be at least 900 mm under roadways and 750 mm in the case of footpaths. This cover shall be measured from the top of the pipe to the surface of the ground. j) Mains shall be located sufficiently away from other service lines like electric and telegraph cables to ensure safety and where the mains cannot be located away from such lines, suitable protective measures shall be accorded to the mains. As far as possible, water supply and sewerage mains should be isolated from each other with certain minimum horizontal distance as per good engineering practice. 4.9.2 Communication Pipes a) Every premises that is supplied with water by the Authority shall have its own separate communication pipe. In the case of a group or block of premises belonging to the same owner the same communication pipe may supply water to more than one premises with the prior permission of the Authority. b) The communication pipe between the water main and the stop-cock at the boundary of the premises shall be laid by the Authority. c) Connections up to 50 mm diameter may be made on the water main by means of screwed ferrules, provided the size of the connections does not exceed one third the size of the water main. In all other cases, the connection shall be made by a T-branch off the water main. d) As far as practicable, the communication pipe and the underground service pipe shall be laid at right angles to the main and in approximately straight lines to facilitate location for repairs. It is also recommended that the communication pipe be laid in a pipe in pipe sleeve of larger diameter made of non- corrosive material to protect the communication pipe. e) Every communication pipe shall have a stop- cock and meter inserted in it. The waterway of eachsuchfittingshallnotbelessthantheinternal sectional area of the communication pipe and the fittings shall be located within the premises ataconspicuousplaceaccessibletotheAuthority which shall have exclusive control over it. 4.9.3 Consumer Pipes a) No consumer pipe shall be laid in the premises to connect the communication pipe without the approval of the Authority. b) The consumer pipe within the premises shall be laid underground with a suitable cover to safeguard against damage from traffic and extremes of weather. c) To control the branch pipe to each separately occupied part of a building supplied by a common service pipe, a stop valve shall be fixed to minimize the interruption of the supply during repairs. All such stop valves shall be fixed in accessible positions and properly protected. To supply water for drinking or for culinary purposes, direct taps shall be provided on the branch pipes connected directly to the consumer pipe. In the case of multi-storeyed buildings, down take taps shall be supplied from overhead tanks. d) Pumps shall not be allowed on the service pipe, as they cause a drop in pressure on the suction side, thereby affecting the supply to the adjoining properties. In cases where pumping is required, a properly protected storage tank of adequate capacity shall be provided to feed the pump. e) No direct boosting (by booster pumps) shall be allowed from the service pipes (communication and consumer pipes). f) Consumer pipes shall be so designed and constructed as to avoid air-locks. Draining taps shall be provided at the lowest points from which the piping shall rise continuously to draw-off taps. g) Consumer pipes shall be so designed as to reduce the production and transmission of noise as much as possible. h) Consumer pipes in roof spaces and unventilated air spaces under floors or in basements shall be protected against corrosion. j) Consumer pipes shall be so located that they are not unduly exposed to accidental damage and shall be fixed in such positions as to facilitate cleaning and avoid accumulations of dirt. k) All consumer pipes shall be so laid as to permit expansion and contraction or other movements. 4.9.4 Prohibited Connections a) A service pipe shall not be connected into any distribution pipe; such connection may permit the backflow of water from a cistern into the service pipe, in certain circumstances, with Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 30. 26 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 consequent danger of contamination and depletion of storage capacity. It might also result in pipes and fittings being subjected to a pressure higher than that for which they are designed, and in flooding from overflowing cisterns. b) No pipe for conveyance or in connection with water supplied by the Authority shall communicate with any other receptacle used or capable of being used for conveyance other than water supplied by the Authority. c) Where storage tanks are provided, no person shall connect or be permitted to connect any service pipe with any distributing pipe. d) No service or supply pipe shall be connected directly to any water-closet or a urinal. All such supplies shall be from flushing cisterns/ flush valves which shall be supplied from storage tank. e) No service or supply pipe shall be connected directly to any hot water system or to any other apparatus used for heating other than through a feed cistern thereof. 4.10 Jointing of Pipes 4.10.1 Cast Iron Pipes Jointing may be done by any of the following methods: a) Spigot and socket joints, or b) Flanged joints. in accordance with good practice [9-1(7)]. The lead shall conform to the accepted standards [9-1(8)].Alternative jointing materials which are found to be equally effective, may be used in place of lead joints, with the approval of the Authority. 4.10.2 Steel Pipes Plain-ended steel pipes may be jointed by welding. Electrically welded steel pipes shall be jointed in accordance with good practice [9-1(9)]. 4.10.3 Wrought Iron and Steel Screwed Pipes Screwed wrought iron or steel piping may be jointed with screwed and socketed joints. Care shall be taken to remove any burr from the end of the pipes after screwing. A jointing compound approved by the Authority and containing no red lead composition shall be used. Screwed wrought iron or steel piping may also be jointed with screwed flanges. 4.10.4 Asbestos Cement Pipes Asbestos cement pipes may be jointed in accordance with good practice [9-1(10)]. 4.10.5 Copper Pipes Copper pipes shall be jointed by internal solder ring joint, end-brazing joint or by use of compression fitting. The flux used shall be non-toxic and the solder used shall be lead free. The use of dezincification fittings shall be made in case of jointing of copper pipe and steel pipe. The jointing technology shall be used as per good engineering practice and as per manufacturers recommendations. 4.10.6 Concrete Pipes Concrete pipes shall be jointed in accordance with good practice [9-1(11)]. 4.10.7 Polyethylene and Unplasticized PVC Pipes Polyethylene and unplasticized PVC pipes shall be jointed in accordance with good practice[9-1(12)]. 4.11 Backflow Prevention 4.11.1 The installation shall be such that water delivered is not liable to become contaminated or that contamination of the public water supply does not occur. 4.11.2 The various types of piping and mechanical devices acceptable for backflow protection are: a) Barometric loop, b) Air gap, c) Atmosphere vacuum breaker, d) Pressure vacuum breaker, e) Double check valve, and f) Reduced pressure backflow device. 4.11.3 The installation shall not adversely affect drinking water, a) by materials in contact with the water being unsuitable for the purpose; b) as a result of backflow of water from water fittings, or water using appliances into pipework connected to mains or to other fittings and appliances; c) by cross-connection between pipes conveying water supplied by the water undertaker with pipes conveying water from some other source; and d) by stagnation, particularly at high temperatures. 4.11.4 No pump or similar apparatus, the purpose of which is to increase the pressure in or rate of flow from a supply pipe or any fitting or appliance connected to a supply pipe, shall be connected unless the prior written permission of the water supplier has been obtained in each instance. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 31. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — SECTION 1 WATER SUPPLY 27 The use of such a pump or similar apparatus is likely to lead to pressure reduction in the upstream pipe work which, if significant, increase the risk of backflow from other fittings. 4.11.5 The water shall not come in contact with unsuitable materials of construction. 4.11.6 No pipe or fitting shall be laid in, on or through land fill, refuse, an ash pit, sewer, drain, cesspool or refuse chute or any manhole connected with them. 4.11.7 No pipe susceptible to deterioration by contact with any substance shall be laid or installed in a place where such deterioration is likely to occur. No pipe that is permeable to any contaminant shall be laid or installed in any position where permeation is likely to occur. 4.11.8 If a liquid (other than water) is used in any type of heating primary circuit, which transfers heat to water for domestic use, the liquid shall be non-toxic and non- corrosive. 4.11.9 A backflow prevention device shall be arranged or connected at or as near as practicable to each point of delivery and use of water. Appliances with built-in backflow prevention shall be capable of passing the test. All backflow prevention devices shall be installed so that they are accessible for examination, repair or replacement. Such devices shall be capable of being tested periodically by the Authority to ensure that the device is functioning efficiently and no backflow is occurring at any time. 4.12 Conveyance and Distribution of Water Within the Premises 4.12.1 Basic Principles Wholesome water supply provided for drinking and culinary purposes shall not be liable to contamination from any less satisfactory water. There shall, therefore, be no cross-connection whatsoever between the distribution system for wholesome water and any pipe or fitting containing unwholesome water, or water liable to contamination, or of uncertain quality, or water which has been used for any other purpose. The provision of reflux or non-return valves or closed and sealed stop valves shall not be construed as a permissible substitute for complete absence of cross-connection. 4.12.2 The design of the pipe work shall be such that there is no possibility of backflow towards the source of supply from any cistern or appliance, whether by siphonage or otherwise. Reflux non-return valves shall not be relied upon to prevent such backflow. 4.12.3 Where a supply of less satisfactory water than wholesome water becomes inevitable as an alternative or is required to be mixed with the latter, it shall be delivered only into a cistern and by a pipe or fitting discharging into the air gap at a height above the top edge of the cistern equal to twice its nominal bore and in no case less than 150 mm. It is necessary to maintain a definite air gap in all appliances or taps used in water- closets. 4.12.4 All pipe work shall be so designed, laid or fixed and maintained as to remain completely water-tight, thereby avoiding wastage, damage to property and the risk of contamination. 4.12.5 No water supply line shall be laid or fixed so as to pass into or through any sewer, scour outlet or drain or any manhole connected therewith, nor through any ash pit or manure pit or any material of such nature that is likely to cause undue deterioration of the pipe. 4.12.5.1 Where the laying of any pipe through corrosive soil or pervious material is unavoidable, the piping shall be properly protected from contact with such soil or material by being carried through an exterior pipe sleeves as approved by the Authority. Any existing piping or fitting laid or fixed, which does not comply with the above requirements, shall be removed immediately by the consumer and re-laid by him in conformity with the above requirements and to the satisfaction of the Authority. 4.12.5.2 Where lines have to be laid in close proximity to electric cables or in corrosive soils, adequate precautions/protection should be taken to avoid corrosion. 4.12.6 Underground piping shall be laid at such a depth that it is unlikely to be damaged by frost or traffic loads and vibrations. It shall not be laid in ground liable to subsidence, but where such ground cannot be avoided, special precautions shall be taken to avoid damage to the piping. Where piping has to be laid across recently disturbed ground, the ground shall be thoroughly consolidated so as to provide a continuous and even support. In the case of frost conditions, the pipes shall be laid below the frost line with suitable insulation to the pipes. 4.12.7 In designing and planning the layout of the pipe work, due attention shall be given to the maximum rate of discharge required, economy in labour and materials, protection against damage and corrosion, water hammer, protection from frost, if required, and avoidance of airlocks, noise transmission and unsightly arrangement. 4.12.8 To reduce frictional losses, piping shall be as Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 32. 28 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 smooth as possible inside. Methods of jointing shall be such as to avoid internal roughness and projection at the joints, whether of the jointing materials or otherwise. 4.12.9Changeindiameterandindirectionshallpreferably be gradual rather than abrupt to avoid undue loss of head. No bend or curve in piping shall be made which is likely to materially diminish or alter the cross-section. 4.12.10 No boiler for generating steam or closed boilers of any description or any machinery shall be supplied direct from a service or supply pipe. Every such boiler or machinery shall be supplied from a feed cistern. 4.13 Laying of Mains and Pipes on Site 4.13.1 The mains and pipes on site shall be laid in accordance with good practice [9-1(13)]. The pipes laid in buildings situated in seismic zone and across large building expansion joints should be installed with suitable expansion bellows and expansion loops to mitigate expansion of piping system for its intended function without failures. 4.13.2 Excavation and Refilling The bottoms of the trench excavations shall be so prepared that the barrels of the pipes, when laid, are well bedded for their whole length on a firm surface and are true to line and gradient. In the refilling of trenches, the pipes shall be surrounded with fine selected material, well rammed so as to resist subsequent movement of the pipes. No stones shall be in contact with the pipes; when resting on rock, the pipes shall be bedded on fine-selected material or (especially where there is a steep gradient) on a layer of concrete. 4.13.2.1 The pipes shall be carefully cleared of all foreign matter before being laid. 4.13.3 Laying Underground Mains Where there is a gradient, pipe laying shall proceed in ‘uphill’ direction to facilitate joint making. 4.13.3.1 Anchor blocks shall be provided to withstand the hydraulic thrust. 4.13.4 Iron surface boxes shall be provided to give access to valves and hydrants and shall be supported on concrete or brickwork which shall not be allowed to rest on pipes. 4.13.5 Laying Service Pipes 4.13.5.1 Service pipes shall be connected to the mains by means of right-hand screw down ferrule or T-branches. The ferrules shall conform to accepted standards [9-1(14)]. 4.13.5.2 Precaution against contamination of the mains shall be taken when making a connection and, where risk exists, the main shall be subsequently disinfected. The underground water service pipe and the building sewer or drain shall be kept at a sufficient distance apart so as to prevent contamination of water. Water service pipes or any underground water pipes shall not be run or laid in the same trench as the drainage pipe. Where this is unavoidable, the following conditions shall be fulfilled: a) The bottom of the water service pipe, at all points, shall be at least 300 mm above the top of the sewer line at its highest point. b) The water service pipe shall be placed on a solid shelf excavated on one side of the common trench. c) The number of joints in the service pipe shall be kept to a minimum. d) The materials and joints of sewer and water service pipe shall be installed in such a manner and shall possess such necessary strength and durability as to prevent the escape of solids, liquids and gases there from under all known adverse conditions, such as corrosion strains due to temperature changes, settlement, vibrations and superimposed loads. 4.13.5.3 The service pipe shall pass into or beneath the buildings at a depth of not less than 750 mm below the outside ground level and, at its point of entry through the structure, it shall be accommodated in a sleeve which shall have previously been solidly built into the wall of the structure. The space between the pipe and the sleeve shall be filled with bituminous or other suitable material for a minimum length of 150 mm at both ends. 4.13.6 Pipes Laid through Ducts, Chases, Notches or Holes Ducts or chases in walls for piping shall be provided during the building of the walls. If they are cut into existing walls, they shall be finished sufficiently smooth and large enough for fixing the piping. 4.13.6.1 Piping laid in notches or holes shall not be subjected to external pressure. 4.13.7 Lagging of Pipes Where lagged piping outside buildings is attached to walls, it shall be entirely covered all round with water- proof and fire insulating material and shall not be in direct contact with the wall. Where it passes through a wall, the lagging shall be continued throughout the thickness of the wall. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 33. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — SECTION 1 WATER SUPPLY 29 4.14 Hot Water Supply Installations 4.14.1 Design Consideration 4.14.1.1 General In electric water heating practice for domestic purposes, the accepted method is to use storage heaters in which water is steadily heated up to a predetermined temperature and stored until required for use. The heating by electricity of a large quantity of water, such as water required for a hot bath, within the time normally taken to run the water into the bath, requires a heater of too high a rating to be practicable in normal domestic premises. It should be ensured that such vents and pipes are above reach/inaccessible during daily use to avoid accidents such as accidental contact and burning. 4.14.1.2 In modern hotels and apartment blocks and service apartments, centralized storage and distribution systems are adopted, where other energy sources such as oil, gas, solar panels, etc, may be used for the generation of hot water as these options prove more economical and convenient in heating large volumes of water for storage. 4.14.1.3 When water supplied to the buildings contain dissolved salts resulting in hardness of water, measures such as installation of water softening plants, etc, shall be taken to avoid formation of scales in the hot water installations. 4.14.2 Storage Temperature 4.14.2.1 The design of hot water supply system and its appliances shall be based on the temperatures at which water is normally required for the various uses, namely: Scalding : 65°C Sink : 60°C Hot bath : 43°C as run for use at 41°C Warm bath : 37°C Tepid bath : 29.5°C 4.14.2.2 In order to minimize the danger of scalding, precipitation of scale from hard water, standing heat losses, risk of steam formation and the possibility of damage to porcelain or other fittings and to surface finishes, a storage temperature of 60°C is recommended. If storage capacity is limited, a higher temperature up to 65°C may be adopted when soft water is used. 4.14.3 Storage Capacity The size of the storage vessel is governed by the maximum short time demand of the domestic premises. Depending on local conditions this shall be 50 litre to 75 litre at 60°C in a dwelling with a bath tub and 25 litre at 60°C for a shower or a tap (for bucket supply). The capacity of the storage vessel shall not be less than 20 percent in excess of the required maximum short time demand. In larger houses where a single hot water heater is intended to supply hot water to more than one bathroom or kitchen or both, the maximum short time demand shall be estimated and the capacity decided accordingly. Small electric or gas storage heaters of 15 litre to 25 litre capacity may be used to supply one or two points of draw off depending on the use of hot water. 4.14.4 Rate of Flow With storage type installation, the recommended maximum rates of flow for different types of fixtures are given in Table 4. Table 4 Rate of Hot Water Flow (Clause 4.14.4) Sl No. Fixtures Rate of Flow litre/min (1) (2) (3) i) Kitchen sink 5 ii) Wash basin 5 iii) Shower (spray type) 6.5 4.14.4.1 Hot water supply systems Identification of water supply system is critical for safe functioning and protection of occupants. The first step is correct labelling of various water systems in the building. The requirements of identification/labelling shall be adhered on every installation where different water systems are provided. While designing centralized hot water systems in major projects, the following points should be considered: a) Fuel to be used, b) Location and dimension of boiler house and calorifier chambers, c) Location and dimension of fuel storage tank, d) Means of ash disposal (in case of solid fuel), e) Location and dimension of chimney, f) Location of cold water points, g) Drainage facilities during emptying, h) Quality of water supply, and j) Provision for air combustion and ventilation. In laying hot water piping systems, the pressures of hot and cold water should be made equal at each fixture, especially where mixing faucets/thermostatic mixer are to be used. Otherwise, there would be imbalance of pressure where one pressure would be more than the other. These conditions should be avoided by proper design of the system. Return circulation systems are recommended for energy conservation and user comfort. In the inverted systems, hot water heaters and tanks Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 34. 30 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 are located at the highest point of water supply system and supply and return risers below the level of hot water source. Environmental and consumer requirements should be considered when planning the installation of a solar hot water system. Factors affecting the performance of a system and decisions about how the system should be installed, include, 1) the climate zone of the site and possibility of, i) shading; ii) frost and freezing; iii) wind; iv) dust; v) hail; and vi) corrosion and scaling. 2) the ambient air temperature. 3) the cold water temperature. 4) the availability of space and pitch of a suitable south-facing roof. 5) the presence and location of an existing hot water service. 6) the available energy sources (for example, gas or electricity). 7) the householder’s hot water usage. 8) the householder’s budget. 4.14.5 Design of Storage Vessel Storage tanks shall be oblong or cylindrical in shape and shall be installed, preferably with the long side vertical in order to assist the effective stratification or ‘layering’ of hot or cold water. The ratio of height to width or diameter shall not be less than 2 : 1. An inlet baffle should preferably be fitted near the cold inflow pipe in order to spread the incoming cold water. 4.14.6 Materials for Storage Vessel and Pipes 4.14.6.1 Under no circumstances shall ungalvanized (black) mild steel pipes and fittings, such as sockets, bushes, etc, be used in any part of domestic hot water installation, including the cold feed pipe and the vent pipe. Materials resistant to the chemical action of water supplied shall be used in construction of vessels and pipes. Each installation shall be restricted to one type of metal only, such as all copper or all galvanized mild steel. When water supplied is known to have appreciable salt content, galvanized iron vessels and pipes shall not be used. However, it is advisable to avoid use of lead pipes in making connection to wash basins. Where required it is also advisable to use vessels lined internally with glass, stainless steel, etc. 4.14.6.2 In general, tinned copper and other metals such as monel metal, etc, are suitable for most types of water. The suitability of galvanized mild steel for storage tanks depends upon the pH value of the water and the extent of its temporary hardness. For values of pH 7.2 or less, galvanized mild steel should not be used. For values of pH 7.3 and above, galvanized mild steel may be used provided the corresponding temporary hardness is not lower than those given below: pH Value Minimum Temporary Hardness Required mg/l 7.3 210 7.4 150 7.5 140 7.6 110 7.7 90 7.8 80 7.9-8.5 70 4.14.7 Location of Storage Vessel The loss of heat increases in proportion to the length of pipe between the storage vessel and the hot water outlet since each time the water is drawn, the pipe fills with hot water which then cools. The storage vessel shall therefore be so placed that the pipe runs to the most frequently used outlets are as short as possible. 4.14.8 Immersion Heater Installation 4.14.8.1 If a domestic storage vessel is to be adopted to electric heating by the provision of an immersion heater and thermostat, the following precautions shall be observed: a) Location of immersion heaters — The immersion heater shall be mounted with its axis horizontal, except in the case of the circulation type which is normally mounted with its axis approximately vertical. b) In a tank with a flat bottom, a space of not less than 75 mm below the immersion heater and 50 mm below the cold feed connection shall be provided to allow for accumulation of sludge and scale, where it will not affect the working of the immersion heater. c) In a cylindrical storage vessel with inwardly dishedbottom,theinletpipeshallbesoarranged that the incoming cold water is not deflected directlyintothehotwaterzone.Thelowestpoint of the immersion heater shall be 25 mm above the centre line of the cold feed inlet, which, in turn, is usually 100 mm above the cylinder rim. d) Location of thermostat — Where the thermostat does not form an integral part of the immersion heater, it shall be mounted with its axis horizontal, at least 50 mm away from Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 35. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — SECTION 1 WATER SUPPLY 31 and not lower than the immersion heater. e) Dual heater installations — If desired, the principle of the dual heater may be adopted. In this case, one heater and its thermostat shall be installed at a low level as indicated in (b) and (c). The second heater and its thermostat shall be similarly disposed in the upper half of the cylinder at a level depending on the reserve of hot water desired for ordinary domestic use. The bottom heater shall be under separate switch control. f) Clearance around storage vessel — Adequate clearance shall be provided between the tank and the cupboard, door or walls to allow convenient insertion and adjustment of the immersion heater and thermostat and to give space for thermal insulation. 4.14.8.2 Rating of immersion heaters The rating of an immersion heater shall be determined according to the following factors: a) Proposed hot water storage capacity (the maximum with cold water as indicated in 4.14.3 shall be taken into account), b) Rate of utilization (draw off frequency), c) Permissible recovery period, and d) Inlet water temperature. For details regarding rated input of water, refer to good practice [9-1(15)]. 4.14.9 Thermal Insulation The hot water storage vessel and pipes shall be adequately insulated, wherever necessary to minimize heat loss. The whole external surface of the storage vessel including the cover to the man hole shall also be duly insulated. Insulation may be provided by wrapping storage vessel and pipes with fibre glass, mineral wool or closed cell flexible elastomeric foam based materials of desired thickness, covered with cladding for protection from damage or from weather in case of external use. 4.14.10 Cold Water Supply to Heaters 4.14.10.1 A storage water heater (pressure type) shall be fed from a cold water storage tank and under no circumstances connected directly to the water main, except the type which incorporates a feed tank with ball valves and overflow pipe arrangement (cistern type heaters) or non-pressure type heaters. 4.14.10.2 Storage cisterns 4.14.10.2.1 The storage capacity of a cold water tank shall be at least twicethe capacity of the hot water heater. The capacity of the storage tank may, however, be 1.5 times when the number of heaters connected to one common tank exceeds 10. 4.14.10.2.2 The storage tank for supply of cold water to hot water heaters shall be separate, if practicable. In the case of a common tank which also supplies cold water to the fixtures, this cold water supply connection shall be so arranged that 50 percent of the net capacity, worked out as in 4.14.10.2.1, shall be available for supply to the hot water heaters. 4.14.10.2.3 In the case of multi-storeyed buildings where a common overhead tank over the stair/lift well is generally installed, it is advisable to have one or more local tanks for supply to the hot water heaters or a compartment in the tank with required storage always available for hot water heater. 4.14.10.2.4 In tall multi-storeyed buildings where the static pressure increases with the height, the total static pressure on the hot water heaters on the lowest floor shall not exceed the rated working pressure of the hot water heater installed. Should the height of the building so require, additional tanks shall be provided on the intermediate floors to restrict the static head to permissible limits or the pressure shall be reduced to working pressure by providing pressure reducing valves. 4.14.10.2.5 As an alternative to the arrangements stated in 4.14.10.2.3 and 4.14.10.2.4, an individual storage tank in each flat may be provided for supply to hot water heaters. 4.14.11 Cold Water Feed 4.14.11.1 The feed pipe connecting cold water tank with the hot water heater shall not be of less than 20 mm bore and it shall leave the cold water tank at a point not less than 50 mm above the bottom of the tank and shall connect into the hot water heater near its bottom. The feed pipe shall not deliver cold water to any other connection, but into the hot water cylinders only. 4.14.11.2 In the case of multi-storeyed buildings, a common cold water feed pipe may be installed, but each hot water heater shall be provided with a check valve (horizontal type check valve shall be preferred to vertical type for easy maintenance). 4.14.11.3 Care shall be taken in installing the piping to prevent air locks in the piping and negative pressure in the hot water heater. Cold water feed pipe shall not be cross-connected with any other source of supply under pressure. 4.14.12 Hot Water Piping 4.14.12.1 Expansion pipe or vent pipe 4.14.12.1.1 Each non-pressure type hot water heater or cylinder shall be provided with a vent pipe of not Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 36. 32 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 less than 20 mm bore. The vent pipe shall rise above the water line of the cold water tank by at least 150 mm plus 10 mm for every 300 mm height of the water line above the bottom of the heater. The vent shall discharge at a level higher than the cold water tank and preferably in the cold water tank supplying the hot water heaters. Care shall be taken to ensure that any accidental discharge from the vent does not hurt or scald any passerby or persons in the vicinity. It shall be ensured that such vents and pipes are so located so as not to encroach into the minimum maneuvering space and should be suitably insulated to avoid accidental contact and burns. NOTE — Pressure type water heaters are very commonly used and non-pressure type is slowly phased out. 4.14.12.1.2 The vent pipe shall be connected to the highest point of the heater vessel and it shall not project downwards inside it, as otherwise air may be trapped inside, resulting in surging and consequent noises. 4.14.12.1.3 At no point, after leaving the vessel, shall the vent pipe dip below the level of its connection with the vessel. 4.14.12.1.4 A vent pipe may, however, be used for supply of hot water to any point between the cold water tank and the hot water heaters. 4.14.12.1.5 The vent pipe shall not be provided with any valve or check valves. 4.14.12.2 Hot water heaters 4.14.12.2.1 The common hot water delivery pipe shall leave the hot water heater near its top and shall be of not less than 20 mm bore generally, not less than 25 mm bore if hot water taps are installed on the same floor as that on which the hot water heater is situated. 4.14.12.2.2 Hot water taps shall be of such design as would cause the minimum friction. Alternatively, oversized tap may be provided, such as a 20 mm tap on a 15 mm pipe. 4.14.12.2.3 The hot water distributing system shall be so designed as to ensure that the time lag between opening of the draw-off taps and discharge of hot water is reduced to the minimum to avoid wastage of an undue amount of water which may have cooled while standing in the pipes when the taps are closed. With this end in view, a secondary circulation system with flow and return pipes from the hot water tank shall be used where justified. Whether such a system is used or not, the length of pipe to a hot water draw-off tap, measured along the pipe from the tap to the hot water tank or the secondary circulation pipe, shall not exceed the lengths given in Table 5. Table 5 Maximum Permissible Lengths of Hot Water Draw-Off Pipes (Clause 4.14.12.2.3) Sl No. Largest Internal Diameter of Pipe Length m (1) (2) (3) i) Not exceeding 20 mm 12 ii) Exceeding 20 mm but not exceeding 25 mm 7.5 iii) Exceeding 25 mm 3.0 NOTE — In the case of a composite pipe of different diameters, the largest diameter is to be taken into consideration for the purpose of this table. 4.14.12.2.4 Wherever mixing of hot and cold water is done by a mixing fitting, that is, hot and cold stop-cocks deliver to a common outlet of mixed water (that is, showers, basin or bath supply fittings), the pressure in the cold and hot water systems shall be equal. This can be achieved by connecting the cold water supply from an overhead tank at the same static height as the overhead tank supplying cold water to the hot water heaters. In case this is not possible, hot and cold water should be supplied to the fixtures by separate supply taps. The hot and cold water thermostatic mixers/diverters/ faucets for public use should have ‘hot’ and ‘cold’ clearly marked in the form of colour coding and tactile information. The functioning of hot and cold water from the thermostatic mixer/diverter/faucet should be consistent, for example, a clockwise turn should result in discharge of hot water and counter clockwise for cold. It is recommended that a thermostat be installed to limit the temperature of the hot water to a maximum of 40°C in order to prevent scalding. All faucets/mixers/ diverts in public use shall be automatic (sensor operated) or lever type (see also B-7 and B-9 of Part 3 ‘Development Control Rules and General Building Requirements’ of the Code). 4.14.13 Types of Hot Water Heaters The various types of water heaters used for preparation of hot water are as follows: a) Electric storage heaters: 1) Non–pressure or open outlet type, 2) Pressure type, 3) Cistern type, and 4) Dual heater type. b) Gas water heaters: 1) Instantaneous type, and 2) Storage type. c) Solar heating systems: 1) Independent roof mounted heating units, and Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 37. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — SECTION 1 WATER SUPPLY 33 2) Centrally banked heated system. d) Central hot water system: 1) Oil fired, 2) Gas fired, 3) Electrical coil type, and 4) Heat Pump. 4.14.13.1 The quality and construction of the different types of hot water heaters shall be in accordance with good practice [9-1(16)]. 4.14.13.2 Requirements in regard to inspection and maintenance of hot water supply installations shall be in accordance with 4.15.1 to 4.15.4. 4.15 Inspection and Testing 4.15.1 Testing of Mains before Commencing Work All pipes, fittings and appliances shall be inspected, before delivery at the site to see whether they conform to accepted standards. All pipes and fittings shall be inspected and tested by the manufacturers at their factory and shall comply with the requirements of this Section. They shall be tested hydraulically under a pressure equal to twice this maximum permissible working pressure or under such greater pressure as may be specified. The pipes and fittings shall be inspected on site before laying and shall be sounded to disclose cracks. Any defective items shall be clearly marked as rejected and forthwith removed from the site. 4.15.2 Testing of Mains after Laying After laying and jointing, the main shall be slowly and carefully charged with water by providing a 25 mm inlet with a stop-cock, so that all air is expelled from the main. The main is then allowed to stand full of water for a few days if time permits, and then tested under pressure. The test pressure shall be 0.5 N/mm2 or double the maximum working pressure, whichever is greater. The pressure shall be applied by means of a manually operated test pump, or, in the case of long mains or mains of a large diameter, by a power-driven test pump, provided the pump is not left unattended. In either case, due precaution shall be taken to ensure that the required test pressure is not exceeded. Pressure gauges shall be accurate and shall preferably have been recalibrated before the test. The pump having been stopped, the test pressure shall maintain itself without measurable loss for at least 5 min. The mains shall be tested in sections as the work of laying proceeds; it is an advantage to have the joints exposed for inspection during the testing. The open end of the main may be temporarily closed for testing under moderate pressure by fitting a water-tight expanding plug of which several types are available. The end of the main and the plug shall be secured by struts or otherwise, to resist the end thrust of the water pressure in the mains. 4.15.2.1 If the section of the main tested terminates into a sluice valve, the wedge of the valve shall not be used to retain the water; instead the valve shall be temporarily fitted with a blank flange, or, in the case of a socketed valve, with a plug, and the wedge placed in the open position while testing. End support shall be given as in 4.15.2. 4.15.3 Testing of Service Pipes and Fittings When the service pipe is complete, it shall be slowly and carefully charged with water, allowing all air to escape, care being taken to avoid all shock or water hammer. The service pipe shall then be inspected under working conditions of pressure and flow. When all draw-offs taps are closed, the service pipe shall be absolutely water-tight. All piping, fittings and appliances shall be checked for satisfactory support, and protection from damage, corrosion and frost. Because of the possibility of damage in transit, cisterns shall be re-tested for water-tightness on arrival at the site, before fixing. 4.15.4 In addition to the provisions given in 4.15.1, provisions given in 4.15.4.1 to 4.15.4.3 shall also apply to hot water supply installations in regard to inspection and testing. 4.15.4.1 Testing of the system after installation After the hot water system, including the hot water heaters, has been installed, it shall be carefully charged with water, so that all air is expelled from the system. The entire system shall then be hydraulically tested to a pressure of 0.5 N/mm2 or twice the working pressure, whichever is greater, for a period of at least 30 min after a steady state is reached. The entire installation shall then be inspected visually for leakages, and sweating. All defects found shall be rectified by removing and remaking the particular section. Caulking of threads, hammering and welding of leaking joints shall not be allowed. 4.15.4.2 Hot water testing After the system has been proved water-tight, the hot water heaters shall be commissioned by connecting the same to the electrical supply. The system shall then be observed for leakage in pipes due to expansion or overheating. The temperature of water at outlets shall be recorded. The thermostats of the appliances shall be checked and adjusted to temperatures specified in 4.14.2.1. 4.15.4.3 Electrical connection For relevant provisions regarding general and safety requirements for household and similar electrical appliances, reference may be made to good practice Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 38. 34 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 [9-1(15)]. The metal work of the water heating appliances and installation other than current carrying parts shall be bonded and earthed in conformity with the good practice [9-1(15)]. It should be noted that screwing of an immersion heater into a tank or cylinder cannot be relied upon to effect a low resistance earth connection, a satisfactory separate earthing of heater should be effected. 4.16 Cleaning and Disinfection of the Supply System 4.16.1 All water mains communications pipes, service pipes and pipes used for distribution of water for domestic purposes shall be thoroughly and efficiently disinfected before being taken into use and also after every major repair. The method of disinfection shall be subject to the approval of the Authority. The pipes shall also be periodically cleaned at intervals, depending upon thequalityofwater,communicationpipesandthestorage cisterns shall be thoroughly cleaned at least once every year in order to remove any suspended impurities that may have settled in the pipes or the tanks. 4.16.2 Disinfection of Storage Tanks and Down Take Distribution Pipes The storage tanks and pipes shall first be filled with water and thoroughly flushed out. The storage tank shall then be filled with water again and a disinfecting chemical containing chlorine added gradually while the tanks are being filled, to ensure thorough mixing. Sufficient quantities of chemicals shall be used to give the water a dose of 50 parts of chlorine to one million parts of water. If ordinary bleaching powder is used, the proportions will be 150 g of powder to 1 000 litre of water. The powder shall be mixed with water to a creamy consistency before being added to the water in the storage tank. When the storage tank is full, the supply shall be stopped and all the taps on the distributing pipes opened successively working progressively away from the storage tank. Each tap shall be closed when the water discharged begins to smell of chlorine. The storage tank shall then be topped up with water from the supply pipe and with more disinfecting chemical in the recommended proportions. The storage tank and pipes shall then remain charged for at least 3 h. Finally, the tank and pipes shall be thoroughly flushed out before any water is used for domestic purposes. 4.17 Water Supply Systems in High Altitudes and/ or Sub-Zero Temperature Regions 4.17.1 Selection and Source In general, the site selected for a water source shall be such as to minimize the length of transmission line so as to reduce the inspection and upkeep. Attempt shall be made, where feasible, to locate the source near the discharge of waste heat, such as of power plants provided it does not affect the potability of water. 4.17.2 Pumping Installation Pump and pumping machinery shall be housed inside well-insulated chambers. Where necessary, arrangements shall be made for heating the inside of pump houses. Pump houses, as far as possible, should be built directly above the water intake structures. 4.17.3 Protection of Storage Water and Treatment Where ambient temperatures are so low as to cause danger of freezing, proper housing, insulation and protection shall be provided for all processes and equipment. If necessary, means shall be provided for proper heating of the enclosure. 4.17.4 Transmission and Distribution Freezing of the buried pipe may be avoided primarily by laying the pipe below the level of the frost line; well consolidated bedding of clean earth or sand, under, around or over the pipe should be provided. For the efficient operation and design of transmission and distribution work, the available heat in the water shall be economically utilized and controlled. If the heat which is naturally present in water is made equate to satisfy heat losses from the system, the water shall be warmed. Where economically feasible, certain faucets on the distribution system may be kept in a slightly dripping condition so as to keep the fluid in motion and thus prevent is freezing. If found unsuitable for drinking purposes, such water may be used for heating purposes. Heat losses shall be reduced by insulation, if necessary. Any material that will catch, absorb or hold moisture shall not be used for insulation purposes. Adequate number of break pressure water tanks and air release valves shall be provided in the distribution system. NOTE — The level of frost line is generally found to be between 0.9 m and 1.2 m below ground level in the northern regions of India, wherever freezing occurs. 4.17.4.1 Materials for pipes Distribution pipes shall be made of any of the following materials conforming to Part 5 ‘Building Materials’ of the Code: a) High density polyethylene pipes, b) Asbestos cement pipes, c) Galvanized iron pipes, d) Cast iron pipes, e) Copper pipes, f) Chlorinated PVC pipes, g) Unplasticized PVC pipes (where it is laid before frost line), and h) Stainless steel pipes. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 39. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — SECTION 1 WATER SUPPLY 35 4.17.4.2 Materials for insulation of pipes Insulation of pipes may be provided by wrapping the pipe with fibre glass, mineral wool or closed cell flexible elastomeric foam based insulation materials of desired thickness covered with cladding for protection from damage or from weather in case of external use/pipes laid in exposed conditions; other materials, like 85 percent magnesia,preformedpipesections,etc,mayalsobeused. 4.17.4.3 Distribution methods Distribution by barrels or tank trucks shall be employed, where the water requirements are temporary and small. Utmost care shall be exercised for preventing the water from being contaminated by maintaining a residual of disinfecting agent at all times. Hoses, pails and the tank shall be kept free from dust and filth during all period of operation. Where winter temperatures are low, making frost penetration depths greater during the winter and where adequate facilities for heating the water in the distribution system do not exist, the use of tank trucks or barrels for delivery of water shall be considered only forcoldweather;duringthewarmweather,pipingsystem for seasonal use may be supplemented. 4.17.4.4Intheconventionaldistributionsysteminvolving the use of a network of pipelines requiring no auxiliary heat,it isessential that the pipelinesare buriedwell below thefrostline.Adequatefacilitiesfordrainingthepipelines shall be provided where there is a danger of frost. 4.17.4.5 House service connections House service connections shall be kept operative by the use of adequate insulation at exposed places extending belowthefrostline.Figure7showsatypicalarrangement for providing insulation for house service connections. 4.17.5 For detailed information on planning and designing water supply system peculiar to high altitudes and/or sub-zero temperature regions of the country, reference may be made to good practice [9-1(17)]. 4.18 Guidelines to Maintenance 4.18.1 Storage tanks shall be regularly inspected and shall be cleaned out periodically, if necessary. Tanks showing signs of corrosion shall be emptied, thoroughly wire brushed to remove loose material (but not scraped), cleaned and coated with suitable bituminous compositions or other suitable anti-corrosive material not liable to impart taste or odour or otherwise contaminate the water. Before cleaning the cistern, the outlets shall be plugged to prevent debris from entering the pipes. Tanks shall be examined for metal wastage and water tightness after cleaning. 4.18.2 Record drawings showing pipe layout and valve positions shall be kept up to date and inspection undertaken to ensure that any maintenance work has not introduced cross-connections or any other undesirable feature. Any addition or alterations to the systems shall be duly recorded from time-to-time. 4.18.3 Any temporary attachment fixed to a tap or outlet shall never be left in such a position that back-siphonage of polluted water may occur into the supply system. 4.18.4 All valves shall periodically be operated to maintain free movement of the working parts. 4.18.5 All taps and ball valves shall be watertight, glands shall be made good, washers shall be replaced and the mechanism of spring operated taps and ball FIG. 7 INSULATION DETAILS AT SERVICE CONNECTION Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 40. 36 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 valves shall be repaired where required. 4.18.6 All overflow pipes shall be examined and kept free from obstructions. 4.18.7 The electrical installation shall be checked for earth continuity and any defects or deficiencies corrected in the case of hot water supply installations. 4.19 Swimming Pools 4.19.1 General A swimming pool is a container that is filled with water toenable swimming orsuchotherleisureactivities.Pools can be sunk into the ground or built above ground (as a freestanding construction or as part of a building or other larger structure), and are also a standard feature aboard ocean liners and cruise ships. In-ground pools are most commonly constructed from materials such as concrete, natural stone, metal, plastic or fiberglass, and can be of a custom size and shape or built to a standardized size. All pools open to public shall take care of the barrier- free design for accessibility and use by persons with disabilities. Reference shall also be made to 13 of Part 3 ‘Development Control Rules and General building Requirements’ of the Code for applicable requirements. 4.19.1.1 Swimming pools shall be of three types, namely: Type Characteristic Fill and draw Clear water of potable quality is retained till it becomes turbid or unfit for use. Thereafter, the pool is drained, cleaned and refilled with clear water. This type is not recommended considering water conservation Flow through Clear water of hygienic quality flows continuously. This type requires more water for replenishment and so cautious decision of usage of such pools should be made; it is not recommended considering water conservation Recirculating Recirculation system shall be provided to minimize water wastage and disinfection shall be done to ensure hygiene. The recirculation system shall be based on the nature of usage such as private, public, wading and competition pools. The entire pool water should be filtered based on the turnover period for various types of pools 4.19.1.2 Turnover rate It is the amount of time it would take for the volume of the pool to pass through the filtration system one time. Turnover rate is measured in hours and is expressed as: Turnover rate, in h = Pool volume (in litre)/Flow (in litre/h) NOTE— Pool volume comprises volume of the pool water, balancing tank, overflow gutter and circulation pipe. Typical turnover rates for the following pools are: Type of Pool Turnover Rate h Swimming pool: a) Private (outdoor) b) Private (indoor) c) Public d) Competition 6 10 6 6 Wading pool 1 Spa (public) Spa (private) ½ 1 4.19.1.3 Swimming pool user load The maximum load for the pool shall be: a) For pool depth up : 2.2 m2 surface area to 1 m per user b) For pool depth : 2.7 m2 surface area up to 1.5 m per user c) For pool depth : 4.0 m2 surface area per more than 1.5 m user 4.19.1.4 Recommended dimensions of the swimming pools shall be: a) Half sized olympic : 25 m (length) × 12 to 13m pools (width) × 1.8 m (depth) b) Full size olympic : 50 m (length) × 25 m pools (wide) × 2 m (depth) c) Diving depth : 3.5 m for 1 m spring board; and 5 m for a 10 m platform d) Maximum depth : See 4.19.2.7 e) Ladders : 2 treads for 1.2 m depth; 3 treads for 1.2 m to 1.5 m depth; and 4 treads for 1.5 m depth f) Displacement : 60 litre per user for deeper pools; and 45 litre for shallow pools 4.19.2 Design 4.19.2.1 The pool should be so designed to withstand all anticipated hydraulic structural loadings for both full and empty conditions. All appurtenances to the Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 41. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — SECTION 1 WATER SUPPLY 37 pool, such as diving boards and slides, shall be designed to carry the anticipated load. Any obstruction creating a safety hazard shall not extend into or above the pool, or shall not protrude from the floor of the pool. Designers may refer good practice [9-1(18)] for providing the guidance on the procedures and the precautions to be taken during construction of swimming pool to ensure the water tightness of the structure. 4.19.2.2 Material Any suitable material that is non-toxic and provides a rigid watertight shell with a smooth, impervious, light colour finish should be used to construct the pool. The floor of shallow areas shall have a slip-resistant finish. Sand or earth shall not be permitted to use as an interior finish in a swimming pool. 4.19.2.3 Dimensions The shape and size of a pool largely depend on the usage. Shape should be considered from the standpoint of safety and circulation of the pool water. NOTES 1 A long and rectangular pool may be ideal for sports and exercise as it gives length and breadth, but the shape of a pool for recreation largely depend on the choice of the owners, available space for making the pool and the design of the house. 2 In sports, normally the swimming pools are 50 m long, minimum 21 m wide and 1.8 m overall depth. 4.19.2.4 Floor slopes Slope of the floor of the pool should be made downward toward the main drain. All slopes should be uniform. The slope in shallow areas should not exceed 300 mm vertical in 3.6 m horizontal except for a slope directed downward from a transition point, which shall not exceed 300 mm vertical in 1m horizontal. In portions of the pool with a depth greater than 1.5 m, the front slope of the deep area shall not be steeper than 300 mm in 1 m. 4.19.2.5 Transition point Transition points should be marked with a stripe on the pool floor having a width of at least 100 mm and a colour that contrasts with that of the floor, and with a buoyed safety rope with colour buoys, installed at least 300 mm on the shallow side of the transition point. In other pools having adjoining shallow and deep areas, a safety rope with colour buoys shall be installed where the water depth reaches 1.5 m. 4.19.2.6 Pool walls Where the pool depth is 1 m or less, pool walls shall be vertical to the floor and the junction of the wall with the floor shall consist of a cove with a radius not exceeding 150 mm. Where the pool depth exceeds 1 m, pool walls shall meet one of the following criteria: a) The wall shall be vertical for a depth of at least 1.5 m below the water level, below which the wall may angle to the floor; or b) The wall shall be vertical for a depth of at least 1 m below the water level, below which the wall shall form a curve to the floor. The curve shall be tangent to the pool wall. 4.19.2.7 Water depth The depth of a swimming pool depends on the purpose of the pool, and whether it is open to the public or strictly for private use. If it is a private casual, relaxing pool, it may go from 1.0 m to 1.5 m deep. If it is a public pool designed for diving, it may slope from 3.5 m to 5.0 m in the deep end. A children’s play pool may be from 0.3 m to 0.6 m deep. Public pools may have differing depths to accommodate different swimmer requirements. Water depths may be clearly marked on the pool walls. The width between handrails of the pool stairs should be between 500 mm and 600 mm. 4.19.2.8 Walkways and deck areas Pools shall be completely surrounded by a deck that is at least 1.2 m in width and extends completely around and adjacent to the pool. There shall be no obstructions or interruptions of the pool deck within the 1.2 m adjacent to the pool other than necessary structural supports, or appurtenances such as diving boards, slides, perimeter overflow systems, or handrails. A clear, unobstructed walkway at least 1.2 m in width shall be maintained at such obstructions or interruptions. A wheelchair turning space of minimum 1.5 m × 1.5 m shall be provided at key places in the walkway. Structural supports located within the minimum required deck width or within 1.2 m of the swimming pool shall be no closer than 3 m apart measured parallel to the adjacent perimeter of the pool, with the dimension of any single support in a plane parallel to the adjacent pool perimeter not greater than 1 m and the sum of all such support dimensions not greater than 10 percent of the pool perimeter. The deck between two adjacent swimming pools shall be at least 2.5 m wide. All decks and walkways shall have an unobstructed overhead clearance of at least 2 m. Synthetic material which meets the following criteria may be installed for deck coverings: a) Non-fibrous and allows drainage such that it will not remain wet or retain moisture; b) Inert and will not support bacterial or fungal growth; Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 42. 38 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 c) Durable; d) Cleanable; and e) Provides a slip-resistant finish. The decks and walkways shall have a paved surface. The surface of the pool deck and other surfaces used for foot contact, such as gratings of perimeter overflow systems, shall be slip-resistant. The outer perimeter of the deck for outdoor pools shall be at least 10 cm higher than the surrounding ground surface except where access is provided to adjacent turf areas. The pool shall have an accessible entry and exit that is accessible to persons with disabilities. Accessible entry/ exit may require provision of a transfer wall or/and a sloped entry with an aquatic chair. Installing a pool lifts may be another option for accessible entry/exit. The transfer wall should have a minimum clear deck space of 1.5 m × 1.5m, with a slope not steeper than 1:48 at the base of the transfer wall. The height of the transfer wall should be 400 mm to 480 mm from the deck floor. The transfer wall should be 300 mm to 400 mm wide. The length should be minimum 1.5 m centered on the clear deck space. Surfaces of transfer walls shall not be sharp and shall have rounded edges. A grab bar should be provided on the transfer wall. Grab bars shall be perpendicular to the pool wall and shall extend the full depth of the transfer wall. The top of the gripping surface shall be 100 mm to 150 mm above transfer walls. Clearance of 610 mm should be available on both sides of the grab bar. 4.19.2.9 Starting platforms Starting platforms may be from 0.50 m to 0.75 m above the surface of water. The maximum height of the platform above the water shall be 0.75 m where the water depth is 1.2 m or greater, and 0.50 m when the water depth is less than 1.2 m. The surface area of each platform shall be 0.5 m × 0.5 m with a maximum slope of not more than 10º. Surface of each block shall be covered with non-slip material and with back stroke hand grip facility. 4.19.3 Electrical Installation 4.19.3.1 Lighting Artificial lighting shall be provided at all indoor pools and at all outdoor pools that are open for use after sunset in accordance with one of the following: a) Underwater lighting of at least 8.35 lumen or 5.5 W/m2 of pool water surface area, located to provide illumination of the entire pool floor; plus area lighting of at least 10 lumen or 6.6 W/m2 of deck area. b) If underwater lights are not provided, at least 33.5 lumen or 2.2 W/m2 of pool water surface area and deck area. Where portable electric vacuum cleaning equipment is used, electrical receptacles with ground-fault circuit interrupter protection shall be provided. Separation between receptacles shall be a maximum of 30 m. All receptacles installed in the swimming pool area shall have waterproof covers and ground-fault circuit interrupter protection. Lighting controls should not be accessible to the public. 4.19.3.2 Ventilation Adequate ventilation shall be provided in facilities to prevent objectionable odor. 4.19.3.3 Shower and bathroom Separate shower, dressing booth and sanitary facilities shall be provided for each gender. This may not be applicable for schools and other institutional use where a pool may be open to one gender at a time. The rooms should be well lit, drained, ventilated, and of good construction, using impervious materials. They should be developed and planned to ensure maintenance of good sanitation throughout the building at all times. Floors should have a slip-resistant surface and sufficiently smooth to ensure ease in cleaning. Each shower and toilet block provided per pool, open for use by public, shall have a unisex accessible shower, dressing-cum-toilet facility for persons with disabilities. Design specifications of this accessible facility shall be as per 13 of Part 3 ‘Development Control Rules and General Building Requirements’ of the Code. 4.19.4 Water Treatment System 4.19.4.1 General A water treatment system shall be provided to filter, chemically balance and disinfect the swimming pool water. 4.19.4.2 Hair and lint strainer A hair and lint strainer shall be installed on the suction side of the pump except on vacuum filter systems. The strainer basket shall be easily removable. Valves shall be installed to allow the flow to be shut off during cleaning, switching baskets or inspection. 4.19.4.3 Inlets Inlets for filtered water shall be located and directed suitably to produce uniform circulation of water to facilitate the maintenance of a uniform disinfectant residual throughout the entire pool without the existence of dead spots, and to produce surface flow patterns that effectively assist skimming. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 43. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — SECTION 1 WATER SUPPLY 39 4.19.4.4 Outlets Pools shall be provided with a minimum of two drains (outlets) at the deepest point. Centre-to-centre distance between drains shall not exceed 2.0 m. Drains shall not be more than 3.0 m away from the pool walls. The main drain may be connected to the recirculation system. Openings shall be covered by grating which cannot be removed without the use of tools. Openings of the grating shall be at least four times the area of the main drain pipe or have an open area. The maximum width of grate openingsshallnotexceed8mm.Maindrainsandallother suction outlets installed in the pool shall be designed to preventbatherentrapmentandshallbeofanti-vortextype. The velocity at outlet pipe shall not be more than 0.3 m/s. 4.19.4.5 Velocities Maximum permissible velocities for various components of the pools are as follows: a) Suction pipe — less than 1.5 m/s b) Return pipe — 1.5 to 2 m/s c) Return/inlet fittings — 2.4 to 2.75 m/s in private pools and 1.5 to 2 m/s in public pools 4.19.4.6 Balancing (surge) tank Overflow system shall be designed for effective surge capacity. Balancing tank should be provided of capacity to accommodate surge storage and storage for make up water. The volume of the balancing tank shall be the total of the above with equal proportions. 4.19.4.7 Make-up water Make-up water shall be added through a fixed air gap of at least 15 cm to the pool, surge tank, vacuum filter tank, or other receptacle. When make-up water is added directly to the pool, the fill-spout should be located under a low diving board or immediately adjacent to a ladder rail, grab rail, or fixed lifeguard chair. 4.19.4.8 Filtration The design filtration rate in the particular application in which the filter is utilized shall not exceed the maximum design filtration rate for which the filter was installed. Wash or backwash water from diatomaceous earth filters shall be passed through a separation tank designed for removal of suspended diatomaceous earth and solids, prior to disposal. NOTE — Filtration rates for various types of filters are: a) Low rate filter — 10 m3 /m2 /h b) Medium rate filter — 11 to 30 m3 /m2 /h c) High rate filter — 31 to 50 m3 /m2 /h d) Minimum flow rate for filter back wash — 30 m3 / m2 /h 4.19.4.9 Disinfection The pool water shall be continuously disinfected by suitable disinfecting agent that imparts easily measured residual. Gaseous chlorine, chlorine compounds, bromine compounds or other bactericidal agents should be used to maintain the quality parameters of water. 4.19.5 Water Quality 4.19.5.1 Disinfectant residual Where chlorine is used as a disinfectant, the chlorine residual shall be maintained between 1.0 and 4.0 ppm. as free chlorine residual. A free chlorine residual of at least 2.0 ppm shall be maintained when the pool water temperature exceeds 30ºC. Where bromine is used as a disinfectant, a bromine residual shall be maintained between 2.0 and 8.0 ppm as total bromine. A bromine residual of at least 4.0 ppm shall be maintained when the pool water temperature exceeds 30ºC. Where chlorinated cyanurates are used, the cyanuric acid concentration shall not exceed 100 ppm. Where silver/copper or copper ion generators are used, the concentration of copper shall not exceed 1.3 ppm andthe concentrationofsilvershall not exceed0.05 ppm. Where ozone isused,the ambient airozone concentration shall be less than 0.1 ppm. at all times either in the vicinity of the ozonator or at the pool water surface. For all other physical, chemical and bacteriological parameters, the quality of water used in swimming pools in continuous circulation type shall conform to good practices [9-1(19)]. 4.20 Allowance for Expansion 4.20.1 The allowances for expansion of the water pipes are recommended as given below: a) All pipes should be installed at ambient temperature. b) Pipes carrying hot fluids such as water or steam operate at higher temperatures. It follows that they expand, especially in length, with an increase from ambient to working temperatures. This will create stress upon certain areas within the distribution system, such as pipe joints, which, in the extreme, could cause fracture. c) The pipe work system shall be sufficiently flexible to accommodate the movements of the components as they expand. In many cases, the flexibility of the pipe work system, due to the length of the pipe and number of bends and supports, means that no undue stresses are imposed. In other installations, however, it will be necessary to incorporate some means of achieving this required flexibility. d) The expansion fitting is one method of accommodating expansion. These fittings are placed within a line and are designed to accommodate the expansion without the total lengthofthe line changing.Theyare commonly called expansion bellows, due to the bellows construction of the expansion sleeve. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 44. 40 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 e) Other expansion fittings can be made from the pipe work itself. This can be a cheaper way to solve the problem, but more space is needed to accommodate the pipe. 4.20.2 Full Loop a) This is simply one complete turn of the pipe and, on steam pipe work, should preferably be fitted in a horizontal rather than a vertical position to prevent condensate accumulating on the upstream side. b) The downstream side passes below the upstream side and great care shall be taken that it is not fitted wrong way round, as condensate can accumulate in the bottom. Sl No. Particulars Ground Colour First Colour Band Second Colour Band (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) i) Cooling water Sea green French blue — ii) Boiler feed water Sea green Gulf red — iii) Condensate water Sea green Light brown — iv) Drinking Sea green French blue Signal red v) Treated Sea green Light orange — vi) Fire water Fire red Crimson red — vii) Water with central heating below 60°C Sea green Canary yellow — viii) Water with central heating between 60 to 100°C Sea green Dark violet — ix) Water with central heating above 100°C Sea green Dark violet Signal red x) Cold water from storage tanks Sea green French blue Canary yellow xi) Domestic, hot water Sea green Light grey — xii) Hydraulic power water Sea green Black — xiii) Untreated sea/river water Sea green white — xiv) Filtered water Sea green Light brown — xv) Soft water Sea green Light brown Signal red xvi) Warm water Sea green Light grey Canary yellow xvii) Chilled water Sea green Black Canary yellow xviii) Sprinkler and hydrant water Sea green White Signal red xix) Waste water Sea green Canary yellow Signal red When full loops are to be fitted in a confined space, care shall be taken to specify that wrong-handed loops are not supplied. c) The full loop does not produce a force in opposition to the expanding pipe work as in some other types, but with steam pressure inside the loop, there is a slight tendency to unwind, which puts an additional stress on the flanges. 4.21 Colour Codes for Different Types of Water Pipes The following colour codes are recommended for pipes {see also accepted standard [9-1(20)]}: Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 45. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — SECTION 1 WATER SUPPLY 41 ANNEX A (Clause 3.2.1) APPLICATION FORM FOR TEMPORARY/PERMANENT SUPPLY OF WATER/FOR ADDITIONS AND/OR ALTERATIONS FOR SUPPLY OF WATER I/We ..hereby make application to the* .. for the temporary/permanent supply of water for the following additions and/or alterations to the water supply requirements and water fittings at the premises . Ward No. ..Street No. .Road/Street known as .for the purpose described below and agreed to pay such charges as the Authority may from time-to-time be entitled to make and to conform to all their byelaws and regulations .licensed/registered plumber, has been instructed by me/us to carry out the plumbing work. Description of the premises: . Address : .. Purpose for which water is required . The connection/connections taken by me/us for temporary use, shall not be used by me/us for permanent supply unless such a permission is granted to me/us in writing by the Authority. I/We hereby undertake to give the* .. due notice of any additions or alterations to the above mentioned supply which I/we may desire to make. My/Our requirements of water supply are as under: a) I/We request that one connection be granted for the whole of the premises. b) I/We request that separate connections may be granted for each floor and I/we undertake to pay the cost of the separate connections. c) My/Our probable requirements for trade purpose are .litre per day and for domestic purposes are ..litre per day. d) Our existing supply is ..litre per day. Our additional requirement of supply is ..litre per day. e) The details as regards proposed additions and alterations in fittings are as follows: .. .. Signature of the licensed/registered plumber ....... Signature of the applicant ...................... Name and address of the licensed/registered Name and address of the Plumber . Applicant .................... Date Date ............... NOTES 1 Please strike out whatever is not applicable. 2 The application should be signed by the owner of the premises or his constituted attorney and shall be countersigned by the licensed/ registered plumber. * Insert here the name of the Authority. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 46. 42 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 ANNEX B (Clause 3.2.3) FORM FOR LICENSED/REGISTERED PLUMBER’S COMPLETION CERTIFICATE Certified that I/we have completed the plumbing work of water connection No . for the premises as detailed below. This may be inspected and connection given. Ward No .. Road/Street .. Locality . Block No House No .. Existing water connection No. (if any) . Owned by . Owner’s address . Applicant’s name Son of . Address Situation ... Size of main on street Where main is situated Size of service pipe . Size of ferrule No. of taps No. of closets No. of other fittings and appliances .. Road cutting and repairing fee . Paid Rs (Receipt No .dated ) (receipt enclosed) Dated ... Signature of licensed/registered plumber .. Name and address of the licensed/registered plumber The Authority’s Report Certified that the communication and distribution pipes and all water fittings have been laid, applied and executed in accordance with the provisions of bye-laws, and satisfactory arrangements have been made for draining off waste water. Connection will be made on Date The Authority Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 47. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — SECTION 1 WATER SUPPLY 43 ANNEX C (Clause 4.7.4) NOMOGRAM OF HAZEN AND WILLIAM’S EQUATION C-1 Examples of the use of nomogram are given below: Example 1 Find the total friction loss in 25 mm diameter G.I. pipe discharging 0.25 litre/s in a total length of 300 m. Procedure Discharge, Q = 0.25 litre/s Pipe diameter = 25 mm Frictional loss = 30 m per 1 000 m (from nomogram) Total friction loss in 300 m length Example 2 Find suitable diameter pipe to carry 15 litre/s from service line to overhead tank. Total length of service main = 200 m Residual pressure available at the take off point on supply line is 15 m. Procedure Available head = 15 m Deduct residual head = 2 m Deduct 10 percent for = 1.3 m losses in bends and specials Friction head available for loss in pipe of 1 000 m 30 300 9m 100 = × = From the nomogram, for a discharge of 15 litre/s and friction loss of 58.5 m per 1 000 m, nearest commercial size (diameter) of pipe is 100 mm. 11.7 1 000 200 = × 58.5 m per 1000 m = Nomogram of Hazen and Williams Equation (c = 100) Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 48. 44 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 LIST OF STANDARDS The following list records those standards which are acceptable as ‘good practice’ and ‘accepted standards’ in the fulfillment of the requirements of the Code. The latest version of a standard shall be adopted at the time of enforcement of the code. The standards listed may be used by the Authority for conformance with the requirements of the referred clauses in the Code. In the following list, the number appearing in the first column within parantheses indicates the number of the reference in this Section. IS No. Title (1) 10446 : 1983 Glossary of terms relating to water supply and sanitation (2) 11208 : 1985 Guidelines for registration of plumbers (3) 10500 : 2012 Specification for drinking water (second revision) (4) 2041 : 2009 Specification for steel plates for pressure vessels used at moderate and low temperature (third revision) 804 : 1967 Specification for rectangular pressed steel tanks (first revision) (5) 4984 : 1995 Specification for high density polyethylene pipes for potable water supplies (fourth revision) 4985 : 2000 Specification for unplasticized PVC pipes for potable water supplies (third revision) 15778 : 2007 Specification for chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC) pipes for portable hot and cold water distribution supplies (6) 2065 : 1983 Code of practice for water supply in buildings (second revision) (7) 3114 : 1994 Code of practice for laying of cast iron pipes (second revision) (8) 782 : 1978 Specification for caulking lead (third revision) (9) 5822 : 1994 Code of practice for laying of welded steel pipes for water supply (second revision) (10) 6530 : 1972 Code of practice for laying of asbestos cement pressure pipes (11) 783 : 1985 Code of practice for laying of concrete pipes (first revision) (12) 7634 Code of practice for plastics pipes selection, handling, storage and installation for potable waters supplies: IS No. Title (Part 1) : 1975 Choice of materials and general recommendations (Part 2) : 2012 Laying and jointing of poly- ethylene (PE) pipes (first revision) (Part 3) : 2003 Laying and jointing of UPVC pipes (first revision) (13) 783 : 1985 Code of practice for laying of concrete pipes (first revision) 3114 : 1994 Code of practice for laying of cast iron pipes (second revision) 5822 : 1994 Code of practice for laying of welded steel pipes for water supply (second revision) 6530 : 1972 Code of practice for laying of asbestos cement pressure pipes 7634 Code of practice for plastics pipes selection, handling, storage and installation for potable water supplies (Part 1) : 1975 Choice of materials and general recommendations (Part 2) : 2012 Laying and jointing of polyethylene (PE) pipes (first revision) (Part 3) : 2003 Laying and jointing of UPVC pipes (first revision) (14) 2692 : 1989 Specification for ferrules for water services (second revision) (15) 302 (Part 1) : Safety of household and similar 2008 electrical appliances: Part 1 General requirements (sixth revision) 2082 : 1993 Stationary storage type electric water heaters (third revision) (16) 7558 : 1974 Code of practice for domestic hot water installations (17) 6295 : 1986 Code of practice for water supply and drainage in high altitudes and/or sub-zero temperature regions (first revision) (18) 6494 : 1988 Code of practice for water- proofing of underground water reservoirs and swimming pools (first revision) (19) 3328 : 1993 Quality tolerances for water for swimming pools (20) 2379 : 1990 Colour code for identification of pipe lines Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 49. NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) Section 2 Drainage and Sanitation BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 50. 2 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 C O N T E N T S FOREWORD 3 1 SCOPE 5 2 TERMINOLOGY 5 3 GENERAL 13 4 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION 15 ANNEX A APPLICATION FOR DRAINAGE OF PREMISES 63 ANNEX B FORM FOR DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF WORK AND 63 SPECIFICATION OF MATERIALS ANNEX C FORM FOR LICENSED/REGISTERED PLUMBER’S COMPLETION 66 CERTIFICATE ANNEX D TYPICAL MOUNTING ARRANGEMENTS FOR VARIOUS PLUMBING 67 FIXTURES, INCLUDING DRAINAGE SYSTEMS AND VENTILATION LIST OF STANDARDS 80 Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 51. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 3 SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION National Building Code Sectional Committee, CED 46 FOREWORD This Code (Part 9/Section 2) covers the drainage and sanitation requirements of buildings, design, layout, construction and maintenance of drains inside buildings and from the buildings up to the connection to public sewer, private sewer, individual sewage disposal system, cesspool, or to other approved point of disposal/treatment work. It also covers drainage systems peculiar to high altitudes and/or sub-zero temperature regions of the country. In the first version of the Code formulated in 1970, three separate sections of Part 9 Plumbing services, were brought out, namely, Section 1 Water Supply, Section 2 Drainage and Sanitation, and Section 3 Gas Supply. These sections were subsequently revised in 1983. The major changes incorporated in the first revision in Section 2 Drainage and sanitation were rationalization of definitions; modification of the requirements for fitments for drainage and sanitation in the case of buildings other than residences; addition of table for sanitation facilities in fruit and vegetable markets; introduction of table giving detailed guidance regarding the selection of plumbing system, depending on the nature of drainage load in buildings and height of buildings; amplification of provision relating to safeguards to be adopted in single stack system; modification of the values of gradients, pipe sizes and the corresponding discharges; rationalization of sizes of manholes/inspection chambers; modification of the sizing of rainwater pipe for roof drainage, to take into account rainfall intensities and recommend sizes on a more rational basis; addition of provisions for drainage and sanitation system peculiar to high altitudes and/or sub-zero temperature regions of the country; and inclusion of requirements of the refuse chute system. As a result of experience gained in implementation of 1983 version of the Code and feedback received as well as revision of some of the standards based on which this Section was prepared, a need to revise this Section was felt. The last revision was therefore prepared to take care of these. In the last revision, the erstwhile two Sections were merged and a combined and comprehensive section, namely Section 1 Water supply, drainage and sanitation (including solid waste management), was brought out. Gas supply was brought out as Section 2. Following significant changes were incorporated in the last revision of Section 1 on Water supply, drainage and sanitation, in respect to drainage and sanitation: rationalization and addition of new definitions under terminology; enunciation of certain basic principles for water supply and drainage; addition of a new clause on sanitary appliances; updation of Tables 1 to 14 of the existing version, regarding drainage and sanitation requirement; addition of additional requirements under layout clause of design considerations; modification and rationalization of provisions regarding choice of plumbing systems; addition of new clause on drain appurtenances having details on trap, floor drain and cleanout; incorporation of provisions on indirect wastes, special wastes (covering laboratory wastes, infected wastes, research laboratory wastes, etc), grease traps, oil interceptors, radio-active wastes, etc; revision of manhole details on size and enhancement of construction clause; inclusion of provisions on rainwater harvesting; revision of the minimum rainfall intensity which is drain design basis for discharge of storm water drain into a public storm water drain, to 50 mm/h; modification of the table for sizing of rainwater pipes for roof drainage, with inclusion of rainfall data which were not available in the earlier version; inclusion of figure on detail of subsoil drainage; and addition of details on support/protection of pipes. The last revision also incorporated for the first time the provisions on solid waste management. In this revision to comprehensively address the various and distinct features related to the plumbing aspects, this Part 9 has been rearranged as follows: Section 1 Water supply Section 2 Drainage and sanitation Section 3 Solid waste management Section 4 Gas supply Further, in this revision of the Section 2, following significant changes/modifications have been incorporated: Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 52. 4 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 1) Various tables on the requirements for fitments for drainage and sanitation for various occupancies have been updated, and a new table for shopping malls and retail buildings has been included. 2) Enabling provisions for use of corrugated pipes, low noise pipes and under slung pipes have been included. 3) Information about bio-toilets has been added. 4) Typical mounting arrangements for various plumbing fixtures, including drainage systems and ventilation have been illustrated. 5) A new table for calculation of single stack sizing has been included. 6) Various additional requirements relating to layout of drainage and sanitation system have been added. 7) Venting system for high rise buildings, along with a comprehensive table on size and developed length of stack vents and vent stacks, has been included. 8) General provisions on design of drainage pipes have been elaborated. 9) Provisions relating to gradients of drainage pipes have been elaborated. 10) The table on fixture unit for different types of fixtures has been updated. 11) The tables on maximum number of fixture units that can be connected to branches and stacks, and to building drains and sewers, have been updated. 12) New provisions on design requirement for high rise buildings drainage system have been included. 13) The minimum diameter for floor drains outlets before connecting to floor trap has been included. 14) Provisions related to manhole covers and recommended locations have been included. 15) Provision for estimation of storm water runoff and coefficient of runoff for various surfaces have been included. 16) The table on sizing of rainwater pipes for roof drainage has been updated. 17) The illustration on artificial ground water recharge structure has been detailed. 18) Guidelines relating to siphonic drainage system for large roofs have been included. 19) Provisions on rainwater harvesting for plotted/group housing developments and deep well/bore well recharging, have been included. 20) Clarifications and recommendations on use of septic tanks have been made. 21) New provisions related to pumping and treatment of sewage have been included. 22) A provision on treatment of waste water and usage of recycled water has been included through cross- reference to Section 1 ‘Water supply’ of this Part of the Code. 23) Provisions have been reviewed and updated from the point of view of accessibility by elderly and persons with disabilities, also, in this context, duly giving cross-reference to 13 of Part 3 ‘Development Control Rules and General Building Requirements’ of the Code. 24) Certain terminologies have been included and some have been updated. 25) Cross-referred standards have been updated. This Section is largely based on the following Indian Standards: IS 1742 : 1983 Code of practice for building drainage (second revision) IS 4111 (Part 1) : 1986 Code of practice for ancillary structures in sewage system: Part 1 Manholes (first revision) IS 5329 : 1983 Code of practice for sanitary pipe work above ground for buildings (first revision) IS 6295 : 1986 Code of practice for water supply and drainage in high altitudes and or sub-zero temperature regions (first revision) A reference to SP 35:1987 ‘Handbook on Water Supply and Drainage’ may be useful, from where also, assistance has been derived. All standards, whether given herein above or cross-referred to in the main text of this Section, are subject to revision. The parties to agreement based on this section are encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying the most recent editions of the standards. In the formulation of this Section, reference has also been made to the following: International Plumbing Code 2015, International Code Council, and Uniform Plumbing Code 2015, International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials For the purpose of deciding whether a particular requirement of this Section is complied with, the final value, observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded off in accordance with IS 2 : 1960 ‘Rules for rounding off numerical values (revised)’. The number of significant places retained in the rounded off value should be the same as that of the specified value in this Section. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 53. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 5 SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION 2.8 Bed Pan Washer — A washer which is to be used for disposing human waste and sterilizing the Bed Pan for reuse. Bed pan washer requires water connection and electrical heating arrangement. This is to be considered as soil appliance. 2.9 Benching — Sloping surfaces constructed on either side of channels at the base of a manhole or inspection chamber for the purpose of confining the flow of sewage, avoiding the accumulation of deposits and providing a safe working platform. 2.10 Branch a) Special form of sewer pipe used for making connections to a sewer or water main. The various types are called ‘T’, ‘Y’, ‘T-Y’, double Y and V branches, according to their respective shapes. b) Any part of a piping system other than a main or stack. 2.11 Branch Soil Pipe (BSP) — A pipe connecting one or more soil appliances to the main soil pipe. 2.12 Branch Soil Waste Pipe (BSWP) — A pipe connecting one or more soil and/or waste appliances to the main soil waste pipe (one pipe system). 2.13 Branch Vent Pipe (BVP) — A pipe, one end of which is connected to the system adjacent to the trap of an appliance and the other to a main vent pipe or a drain-vent pipe. It is fitted to prevent loss of water seal from a trap owing to partial vacuum, back- pressure, or surging caused by air movement within the pipe system. It also provides ventilation for the branch waste pipe. 2.14 Branch Waste Pipe (BWP) — A pipe connecting one or more waste appliances to the main waste pipe. 2.15 Building Drain-Combined — A building drain which conveys both sewage and storm water or other drainage. 2.16 Building Drain-Sanitary — A building drain which conveys sewage and sullage only. 2.17 Building Drain-Storm — A building drain which conveys storm water or other drainage but no sewage or sullage. 1 SCOPE 1.1 This Code (Part 9/Section 2) covers the design, layout, construction and maintenance of drains for foul water, surface water, subsoil water and sewage together with all ancillary works, such as connections, manholes and inspection chambers used within the building and from building to the connection to a public sewer, private sewer, individual sewage-disposal system, cess- pool, soakaway or to other approved point of disposal/ treatment work. NOTE — A sanitary drainage system consists of a building sewer, a building drain, a soil and/or waste stack, horizontal branches or fixture drain, and vents. The sanitary drainage of a large building may have a number of primary and secondary branches, and several soil and/or waste stacks, each of them in turn may have a number of horizontal branches. 2 TERMINOLOGY For the purpose of this Section, the following definitions shall apply in addition to the definitions given in accepted standards [9-2(1)]. 2.1 Air Admittance Valve — One way valves designed to allow air to enter drainage system when negative pressure develops in the system. The purpose is to provide a method of allowing air to enter the drainage system for prevention of siphonage of traps. 2.2 Air Break — Physical separation which may be a low inlet into the indirect waste receptor from the fixture or device indirectly connected. 2.3 Air Gap, Drainage — Unobstructed vertical distance through the free atmosphere between the lowest opening from any pipe, plumbing fixture or appurtenance conveying waste to flood level of the receptor. 2.4 Back Up — A condition where the waste water may flow back into another fixture or compartment but not back into the potable water system. 2.5 Back Water Valve — Device installed in a drainage system to prevent reverse flow. 2.6 Bath Room Group — Group of fixtures consisting of water closet, lavatories bath tub or shower and other fittings with a floor drain located together. 2.7 Battery of Fixtures — Any group of two or more similar adjacent fixtures which discharge into a common horizontal waste or soil pipe. NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) Section 2 Drainage and Sanitation Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 54. 6 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 2.18 Building Sewer — That part of the horizontal piping of a drainage system which extends from the end of the building drain and which receives the discharge of the building drain and conveys it to a public sewer, private sewer, individual sewage-disposal system or approved point of disposal. 2.19 Building Sub-Drain — That portion of a drainage systemwhichcannotdrainbygravityinthebuildingsewer. 2.20 Building Trap — A device, fitting or assembly of fittingsinstalledinthebuildingdraintopreventcirculation ofairbetweenthedrainageofthebuildingandthebuilding sewer. It is usually installed as running trap. 2.21 Cesspool a) An underground chamber for the reception and storage of foul water, the contents of which are periodically removed for disposal. b) A box-shaped receiver constructed in a roof or gutter for collecting rainwater which then passes into a rainwater pipe connected thereto. 2.22 Cleaning Eye — An access opening in a pipe or pipe fitting arranged to facilitate the cleaning of obstructions and fitted with removable cover. 2.23 Clear Waste Water — Cooling water and condensate drainage from refrigeration and air conditioning equipment, cooled condensate from steam heating systems, cooled boiler blow-down water, waste water drainage from equipment rooms and other areas where water is used without an appreciable addition of oil, gasoline, solvent, acid, etc, and treated effluent in which impurities have been reduced below a minimum concentration considered harmful. 2.24 Collection Chamber — A compartment situated at the lower end of the chute for collecting and housing the refuseduringtheperiodbetweentwosuccessivecleanings. 2.25 Connection — The junction of a foul water drain, surface water drain or sewer from building or building with public sewer treatment works, public sewer, private sewer, individual sewage-disposal system, cess-pool, soakaway or to other approved point of disposal/ treatment work. 2.26 Consumer — Any person who discharges waste or sewage to the public sewer installed by the Authority. 2.27 Crown of Trap — The topmost point of the inside of a trap outlet. 2.28 Deep Manhole — A manhole of such depth that an access shaft is required in addition to the working chamber. 2.29 Depth of Manhole — The vertical distance from the top of the manhole cover to the outgoing invert of the main drain channel. 2.30 Developed Length — The length measured along the centre line of a pipe and fittings. 2.31 Diameter — The nominal internal diameter of pipes and fittings. 2.32 Drain — A conduit, channel or pipe for the carriage of storm water, sewage, waste water or other water-borne wastes in a building drainage system. 2.33 Drain Vent Pipe (DVP) — A pipe installed to provide flow of air to or from a drain to prevent undue concentration of foul air in the drain. The main soil pipe or main waste pipe may serve as drain vent pipe wherever their upper portions, which do not receive discharges, are extended to the roof level and let open to air. 2.34 Drainage — The removal of any liquid by a system constructed for the purpose. 2.35 Drainage Fixture Unit (DFU) — A measure of probable discharge into the drainage system by various types of plumbing fixtures. The drainage fixture unit value for a particular fixture depends on its volume rate of drainage discharge, on the time duration of a single drainage operation and on the average time between successive operations. 2.36 Drainage Work — The design and construction of a system of drainage. 2.37 Drop Connection — A length of conduit installed vertically immediately before its connection to a sewer or to another drain. 2.38 Drop Manhole — A manhole installed in a sewer where the elevation of the incoming sewer considerably exceeds that of the outgoing sewer; a vertical waterway outside the manhole is provided to divert the waste from the upper to the lower level so that it does not fall freely into the manhole except at peak rate of flow. 2.39 Eco-toilet (or Bio-toilet) — The dry toilet that uses a predominantly aerobic processing system to treat human excreta, by composting or managed-aerobic decomposition. It generally uses little to no water and may be used as an alternative to flush toilets. 2.40 Fittings — The appurtenances such as coupling, flange, branch, bend, tees, elbows, unions, waste (with or without plug), P or S trap (with or without vent), stop ferrule, bib tap, pillar tap, bath faucet, water meter, garden hydrant, valves and any other article used in connection with water supply, drainage and sanitation. 2.41 Fixture Unit — A quantity in terms of which the load producing effects on the plumbing system of different kinds of plumbing fixtures is expressed on some arbitrarily chosen scale. 2.42 Formation — The finished level of the excavation at the bottom of a trench or heading prepared to receive the permanent work. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 55. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 7 SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION 2.43 French Drain or Rubble Drain — A shallow trench filled with coarse rubble, clinker, or similar material with or without field drain pipes. 2.44 Frost Line — The line joining the points of greatest depths below ground level up to which the moisture in the soil freezes. 2.45 Grease Interceptor (or Grease Trap) — A chamber, on the line of a drain or waste pipe, for preventing grease from passing into the drainage system. It reduces non-petroleum fats, oils and grease in effluent by separation and volume reduction to improve sewage treatment efficiency. As it is used to intercept fats, oils and grease (FOG) from a waste water discharge, it is also known as FOG interceptor. 2.46 Gully Chamber — The chamber built of masonry round a gully trap for housing the same. 2.47 Gully Trap — A trap provided in a drainage system with a water seal fixed in a suitable position to collect waste water from the scullery, kitchen sink, wash basins, baths and rainwater pipes. 2.48 High Altitudes — Elevations higher than 1 500 m above mean sea level (MSL). 2.49 Highway Authority — The public body in which is vested, or which is the owner of, a highway repairable by the inhabitants collectively; otherwise the body or persons responsible for the upkeep of the highway. 2.50 Horizontal Pipe — Any pipe of fitting which makes an angle of more than 45° with the vertical. 2.51 Indirect Waste Pipe — The pipe that does not connect directly with the drainage system, but conveys liquid wastes by discharging into a plumbing fixture/ interceptor that is directly connected to the drainage system. 2.52 Inlet Fittings — An arrangement of connecting the internal waste branch pipe from wash basin, sinks and shower drains to the main deep seal trap with the help of hopper extension. 2.53 Inlet Hopper — A receptacle fitting for receiving refuse from each floor and dropping it into the chute. 2.54 Insanitary — Condition that is contrary to sanitary principles or is injurious to health. 2.55 Inspection Chamber — A water-tight chamber constructed in any house-drainage system which takes wastes from gully traps and disposes to manhole with access for inspection and maintenance. 2.56 Interceptor — A device designed and installed so as to separate and retain deleterious, hazardous or undesirable matter from normal wastes and permit normal sewage or liquid wastes to discharge into the disposal terminal by gravity. 2.57 Interceptor Manhole or Interceptor Chamber — A manhole incorporating an intercepting trap and providing means of access thereto. 2.58 Invert — The lowest point of the internal surface of a pipe or channel at any cross-section. 2.59 Junction Pipe — A pipe incorporating one or more branches. 2.60 Lagging — Thermal insulation or pipes. 2.61 Licensed (or Registered) Plumber — A person licensed (or registered) under the provisions of this Code. 2.62 Main Soil Pipe (MSP) — A pipe connecting one or more branch soil pipes to the drain. 2.63 Main Soil and Waste Pipe (MSWP) — A pipe connecting one or more branch soil and waste pipes to the drain. 2.64 Main Vent Pipe (MVP) — A pipe which receives a number of branch vent pipes. 2.65 Main Waste Pipe (MWP) — A pipe connecting one or more branch waste pipes to the drain. 2.66 Manhole — An opening by which a man may enter or leave a drain, a sewer or other closed structure for inspection, cleaning and other maintenance operations, fitted with suitable cover. 2.67 Manhole Chamber — A Chamber constructed on a drain or sewer so as to provide access thereto for inspection, testing or clearance of obstruction. 2.68 Offset — A pipe fitting used to connect two pipes whose axes are parallel but not in line. 2.69 Pipe System — The system to be adopted will depend on the type and planning of the building in which it is to be installed and will be one of the following: a) Single stack system (see Fig. 1) — The piping system in which there is no trap ventilation and the stack itself acts as vent through roof. In this system care shall be taken for proper sizing of the pipes and the trap arm distance, specially the horizontal distance of sanitary fixtures from the drainage stack and vertical distance between connection of branches from fixtures to drainage stack. b) One pipe — Partially ventilated system (see Fig. 2) — The piping system in which soil and waste pipes are connected to a single vertical stack [as explained in 2.69 (a)] with additional vent pipe for ventilation of traps of water closets. It is also sometimes known as single stack — partially ventilated system. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 56. 8 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 c) One pipe — Fully ventilated systme (see Fig. 3) — The piping system in which the waste pipes from the sinks, baths and wash basins, and the soil pipe from water closet are connected to a single vertical stack. The traps of the water closets, waste appliances, etc, are individually ventilated and connected with a separate stack to preserve the water seal. It is also sometimes known as single stack — fully ventilated system. d) Two pipe system 1) Two pipe system with common vent pipe (see Fig. 4A) — The piping system in which all soil appliances such as water closets, urinals, bidet and bedpan sinks are connected to soil stack and all other plumbing fixtures such as baths, sinks, and basins are connected to waste stack through deep seal trap. In addition, a common vent stack is provided for ventilation of soil and waste stacks. 2) Two pipe system with independent vent pipes (see Fig. 4B) — The piping system in which all soil appliances such as water closets, urinals , bidet and bedpan sinks are connected to soil stack, and all other plumbing fixtures such as baths, sinks, and basins are connected to waste stack through deep seal trap. In addition, there are independent a vent stacks provided for respective ventilation of soil and waste stacks. 2.70 Plumbing a) The pipes, fixtures and other apparatus inside a building for bringing in the water supply and removing the liquid and water borne wastes. b) The installation of the foregoing pipes, fixtures and other apparatus. 2.71 Plumbing System — The plumbing system shall include the water supply and distribution pipes; plumbing fittings and traps; soil, waste, vent pipes and anti-siphonage pipes; building drains and building sewers including their respective connections, devices and appurtenances within the property lines of the premises; and water-treating or water-using equipment. 2.72 Premises — Premises shall include passages, buildings and lands of any tenure, whether open or enclosed, whether built on or not, and whether public or private in respect of which a water rate or charge is payable to the Authority or for which an application is made for supply of water and disposal of waste to the public sewer. 2.73 Puff Ventilation — The ventilation provided for waste traps in two-pipe system, in order to preserve the water seal. 2.74 Saddle — A purpose made fitting, so shaped as to fit over a hole cut in a sewer or drain used to form connections. 2.75 Sanitary Appliances — The appliances for the collection and discharge of soil or waste matter. 2.76 Sewer — A pipe or conduit, generally closed, but normally not flowing full for carrying sewage and/or other waste liquids. 2.77 Slop Hopper (Slop Sink) — A hopper shaped sink, with a flushing run and outlet similar to those of a WC pan, for the reception and discharge of human excreta. 2.78 Soakaway — A pit, dug into permeable ground lined to form a covered perforated chamber or filled with hard-core, to which liquid is led, and from which it may soak away into the ground. 2.79 Soffit (Crown) — The highest point of the internal surface of a sewer or culvert at any cross-section. 2.80 Soil Appliances — A sanitary appliance for the collection and discharge of excretory matter. 2.81 Soil Pipe — A pipe that conveys the discharge of water closets or fixtures having similar functions, with or without the discharges from other fixtures. 2.82 Soil Waste — The discharge from water closets, urinals, slop hopper, stable yard or cowshed gullies and similar appliances. 2.83 Stack Vent — The extension of a soil or waste stack above the highest horizontal drain connected to the stack. 2.84 Sub Soil Water — Water occurring naturally in the subsoil. 2.85 Sub Soil Water Drain a) A drain intended to collect and carry away subsoil water. b) A drain intended to disperse into the subsoil from a septic tank. 2.86 Sullage — See 2.99. 2.87 Supply Pipe — So much of any service pipe as is not a communication pipe. 2.88 Supports — Hangers and anchors or devices for supporting and securing pipe and fittings to walls, ceilings, floors or structural members. 2.89 Surface Water — Natural water from the ground surface, paved areas and roofs. 2.90 Surface Water Drain — A drain conveying surface water including storm water. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 57. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 9 SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION FIG. 1 SINGLE STACK SYSTEM NOTES 1 Presentation of type of fixtures/drains, and pipe route/layout is typical in nature. 2 Kitchen waste piping shall also be planned in a similar manner as for other waste appliances. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 58. 10 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 FIG. 2 ONE PIPE — PARTIALLY VENTILATED SYSTEM NOTES 1 Presentation of type of fixtures/drains, and pipe route/layout is typical in nature. 2 Kitchen waste/vent piping shall also be planned in a similar manner as for other waste appliances. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 59. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 11 SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION FIG. 3 ONE PIPE — FULLY VENTILATED SYSTEM NOTES 1 Presentation of type of fixtures/drains, and pipe route/layout is typical in nature. 2 Kitchen waste/vent piping shall also be planned in a similar manner as for other waste appliances. 3 The vent pipe shall be installed either in suspended ceiling or in the wall above the toilet floor, depending on space availability and structural arrangements. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 60. 12 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 2.91 Systems of Drainage a) Combined system — A system in which foul water (sewage) (black and grey water) and surface water are conveyed by the same sewers and drains. b) Separate system — A system in which foul water (sewage) (black and grey water) and surface water are conveyed by the separate sewers and drains. c) Partially separate system — A modification of the separate system in which part of the surface water is conveyed by the foul (sanitary) sewers and drains. 2.92 Trade Effluent — Any liquid either with or without particles of matter in suspension which is wholly or in part produced in the course of any trade or industry, at trade premise. It includes farm wastes but does not include domestic sewage. 2.93 Trap — A fittings or device so designed and constructed as to provide, when properly vented, a FIG. 4 TWO PIPE SYSTEM NOTES 1 Presentation of type of fixtures/drains, and pipe route/layout is typical in nature. 2 Kitchen waste/vent piping shall also be planned in a similar manner as for other waste appliances. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 61. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 13 SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION liquid seal which will prevent the back passage of air without materially affecting the flow of sewage or waste water through it. 2.94 Vertical Pipe — Any pipe or fitting which is installed in a vertical position or which makes an angle or not more than 45° with the vertical. 2.95 Vent Stack/Vent Pipe — A vertical vent pipe installed primarily for the purpose of proving circulation of air to and from any part of the drainage system. It also protects trap seals from excessive pressure fluctuation. 2.96 Vent System — A pipe or pipes installed to provide a flow of air to or from a drainage system or to provide a circulation of air with in such system to protect traps seals from siphonage and back-pressure. 2.97 Waste Appliance — A sanitary appliance for the collection and discharge of water after use for ablutionary, culinary and other domestic purpose. 2.98 Waste Pipe — In plumbing, any pipe that receives the discharge of any fixtures, except water closets or similar fixtures and conveys the same to the house drain or soil or waste stack. When such pipe does not connect directly with a house drain or soil stack, it is called an indirect waste pipe. 2.99 Waste Water (Sullage) — The discharge from wash basins, sinks and similar appliances, which does not contain human or animal excreta. 2.100 Water Closet — A water flushed plumbing fixture designed to receive human excrement directly from the user of the fixture. The term is used sometimes to designate the room or compartment in which the fixture is placed. 2.101 Water Seal — The water in a trap, which acts as a barrier to the passage of air through the trap. 3 GENERAL 3.1 Basic Principles The basic principles of water supply, drainage and sanitation are given below, and the design of drainage and sanitation should in general be guided by the applicable principles. 3.1.1 Potable Water All premises intended for human habitation, occupancy, or use shall be provided with supply of potable water. This water supply shall not be connected with unsafe water resources, nor shall it be subject to the hazards of backflow. 3.1.2 Water Provision Plumbing fixtures, devices and appurtenances shall be provided with water in sufficient volume and at pressures adequate to enable them to function properly and without undue noise under normal conditions of use. There should be at least a residual head of 0.018 N/mm2 at the consumer’s tap. There may be certain fixtures or appliances in the installation that may require a higher pressure, such as 0.05 N/mm2 or even higher (such as 0.1 N/mm2 in case of flush valves), in which case the system shall be designed using pumps, tanks or both to achieve the required minimum pressure. NOTE — The residual head shall be taken at the highest/farthest outlets in the building. 3.1.3 Water Efficiency Plumbing system shall be designed, installed and adjusted to use the optimum quantity of water consistent with proper performance and cleaning. 3.1.4 Safety Devices Plumbing system shall be designed and installed with safety devices to safeguard against dangers from contamination, explosion, overheating, etc. 3.1.5 Minimum Amenities Each dwelling unit on premises (abutting on a sewer or with a private sewage disposal system) shall have at least one water closet, one kitchen wash place or a sink, and one bathing place or shower to meet the basic requirements of sanitation and personal hygiene. In case of a group housing, the requirements relating to toilet or sanitary room and kitchen as given in 13 and B-9 of Part 3 ‘Development Control Rules and General Building Requirements’ of the Code shall also be complied with. 3.1.6 Drainage System The drainage system shall be designed, installed and maintained to guard against fouling, deposit of solids and clogging and with adequate cleanouts so arranged that the pipes may be readily cleaned. 3.1.7 Materials and Workmanship The plumbing system shall have durable material, free from defective workmanship and so designed and installed as to give satisfactory service for its reasonable expected life. The accessories of the plumbing system should be of such specifications as to meet the functional requirements of the installation, so as to also avoid any inconsistency leading to leakage and resultant seepage. 3.1.8 Fixture Traps and Vent Pipes Each fixture directly connected to the drainage system shall be equipped with a liquid seal trap. Trap seals shall be maintained to prevent sewer gas, other Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 62. 14 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 potentially dangerous or noxious fumes, or vermin from entering the building. Further, the drainage system shall be designed to provide an adequate circulation of air in all pipes with no danger of siphonage, aspiration, or forcing of trap seals under conditions of ordinary use by providing vent pipes throughout the system. 3.1.9 Foul Air Exhaust Each vent terminal shall extend to the outer air and be so installed as to minimize the possibilities of clogging and the return of foul air to the building, as it conveys potentially noxious or explosive gases to the outside atmosphere. All vent pipes shall be provided with a cowl. 3.1.10 Testing The plumbing system shall be subjected to required tests to effectively disclose all leaks and defects in the work or the material. 3.1.11 Exclusion from Plumbing System No substance that will clog or accentuate clogging of pipes, produce explosive mixtures, destroy the pipes or their joints, or interfere unduly with the sewage- disposal process shall be allowed to enter the drainage system. 3.1.12 Light and Ventilation Wherever water closet or similar fixture is located in a room or compartment, it should be properly lighted and ventilated. 3.1.13 Individual Sewage Disposal Systems If water closets or other plumbing fixtures are installed in buildings where connection to public sewer is not possible, suitable provision shall be made for acceptable treatment and disposal. 3.1.14 Maintenance Plumbing systems shall be maintained in a safe and serviceable condition. 3.1.15 Approach for Use and Cleaning All plumbing fixtures shall be so installed with regard to spacing as to be approachable for their intended use and for cleaning. All doors, windows and any other device needing access within the toilet shall be so located that they have proper approach. 3.1.16 Accessibility for Persons with Disabilities All doors, windows and fixtures, including WC, urinals, grab bars, wash basin, mirror and all other accessories for use by persons with disabilities shall be so installed/ located that they have proper access with appropriate width, height, space, centerlines, and ease of operation (see 13 of Part 3 ‘Development Control Rules and General Building Requirements’ of the Code). 3.1.17 Structural Safety Plumbing system shall be installed with due regard to preservation of the structural members and prevention of damage to walls and other surfaces. 3.1.18 Protection of Ground and Surface Water Sewage or other waste shall not be discharged into surface or sub-surface water without acceptable form of treatment. 3.2 Drainage and Sanitation 3.2.1 Preparation and Submission of Plan No person shall install or carry out any water-borne sanitary installation or drainage installation or any works in connection with anything existing or new buildings or any other premises without obtaining the prior sanction of the Authority. The owner shall make an application in the prescribed form (see Annex A) to the Authority to carry out such a work. 3.2.2 Site Plan A site plan of the premises on which the building is to be situated or any such work is to be carried out shall be prepared drawn to a scale not smaller than 1 in 500 (see Part 2 ‘Administration’ of the Code). The site plan of the building premises shall show, a) the adjoining plots and streets with their names; b) the position of the municipal sewer and the direction of flow in it; c) the invert level of the municipal sewer, the road level, and the connection level of the proposed drain connecting the building in relation to the sewer, d) the angle at which the drain from the building joints the sewer; and e) the alignment, sizes and gradients of all drains and also of surface drains, if any. A separate site plan is not necessary if the necessary particulars to be shown in such a site plan are already shown in the drainage plan. 3.2.3 Drainage Plan The application (see 3.3.1) shall be accompanied by a drainage plan drawn to a scale of not smaller than 1 in 100 and furnished along with the building plan (see Part 2 ‘Administration’ of the Code). The plans shall show the following: Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 63. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 15 SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION a) Every floor of the building in which the pipes or drains are to be used; b) The position, forms, level and arrangement of the various parts of such building, including the roof thereof; c) All new drains as proposed with their sizes and gradients; d) Invert levels of the proposed drains with corresponding ground levels; e) The position of every manhole, gully, soil and waste pipe, vent pipe, rainwater pipe, water closet, urinal, latrine, bath, lavatory, sink, trap or other appliances in the premises proposed to be connected to any drain and the following colours are recommended for indicating sewers, waste water pipes, rainwater pipes an existing work: Description of Work Colour Sewers Red Waste water pipes and Blue rainwater pipes Existing work Black f) The position of refuse chute, inlet hopper and collection chamber. 3.2.3.1 In the case of an alteration or addition to an existing building, this clause shall be deemed to be satisfied if the plans as furnished convey sufficient information for the proposals to be readily identified with previous sanctioned plans and provided the locations of tanks and other fittings are consistent with the structural safety of the building. 3.2.3.2 The plans for the building drainage shall in every case be accompanied by specifications for the various items of work involved. This information shall be supplied in the prescribed form given in Annex B. 3.2.4 In respect of open drains, cross-sectional details shall be prepared to a scale not smaller than 1 in 50 showing the ground and invert levels and any arrangement already existing or proposed for the inclusion of any or exclusion of all storm water from the sewers. 3.2.5 Completion Certificate At the completion of the plumbing installation work, the licensed/registered plumber shall give a completion certificate in the prescribed form, which is given in Annex C. 3.3 Licensing/Registration of Plumbers 3.3.1 Execution of Work The work which is required to be carried out under the provisions of this section, shall be executed only by a licensed/registered plumber under the control of the Authority and shall be responsible to carry out all lawful directions given by the Authority. No individual shall engage in the business of plumbing unless so licensed/ registered under the provisions of this Section. 3.3.1.1 No individual, firm, partnership or corporation shall engage in the business of installing, repairing or altering plumbing unless the plumbing work performed in the course of such business is under the direct supervision of a licensed/registered plumber from approved Authority. 3.3.2 Examination and Certification The Authority shall establish standards and procedure for the qualification, examination and licensing/ registration of plumbers and shall issue licences to such persons who meet the qualifications thereof and successfully pass the examination. 3.3.3 For guidelines for registration of plumbers including the minimum standards for qualifications for the grant of licences, reference may be made to good practice [9-2(2)]. The Authority may also utilize the services of the certified plumbers who are certified for the required skill level under the appropriate scheme of the Government. 4 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION 4.1 Types of Sanitary Appliances 4.1.1 Soil Appliances 4.1.1.1 Water closet It shall essentially consist of a closet consisting of a bowl to receive excretory matter, trap and a flushing apparatus. It is recommended to provide ablution tap adjacent to the water closet, preferably on right hand side wall. The various types/style of water closets may be: a) Squatting Indian type water closet, b) Washdown type water closet, c) Siphonic washdown type water closet, and d) Universal or Anglo-Indian water closet. 4.1.1.2 Bidet Bidet is an ablution appliance for cleansing excretory organs with water for personnel hygiene. It may be pedestal type or wall hung with a shallow bowl. Hot and cold water supplied through a mixer is discharged from a spray installed over the rim of the appliance. The bidet outlet should essentially connect to soil pipe in a system. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 64. 16 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 4.1.1.3 Urinal It is a soil appliance for urination and is connected to soil pipe after a suitable trap. Urinal should have adequate provision of flushing apparatus. The various types/style of urinal may be: a) Bowl type urinal: flat back or angle back. b) Slab (single) type urinal. c) Stall (single) type urinal. d) Squatting plate type urinal. e) Syphon jet urinal with integral trap. f) Water less (non-water) urinal 4.1.1.4 Slop sink Slop sink is a large sink, generally of square shape. the appliance is used in hospitals and is installed in the dirty utility room, sluice room and similar locations for disposal of excreta and other foul waste and for washing bed pans and urine bottles/pans. It is provided with a flushing mechanism. It is also provided in Janitor’s closet where it is used for cleaning the housekeeping mops, etc. 4.1.1.5 Bed pan sink Bed pan sink, also known as bedpan washer and disinfector, is a part of medical equipment inventory which is used to clean manually or automatically, the hospital bedpans, urine bottles and other containers used for collecting body fluids. It is provided in dirty utility room, sluice room, similar locations for disposal of excreta and other foul waste and for washing bed pans, urine bottles/pans. It is a soil appliance and is connected to soil pipe after a suitable trap. In manual models, it has a flushing arrangement. Provision for installing a bedpan washer and disinfector should be made in all intensive care units in hospitals. 4.1.2 Waste Appliances 4.1.2.1 Wash basin It is of one-piece construction having a combined overflow and preferably should have soap holding recess or recesses that should properly drain into the bowl. Each basin shall have circular waste hole through which the liquid content of the basin shall drain. 4.1.2.2 Wash-trough It is a linear trough for simultaneous use by number of persons. 4.1.2.3 Sink It is used in kitchen and laboratory for the purpose of cleaning utensils/ apparatus and also serve the purpose of providing water for general usage. The sink may be made with or without overflow arrangement. The sink shall be of one-piece construction including combined over flow, where provided. The sink shall have a circular waste hole into which the interiors of the sink shall drain. 4.1.2.4 Bath tub Bath tub may be of enameled steel, cast iron, gel-coated, glass fibre reinforced plastic or may be cast in-situ. It shall be stable, comfortable, easy to get in and out, water tight, with anti-skid base, and easy to install and maintain. The bath tub shall be fitted with overflow and waste pipe of nominal diameter of not less than 32 mm and 40 mm, respectively. 4.1.2.5 Drinking fountain It is a bowl fitted with a push button tap and a water bubbler or a tap with a swan neck outlet fitting. It has a waste fitting, a trap and is connected to the waste pipe. 4.1.3 The requirements of various soil appliances and waste appliances shall be in accordance with accepted standards [9-2(3)]. 4.2 Drainage and Sanitation Requirements 4.2.1 General There should be at least one water tap and arrangement for drainage in the vicinity of each water closet or group of water closet in all the buildings. 4.2.2 Each dwelling unit on premises (abutting on a sewer or with a private sewage disposal system) shall have at least one water closet, one kitchen wash place or a sink, and one bathing place or shower to meet the basic requirements of sanitation and personal hygiene. In case of a group housing, the requirements relating to toilet or sanitary room and kitchen as given in 13 and B-9 of Part 3 ‘Development Control Rules and General Building Requirements’ of the Code shall also be complied with. 4.2.3 All other structures for human occupancy or use on premises (abutting on a sewer or with a private sewage disposal system) shall have adequate sanitary facilities, but in no case less than one water closet and one other fixture for cleaning purposes. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 65. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 17 SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION Table 1 Office Building (Clause 4.2.5.1) Sl No. Fixtures Public Toilets Staff Toilets Males Females Males Females (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) Executive Rooms and Conference Halls in Office Buildings i) Toilet suite comprising one WC, one wash basin (with optional shower stall if building is used round the clock at user's option) Pantry optional as per user requirement Unit could be common for male/female or separate depending on the number of user of each facility For individual officer rooms Main Office Toilets for Staff and Visitors ii) Water closets See Note 1 per 25 1 per 15 iii) Ablution tap with each water closet 1 in each water closet iv) Urinals See Note — Nil up to 6 — 1 for 7 to 20 2 for 21 to 45 3 for 46 to 70 4 for 71 to 100 From 101 to 200, add @ 3% For over 200, add @ 2.5% v) Wash basins See Note 1 per 25 1 per 25 vi) Drinking water fountain See Note 1 per 100 1 per 100 vii) Cleaner's sink 1 per floor NOTE — Staff and public toilet utilities are generally common in office buildings. Where public toilets are to be provided independently, similar requirements as that of staff toilet may be provided. 4.2.4 For Residences 4.2.4.1 Dwelling with individual convenience shall have at least the following fitments: a) One bath room provided with a tap and a floor trap; b) One water closet with flushing apparatus with an ablution tap; and c) One tap with a floor trap or a sink in kitchen or wash place. 4.2.4.1.1 Where only one water closet is provided in a dwelling, it is desirable to have the bath and water closet separately accommodated. 4.2.4.2 Dwellings without individual conveniences shall have the following fitments: a) One water tap with floor trap in each tenement, b) One water closet with flushing apparatus and one ablution tap bath for every two tenements, and c) One bath with water tap and floor trap for every two tenements. 4.2.5 For Buildings Other than Residences 4.2.5.1 The requirements for fitments for drainage and sanitation in the case of buildings other than residences shall be in accordance with Table 1 to Table 15. The accessibility requirements for provision of these facilities for persons with disabilities shall be in accordance with 13 of Part 3 ‘Development Control Rules and General Building Requirements’ of the Code. The following shall be, in addition, taken into consideration: a) The figures shown are based upon one (1) fixture being the minimum required for the number of persons indicated or part thereof. b) Building categories not included in the tables shall be considered separately by the Authority. c) Drinking fountains shall not be installed in the toilets. d) Where there is the danger of exposure to skin contamination with poisonous, infectious or irritating material, wash basin with eye wash jet and an emergency shower (safety shower with eye wash unit) located in an area accessible at all times with the passage/right of way suitable for access to a wheel chair, shall be provided. e) When applying the provision of these tables for providing the number of fixtures, consideration shall be given to the accessibility of the fixtures. Using purely numerical basis may not result in an Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 66. 18 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 Table 2 Factories (Clause 4.2.5.1) Sl No. Fixtures Offices/Visitors Workers Males Females Males Females (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) i) 1 for up to 25 1 for up to 15 1 for up to 15 1 for up to 12 2 for 26 to 35 2 for 16 to 25 2 for 16 to 35 2 for 13 to 25 3 for 36 to 65 3 for 26 to 40 3 for 36 to 65 3 for 26 to 40 4 for 66 to 100 4 for 41 to 57 4 for 66 to 100 4 for 41 to 57 5 for 58 to 77 5 for 58 to 77 Water closets (workers and staff) 6 for 78 to 100 6 for 78 to 100 For persons 101-200 add 3% 5% 3% 5% For persons over 200 add 2.5% 4% 2.50% 4% ii) Ablution tap 1 in each water closet 1 in each water closet 1 in each water closet 1 in each water closet iii) Urinals Nil up to 6 — Nil up to 6 — 1 for 7 to 20 1 for 7 to 20 2 for 21 to 45 2 for 21 to 45 3 for 46 to 70 3 for 46 to 70 4 for 71 to 100 4 for 71 to 100 From 101 to 200, add @ 3% From 101 to 200, add @ 3% For over 200, add @ 2.5% For over 200, add @ 2.5% iv) Wash basins 1 per 25 or part thereof 1 per 25 or part thereof 1 per 25 or part thereof 1 per 25 or part thereof Wash basins in rows or troughs and taps spaced 750 mm c/c v) Drinking water fountain 1 per every 100 or part thereof with minimum one on each floor 1 per every 100 or part thereof with minimum one on each floor vi) Cleaner's sink 1 on each floor 1 on each floor 1 on each floor 1 on each floor vii) Showers/bathing rooms As per trade requirements viii) Emergency shower and eye wash fountain — — 1 per every shop floor per 500 persons NOTES 1 For factories requiring workers to be engaged in dirty and dangerous operations or requiring them to being extremely clean and sanitized conditions additional and separate (if required so) toilet facilities and if required by applicable Industrial and safety laws and the Factories Act shall be provided in consultation with the user. 2 Depending on the type of disability of a person and the hazard posed by the type of activities in the factory for a person with disabilities, if a person with disabilities is decided to be engaged for a particular activity, the requirements of accessibility shall be guided by the provisions given in 13 of Part 3 ‘Development Control Rules and General Building Requirements’ of the Code. Table 3 Cinema, Multiplex Cinema, Concert and Convention Halls, Theatres and Stadia (Clause 4.2.5.1) Sl No. Fixtures Public Staff Males Females Males Females (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) i) Water closets 1 per 100 up to 400 3 per 100 up to 200 1 for up to 15 1 for up to 12 Over 400 add at 1 per 250 or part thereof Over 200 add at 2 per 100 or part thereof 2 for 16 to 35 2 for 13 to 25 ii) Ablution tap 1 in each water closet 1 in each water closet 1 in each water closet 1 in each water closet 1 water tap with draining arrangements shall be provided for every 50 persons or part thereof in the vicinity of water closets and urinals iii) Urinals 1 per 25 or part thereof — Nil up to 6 — 1 for 7 to 20 2 for 21 to 45 iv) Wash basins 1 per 200 or part thereof 1 for up to 15 1 for up to 12 2 for 16 to 35 2 for 13 to 25 v) Drinking water fountain 1 per 100 persons or part thereof vi) Cleaner's sink 1 per floor vii) Showers/bathing rooms As per trade requirements NOTES 1 Some WCs may be Indian style, if desired. 2 Male population may be assumed as two-third and female population as one-third. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 67. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 19 SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION Table 4 Art Galleries, Libraries and Museums (Clause 4.2.5.1) Sl No. Fixtures Public Staff Males Females Males Females (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) i) Water closets 1 per 200 up to 400 1 per 100 up to 200 1 for up to 15 1 for up to 12 Over 400 add at 1 per 250 or part thereof Over 200 add at 1 per 150 or part thereof 2 for 16 to 35 2 for 13 to 25 ii) Ablution tap One in each water closet One in each water closet One in each water closet One in each water closet 1 water tap with draining arrangements shall be provided for every 50 persons or part thereof in the vicinity of water closets and urinals iii) Urinals 1 per 50 — Nil up to 6 — 1 per 7 to 20 2 per 21 to 45 iv) Wash basins 1 for every 200 or part thereof. For over 400, add at 1 per 250 persons or part thereof 1 for every 200 or part thereof. For over 200, add at 1 per 150 persons or part thereof 1 for up to 15 2 for 16 to 35 1 for up to 12 2 for 13 to 25 v) Drinking water fountain 1 per 100 persons or part thereof vi) Cleaner's sink 1 per floor (Minimum) vii) Showers/bathing rooms As per requirements NOTES 1 Some WCs may be Indian style, if desired. 2 Male population may be assumed as two-third and female population as one-third. Table 5 Hospitals with Indoor Patient Wards (Clause 4.2.5.1) Sl No. Fixtures Patient Toilets Staff Toilets Males Females Males Females (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) i) Toilet suite comprising one WC and one wash basin and shower stall Private room with up to 4 patients For individual doctor’s/officer’s rooms For General Wards, Hospital Staff and Visitors ii) Water closets 1 per 5 beds or part thereof 1 per 5 beds or part thereof 1 for up to 15 2 for 16 to 35 1 for up to 12 2 for 13 to 25 iii) Ablution tap One in each water closet One in each water closet One in each water closet One in each water closet 1 water tap with draining arrangements shall be provided for every 50 persons or part thereof in the vicinity of water closets and urinals iv) Urinals 1 per 15 beds — Nil up to 6 — 1 for 7 to 20 2 for 21 to 45 v) Wash basins 2 for every 30 beds or part thereof. Add 1 per additional 30 beds or part thereof 1 for up to 15 2 for 16 to 35 1 for up to 12 2 for 13 to 25 vi) Drinking water fountain 1 per ward 1 per 100 persons or part thereof vii) Cleaner's sink 1 per ward — viii) Bed pan sink 1 per ward — ix) Kitchen sink 1 per ward — NOTES 1 Some WCs may be of Indian style, if desired. 2 Male population may be assumed as two-third and female population as one-third. 3 Provision for additional and special hospital fittings where required shall be made. 4 Drinking water fountains are not recommended for hospitals for reasons of infection control. This is to be decided by the health authority recommendations. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 68. 20 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 Table 6 Hospitals with Outdoor Patient Department (Clause 4.2.5.1) Sl No. Fixtures Patient Toilets Staff Toilets Males Females Males Females (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) i) Toilet suite comprising one WC and one wash basin (with optional shower stall if building used for 24 h) For up to 4 patients For individual doctor’s/officer’s rooms ii) Water closets 1 for up to 15 1 for up to 12 1 per 100 persons or part thereof 2 per 100 persons or part thereof 2 for 16 to 35 2 for 13 to 25 iii) Ablution tap One in each water closet One in each water closet One in each water closet One in each water closet 1 water tap with draining arrangements shall be provided for every 50 persons or part thereof in the vicinity of water closets and urinals iv) Urinals — Nil up to 6 — 1 per 50 persons or part thereof 1 for 7 to 20 2 for 21 to 45 v) Wash basins 2 per 100 persons of part thereof 2 per 100 persons or part thereof 1 for up to 15 2 for 16 to 35 1 for up to 12 2 for 13 to 25 vi) Drinking water fountain See Note 2 1 per 100 persons or part thereof NOTES 1 Some WCs may be Indian style, if desired. 2 Drinking water fountains are not recommended for hospitals for reasons of infection control. This to be decided by the health authority recommendation. 3 The WCs shall be provided keeping in view the location of main OPD waiting hall and sub-waiting halls, floor wise, so as to serve the people effectively. The number of patients shall be calculated floor wise. The OPD population shall include patient attendants @ at least 1 per patient. 4 Male population may be assumed as two-third and female population as one-third. 5 Provision for additional and special hospital fittings where required shall be made. Table 7 Hospitals, Administrative Buildings (Clause 4.2.5.1) Sl No. Fixtures Staff Toilets Males Females (1) (2) (3) (4) i) Toilet suite comprising one WC, one urinal and one wash basin (with optional shower stall if building used for 24 h) For individual doctor’s/officer’s rooms ii) Water closets 1 per 25 persons or part thereof 1 per 15 persons or part thereof iii) Ablution tap One in each water closet One in each water closet 1 water tap with draining arrangements shall be provided for every 50 persons or part thereof in the vicinity of water closets and urinals iv) Urinals — 1 for 6 to 15 2 for 16 to 50 v) Wash basins 1 per 25 persons or part thereof 1 per 25 persons or part thereof vi) Drinking water fountain 1 per 100 persons or part thereof (See Note 2) vii) Cleaner's sink 1 per floor, Min viii) Kitchen sink 1 per floor, Min NOTES 1 Some WCs may be Indian style, if desired. 2 Drinking water fountains to be provided only when it is a separate block and patients will not use it. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 69. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 21 SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION Table 8 Hospitals Staff Quarters and Nurses Homes (Clause 4.2.5.1) Sl No. Fixtures Staff Quarters Nurses Homes Males Females Males Females (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) i) Water closets 1 per 4 persons or part thereof 1 per 4 persons or part thereof 1 per 4 persons or part thereof 1 per 4 persons or part thereof 2 for 5 to 35 2 for 5 to 25 ii) Ablution tap One in each water closet One in each water closet One in each water closet One in each water closet 1 water tap with draining arrangements shall be provided for every 50 persons or part thereof in the vicinity of water closets and urinals iii) Wash basins 1 per 8 persons or part thereof 1 per 8 persons or part thereof iv) Bath (showers) 1 per 4 persons or part thereof 1 per 4 to 6 persons or part thereof v) Drinking water fountain 1 per 100 persons or part thereof, Min 1 per floor 1 per 100 persons or part thereof, Min 1 per floor vi) Cleaner's sink 1 per Floor 1 per Floor NOTES 1 Some WCs may be Indian style, if desired. 2 For independent housing units, fixtures shall be provided as for residences. Table 9 Hotels (Clause 4.2.5.1) Sl No. Fixtures Public Rooms Non Residential Staff Males Females Males Females (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) i) Toilet suite comprising one WC, wash basin with shower or a bath tub Individual guest rooms with attached toilets — Guest Rooms with Common Facilities ii) Water closets 1 per 100 persons up to 400 2 per 100 persons up to 200 1 for up to 15 1 for up to 12 Over 400 add at 1 per 250 or part thereof Over 200 add at 1 per 100 or part thereof 2 for 16 to 35 3 for 36 to 65 4 for 66 to 100 2 for 13 to 25 3 for 26 to 40 4 for 41 to 57 5 for 58 to 77 6 for 78 to 100 iii) Ablution tap One in each water closet One in each water closet One in each water closet One in each water closet 1 water tap with draining arrangements shall be provided for every 50 persons or part thereof in the vicinity of water closets and urinals iv) Urinals Nil up to 6 — 1 for 7 to 20 1 per 50 persons or part thereof — 2 for 21 to 45 3 for 46 to 70 4 for 71 to 100 v) Wash basins 1 per WC/Urinal 1 per WC 1 for up to 15 2 for 16 to 35 3 for 36 to 65 4 for 66 to 100 1 for up to 12 2 for 13 to 25 3 for 26 to 40 4 for 41 to 57 vi) Bath (showers) 1 per 10 persons or part thereof — — vii) Cleaner’s sink 1 per 30 rooms, Min 1 per floor viii) Kitchen sink 1 per kitchen NOTES 1 Some WCs may be Indian style, if desired. 2 Male population may be assumed as two-third and female population as one-third. 3 Provision for additional and special fittings where required shall be made. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 70. 22 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 Table 10 Restaurants (Clause 4.2.5.1) Sl No. Fixtures Public Rooms Non-Residential Staff Males Females Males Females (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) i) Water closets 1 per 50 seats up to 200 2 per 50 seats up to 200 1 for up to 15 1 for up to 12 Over 200 add at 1 per 100 or part thereof Over 200 add at 1 per 100 or part thereof 2 for 16 to 35 3 for 36 to 65 4 for 66 to 100 2 for 13 to 25 3 for 26 to 40 4 for 41 to 57 5 for 58 to 77 6 for 78 to 100 ii) Ablution tap One in each water closet One in each water closet One in each water closet One in each water closet 1 water tap with draining arrangements shall be provided for every 50 persons or part thereof in the vicinity of water closets and urinals iii) Urinals Nil up to 6 1 for 7 to 20 1 per 50 persons or part thereof — 2 for 21 to 45 3 for 46 to 70 4 for 71 to 100 — iv) Wash basins 1 per WC 1 per WC 1 per WC 1 per WC v) Cleaner’s sink 1 per each restaurant vi) Kitchen sink/dish washer 1 per kitchen NOTES 1 Some WCs may be Indian style, if desired. 2 Male population may be assumed as two-third and female population as one-third. 3 Provision for additional and special fittings where required shall be made. Table 11 Schools and Educational Institutions (Clause 4.2.5.1) Non-Residential Residential Sl No. Fixtures Nursery School Boys Girls Boys Girls (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) i) Water closets 1 per 15 pupils or part thereof 1 per 40 pupils or part thereof 1 per 25 pupils or part thereof 1 per 8 pupils or part thereof 1 per 6 pupils or part thereof ii) Ablution tap One in each water closet One in each water closet One in each water closet One in each water closet One in each water closet 1 water tap with draining arrangements shall be provided for every 50 persons or part thereof in the vicinity of water closets and urinals iii) Urinals — 1 per 20 pupils or part thereof — 1 per 25 pupils or part thereof — iv) Wash basins 1 per 15 pupils or part thereof 1 per 60 pupils or part thereof 1 per 40 pupils or part thereof 1 per 8 pupils or part thereof 1 per 6 pupils or part thereof v) Bath/showers 1 per 40 pupils or part thereof — — 1 per 8 pupils or part thereof 1 per 6 pupils or part thereof vi) Drinking water fountain or taps 1 per 50 pupils or part thereof 1 per 50 pupils or part thereof 1 per 50 pupils or part thereof 1 per 50 pupils or part thereof 1 per 50 pupils or part thereof vii) Cleaner’s sink 1 per each floor NOTES 1 Some WCs may be Indian style, if desired. 2 For teaching staff, the schedule of fixtures to be provided shall be the same as in case of office building. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 71. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 23 SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION Table 12 Hostels (Clause 4.2.5.1) Fixtures Resident Non-Resident Visitor/Common Rooms Sl No. Males Females Males Females Males Females (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) i) Water closets 1 per 8 or part thereof 1 per 6 or part thereof 1 for up to 15 2 for 16 to 35 3 for 36 to 65 4 for 66 to 100 1 for up to 12 2 for 13 to 25 3 for 26 to 40 4 for 41 to 57 5 for 58 to 77 6 for 78 to 100 1 per 100 up to 400 Over 400 add at 1 per 250 2 per 100 up to 200 Over 200 add at 1 per 100 ii) Ablution tap One in each water closet One in each water closet One in each water closet One in each water closet One in each water closet One in each water closet 1 water tap with draining arrangements shall be provided for every 50 persons or part thereof in the vicinity of water closets and urinals iii) Urinals 1 per 25 or part thereof — Nil up to 6 1 for 7 to 20 2 for 21 to 45 3 for 46 to 70 4 for 71 to 100 — 1 per 50 or part thereof — iv) Wash basins 1 per 8 persons or part thereof 1 per 6 persons or part thereof 1 for up to 15 2 for 16 to 35 3 for 36 to 65 4 for 66 to 100 1 for up to 12 2 for 13 to 25 3 for 26 to 40 4 for 41 to 57 5 for 58 to 77 6 for 78 to 100 1 per WC/ Urinal 1 per WC v) Bath/showers 1 per 8 persons or part thereof 1 per 6 persons or part thereof — — — — vi) Cleaner’s sink 1 per each floor NOTE — Some WCs may be Indian style, if desired. Table 13 Fruit and Vegetable Markets (Clause 4.2.5.1) Sl No. Fixtures Shop Owners Common Toilets in Market Building Public Toilet for Floating Population Males Females Males Females Males Females (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) i) Water closets 1 per 8 or part thereof 1 for up to 15 2 for 16 to 35 3 for 36 to 65 4 for 66 to 100 1 for up to 12 2 for 13 to 25 3 for 26 to 40 4 for 41 to 57 5 for 58 to 77 6 for 78 to 100 1 per 50 (Min 2) 1 per 50 (Min 2) ii) Ablution tap One in each water closet One in each water closet One in each water closet One in each water closet One in each water closet One in each water closet 1 water tap with draining arrangements shall be provided in receiving/ sale area of each shop and for every 50 persons or part thereof in the vicinity of water closets and urinals iii) Urinals — — Nil up to 6 1 for 7 to 20 2 for 21 to 45 3 for 46 to 70 4 for 71 to 100 — 1 per 50 — iv) Wash basins 1 per 8 or part thereof 1 for up to 15 2 for 16 to 35 3 for 36 to 65 4 for 66 to 100 1 for up to 12 2 for 13 to 25 3 for 26 to 40 4 for 41 to 57 — — v) Bath/showers 1 per 8 persons or part thereof 1 per 6 persons or part thereof — — 1 per 50 persons 1 per 50 persons NOTES 1 Toilet facilities for individual buildings in a market should be taken same as that for office buildings. 2 Common toilets in the market buildings provide facilities for persons working in shops and their regular visitors. 3 Special toilet facilities for a large floating population of out of town buyers/sellers, labour, drivers of vehicles for whom special toilet (public toilets). Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 72. 24 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 Table 14 Bus Stations, Airports and Railway Stations (Clause 4.2.5.1) Fixtures Junction Stations, Intermediate Stations and Bus Stations Terminal Railway and Bus Stations Domestic and International Airports Sl No. Males Females Males Females Males Females (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) i) Water closets 3 for up to 1 000 4 for up to 1 000 4 for up to 1 000 5 for up to 1 000 Min 2 Min 2 Add 1 per additional 1 000 or part thereof Add 1 per additional 1 000 or part thereof Add 1 per additional 1 000 or part thereof Add 1 per additional 1 000 or part thereof For 200 : 5 For 400 : 9 For 600 : 12 For 800 : 16 For 1 000 : 18 For 200 : 8 For 400 : 15 For 600 : 20 For 800 : 26 For 1 000 : 29 ii) Ablution tap One in each water closet One in each water closet One in each water closet One in each water closet One in each water closet One in each water closet 1 water tap with draining arrangements shall be provided for every 50 persons or part thereof in the vicinity of water closets and urinals iii) Urinals 4 for up to 1 000 Add 1 per additional 1 000 — 6 for up to 1 000 Add 1 per additional 1 000 — 1 per 40 or part thereof — iv) Wash basins 1 per WC/ Urinal 1 per WC 1 per WC/ Urinal 1 per WC 1 per WC/ Urinal 1 per WC v) Bath/showers 2 per 1 000 3 per 1 000 4 per 1 000 vi) Drinking water fountain or taps (in common lobby for male/female) 2 per 1 000 or part thereof 3 per 1 000 or part thereof 4 per 1 000 or part thereof vii) Cleaner’s sink 1 per toilet compartment with 3 WCs 1 per toilet compartment with 3 WCs 1 per toilet compartment with 3 WCs 1 per toilet compartment with 3 WCs 1 per toilet compartment with 3 WCs 1 per toilet compartment with 3 WCs NOTES 1 Some WCs may be Indian style, if desired. 2 Male population may be assumed as three-fifth and female population as two-fifth. 3 Separate provision shall be made for staff and workers. Table 15 Shopping Malls and Retail Buildings (Clause 4.2.5.1) Staff Toilets in Shopping Building Public Toilet for Floating Population Sl No. Fixtures Males Females Males Females (1) (2) (5) (6) (7) (8) i) Water closets 1 for up to 15 2 for 16 to 35 3 for 36 to 65 4 for 66 to 100 1 for up to 12 2 for 13 to 25 3 for 26 to 40 4 for 41 to 57 5 for 58 to 77 6 for 78 to 100 1 per 50 (Min 2) 1 per 50 (Min 2) ii) Ablution tap One in each water closet One in each water closet One in each water closet One in each water closet iii) Urinals Nil up to 6 1 for 7 to 20 2 for 21 to 45 3 for 46 to 70 4 for 71 to 100 — 1 per 50 — iv) Wash basins 1 for up to 15 2 for 16 to 35 3 for 36 to 65 4 for 66 to 100 1 for up to 12 2 for 13 to 25 3 for 26 to 40 4 for 41 to 57 1 per 50 (Min 2) 1 per 50 (Min 2) v) Bath/showers 1 per 100 persons 1 per 100 persons — — NOTES 1 Toilet facilities for individual facilities in a shopping building should be taken same as that for office buildings. 2 Staff toilets in the shopping buildings provide facilities for persons working in shops and building, as well as for maintenance staff. 3 The number of persons against the fixture bath/showers represent the maintenance staff requiring such facility. 4 Public toilet facilities are provided for a large floating population for buyers and visitors. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 73. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 25 SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION installation suited to the need of a specific building. For example, schools should be provided with toilet facilities on each floor. Similarly, toilet facilities shall be provided for temporary workmen employed in any establishment according to the needs; and in any case one WC and one wash basin shall be provided. f) All buildings used for human habitation for dwelling, work, occupation, medical care or any purpose detailed in the various tables, abutting a public sewer or a private sewage disposal system, shall be provided with minimum sanitary facilities as per the schedule in the tables. In case the disposal facilities are not available, they shall be provided as a part of the building design for ensuring high standards of sanitary conditions in accordance with this section. g) Workplaces where crèches are provided, they shall be provided with one WC for 10 persons or part thereof, one wash basin for 15 persons or part thereof, one kitchen sink with floor trap for preparing food/milk preparations. The sink provided shall be with a drinking water tap. h) In all types of buildings, individual toilets and pantry should be provided for executives, and for meeting/seminar/conference rooms, etc, as per the user requirement. j) Where food is consumed indoors, water stations may be provided in place of drinking water fountains. 4.3 Materials, Fittings and Appliances 4.3.1 Standards for Materials, Fittings and Sanitary Appliances All materials, fittings and sanitary appliances shall conform to Part 5 ‘Building Materials’ of the Code. 4.3.2 Choice of Material for Pipes 4.3.2.1 Salt glazed stoneware pipe For all sewers and drains in all soils, except where supports are required as in made-up ground, glazed stoneware pipe shall be used as far as possible in preference to other types of pipes. These pipes are particularly suitable where acid effluents or acid subsoil conditions are likely to be encountered. Salt glazed stoneware pipes shall conform to accepted standards [9-2(4)]. 4.3.2.2 Cement concrete pipes When properly ventilated, cement concrete pipes with spigot and socket or collar joints present an alternative to glazed stoneware sewers of over 150 mm diameter. These shall not be used to carry acid effluents or sewage under conditions favourable for the production of hydrogen sulphide and shall not be laid in those subsoils that are likely to affect adversely the quality or strength of concrete. Where these pipes are employed for conveying liquid containing sulphates, the pipes used shall be manufactured using sulphate resisting Portland cement. Owing to the longer lengths of pipes available, the joints would be lesser in the case of cements concrete pipes. These pipes may be used for surface water drains in all diameters. Cement concrete pipes shall conform to accepted standards [9-2(5)]. 4.3.2.3 Cast iron pipes 4.3.2.3.1 These pipes shall be used in the following situation: a) In bed or unstable ground where soil movement is expected; b) In made-up or tipped ground; c) To provide for increased strength where a sewer is laid at insufficient depth, where it is exposed or where it has to be carried on piers or above ground; d) Under buildings and where pipes are suspended in basements and like situations; e) In reaches where the velocity is more than 2.4 m/s; and f) For crossings of watercourses. NOTE — In difficult foundation condition such a in the case of black cotton soil, the cast iron pipes shall be used only when suitable supporting arrangements are made. 4.3.2.3.2 It shall be noted that cast iron pipes even when given a protective paint are liable to severe external corrosion in certain soils; among such soils are: a) Soils permeated by peaty waters; and b) Soils in which the subsoil contains appreciable concentrations of sulphates. Local experiences shall be ascertained before cast iron pipes are used where corrosive soil conditions are suspected. Where so used, suitable measures for the protection of the pipes may be resorted to as an adequate safeguard. 4.3.2.3.3 Cast iron pipes shall conform to accepted standards [9-2(6)]. 4.3.2.4 Asbestos cement pipes Asbestos cement pipes are commonly used for house drainage systems and they shall conform to accepted standards [9-2(7)]. They are not recommended for underground situations. However, asbestos cement pressure pipes conforming to accepted standards [9-2(7)] may be used in underground situations also, provided they are not subject to heavy superimposed Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 74. 26 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 loads. These shall not be used to carry acid effluents or sewage under conditions favourable for the production of hydrogen sulphide and shall not be laid in those subsoils which are likely to affect adversely the quality or strength of asbestos cement pipes. Where so desired, the life of asbestos cement pipes may be increased by lining inside of the pipe with suitable coatings like epoxy/polyester resins, etc. 4.3.2.5 PVC pipes Unplasticized PVC pipes may be used for drainage purposes; however, where hot water discharge is anticipated, the wall thickness shall be minimum 3 mm irrespective of the size and flow load. PVC and HDPE pipes shall conform to accepted standards [9-2(8)]. NOTE — Where possible, high density polyethylene pipes (HDPE) and PVC pipes may be used for drainage and sanitation purposes, depending upon the suitability. 4.3.2.6 Corrugated pipes These pipes (externally corrugated) are used for sewerage and drainage applications. They are light weight and have long life. The leakage and infiltration at joints are less. The operational cost is low and can easily withstand natural settlements without suffering cracks or leakages. They consume fewer raw material and have less carbon dioxide emission. 4.3.2.7 Low noise pipes Waste water systems encompass the system of drainage and pressure relief pipes within a building and terminate 0.5 m outside the external wall. Waste water systems are based on the primary pressure-relief system in which water and air-flow occurs in the same pipe. The waste water system shall be separated from the roof drainage system. Noise is a variance in air pressure that spreads like a wave. If quick changes in pressure occur between 20 and 20 000 times a second (frequency 20 Hz and 20 kHz), they are audible to humans. The loudness of noise is determined by the amplitude of the wave, which is measured in decibels (dB). The main cause of noise in indoor drainage systems (primarily focused on the downpipe) are the choice of the pipe system, the bracket type and the design of drainage system. Optimizing these factors will therefore have the best influence on noise reduction. 4.3.2.8 Under slung pipes In under slung plumbing, the toilet slab is built at the same level as the slabs outside the toilet. Holes/core cuts are punctured through the slab wherever pipes have to pass through, and the plumbing is clamped to the bottom of the slab. It is then concealed above a false ceiling, which is accessible above the false ceiling for routine maintenance. In this type of plumbing, any leaks will drip onto the false ceiling which is easily detectable thus allow quick maintenance without much damage to the structure or occupied premises 4.4 Preliminary Data for Design 4.4.1 General Before the drainage system for a building or group of buildings is designed and constructed, accurate information regarding the site conditions is essential. This information may vary with the individual scheme but shall, in general, be covered by the following: a) Site plan (see 3.2.2). b) Drainage plan (see 3.2.3). c) Use — A description of the use for which the building is intended and periods of occupation in order that peak discharges may be estimated; d) Nature of waste — While dealing with sewage from domestic premises, special problems under this head may not arise; however, note shall be taken of any possibility of trade effluents being discharged into the pipes at a future date; e) Outlet connection — The availability of sewers or other outlets; f) Cover — The depth (below ground) of the proposed sewers and drains and the nature and weight of the traffic on the ground above them; g) Subsoil condition 1) The approximate level of the subsoil water, and any available records of flood levels shall be ascertained, as also the depth of the water table relative to all sewer connections, unless it is known to be considerably below the level of the latter. 2) In the case of deep manholes, this information will influence largely the type of construction to be adopted. The probable safe bearing capacity of the subsoil at invert level may be ascertained in the case of a deep manhole. 3) Where work of any magnitude is to be undertaken, trial pits or boreholes shall be put at intervals along the line of the proposed sewer or drain and the data therefrom tabulated, together with any information available from previous works carried out in the vicinity. In general, the information derived from Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 75. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 27 SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION trial pits is more reliable than that derived from boreholes. For a long length of sewer or drain, information derived from a few trial pits at carefully chosen points may be supplemented by that obtained from number of intermediate boreholes. Much useful information is often obtained economically and quickly by the use of a soil auger. 4) The positions of trial pits or boreholes shall be shown on the plans, together with sections showing the strata found and the dates on which water levels are recorded. h) Location of other services — The position, depth and size of all other pipes, mains, cables, or other services, in the vicinity of the proposed work, may be ascertained from the Authority, if necessary; j) Reinstatement of surfaces — Information about the requirements of the highway authority is necessary where any part of the sewer or drain is to be taken under a highway. Those responsible for the sewer or drain shall be also responsible for the maintenance of the surface until permanently reinstated. The written consent of the highway authority to break up the surface and arrangement as to the charges thereof and the method and type of surface reinstatement shall always be obtained before any work is commenced; k) Diversion and control of traffic 1) In cases where sewers cross roads or foot- paths, cooperation shall be maintained with the police and Authorities regarding the control and diversion of vehicular and/ or pedestrian traffic as may be necessary. Access to properties along the road shall always be maintained and adequate notice shall be given to the occupiers of any shops or business premises, particularly if obstruction is likely. 2) During the period of diversion, necessary danger lights, red flags, diversion boards, caution boards, watchmen, etc, shall be provided as required by the Authority. m) Way-leaves (easements) — The individual or authority carrying out the work is responsible for negotiating way-leaves where the sewer crosses land in other ownership. The full extend and conditions of such way-leaves shall be made known to the contractor and his employees, and prior notice of commence-ment of excavation shall always be given to the owners concerned, and cooperation with them shall be maintained at all stages, where sewers run across fields or open ground, the exact location of manholes shall be shown on way- leaves or easement plans. The right of access to manhole covers and the right to maintain the sewer shall be specifically included in any way- leave or easement arrangements which may be made with the owner of the land; and n) Damage to buildings and structures — When sewer trenches have to be excavated near buildings or walls a joint inspection with the ownersofthepropertyshallbemadetoestablish whether any damage or cracks exist before starting the work, and a properly authenticated survey and record of the condition of buildings likely to be affected shall be made. Tell tales may be placed across outside cracks and dated, and kept under observation. Un-retouched photographs taken by an independent photographer may provide useful evidence. 4.4.2 Drainage into a Public Sewer Where public sewerage is available, the following information is particularly necessary and may be obtained from the Authority: a) The position of the public sewer or sewers in relation to the proposed buildings. b) The invert level of the public sewer; c) The system on which the public sewers are designed (combined, separate or partially separate), the lowest level at which connection may be made to it, and the Authority in which it is vested; d) The material of construction and condition of the sewer if connection is not to be made by the Authority; e) The extent to which surcharge in the sewer may influence the drainage scheme; f) Whether the connection to the public sewer is made, or any part of the drain laid, by the Authority, or whether the owner is responsible for this work; if the latter, whether the Authority imposes any special conditions; g) Whether an intercepting trap is required by the Authority on the drain near the boundary of the curtilage; and h) Where manholes are constructed under roads, the approval of the Highway Authority for the type of cover to be fitted shall be obtained. 4.4.3 Other Methods of Disposal of Sewage 4.4.3.1 Where discharge into a public sewer is not possible, the drainage of the building/building campus shall be on a separate system. Foul water shall be Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 76. 28 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 disposed of by adequate treatment approved by the Authority on the site. The effluent from the plant shall be discharged after meeting the norms specified by the statutory authority into a natural watercourse or on the surface of the ground or disposed of subsoil dispersion preferably draining to a suitable outlet channel. 4.4.3.2 In the case of dilution into a natural stream course, the quality of the effluent shall conform and the requirements of the Authority controlling the prevention of pollution of streams. 4.4.3.3 In the case of subsoil dispersion, the requirements of the Authority for water supply shall be observed to avoid any possible pollution of local water supplies or wells. 4.4.3.4 The general subsoil water level and the subsoil conditions shall be ascertained, including the absorptive capacity of the soil. 4.4.3.5 A subsoil dispersion is not desirable near a building or in such positions that the ground below the foundations is likely to be affected. 4.4.3.6 Where no other method of disposal is possible, foul water may be diverted to cesspools and arrangements made with the Authority for satisfactory periodical removal and conveyance to a disposal works. 4.4.3.7 Under the separate system, drainage of the building shall be done through septic tanks of different sizes or by stabilization ponds or by any other treatment methods such as extended aeration activated process, sequential batch process, fluidized bio-reactors, membrane bio-reactor, submerged aerobic fixed film, rotating biological contactor, electrolyte process, etc, as approved by the Authority. For detailed information on the design and construction of septic tanks and waste stabilization ponds, sewage treatment plants reference may be made to good practice [9-2(9)]. 4.4.3.8 Bio-toilet (or eco-toilet) It is useful in situations where no suitable water supply or sewer system and sewage treatment plant is available to capture the nutrients in human excreta. The toilet is made of a structure, generally of prefabricated type, above the ground, a bio-digester tank below the ground and in case of sub-zero temperature regions, a solar panel. Bio-toilet involves complete sludge free disposal of human waste and eliminates need for manual scavenging. It decomposes solid waste to water and bio-gas. It is eco-friendly, hazard free, requiring least maintenance and is capable of functioning efficiently at sub-zero temperatures (see Fig. 5) 4.4.4 Disposal of Surface and Subsoil Waters All information which may influence the choice of methods of disposal of surface and/or subsoil waters shall be obtained. In the absence of surface water drainage system, and if practicable and permissible, disposal into a natural water-course or soakaway may be adopted. The location and flood levels of the water course as also the requirements of the Authority controlling the river or the waterway shall be ascertained. 4.5 Planning and Design Considerations 4.5.1 Aim The efficient disposal of foul and surface water from a building is of great importance to public health and is FIG. 5 BIO-TOILET OR ECO-TOILET Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 77. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 29 SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION an essential part of the construction of the building. In designing a drainage system for an individual building or a housing colony, the aim shall be to provide a system of self-cleaning conduits for the conveyance of foul, waste, surface or subsurface waters and for the removal of such wastes speedily and efficiently to a sewer or other outlet without risk of nuisance and hazard to health. Also, intent should be to take into consideration that, waste water, storm water and solid waste are potential resources. 4.5.1.1 To achieve this aim, a drainage system shall satisfy the following requirements: a) Rapid and efficient removal of liquid wastes without leakage; b) Prevention of access of foul gases to the building and provision for their escape from the system. c) Adequate and easy access for clearing obstructions; d) Prevention of undue external or internal corrosion, or erosion of joints and protection of materials of construction; and e) Avoidance of air locks, siphonage, proneness to obstruction, deposit and damage. 4.5.1.2 The realization of an economical drainage system is added by compact grouping of fitments in both horizontal and vertical directions. This implies that if care is taken and ingenuity brought into play when designing the original building or buildings to be drained, it is possible to group the sanitary fittings and other equipment requiring drainage; both in vertical and horizontal planes, as to simplify the drainage system and make it most economical. 4.5.1.3 Efficient and an economical plumbing system can be achieved by planning the toilets in compact grouping with the layout of the bathrooms and observing the following guidelines: a) Placing of plumbing fixtures around an easily accessible pipe shaft; in high rise buildings the pipe shafts may have to be within the building envelope and easy provision for access panels and doors should be planned in advance, in such cases so as not to cause inconvenience during maintenance. b) Adopting repetitive layout of toilets in the horizontal and vertical directions. c) In planning for malls, the required public and toilet facilities shall be located not more than one storey above or below the space to be served with such facilities, and the path of travel to such facilities shall not exceed 91 m. In other occupancies, the required public and toilet facilities shall be located not more than one storey above or below the space to be served with such facilities, and the path of travel to such facilities shall not exceed 152 m. However, in the above buildings, toilet rooms shall not open directly into a room used for preparation of food for service to public. d) Avoiding any conflict with the reinforced cement concrete structure by avoiding embedding pipes in it, avoiding pipe crossings in beams, columns and major structural elements. e) Identifying open terraces and areas subject to ingress of rainwater directly or indirectly and providing for location of inlets at each level for down takes for disposal at ground levels. f) Avoiding crossing of services of individual property through property of other owners. g) Planning to avoid accumulation of rainwater or any backflow from sewers particularly in planned low elevation areas in a building. h) Setting of sanitary fixtures — A water closet, urinal, lavatory or bidet shall not be set closer than 380 mm from the centre to any side wall partition, vanity or other obstruction, or closer than 760 mm centre-to-centre between adjacent fixtures. There shall not be less than 530 mm clearance in front of the water closet, urinal, lavatory or bidet to any wall, fixture or door. Water closet compartment shall not be less than 760 mm in width and 1 520 mm in depth for floor mounted closets, and not less than 760 mm in width and 1 420 mm in depth for wall hung water closets. The urinal partitions shall begin at a height not greater than 305 mm from and extend not less than 1 520 mm above the finished floor surface. The walls or partitions shall extend from the wall surface at each side of the urinal not less than 460 mm or to a point not less than 150 mm beyond the outermost front lip of the urinal measured from the finished back wall surface, whichever is greater. j) Usually, the vertical distance between two horizontal connections to a vertical drain should be more than 200 mm in order to avoid back flow. 4.5.1.4 Typical mounting arrangements for various plumbing fixtures, including drainage systems and ventilation are illustrated in Annex D. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 78. 30 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 4.5.2 Layout 4.5.2.1 General Rainwater should preferably be dealt separately from sewage and sullage. Sewage and sullage shall be connected to sewers. However, storm water from the courtyard may be connected to the sewer where it is not possible to drain otherwise; after obtaining permission of the Authority. 4.5.2.2 Additional requirements The following requirements are suggested to be considered in the design of drainage system: a) The layout shall be as simple and direct as practicable. b) The pipes should be laid in straight lines, as far as possible, in both vertical and horizontal planes. c) Anything that is likely to cause irregularity of flow, such as abrupt changes of direction, shall be avoided. d) The pipes should be non-absorbent, durable, smooth in bore and of adequate strength. e) The pipes should be adequately supported without restricting movement. f) Drains should be well ventilated, to prevent the accumulation of foul gases and fluctuation of air pressure within the pipe, which could lead to unsealing (siphoning) of gully or water closet traps. g) All the parts of the drainage system should be accessible for feasibility of inspection and practical maintenance. h) No bends and junctions whatsoever shall be permitted in sewers except at manholes and inspection chambers. j) Sewer drain shall be laid for self-cleaning velocity of 0.75 m/s and generally should not flow more than half-full. k) Pipes crossing in walls and floors shall be through mild steel sleeves of diameter leaving an annular space of 5 mm around the outer diameter of the pipe crossing the wall. m) Pipes should not be laid close to building foundation. n) Pipes should not pass near large trees because of possibility of damage by the roots. p) Branch connections should be swept in the direction of flow. q) Sewer pipes should be at least 900 mm below road and at least 600 mm below fields and gardens. r) Pipes should not pass under a building unless absolutely necessary. Where it is necessary to lay pipes under a building, the following conditions shall be observed: 1) Pipes shall be centrifugally cast (spun) iron pressure pipe as per good practice [9-2(10)]; 2) The pipe shall be laid in straight line and at uniform gradient; 3) Means of access in form of manholes/ inspection chamber shall be provided at each end, immediately outside the building; 4) In case the pipe or any part of it is laid above the natural surface of the ground, it shall be laid on concrete supports, the bottom of which goes at least 150 mm below the ground surface. NOTE — It is desirable that pipe/drains should not be taken through a living room or kitchen and shall preferably be taken under a staircase room or passage. s) Consideration shall be given to alternative layouts so as to ensure that the most economical and practical solution is adopted. The possibility of alterations shall be avoided by exercising due care and forethought. 4.5.2.3 Protection against vermin and dirt The installation of sanitary fittings shall not introduce crevices which are not possible to inspect and clean readily. Pipes, if not embedded, shall be run well clear of the wall. Holes through walls to lay pipes shall be made good on both sides to prevent entry of insects. Materials used for embedding pipes shall be rodent-proof. Passage of rodents from room-to-room or from floor- to-floor shall be prevented by suitable sealing. The intermediate lengths of ducts and chases shall be capable of easy inspection. Any unused drains, sewers, etc, shall be demolished or filled in to keep them free from rodents. All pipe shafts shall be plastered before any pipes are installed in the shaft. It is advisable to lay pipes on the steel supports with adequate gap between plastered wall and support structure. This will provide a smooth surface and prevent location for survival of insects and vermins. 4.5.2.4 Choice of plumbing system 4.5.2.4.1 In selecting one or more of the type of piping systems, the building and the layout of toilets/fixtures, relationship with other services, acceptability to the Authority, and any special requirements of users, shall be studied. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 79. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 31 SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION a) Single stack system [see 2.69 (a)] 1) The single stack system is ideal when the toilet/fixture layouts are repetitive and there is less space for pipes on the wall. 2) In any system so selected there should be not more than two toilet connections per floor. 3) The system requires minimum 100 mm diameter stack for a maximum of 5 floors in a building. 4) In this system, care shall be taken of the horizontal distance of sanitary fixtures from the drainage stack and vertical distance between connections of branches from fixtures to drainage stack. 5) All the safeguards for the use of this system given in 4.5.2.4.2 shall be complied with. b) One pipe — partially ventilated system [see 2.69 (b)] The system and the applicable safeguards under this system are the same as for single stack system. The prime modification is to vent the soil appliance(s). c) One pipe — fully ventilated system [see 2.69 (c)] 1) This system is suitable for buildings where the toilet/fixture layouts and the shafts are repetitive. It requires less shaft space, and is economical. 2) Continuous flow of water in the pipe from waste appliances makes it less prone to blockage and makes the system more efficient. 3) The system eliminates the need for a gully trap which requires constant cleaning. 4) This system requires individual vent pipes installed either in suspended ceiling or in the wall above the floor level in the toilet, provided construction details of the building allow provision of vent pipes for individual fixtures and routing of vent pipes to remote shafts where main vent stacks may have been located. 5) The system requires minimum 100 mm diameter stack. 6) The system is ideal when the main pipes run at the ceiling of the lowest floor or in a service floor. d) Two pipe system [see 2.69 (d)] 1) This system provides safety and flexibility in layouts for larger toilets and for buildings having higher requirement of performance due to its height and type of occupancy. 2) In large buildings and houses with open ground and gardens, the sullage water from the waste system can be suitably treated and usefully utilized for gardening and agriculture. 3) In larger and multi-storeyed buildings, the sullage is treated within the building for reuse as makeup water for cooling towers for air conditioning system and is also used for flushing water closets provided it has absolutely no connection with any water supply line, tank or system used for domestic and drinking supply. For detailed information regarding design and installation of soil, waste and vent pipes, reference may be made to good practice [9-2(11)]. 4.5.2.4.2 Safeguards for single stack system a) As far as practicable,the fixtures on a floor shall be connected to stack in order of increasing discharge rate in the downward direction. b) The size of the vent pipe (terminating to the outdoor) shall be same as the size of drainage stack in the case of single stack system. c) Water closets shall be connected to the stack through a sanitary tee; the maximum horizontal distance from the stack being 2 400 mm. d) For fixtures other than water closets, the maximum horizontal distance from the stack shall be 3 500 mm. e) The vertical distance between the waste branch (from floor trap or from the individual appliance) and the soil branch connection, when soil pipe is connected to stack above the waste pipe, shall be not less than 200 mm. f) Depth of water seal traps from different fixtures shall be as per 4.5.3.6.1.6. g) Branches and stacks which receive discharges from WC pans should not be less than 100 mm, except where the outlet from the siphonic water closet is 80 mm, in which case a branch pipe of 80 mm may be used. For outlet of floor traps 75 mm dia pipes may be used. h) The horizontalbranchdistancefor fixturesfrom stack, bend(s) at the foot of stack to avoid back pressure as well as vertical distance between the lowest connection and the invert of drain shall be as per good practice [9-2(11)]. j) For tall buildings, ground floor appliances are recommended to be connected directly to manhole/inspection chamber. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 80. 32 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 4.5.2.4.2.1 Drainage stack shall be sized in accordance with Table 16. The drainage stack and branch piping shall be the vents for the drainage system. Stack shall be uniformly sized based on the total connected drainage fixture unit load. Table 16 Single Stack Sizing (Clause 4.5.2.4.2.1) Maximum Connected Drainage Fixture Units (DFU) Sl No. Stack Size mm Stacks Less than 23 m in Height Stacks 23 m to Less than 49 m in Height Stacks 49 m and Greater in Height1) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) i) 75 24 — — ii) 100 225 24 — iii) 125 480 225 24 iv) 150 1 015 480 225 v) 200 2 320 1 015 480 vi) 250 4 500 2 320 1 015 vii) 300 8 100 4 500 2 320 viii) 375 13 600 8 100 4 500 1) To be considered for one-pipe partially ventilated system only. 4.5.2.4.2.2 An alternative design approach for designing the single stack system is also used in some of the countries, which may be followed if approved by the authority. Such an approach may utilize the following, and may also require reference to available specialist literature: a) The size of the vent pipe (terminating to the outdoor) shall be same as the size of drainage stack in the case of single stack system. b) Using branch discharge pipes, self and external siphonage of the water seal of traps can be avoided. c) In respect of branch discharge pipes, the entire developed length including fittings up to farthest connection is 4.0 m. d) A 45º bend shall be used for the horizontal branch pipe with a drop connection after the connection from the appliance. e) To match the crowns of small and larger pipes, an eccentric reducer is used with straight portion on top. f) A non-ventilated discharge pipe shall be connected to discharge stack with a sweep junction having an angle of 87º to 88.5º. g) Inrespectofverticaldischargestacks,concentric or eccentric reducers may be permitted. h) In respect of stacks not exceeding 10 m in height, from the upper most connection to change of direction, no branch discharge pipe shall be connected to the stack or horizontal side for a distance of 1.0 m. In respect of second change in direction, no branch discharge pipe shall be connected within a distance of 0.5 m after the change of direction. The pipe stack shall not be connected to sanitary appliances from the lowest floor. j) In respect of stacks exceeding 10 m in height, from the upper most connection to change of direction, no branch discharge pipe shall be connected to the stack or horizontal side for a distance of 2.0 m. The connection of the ventilated branch to the main stack shall not be within 2.0 m from the change of direction. In respectof second change in direction, no branch discharge pipe shall be connected within a distance of 0.5 m after the change of direction. The pipe stack shall not be connected to sanitary appliances from the lowest floor. k) The connection of branch discharge pipes to the vertical stack shall be such that back flow will notcrossflow intofixturesontheoppositeends. 4.5.3 Drainage (Soil, Waste and Vent) Pipes 4.5.3.1 General considerations 4.5.3.1.1 Drainage pipes shall be kept clear of all other services. Provisions shall be made during the construction of the building for the entry of the drainage pipes. In most cases this may be done conveniently by installing sleeves or conduit pipes into or under the structure in appropriate positions. This will facilitate the installation and maintenance of the services. 4.5.3.1.2 Horizontal drainage piping should be so routed as not to pass over any equipment or fixture where leakage from the line could possibly cause damage or contamination. Drainage piping shall never pass over switch-gear or other electrical equipment. If it is impossible to avoid these areas and piping shall run in these locations, then a pan or drain tray should be installed below the pipe to collect any leakage or condensation. A drain line should run from this pan to a convenient floor drain or service sink. 4.5.3.1.3 All vertical soil, waste, vent and anti- siphonage pipes shall be covered on top with a copper or heavily galvanized iron wire dome or cast iron terminal guards. All cast iron pipes, which are to be painted periodically, shall be fixed to give a minimum clearance of 50 mm clear from the finished surface of the wall by means of a suitable clamp. NOTE — Asbestos cement cowls may be used in case asbestos cement pipes are used as soil pipes. 4.5.3.1.4 Drainage pipes shall be carried to a height above the buildings as specified for vent pipe (see 4.5.3.4). Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 81. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 33 SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION 4.5.3.2 Soil pipes A soil pipe, conveying to a drain, any solid or liquid filth, shall be circular and shall have a minimum diameter of 100 mm. 4.5.3.2.1 Except where it is impracticable, the soil pipe shall be situated outside the building or in suitably designed pipe shafts and shall be continued upwards without diminution of its diameter, and (except where it is unavoidable) without any bend or angle, to such a height and position as to afford by means of its open end a safe outlet for foul air. The position of the open end with its covering shall be such as to comply with the conditions set out in 4.5.3.4 relating to vent pipe. Even if the pipes are laid externally, the soil pipes shall not be permitted on a wall abutting a street unless the Authority is satisfied that it is unavoidable. Where shafts for pipes are provided, the cross-section area of the shaft shall be suitable to allow free and unhampered access to the pipes and fittings proposed to be installed in the shaft. However, in no case cross- section area of the shaft shall be less than a square of 1 m side. All pipe shafts shall be provided with an access door at ground level and facilities for shaft ventilation. 4.5.3.2.2 Soil pipes, whether insider or outside the building, shall not be connected with any rainwater pipe and there shall not be any trap in such soil pipe or between it and any drain with which it is connected. 4.5.3.2.3 The soil pipe shall be provided with heel rest bend which shall rest on sound footing, if terminating at firm ground level. When the stack is terminating at the ceiling of a floor, the bend shall be provided with sufficient structural support to cater for the stack dead weight and the thrust developed from the falling soil/ waste. Vertical stack shall be fixed at least 50 mm clear of the finished surface of the wall by means of a suitable clamp of approved type. 4.5.3.3 Waste pipes Every pipe in a building for carrying off the waste or overflow water from every bath, wash basin or sink to a drain shall be of 32 mm to 50 mm diameter, and shall be trapped immediately beneath such wash basins or sink by an efficient siphon trap — P trap with adequate means for inspection and cleaning. Such P traps shall be ventilated into the external air whenever such ventilation is necessary to preserve the seal of the trap. Waste pipes, P traps, etc, shall be constructed of iron, lead, brass, PVC, engineering plastics, stoneware, asbestos cement or other approved material. The overflow pipe from wash basin, sinks, etc, shall be connected with the waste pipe immediately above the trap. Vertical pipes carrying off waste water shall have a minimum diameter of 75 mm. NOTE — Whenever wash basins and sinks have in-built overflow arrangements, there is no need to provide overflow pipes in such cases. 4.5.3.3.1 Every pipe in a building for carrying off waste water to a drain shall be taken through an external wall of the building by the shortest practicable line, and shall discharge below the grating or surface box of the chamber but above the inlet of a properly trapped gully. The waste pipe shall be continued upwards without any diminution in its diameter and (except when unavoidable) without any bend or angle to such a height and position as to afford by means of the open end of the waste pipe, a safe outlet for foul air, the position of the open end and its covering being such as to comply with the conditions. 4.5.3.3.2 Except where it is impracticable, the common waste pipe shall be situated outside the building and shall be continued upwards without diminution of its diameter (except where it is unavoidable) without any bend or angle being formed to such a height and position as to avoid by means of the open end a safe outlet for foul air, the position of the open end and the covering threat being such as to comply with the conditions set out in 4.5.3.4 relating to vent pipe. 4.5.3.4 Vent pipes Vent pipes should be so installed that water cannot be retained in them. They should be fixed vertically. Whenever possible, horizontal runs should be avoided. Vent pipe shall be carried to such a height and in such a position as to afford by means of the open end of such pipe or vent shaft, a safe outlet for foul air with the least possible nuisance. 4.5.3.4.1 The upper end of the main vent pipe may be continued to the open air above roof level as a separate pipe, or it may join the MSP and/or MWP above the floor level of the highest appliance. Its lower end may be carried down to join the drain, at a point where air relief may always be maintained. 4.5.3.4.2 Branch vent pipes should be connected to the top of the BSP and BWP between 75 mm and 450 mm from the crown of the trap. 4.5.3.4.3 The vent pipe shall always be taken to a point 1 500 mm above the level of the eaves or flat roof or terrace parapet whichever is higher or the top of any window within a horizontal distance of 3 m. The least dimension shall be taken as a minimum and local conditions shall be taken into account. The upper end of every vent pipe shall be protected by means of a cowl. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 82. 34 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 4.5.3.4.4 In case the adjoining building is taller, the vent pipe shall be carried higher than the roof of the adjacent building, wherever it is possible. 4.5.3.4.5 The building drain intended for carrying waste water and sewage from a building shall be provided with at least one vent pipe situated as near as practicable to the building from an inspection chamber and as far away as possible from the point at which the drain empties into the sewer or other carrier. 4.5.3.4.6 Size of vent pipe a) The building drain vent pipe shall be of not less than 75 mm diameter. When, however, it is used as MSP or MWP, the upper portion, which does not carry discharges, shall not be of lesser diameter than the remaining portion; b) The diameter of the main vent pipe in any case should not be less than 50 mm; c) A branch vent pipe on a waste pipe in both one and two-pipe systems shall be of not less than two-thirds the diameter of the branch waste pipe, subject to a minimum of 25 mm; and d) A branch vent pipe on a soil pipe in both one and two-pipe systems shall be not less than 32 mm in diameter. e) Vent pipes to be sized/designed considering the drainage fixture units of individual fixtures/appliances as per good engineering practices (see 4.5.3.4.7). 4.5.3.4.7 Venting system for high rise buildings In the case of fully ventilated system, suitable sized pipe stacks carry soil and waste drainage, wherein each sanitary fixture is individually vented. The practical way of implementation of this system is by venting each water closet and floor drain. A fully ventilated one pipe drainage system is most popular in advanced plumbing installations. Properly sized vent pipe would ensure maintenance of atmospheric pressure within gravity drainage pipes. Sizing of vent pipe is based on cumulative drainage fixture units of all fixtures served by the pipe. Sizing also depends on maximum permissible lengths. Maximum lengths are also subject to the limitation that one-third of length shall be horizontal. Horizontal pipes always rise towards termination point, avoiding vertical loops. The minimum required diameter of stack vents and vent stacks shall be determined from the developed length and the total drainage fixture units (DFU) connected thereto, in accordance with Table 17. However, in no case, the diameter shall be less than half the diameter of the drain served or less than 32 mm. NOTE — In case, if fully ventilated one-pipe system is not implemented then it shall indicate the case of two-pipe system along with common vent pipe for which the guideline for sizing shall be provided. Also, it shall provide a sketch for two-pipe system along with connection of branch pipes from wash basin to the deep seal trap through inlet fitting as per prevailing conditions as approved by Authority. 4.5.3.5 Design of drainage pipes A stack is the main vertical pipe that carries away discharge from water closets and urinals (soil stack) or other clear waste water from equipment (waste stack) with adequate suitable fittings, which may be a long- turn, tee-wye or short-turn or sanitary tee. Depending on the rate of flow in to the drain stack, the diameter of the stack, the type of stack fittings and the flow down the stack from higher levels (if any), the discharge from the fixture drain may or may not fill the cross-section of the stack at the level of entry. In any event, as soon as the water enters the stack, the force of gravity rapidly accelerates it downward and before it travels very far, it assumes the form of a sheet around the wall of the stack, leaving the centre of the pipe open for the flow of air. This sheet of water continues to accelerate until the frictional force exerted by the wall of the falling sheet of water equals the gravitational force. If the distance the water travel is sufficient enough and provided that no flow enters the stack at lower levels to interfere the sheet, the sheet remains unchanged in thickness and velocity until it reaches the bottom of the stack. The ultimate vertical velocity the sheet attains is called the ‘terminal velocity’. The distance the sheet must fall to attain this terminal velocity is called the ‘terminal length’. Following formulae may be used for calculating the terminal velocity and terminal length: Vt = 3.0 (Q/d)2/5 Lt = 0.052 Vt 2 where Vt = terminal velocity in the stack, m/s; Lt = terminal length below the point of flow entry, m; Q = quantity rate of flow, l/s; and d = diameter of stack, mm. At the centre of the stack is a core of air that is dragged along with the water by friction. A supply source of air shall be provided to avoid excessive pressures in the stack. The usual means of supplying this air are through the stack vent or vent stack. The entrained air in the stack causes a pressure reducing inside the stack, which is caused by the frictional effect of the falling sheet of water dragging the core of air with it. 4.5.3.5.1 Estimation of maximum flow of sewer a) Simultaneous discharge flow 1) The maximum flow in a building drain or a stack depends on the probable maximum number of simultaneous discharging appliances. For the Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 83. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 35 SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION calculation of this peak flow certain loading factors have been assigned to appliances in terms of fixture units, considering their probability and frequency of use. These fixture unit values are given in Table 18. 2) For any fixtures not covered under Table 18, Table 19 may be referred to for deciding their fixture unit rating depending on their drain or trap size. 3) From Tables 18 and 19, the total load on any pipe in terms of fixtures units may be calculated knowing the number and type of appliances connected to this pipe. 4) For converting the total load in fixture units to the peak flow in litre per minute, Fig. 6 is to be used. 5) The maximum number of fixture units that are permissible for various recommended pipe size in the drainage system are given in Table 20 and Table 21. 6) Results should be checked to see that the soil, waste and building sewer pipes are not reducedindiameterinthedirectionofflow. Whereappliancesaretobeaddedinfixture, these should be taken into account in assessing the pipe sizes by using the fixture units given in Table 18 and Table 19. Table 17 Size and Developed Length of Stack Vents and Vent Stacks (Clause 4.5.3.4.7) Maximum Developed Length of Vent for the Diameter of Vent m Sl No. Diameter of Soil and / or Waste Stack mm Total Fixture Units Being Vented (DFU) 32 mm 40 mm 50 mm 65 mm 75 mm 100 mm 125 mm 150 mm 200 mm 250 mm 300 mm (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) i) 32 2 9 — — — — — — — — — — ii) 40 8 15 45 — — — — — — — — — iii) 40 10 9 30 — — — — — — — — — iv) 50 12 — 23 61 — — — — — — — — v) 50 20 9 15 45 — — — — — — — — vi) 65 42 8 9 30 91 — — — — — — — vii) 75 10 — 13 45 110 317 — — — — — — viii) 75 21 — 10 34 82 247 — — — — — — ix) 75 53 — 8 29 70 207 — — — — — — x) 75 102 — — 26 64 189 — — — — — — xi) 100 43 — 8 11 26 76 299 — — — — — xii) 100 140 — — 8 20 61 229 — — — — — xiii) 100 320 — — 7 17 52 195 — — — — — xiv) 100 540 — — 6 15 46 177 — — — — — xv) 125 190 — — — 8.5 25 98 302 — — — — xvi) 125 490 — — — 6.4 19 76 232 — — — — xvii) 125 940 — — — 5.5 16 64 204 — — — — xviii) 125 1 400 — — — 4.9 15 58 180 — — — — xix) 150 500 — — — — 10 40 122 305 — — — xx) 150 1 100 — — — — 8 30 94 238 — — — xxi) 150 2 000 — — — — 7 26 79 201 — — — xxii) 150 2 900 — — — — 6 23 73 183 — — — xxiii) 200 1 800 — — — — — 9 29 73 287 — — xxiv) 200 3 400 — — — — — 7 22 58 222 — — xxv) 200 5 600 — — — — — 6 19 49 186 — — xxvi) 200 7 600 — — — — — 5 17 43 171 — — xxvii) 250 4 000 — — — — — — 9 24 94 293 — xxviii) 250 7 200 — — — — — — 7 18 73 226 — xxix) 250 11 000 — — — — — — 6 16 61 192 — xxx) 250 15 000 — — — — — — 5 14 55 174 — xxxi) 300 7 300 — — — — — — — 9 37 116 287 xxxii) 300 13 000 — — — — — — — 7 29 91 219 xxxiii) 300 20 000 — — — — — — — 6 24 76 186 xxxiv) 300 26 000 — — — — — — — 5 22 70 152 xxxv) 375 15 000 — — — — — — — — 12 40 94 xxxvi) 375 25 000 — — — — — — — — 9 29 73 xxxvii) 375 38 000 — — — — — — — — 8 25 61 xxxviii) 375 50 000 — — — — — — — — 7 23 55 NOTE — The developed length shall be measured from the vent connection to the open air. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 84. 36 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 b) Maximum discharge flow — The maximum rate of discharge flow shall be taken as thrice the average rate; allowance being made in addition for any exceptional peak discharges. A good average rule is to allow for a flow of liquid wastes from buildings at the rate of 3 litre per minute per 10 persons. 4.5.3.5.2 Gradients 4.5.3.5.2.1 The discharge of water through a domestic drain is intermittent and limited in quantity and, therefore, small accumulations of solid matter are liable to form in the drains between the building and the public sewer. There is usually a gradual shifting of these deposits as discharges take place. Gradients should be sufficient to prevent these temporary accumulations building up and blocking the drains. a) Drainage loads — Single family dwellings contain plumbing fixtures, such as one or more bathroom groups, each consisting of a toilet, washbasinandbathtuborshowerunit,akitchen sink, dishwasher and washing machine. Large buildingsalsohaveotherfixtures,slopsinksand drinking water coolers. The important characteristic of these fixtures is that they are notusedcontinuously.Rather,theyareusedwith irregularfrequenciesthatvarygreatlyduringthe day. In addition, the various fixtures have quite differentdischargecharacteristicsregardingboth the average flow rate per use and the duration of asingledischarge.Consequently,theprobability of all the fixtures in the building operating simultaneously is small. b) Stack capacities — The criterion of flow capacities in drainage stacks is based on the limitation of the water occupied cross-section to a specified fraction of the cross-section of the stack where terminal velocity exists, as suggested by earlier investigations. Flow capacity can be expressed in terms of the stack diameter and the water cross-section, as follows: Q = 27.8 × rs 5/3 × D8/3 where Q = capacity, l/s; rs = ratio of the cross-sectional area of the sheet of water to the cross-sectional area of the stack; and D = diameter of the stack, mm. c) Design requirement for high rise buildings drainage system — Drainage pipe stacks are sized for one third of their carrying capacity. Plumbing codes provides values of drainage fixture units for each fixture. Different values for fixture units are based on the nature of occupancy and the place of installation. Sizing of drainage pipes is based on the cumulative values of drainage fixture units connected to the pipe. A vertical pipe shall always have Table 18 Drainage Fixture Units (DFU) for Different Fixtures with Minimum Pipe Sizes (Clause 4.5.3.5.1) Application Sl No. Type of Fixture Private Public Minimum Trap Size mm (1) (2) (3) (4) (6) i) Bathroom group (water closet, wash basin, bidet and tub or shower) a) Water closet (flush valve) b) Water closet (flush tank) 8 6 — — — — ii) Bathtub 3 — 40 iii) Bar sink 1 2 40 iv) Ablution faucet/Bidet 1 2 40 v) Clothes washer 3 3 50 vi) Dishwasher 2 2 40 vii) Drinking fountain — 0.5 (0.75) 32 viii) Floor drain 1 2 50 ix) Wash basin 1 1 32 x) Service or mop basin/sink 1.5 3 50 xi) Kitchen sink 2 2 40 xii) Shower 2 2 50 xiii) Laundry sink 2 2 40 xiv) Clinical or surgeon’s scrub sink — 6 80 xv) Urinal (with flush valve) 2 2 (3) 50 xvi) Urinal (with flush tank) 2 2 (3) 50 xvii) Urinal with sensor operated 2 2 (3) 50 xviii) Water closet (flush valve) 4 6 (8) 80 xix) Water closet (flush tank) 3 4 (6) 80 xx) Combination fixture (faucet) 1 2 40 NOTES 1 A shower head over a bath tub does not increase the fixture unit value. 2 Size of floor trap shall be determined by the area of surface water to be drained. 3 Wash basins with 32 mm and 40 mm trap have the same load value. 4 Trap size shall be consistent with the fixture outlet size. 5 For fixtures added to bathroom group, the DFU value is added to those additional fixtures to the bathroom group fixture count. 6 No floor traps to be provided inside operating rooms, procedure rooms, AIIR isolation rooms and PE isolation rooms. 7 The values given in parentheses pertain to such public use buildings (congregation halls) where an enhanced requirement is expected to be encountered as compared to the normal maximum use in public use buildings. larger carrying capacity when compared to horizontal pipe of same size. Carrying capacity of horizontal pipe is dependent on gradient provided. Carrying capacities of vertical pipes are restricted by their maximum permissible lengths. This restriction does not Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 85. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 37 SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION apply to horizontal pipes. Irrespective of drainage fixture units, the minimum size for the fixture shall be adopted. The minimum size of horizontal pipe is critical to ensure self cleansing velocities in sewers. shall on no account be less than 0.61 m/s and adequate flushing should be done. NOTE — Where gradients are restricted, the practice of using a pipe of larger diameter than that required by the normal flow, in order to justify laying at a flatter gradient does not result in increasing the velocity of flow, further this reduces the depth of flow and thus for this reasons the above mentioned practice should be discouraged. 4.5.3.5.2.4 On the other hand, it is undesirable to employ gradients giving a velocity of flow greater than 2.4 m/s. Where it is unavoidable, cast iron pipes shall be used. The approximate gradients, which give a velocity of 2.4 m/s for pipes of various sizes and the corresponding discharge when flowing half-full are given in Table 22. 4.5.3.5.2.5 The discharge values corresponding to nominal diameter and gradient given in Table 22 are based on Manning’s formula (n = 0.015). NOTE — Subject to the minimum size of 100 m, the sizes of pipes shall be decided in relation to the estimated quantity of flow and the available gradient. 4.5.3.6 Drain appurtenances 4.5.3.6.1 Trap All traps shall be protected against siphonage and back pressure ensuring access to atmospheric air for air circulation and preserving the trap seal in all conditions. 4.5.3.6.1.1 A trap may be formed as an integral trap with the appliance during manufacture or may be a separate fitting called an attached trap which may be connected to the waste outlet of the appliance. 4.5.3.6.1.2 Traps should always be of a self-cleansing pattern. A trap, which is not an integral part of an Table 20 Horizontal Fixture Branches and Stacks1) (Clause 4.5.3.5.1) Maximum Number of Drainage Fixture Units2) (DFU) that can be Connected to Diameter of Pipe Stacks3) Sl No. mm Branch Total for Horizontal Branch Total Discharge into One Branch Interval Total for Stack of Three Branch Intervals or Less Total for Stack Greater than Three Branch Intervals (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) i) 32 1 2 2 2 ii) 40 3 2 4 8 iii) 50 6 6 10 24 iv) 65 12 9 20 42 v) 75 20 20 48 72 vi) 100 160 90 240 500 vii) 125 360 200 540 1 100 viii) 150 620 350 960 1 900 ix) 200 1 400 600 2 200 3 600 x) 250 2 500 1 000 3 800 5 600 xi) 300 3 900 1 500 6 000 8 400 xii) 375 7 000 See Note See Note See Note 1) Does not include branches of the building sewer. 2) Depending upon the probability of simultaneous use of appliances considering the frequency of use and peak discharge rate. 3) Stacks shall be sized based on the total accumulated connected load at each story or branch interval. As the total accumulated connected load decreases, stacks are permitted to be reduced in size. Stack diameters shall not be reduced to less than one-half of the diameter of the larger stack size required. NOTE — Sizing load based on design criteria. Table 19 Fixture Unit Values for Fixtures Based on Fixture Drain on Trap Size (Clause 4.5.3.5.1) Sl No. Fixture Drain on Trap Size Fixture Unit Value (1) (2) (3) i) 32 mm and smaller 1 ii) 40 mm 2 iii) 50 mm 3 iv) 65 mm 4 v) 80 mm 5 vi) 100 mm 6 4.5.3.5.2.2 When flow occurs in drain piping, it should not entirely fill the cross-section of the pipe under flow condition. If the pipe were to flow full, pressure fluctuations would occur which could possibly destroy the seal of the traps within the building. Normally, the sewer shall be designed for discharging the peak flow as given in 4.5.3.5.1, flowing half-full with a minimum self- cleansingvelocityof0.75m/s.Theapproximategradients which give this velocity for the sizes of pipes likely to be usedinbuildingdrainageandthecorrespondingdischarges when following half-full are given in Table 22. 4.5.3.5.2.3 In cases where it is practically not possible to conform to the ruling gradients, a flatter gradient may be used, but the minimum velocity in such cases Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 86. 38 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 appliance, should be directly attached to its outlet and the pipe should be uniform throughout and have a smooth surface. 4.5.3.6.1.3 The trap should have minimum size of outlet/exit, same as that of largest waste inlet pipe. 4.5.3.6.1.4 Traps for use in domestic waste installations and all other traps should be conveniently accessible and provided with cleansing eyes or other means of cleaning. 4.5.3.6.1.5 The minimum internal diameter for sanitary appliances shall be as follows: Sl No. Sanitary Appliance Minimum Internal Diameter of Waste Outlet mm i) Soil appliances: a) Indian and European type water closets 100 b) Bed pan washers and slop sinks 100 c) Urinal with integral traps 75 d) Stall urinals (with not more than 120 mm of channel drainage) 50 e) Lipped urinal small/large 40 ii) Waste appliances: a) Drinking fountain 25 b) Washbasin 32 c) Bidets 32 d) Domestic sinks and baths 40 e) Shower bath trays 40 f) Domestic bath tubs 50 g) Hotel and canteen sinks 50 h) Floor traps (outlet diameter) 75 Table 21 Building Drains and Sewers1) (Clause 4.5.3.5.1) Diameter of Pipe Maximum Number of Drainage Fixture Units (DFU) that can be Connected to any Portion of the Building Drain or the Building Sewer Including Branches of the Building Drain2) , for Slope Sl No. mm 1/200 1/100 1/50 1/25 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) i) 32 — — 1 1 ii) 40 — — 3 3 iii) 50 — — 21 26 iv) 65 — — 24 31 v) 75 — 36 42 50 vi) 100 — 180 216 250 vii) 125 — 390 480 575 viii) 150 — 700 840 1 000 ix) 200 1 400 1 600 1 920 2 300 x) 250 2 500 2 900 3 300 4 200 xi) 300 3 900 4 600 5 600 6 700 xii) 375 7 000 8 300 10 000 12 000 1) Includes branches of the building sewer. 2) The minimum size of any building drain serving a water closet shall be 75 mm. 4.5.3.6.1.6 Depth of water seal traps from different fixtures shall be as follows: Depth of Seals mm Sl No. Item Two Pipe System One Pipe System Single Stack System i) Water closets 50 50 50 ii) Floor traps 50 50 50 iii) Other fixtures, directly connected to the stack: a) Where attached to branch waste pipes of 75 mm dia or more 40 40 40 b) Where attached to branch waste pipes of less than 75 mm dia 40 40 75 NOTE — When connection is made through floor trap, no separate seals are required for individual fixtures. 4.5.3.6.2 Floor drains All toilets/bathrooms in a building desirably should be provided with floor drains to facilitate cleaning. 4.5.3.6.2.1 Floor drains shall connect into a trap so constructed that it can be readily cleaned and of a size to serve efficiently the purpose for which it is intended. The trap shall be either accessible from the floor drain or by a separate cleanout within the drain. 4.5.3.6.2.2 Floor drain also receives, waste piping which does not connect to the sanitary system, known as indirect waste. This discharge from an indirect waste should be conveyed into a water supplied, trapped and vented floor drain. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 87. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 39 SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION 4.5.3.6.2.3 Floor drain should be provided in mechanical equipment rooms, where pumps, boilers, water chillers, heat exchangers and other air conditioning equipment are periodically drained for maintenance and repair. Boiler requires drain at safety relief valve discharge. 4.5.3.6.2.4 Strategically floor drains are required to be located in buildings with wet fire protection sprinkler systems to drain water in case of activation of sprinkler heads. 4.5.3.6.2.5 The minimum diameter for floor drains outlets before connecting to floor trap is 75 mm. 4.5.3.6.3 Cleanouts The cleanout provides access to horizontal and vertical lines and stacks to facilitate inspection and means to remove obstructions common to all piping systems, 6A GRAPH FOR PROBABLE DEMAND UP TO 10 000FU 6B GRAPH FOR PROBABLE DEMAND UP TO 1 000FU CURVE 1 — SYSTEM WITH FLUSH VALVES CURVE 2 — SYSTEM WITH FLUSH TANKS FIG. 6 GRAPH FOR PROBABLE DEMAND Table 22 Different Diameter Pipes Giving Velocity and Corresponding Discharge at Minimum and Maximum Gradient (Clauses 4.5.3.5.2.2, 4.5.3.5.2.4 and 4.5.3.5.2.5) Sl No. Diameter Minimum Gradient (Velocity : 0.75 m/s) Discharge at the Minimum Gradient Maximum Gradient (Velocity : 2.4 m/s) Discharge at the Maximum Gradient mm m3 /min m3 /min (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) i) 100 1 in 57 0.18 1 in 5.6 0.59 ii) 150 1 in 100 0.42 1 in 9.7 1.32 iii) 200 1 in 145 0.73 1 in 14 2.40 iv) 230 1 in 175 0.93 1 in 17 2.98 v) 250 1 in 195 1.10 1 in 19 3.60 vi) 300 1 in 250 1.70 1 in 24.5 5.30 Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 88. 40 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 such as solid objects, greasy wastes, hair and the like. 4.5.3.6.3.1 Cleanouts in general should be gas and water tight, provide quick and easy plug removal, allow ample space for rodding tools, have means of adjustments to finished floor level, be attractive and be designed to support whatever load is directed over them. 4.5.3.6.3.2 Waste lines are normally laid beneath the floor slab at a sufficient distance to provide adequate back-fill over the joints. Cleanouts are then brought up to floor level grade by pipe extension pieces. 4.5.3.6.3.3 The size of the cleanout within a building should be the same size as the piping up to 100 mm. For larger size piping 100 mm cleanouts are adequate for their intended purpose. 4.5.3.6.3.4 Cleanouts are suggested to be provided at the following locations: a) Inside the building at a point of exit. Use a wye branch or a trap. b) At every change of direction greater than 45°. c) At the base of all stacks. d) At the horizontal header, receiving vertical stacks and serving the purpose of offset header. 4.5.3.6.3.5 Supports for drainage and sewerage pipes The supports for the above pipes and fittings shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and shall comply with the applicable standards. 4.5.4 Indirect Wastes 4.5.4.1 General Waste, overflow and drain pipes from the following types of equipment shall not be connected into any drainage system directly to prevent backflow from the drainage system into the equipment/installation: a) Plumbing and kitchen appliances: 1) Underground or overhead water tanks 2) Drinking water fountains 3) Dishwashing sinks and culinary sinks used for soaking and preparation of food 4) Cooling counters for food and beverages 5) Kitchen equipment for keeping food warm 6) Pressure drainage connections from equipment b) Air conditioning, heating and other mechanical equipment: 1) Air handling equipment 2) Cooling tower and other equipment 3) Condensate lines from equipment 4) Storage tanks 5) Condensate lines 6) Boiler blow down lines 7) Steam trap drain lines c) Laboratories and other areas: 1) Water stills 2) Waste from laboratory in specified sinks 3) Sterlizers and similar equipment 4) Water purification equipment 4.5.4.2 Indirect waste receptors All plumbing fixtures or other receptors receiving the discharge of indirect waste pipes shall be of such shape and capacity as to prevent splashing or flooding and shall be located where they are readily accessible for inspection and cleaning. 4.5.4.3 Pressure drainage connections Indirect waste connections shall be provided for drains, overflows or relief vents from the water supply system, and no piping or equipment carrying wastes or producing wastes or other discharges under pressure shall be directly connected to any part of the drainage system. The above shall not apply to any approved sump pump or to any approved plumbing fixture discharging pressurized waste or device when the Authority has been satisfied that the drainage system has the capacity to carry the waste from the pressurized discharge. An indirect waste is required for any type of fixture or equipment that may come in contact with the food. The purpose is to isolate the fixture or equipment from drainage system waste. Indirect waste piping shall be a minimum of 25 mm in size, but not smaller than drain of the equipment or fixture. There is no limitation on the length of indirect waste piping. 4.5.5 Special Wastes 4.5.5.1 General Wastes having characteristics which may be detrimental to the pipes in which it is disposed as well as to the persons handling it. Such wastes used in a building need to be specially identified and a suitable and safe method of its disposal installed to ensure that the piping system is not corroded nor the health and safety of the occupants is affected in any way. Whenever the occupant or the user of any wastes is unaware of the dangers of the consequences of disposing the waste, he shall be made aware of the dangers of his action along with providing suitable warning and instruction for correct disposal be provided to him. Piping system for all special wastes should be separate and independent for each type of waste and should not be connected to the building drainage system. Other applicable provisions for installation of soil and waste pipe system shall be however be followed. 4.5.5.2 Laboratory wastes A study of the possible chemical and corrosive and toxic properties of wastes handled and disposed of in a laboratory need to be ascertained in advance. The relevant statutory rules and regulation regarding the method of disposal of strong and objectionable wastes shall be followed. All sinks, receptacles, traps, pipes, fittings and joints shall be of materials resistant to the liquids disposed of Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 89. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 41 SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION in the system. In laboratories for educational, research and medical institutions, handling mildly corrosive and toxic wastes, they may be neutralized in chambers using appropriate neutralizing agents. The chamber shall be provided with chambers at inlet and outlet for collecting samples of the incoming and outgoing waste for monitoring its characteristics. 4.5.5.3 Infected wastes Infected liquid wastes are generated in hospitals from patient excreta, operation theatres, laboratories testing samples of stools, urine, blood, flesh, etc, which shall not be disposed of into the drainage system. Such waste shall be collected separately and pre-treated, and sterilized, if required, before disposal into the building drainage system. Soiled linen from infectious patients needs to be collected from the respective areas of the hospital in separate linen bins and pre-washed in dirty utility room in a sluice tub and sterilized in the laundry (sluice machine) before its regular washing in the hospital laundry. Liquid wastes from the washing operations shall be neutralized to prevent any cross contamination before discharge in the building’s drainage system. 4.5.5.4 Research laboratory wastes Research laboratories conducting research in all areas of science and technology, for example, chemical industry, pharmacy, metallurgy, bio-sciences, agriculture, atomic energy, medicine, etc, shall follow the established procedures laid down by statutory bodies to handle, treat and dispose wastes which are highly toxic, corrosive, infectious, inflammable, explosive and having bacterial cultures, complex organic and inorganic chemicals. Such wastes shall not be disposed of in a building drainage system or the city sewerage system unless they are pre-treated and meet the disposal criteria in accordance with the relevant rules/regulations. It requires a liquid waste decontamination system which consists of at least one reactor or sterilizer plus a holding tank. An ideal system would consist of two or more sterilizers to provide redundancy with two or more tanks. There should be a sampling tank between this system and building drainage. The final reacted waste water should flow to ETP and not to STP. 4.5.6 Grease Traps Oil and grease is found in wastes generated from kitchens in hotels, industrial canteens, restaurant, butcheries, some laboratories and manufacturing units having a high content of oil and greases in their final waste. Waste exceeding temperature of 60°C should not be allowed in the grease trap. When so encountered, it may be allowed to cool in a holding chamber before entering the grease trap. Oil and greases tend to solidify as they cool within the drainage system. The solidified matter clogs the drains and the other matter in the waste stick to it due to the adhesion properties of the grease. Oil and greases are lighter than water and tend to float on the top of the waste water. Grease traps shall be installed in building having the above types of wastes. In principle the grease laden water is allowed to retain in a grease trap which enables any solids to be settled or separated for manual disposal. The retention time allows the incoming waste to cool and allow the grease to solidify. The clear waste is then allowed to discharge into the building’s drainage system. 4.5.7 Oil Interceptors Oils and lubricants are found in wastes from vehicle service stations, workshops manufacturing units whose waste may contain high content of oils. Oils for example, petroleum, kerosene and diesel used as fuel, cooking, lubricant oils and similar liquids are lighter than water and thus float on water in a pipe line or in a chamber when stored. Such oils have a low ignition point and are prone to catch fire if exposed to any flame or a spark and may cause explosion inside or outside the drainage system. The flames from such a fire spread rapidly if not confined or prevented at the possible source. Lighter oils and lubricants are removed from the system by passing them through an oil interceptor/ petrol gully. They are chambers in various compartments which allow the solids to settle and allow the oils to float to the top. The oil is then decanted in separate containers for disposal in an approved manner. The oil free waste collected from the bottom of the chamber is disposed of in the building drainage system. 4.5.8 Radioactive Waste Scientific research institutions, hospital and many types of manufacturing processes use radioactive material in the form of radio-isotopes and other radioactive sources for their activities. Manufacture, sale, use and disposal of radioactive material is regulated by the statutory rules and regulation. Proposal for usage and disposal of radioactive materials shall be done in consultation with and prior permission of the Authority by the users of the materials. No radioactive material shall be disposed of in any building drainage system without the authorization of the Authority. NOTE — All procedures followed and precautions taken shall be in accordance with AERB regulations, including regarding employing delay and decay tanks. Where applicable, the toilets may be designated as ‘hot toilets’ and should be clearly indicated. All drainage plumbing needs to be isolated and connected to delay and decay tanks (usually required for PET CT scan room, SPECT CT scan room and iodine therapy ward, and may be also required for cyclotron liquid waste). 4.5.9 Special Situations of Waste Water Disposal Buildings may generate uncontaminated waste water from various sources continuously, intermittently or in large volumes for a short time for example, emptying any water tanks or pools, testing fire and water lines for flow conditions, etc. Connections from all such Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 90. 42 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 sources shall be made to the building drainage system indirectly through a trap. It should be ensured in advance that the building drain or a sump with a pump has the capacity to receive to rate of flow. In case the capacity is less the rate of discharge from the appliances should be regulated to meet the capacity of the disposal. Under no circumstances shall any waste water described above shall be disposed of in any storm water drains. 4.5.10 Manholes 4.5.10.1 General A manhole or inspection chamber shall be capable of sustaining the loads which may be imposed on it, exclude subsoil water and be water tight. The size of the chamber should be sufficient to permit ready access to the drain or sewer for inspection, cleaning and rodding and should have a removable cover of adequate strength, constructed of suitable and durable material. Where the depth of the chamber so requires, access rungs, step irons, ladders or other means should be provided to ensure safe access to the level of the drain or sewer. If the chamber contains an open channel, benching should be provided having a smooth finish and formed so as to allow the foul matter to flow towards the pipe and also ensure a safe foothold. No manhole or inspection chamber shall be permitted inside a building or in any passage therein. The minimum depth of the manhole shall not be less than 800 mm to facilitate gully trap connection. Further, ventilating covers shall not be used for domestic drains. At every change of alignment, gradient or diameter of a drain, there shall be a manhole or inspection chamber. Bends and junctions in the drains shall be grouped together in manholes as far as possible. Alternative materials of manholes using RCC rings and PVC in sewer lines are being used in some sites. These may be considered subject to ensuring their proper design, keeping in view the lateral and vertical loads at the place of installation. The holes over the surfaces of covers/gratings of various manholes, gullys and other chambers/drains shall comply with the requirements given in 13 of Part 3 ‘Development Control Rules and General Building Requirements’ of the Code. 4.5.10.2 Spacing of manholes The spacing of manholes for a given pipe size should be as follows: Sl No. Pipe Diameter mm Spacing of Manhole m i) Up to 300 45 ii) 301 to 500 75 iii) 501 to 900 90 iv) Beyond 900 Spacing shall depend upon local condition and shall be gotten approved by the Authority Where the diameter of a drain is increased, the crown of the pipes shall be fixed at the same level and the necessary slope given in the invert of the manhole chamber. In exceptional cases and where unavoidable, the crown of the branch sewer may be fixed at a lower level, but in such cases the peak flow level of the two sewers shall be kept the same. 4.5.10.3 Size of manhole The manhole or chamber shall be of such size as will allow necessary examination or clearance of drains. The size of shall be adjusted to take into account any increase in the number of entries into the chamber. 4.5.10.3.1 Manholes may be rectangular, arch or circular type. The minimum internal size of manholes, chambers (between faces of masonry) shall be as follows: a) Rectangular manholes: 1) For depths less than 900 mm × 0.90 m 800 mm 2) For depths from 0.90 m 1 200 mm × and up to 2.5 m 900 mm NOTE — For depths upto 0.60 m, 600 mm × 600 mm manhole may be used. b) Arch type manholes: For depths of 2.5 m and 1 400 mm × above 900 mm NOTE — The width of manhole chamber shall be suitably increased more than 900 mm on bends, junctions or pipes with diameter greater than 450 mm so that benching width in either side of channel is minimum 200 mm. c) Circular manholes: 1) For depths above 0.90 m 900 mm and up to 1.65 m diameter 2) For depths above 1.65 m 1 200 mm and up to 2.30 m diameter 3) For depths above 2.30 m 1 500 mm and up to 9.00 m diameter 4) For depths above 9.00 m 1 800 mm and up to 14.00 m diameter NOTES 1 In adopting the above sizes of chambers, it should be ensured that these sizes accord with full or half bricks with standard thickness of mortar joints so as to avoid wasteful cutting of bricks. 2 The sizes of the chambers/manhole may be adjusted to suit the availability of local building materials, economics of construction and to meet local authority approval. 3 The access shaft shall be corbelled inwards on three sides at the top to reduce its size to that of the cover frame to be fitted or alternatively the access shaft shall be covered over by a reinforced concrete slab of suitable dimensions with an opening for manhole cover and frame. 4 The minimum sewer pipe diameter is 200 mm based on good practice [9-2(12)]. 4.5.10.4 Construction 4.5.10.4.1 Excavation The manhole shall be excavated true to dimensions and Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 91. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 43 SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION levels as shown on the plan. The excavation of deep manholes shall be accompanied with safety measures like timbering, staging, etc. In areas where necessary, appropriate measures for dewatering should be made. 4.5.10.4.2 Bed concrete The manhole shall be built on a bed of concrete 1:4:8 (1 cement : 4 coarse sand : 8 graded stone aggregate 40 mm nominal size). The thickness of bed concrete shall be at least 150 mm for manholes up to 0.9 m in depth, at least 200 mm for manholes from 0.90 m up to 2.5 m in depth and at least 300 mm for manholes of greater depth, unless the structural design demands higher thickness. This thickness may be verified considering the weight of wall, cover, the wheel loads, impact of traffic which are transmitted through cover and the shaft walls and for water pressure, if any. In case of weak soil, special foundation as suitable shall be provided 4.5.10.4.3 Brickwork The thickness of walls shall be designed depending upon its shape and taking onto account all loads coming over it, including earth pressure and water pressure. Generally, the brickwork shall be with first class bricks in cement mortar 1: 5 (1 cement : 5 coarse sand). All brickwork in manhole chambers and shafts shall be carefully built in English Bond, the jointing faces of each brick being well ‘buttered’ with cement mortar before laying, so as to ensure a full joint. The construction of walls in brickwork shall be done in accordance with good practice [9-2(13)]. For various depths the recommended thickness of wall may be as follows: Depth of the chamber thickness of wall a) Up to 2.25 m : 200 mm (one brick length) b) From 2.25 m up to : 300 mm (one and 3.0 m half brick length) c) From 3.00 m up to : 400 mm (two brick 5.0 m length) d) From 5.00 m up to : 500 mm (two and 9.0 m half brick length) e) Above 9.00 m : 600 mm (three brick length) The actual thickness in any case shall be calculated on the basis of engineering design. Typical sections of the manholes are illustrated in Figs. 7, 8 and 9. NOTES 1 Rich mix of cement mortar, not weaker than 1:3, should be used in brick masonry, where subsoil water conditions are encountered. 2 For arched type of manholes, the brick masonry in arches and arching over pipes shall be in cement mortar 1:3. FIG. 7 DETAIL OF MANHOLE (DEPTH LESS THAN 0.90 m) Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 92. 44 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 4.5.10.4.4 Plastering The wall shall be plastered (15 mm, minimum) both inside and outside within cement mortar 1:3 and finished smooth with a coat of neat cement. Where subsoil water conditions exit, a richer mix may be used and it shall further be waterproofed with addition of approved waterproofing compound in a quantity as per manufacturer specifications. All manholes shall be so constructed as to be water- tight under test. All angles shall be rounded to 75 mm radius and all rendered internal surface shall have hard impervious finish obtained using a steel trowel. 4.5.10.4.5 Channels and benching These shall be semi-circular in the bottom half and of diameter equal to that of the sewer. Above the horizontal diameter, the sides shall be extended vertically 50 mm above the crown of sewer pipe and the top edge shall be suitably rounded off. The branch channels shall also be similarly constructed with respect to the benching, but at their junction with the main channel an appropriate fall, if required suitably rounded off in the direction of flow in the main channel shall be given. The channel/drain and benching at the bottom of the chamber shall be done in cement concrete 1:2:4 and subsequently plastered with cement mortar of 1:2 proportion or weaker cement mortar with a suitable waterproofing compound and finished smooth, to the grade (where required). The benching at the sides shall be carried up in such a manner as to provide no lodgment for any splashing in case of accidental flooding of the chamber. All dimensions in centimetres. FIG. 8 DETAIL OF MANHOLE (DEPTH FROM 0.9 m AND UP TO 2.5 m) Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 93. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 45 SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION Channels shall be rendered smooth and benchings shall have slopes towards the channel. 4.5.10.4.6 Rungs Rungs shall be provided in all manholes over 0.8 m in depth and shall be of cast iron, or PVC encapsulated or composite non-corrosive materials, and of suitable dimensions, conforming to accepted standards [9-2(14)]. These rungs may be set staggered in two vertical rungs which may be 300 mm apart horizontally as well as vertically and shall project a minimum of 100 mm beyond the finished surface if the manhole wall. The top rung shall be 450 mm below the manhole cover and the lowest not more than 300 mm above the benching. 4.5.10.4.7 Manhole covers and frames The size of manhole covers shall be such that there shall be a clear opening of at least 500 mm in diameter for manholes exceeding 0.90 m in depth. The manhole covers and frames used shall conform to accepted standards [9-2(15)]. The frame of manhole shall be firmly embedded to concrete alignment and level in plain concrete on the top of masonry. 4.5.10.5 Drop manhole Where it is uneconomic or impracticable to arrange the connection within 600 mm height above the invert of the manholes, the connection shall be made by constructing a vertical shaft outside the manhole All dimensions in centimetres. FIG. 9 DETAIL OF MANHOLE (DEPTH 2.5 m AND ABOVE) Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 94. 46 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 chamber, as shown in Fig. 10. If the difference in level between the incoming drain and the sewer does not exceed 600 mm, and there is sufficient room in the manhole, the connecting pipe may be directly brought through the manhole wall and the fall accommodated by constructing a ramp in the benching of the manhole. For detailed information regarding manholes in sewerage system, reference may be made to good practice [9-2(16)]. All dimensions in centimetres. NOTE — Wall thickness have been indicated in brick length to provide for use of modular bricks or traditional bricks. In the figure, B = one brick length, 1.5 B = one an a half brick length, etc. FIG. 10 DROP MANHOLE Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 95. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 47 SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION 4.5.10.6 Manhole covers and recommended locations Manhole covers were traditionally and presently manufactured from concrete, steel fibre reinforced concrete, cast iron and ductile iron or PVC materials and these materials are used based on the load carrying capacity and for the following type of applications: a) Inspection chambers for sewerage; b) Underground electrical cabling; c) Telecom cabling; d) Water, gas and petroleum installations; and e) Beautification of gardens and landscapes. Recommended locations conforming to load capacity shall be as per accepted standard [9-2(15)]. 4.5.11 Storm Water Drainage 4.5.11.1 General The object of storm water drainage is to collect and carry, the rainwater collected within the premises of the building, for suitable disposal. 4.5.11.2 Design factors Estimate of the quantity that reaches the storm water drain (runoff) depends on the following factors: a) Type of soil and its absorption capacity determined by its soil group. b) Ground slope and the time in which the area is drained. c) Intensity of the rainfall for a design period. d) Duration of the rain/storm. The runoff reaching the sewer may be given by the expression: Q = 10 C.i.A where Q = runoff, m3 /h; C = coefficient of runoff; i = intensity of rainfall, mm/h; and A = area of the drainage district, hectares. Coefficient of runoff for various surfaces may be taken as: Type of Surface Coefficient of Runoff Concrete roof area 0.9 Paved podium areas and asphalted roads 0.8 Unpaved ground 0.3 Lawns and parks 0.15 4.5.11.2.1 Imperviousness The soil conditions and the ground slope determine the impermeability factor. Impermeability factor is the proportion of the total rainfall received on the surface which will be discharging into a storm water drain after allowing for initial abstraction (in local pond and lakes), ground absorption by evaporation, vegetation and other losses. The net flow reaching the storm water drain is called runoff. The percentage of imperviousness of the drainage area may be obtained from available data for a particular area. In the absence of such data, the following figures may serve as a guide: Type of Area Imperviousness Factor Percent Commercial and industrial areas 70 - 90 Residential areas (high density) 60 - 75 Residential areas (low density) 35 - 60 Parks and underdeveloped areas 10 - 20 4.5.11.2.2 Terrain modelling Areas planned for urbanization from agricultural land, forest or low grade land for example, low lying areas prone to flooding, marshy or abandoned quarries, etc, need detailed and careful consideration with respect to its drainage. A detailed contour survey shall be carried out not only with respect to the site but also the surrounding areas to verify the quantity/area contributing runoff, presence of any low lying and natural water body acting as holding pond or any natural drain passing through the area and beyond whose filling up or diversion may cause water logging problem on the site or to the surrounding areas. The planning of the area should ensure that, a) all areas become self draining by gravity with respect to the high flood level of the area or the drainage channels passing, whichever is higher; b) as far as possible, natural drainage pattern with respect to the whole area be maintained except when low lying areas need to be filled up for grading purposes; c) the drainage in the area shall be planned in accordance with the natural slopes; and d) levels of the main highway or road connecting to the property shall be determined to ensure proper drainage and protection of the site. The formation levels of the entire area shall be prepared to determine proposed formation levels by preparing a terrain model which will show the proposed site contours, ground and road levels and connections to all services including storm water disposal system. 4.5.11.2.3 Rainfall intensity The intensity of rainfall is the amount of rain falling in Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 96. 48 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 unit time and is expressed in centimetre or millimetre per hour. For design purposes, the mean rainfall intensity is collected for 25 years. 4.5.11.2.4 Design frequency Storm water drainage system for an urbanized area is planned on the basis of the design frequency of the storm which shall be determined by the designer. Frequency is the period in which the selected design intensity recurs in a given period of time in years. NOTE — The rainfall intensity varies with the period, which includes good, bad and average years of rainfall. Meteorological department has long term data regarding the rainfall and have graphs for different periods and the designers are advised to consult the department before designing any scheme. 4.5.11.2.5 Time of concentration Time of concentration is the time required for the rainwater to flow to reach the farthest point of the drainage system or the outfall under consideration. Time of concentration is equal to the inlet time plus the time required for the flow to reach the main or branch drain. The inlet time is the time dependent on the distance of the farthest point in the drainage area to the inlet of the manhole and the surface slopes, etc, and will vary between 5 min and 30 min. In highly developed sections for example with impervious surfaces it may be as low as 3 min or lower (with good slopes) as in building terraces and paved areas. Correspondingly the design intensity for the drainage for such areas will be much higher. Rainwater pipes have to be designed for an intensity for a very low time of concentration. 4.5.11.2.6 Natural infiltration In planning any area with buildings, layout with paved and non-permeable surfaces, care should be taken to allow maximum discharge of the rainwater to flow directly or indirectly to permeate into the ground for enabling the ground water to be recharged. Some of the techniques which allow infiltration that may be considered are: a) Use of brick paved open jointed storm water drains. b) Providing bore holes in the storm water drains. c) Using paving tiles with open joints which enable water to percolates as it flows on it. 4.5.11.3 Combined system A combined system of drainage is one which carries the sewerage as well as the runoff from the storm water drainage. Relevant applicable statutory rules/ regulations may not allow such system in new areas and the sewerage and the storm water drainage have to be separate and independent of each other. Such systems are however existing in many old cities and the storm water may have to be discharged into the combined drainage system. Where levels do not permit for connection to a public storm water drain, storm water from courtyards of buildings may be connected to the public sewer, provided it is designed to or has the capacity to convey combined discharge. In such cases, the surface water shall be admitted to the soil sewer through trapped gullies in order to prevent the escape of foul air. 4.5.11.4 Discharging into a watercourse It may often be convenient to discharge surface water to a nearby stream or a watercourse. The invert level of the outfall shall be about the same as the normal water level in the watercourse or ideally should be above the highest flood level of the watercourse. The out-fall shall be protected against floating debris by a screen. 4.5.11.5 Discharge to a public storm water drain Where it is necessary to connect the discharge rainwater into a public storm water drain, such drains shall be designed for the intensity of rain based on local conditions, but in no case shall they be designed for intensity of rainfall of less than 50 mm/h. Rainwater from each building plot shall be connected to the storm water drainage through a separate pipe or an open public drain directly. No trap shall be installed before the connection. 4.5.11.6 Rainwater pipes for roof drainage 4.5.11.6.1 The roofs of a building shall be so constructed or framed as to permit effectual drainage of the rainwater therefrom by means of a sufficient number of rainwater pipes of adequate size so arranged, jointed and fixed as to ensure that the rainwater is carried away from the building without causing dampness in any part of the walls or foundations of the building or those of an adjacent building. 4.5.11.6.2 The rainwater pipes shall be fixed to the outside of the external walls of the building or in recesses or chases cut or formed in such external wall or in such other manner as may be approved by the Authority. 4.5.11.6.3 Rainwater pipes conveying rainwater shall discharge directly or by means of a channel into or over an inlet to a surface drain or shall discharge freely in a compound, drained to surface drain but in no case shall it discharge directly into any closed drain. 4.5.11.6.4 Whenever it is not possible to discharge a rainwater pipe into or over an inlet to a surface drain or in a compound or in a street drain within 30 m from the boundary of the premises, such rainwater pipe shall Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 97. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 49 SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION discharge into a gully trap which shall be connected with the street drain for storm water and such a gully- trap shall have a screen and a silt catcher incorporated in its design. 4.5.11.6.5 If such streets drain is not available within 30 m of the boundary of the premises, a rainwater pipe may discharge directly into the kerb drain and shall be taken through a pipe outlet across the foot path, if any, without obstructing the path. 4.5.11.6.6 A rainwater pipe shall not discharge into or connect with any soil pipe or its vent pipe or any waste pipe or its vent pipe nor shall it discharge into a sewer unless specifically permitted to do so by the Authority, in which case such discharge into a sewer shall be intercepted by means of a gully trap. 4.5.11.6.7 Rainwater pipes shall be constructed of cast iron, PVC, asbestos cement, galvanized sheet or other equally suitable material and shall be securely fixed. 4.5.11.6.8 The factors that decide the quantity of rainwater entering are: a) Intensity of rainfall, and b) Time of concentration selected for rainwater pipe. A bell mouth inlet at the roof surface is found to give better drainage effect, provided proper slopes are given to the roof surface. The spacing of rainwater pipes depends on the locations available for the down takes and the area which each pipe serves. The spacing will also be determined by the amount of slopes that can be given to the roof. The recommended slopes for the flat roofs with smooth finish would be 1:150 to 1:133, with rough stone/tiles 1:100 and for gravel set in cement or losely packed concrete finish 1:75 to 1:66. The effective strainer area should preferably be 1.5 to 2 times the area of pipe to which it connects to considerably enhance the capacity of rainwater pipes. The rainwater pipes of cast iron (coefficient of roughness 0.013) shall normally be sized on the basis of roof areas according to Table 23. The vertical down take rainwater pipes, having a bell mouth inlet on the roof surface with effective cross-sectional area of grating 1.5 to 2 times the rainwater pipe area, may be designed by considering the outlet pipe as weir. The roof area (RA) for drainage may be worked out by using: RA = 0.084 × d 5/2 /I where RA = roof area, m2 ; d = pipe diameter, mm; and I = intensity of rainfall, mm/h. 4.5.11.6.9 The storm water may be led off in a suitable open drain to a watercourse. The open drain, if not a Pucca masonry throughout, shall be so at least where there is either a change in direction or gradient. 4.5.12 Rainwater Harvesting 4.5.12.1 General To supplement the ever growing shortage of protected, pure and safe water supply for human consumption, rainwater is an ideal source which can be conserved and used in a useful manner by the people. The amount of rainfall available varies from region to region. Each area has to develop its own method and system to conserve, store and use it to suit its requirement and local conditions. There are several methods by which rainwater can be stored, used and conserved. Each system depends on the amount of precipitation, the period in which the rainfall occurs in a year and the physical infrastructure, for example space available to store the water, etc. There are several techniques available for catching and storing the rainwater. Most of the techniques are applicable for large open areas, farms, sloping grounds, Table 23 Sizing of Rainwater Pipes for Roof Drainage in mm/h (Clause 4.5.11.6.8) Roof Area, in m2 for Average Rate of Rainfall in mm/h Sl No. Dia of Pipe mm 50 75 100 125 150 200 (1) (2) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) i) 50 29.70 19.80 14.85 11.88 9.90 7.42 ii) 65 57.23 38.15 28.61 22.89 19.08 14.31 iii) 75 81.84 54.56 40.92 32.74 27.28 20.46 iv) 100 168.00 112.00 84.00 67.20 56.00 42.00 v) 125 293.48 195.66 146.74 117.39 97.83 73.37 vi) 150 462.95 308.64 231.48 185.18 154.32 115.74 NOTE — For rainwater pipes of other materials, the roof areas shall be multiplied by (0.013/coefficient of roughness of surface of that material). For example, for rainwater pipes of PVC (coefficient of roughness = 0.009), the above values of roof area shall be multiplied by 0.013/0.009 = 1.44. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 98. 50 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 etc, with a low population base. Two major systems that are ideal for urban and semi-urban developed areas are: a) Artificial ground water recharge, and b) Roof top rainwater harvesting. NOTE — Type and number of recharge pits and roof top rainwater harvesting capacity shall be provided as per the local/ state bye-laws. 4.5.12.2 Artificial ground water recharge With increase in the impermeable surfaces in modern built up areas, there is gross reduction in the original catchment area. This prevents the natural percolation that would have recharged the area in the normal course if the ground was in its natural condition, for example a farm, open ground, forest, etc. This results in a large quantity of water, normally percolating into the ground, running off to the natural drains and into the rivers, causing increased runoff and flooding of downstream areas. It is therefore essential to catch the runoff and use it for augmentation of ground water reservoir by modifying the natural movement of surface water by recharging it by artificial means, for example construction of recharge structures (see Fig. 11). The main objectives achieved may be: a) Enhancement of sustainable yield in areas where over development and depletion of the aquifers. b) Conservation and storage of excess surface water in the aquifers. c) Improve the quality of the existing ground water through dilution. d) Remove bacteriological and suspended impurities during the surface water transition within the subsoil. e) Maintain the natural balance of the ground water and its usage as the rainwater is a renewable supply source. A well managed and controlled tapping of the aquifers will provide constant, dependable and safe water supply. In planning and designing the ground water recharge structures, following should be taken into consideration: 1) Annual rainfall (for estimating approximately rainwater recharge per year). 2) Peak intensity and duration of each storm. 3) Type of soil and subsoil conditions and their permeability factor. 4) Ground slopes and run off which cannot be caught. 5) Location of recharge structures and its overflow outfall. 6) Rainwater measuring devices for finding the flow of water in the system. For artificial recharge to ground water code for guidelines for artificial recharge to ground water [9-2(17)] may be referred. NOTE — Rainwater harvesting with underground recharging will depend from region to region as per the climatic, topography, soil conditions and data about intensity of rainfall and retention time for calculating the capacity of recharge wells to be obtained from reference documents from the Authority. 4.5.12.3 Roof top rainwater harvesting 4.5.12.3.1 Harvesting in regular rainfall areas In areas having rainfall over a large period in a year, for example in hilly areas, coastal regions, etc constant and regular rainfall can be usefully harvested and stored in suitable water tanks. Water shall be collected through roof gutters and down take pipes. Provision should be made to divert the 1st rainfall after a dry spell so that ant dust, soot and leaves, etc, are drained away before the water is collected into the water tank. The capacity of the water tank should be enough for storing water required for consumption between two dry spells. The water tank shall be located in a well protected area and shall not be exposed to any hazards of water contamination from any other sources. The water shall be chlorinated using chlorine tablets or solution to maintain a residual chlorine of approximately 1 mg/l. The tank shall have an overflow leading to natural water courses or to any additional tanks (see Table 24). 4.5.12.3.2 Harvesting in limited rainfall areas In areas with the rainfall limited during the monsoon period (usually from 15-90 days), roof top rainwater can be stored and used for non-potable purposes, after proper treatment, in the premises itself as mentioned above; excess water, if any, is best used for recharging the ground water. For individual properties and plots the roof top rainwater can be diverted to underground or above ground water storage tank(s), pretreated, stored and used for non-potable purposes. Excess water, if any, may be discharged to existing open or abandoned tube wells. In a well-planned building complex, a system should be laid out so that the runoff is collected in underground or above ground water storage tank(s), pretreated, stored, and used for non-potable purposes. Excess water, if any, shall be discharged in bore-wells as per designs specified by the Central Ground Water Board, Government of India. For roof top rainwater harvesting, reference may be made to good practice [9-2(18)]. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 99. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 51 SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION All dimensions in millimetres unless specified. NOTE — Depending on site soil condition and keeping the above plumbing details and dimensions in view, the detailed structural/ shop drawing to be prepared, before executing the work. FIG. 11 ARTIFICIAL GROUND WATER RECHARGE STRUCTURE 4.5.12.4 Care to be taken in rainwater harvesting Water conservation technique discussed above shall be constructed with due care taking following precautions: a) No sewage or waste water should be admitted into the system. b) No waste water from areas likely to have oil, grease or other pollutants should be connected to the system. c) Each structure/well shall have an inlet chamber with a silt trap to prevent any silt from finding its way into the subsoil water. d) The wells should be terminated at least 5 m above the natural static subsoil water at its highest level so that the incoming flow passes through the natural ground condition and prevent contamination hazards. e) No recharge structure or a well shall be used for drawing water for any purpose. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 100. 52 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 4.5.12.5 Siphonic drainage system It is an installation generally used for special situations such as roofs with large spans for structures like hangars, airport terminals, stadia and industrial sheds, where the number of down pipes has to be limited. These are designed for full flow of pipes and the roof outlets are different from conventional ones. Siphonic roof drainage systems are engineered on the concept of a full bore (a fill rate of 100 percent). This implies that rainwater flows at high speed through small diameter pipe work, at normally zero gradient. This siphonic effect is created by the (kinetic) energy derived from the hydraulic head, caused by the difference in height between the roof outlet and the discharge point in a building. Specialist roof outlets prevent air being sucked into the system. The engineering principle of siphonic roof drainage design is based on the Bernoulli’s energy equation for a steady flow of an incompressible fluid with constant density. In order to balance the equation, and to guarantee the required siphonic effect according to the rainfall intensity, the ideal pipe dimensions per flow path need to be determined. In case of syphon system, the outlets of drainage system prevent vortex formation, thereby preventing air from entering the pipeline ensuring the entire system is running at full flow (see Fig. 12). It uses design that complies with Bernoulli’s principle where equal energy is created under positive and negative pressure. 4.5.12.6 Rainwater harvesting for plotted/group housing developments The rainwater harvesting methods adopted for plotted and group housing are through collection of rooftop rainwater and surface runoff harvesting. A network of storm water drains in the entire residential area is used for harvesting rooftop rainwater and surface runoff. Appropriate number of recharge wells measuring 1 m × 1 m × 2 m may be constructed in the storm water drain for facilitating groundwater recharge. The quality of runoff, which passes through the borewell installed inside the recharge well, is ensured through a filter bed of pebbles (see Fig. 11). 4.5.12.7 Other methods of rainwater harvesting a) Creation of artificial reservoirs/lakes for utilization of available storm water — This shall be based on estimation of amount of runoff volume based on rainfall data (for a period of 10 years) considering the percolation and evaporation losses and efforts to be made to collect all available runoff for proper utilization. b) Water balancing methods — This refers to optimum utilization of available water from different sources, namely ground water, recycled waste water, storm water and municipal supply and its adoption would ensure that there is no wastage of water. FIG. 12 SIPHONIC DRAINAGE SYSTEM Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 101. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 53 SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION Table 24 Rainwater Available from Roof Top Harvesting (Clause 4.5.12.3.1) Rain fall mm 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1 000 1 100 1 200 1 300 1 400 1 500 1 600 1 700 1 800 1 900 2 000 Roof Top Area m2 Harvested Water from Roof Tops, m3 (80 percent of gross precipitation) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) 20 2 3 5 6 8 10 11 13 14 16 18 19 21 22 24 26 27 29 30 32 30 2 5 7 10 12 14 17 19 22 24 26 29 31 34 36 38 41 43 46 48 40 3 6 10 13 16 19 22 26 29 32 35 38 42 45 48 51 54 58 61 64 50 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 60 64 68 72 76 80 60 5 10 14 19 24 29 34 38 43 48 53 58 62 67 72 77 82 86 91 96 70 6 11 17 22 28 34 39 45 50 56 62 67 73 78 84 90 95 101 106 112 80 6 13 19 26 32 38 45 51 58 64 70 77 83 90 96 102 109 115 122 128 90 7 14 22 29 36 43 50 58 65 72 79 86 94 101 108 115 122 130 137 144 100 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96 104 112 120 128 136 144 152 160 110 9 18 26 35 44 53 62 70 79 88 97 106 114 123 132 141 150 158 167 176 120 10 19 29 38 48 58 67 77 86 96 106 115 125 134 144 154 163 173 182 192 130 10 21 31 42 52 62 73 83 94 104 114 125 135 146 156 166 177 187 198 208 140 11 22 34 45 56 67 78 90 101 112 123 134 146 157 168 179 190 202 213 224 150 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180 192 204 216 228 240 200 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240 256 272 288 304 320 250 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320 340 360 380 400 300 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192 216 240 264 288 312 336 360 384 408 432 456 480 400 32 64 96 128 160 192 224 256 288 320 352 384 416 448 480 512 544 576 608 640 500 40 80 120 160 200 240 280 320 360 400 440 480 520 560 600 640 680 720 760 800 1 000 80 160 240 320 400 480 560 640 720 800 880 960 1 040 1 120 1 200 1 280 1 360 1 440 1 520 1 600 2 000 160 320 480 640 800 960 1 120 1 280 1 440 1 600 1 760 1 920 2 080 2 240 2 400 2 560 2 720 2 880 3 040 3 200 3 000 240 480 720 960 1 200 1 440 1 680 1 920 2 160 2 400 2 640 2 880 3 120 3 360 3 600 3 840 4 080 4 320 4 560 4 800 ok Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid u Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017
- 102. 54 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 4.5.13 Subsoil Water Drainage 4.5.13.1 General Subsoil water is that portion of the rainfall which is absorbed into the ground. The drainage of subsoil water may be necessary for the following reasons: a) To increase the stability of the surface; b) To avoid surface flooding; c) To alleviate or to avoid causing dampness in the building, especially in the cellars; d) To reduce the humidity in the immediate vicinity of the building; and e) To increase the workability of the soil. 4.5.13.2 Depth of water table The standing level of the subsoil water will vary with the season, the amount of rainfall and the proximity and level of drainage channels. Information regarding this level may be obtained by means of boreholes or trial pits, preferably the latter. It is desirable though not always practicable to ascertain the level of the standing water over a considerable period so as to enable the seasonal variations to be recorded and in particular the high water level. The direction of flow of the subsoil water may usually be judged by the general inclination of the land surface and the main lines of the subsoil drains shall follow the natural falls, wherever possible. 4.5.13.3 Precautions Subsoil drains shall be so sited as not to endanger the stability of the buildings or earthwork. In some portions of the drain, it may be necessary to use non-porous jointed pipes. 4.5.13.3.1 No field pipe shall be laid in such a manner or in such a position as to communicate directly with any drain constructed or adopted to be used for conveying sewage, except where absolutely unavoidable and in such case a suitable efficient trap shall be provided between subsoil drain and such sewer. 4.5.13.4 Systems of subsoil drainage Clay or concrete porous field drain pipes may be used and shall be laid in one of the following ways (see also Fig. 13): a) Natural — The pipes are laid to follow the natural depressions or valleys of the site; branches discharge into the main as tributaries do into a river. b) Herringbone — The system consists of a number of drains into which discharges from both sides smaller subsidiary branch drains parallel to each other, but an angle to the mains forming a series of herringbone pattern. Normally these branch drains should not exceed 30 m in length. c) Grid — A main or mains drain is laid to the boundaries if the site into which subsidiary branches discharge from one side only. d) Fan-shaper — The drains are laid converging to a single outlet at one point on the boundary of a site, without the use of main or collecting drains. e) Moat or cut-off system — This system consists of drains laid on one or more sides of a building to intercept the flow of subsoil water and carry it away, thereby protecting the foundations of a building. The choice of one or more of these systems will naturally depend on the local conditions of the site. For building sites, the mains shall be not less than 75 mm in diameter and the branches not less than 65 mm in diameter but normal practice tends towards the use of 100 mm and 75 mm, respectively. The pipes shall generally be laid at 60 to 90 cm depth, or to such a depth to which it is desirable to lower the water-table and the gradients are determined rather by the fall of the land than by considerations of self-cleansing velocity. The connection of the subsidiary drain to the main drain is best made by means of a clayware or concrete junction pipe. The outlet of a subsoil system may discharge into a soakaway or through a catch pit into the nearest ditch or watercourse. Where these are not available, the subsoil drains may be connected, with the approval of the Authority, through an intercepting trap to the surface water drainage system. NOTE — Care shall be taken that there is no backflow from sub-surface drains during heavy rains. 4.5.13.5 Deep well/borewell recharging Recharge well is one which pushes back surface water into ground water system. The recharge well may be of 1 m in diameter and 6 m deep lined with concrete rings having perforations. Direct recharge is recommended when the well has gone dry and is yielding negligible amount of water. Indirect recharge is adopted for functioning borewells. 4.5.14 Waste Disposal Systems in High Altitudes and/ or Sub-Zero Temperature Regions 4.5.14.1 In general, all the care to be exercised regarding water supply systems shall also be applicable in the case of waste disposal systems. The biological and chemical reduction of organic material proceeds slowly under low temperature conditions, consequently affecting the waste disposal systems. The waste disposal methods given in 4.5.14.2, 4.5.14.3 and 4.5.14.4 shall be used only where it is not practical to install water carriage system. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 103. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 55 SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION 4.5.14.2 Box and can system Where box and can systems are employed, adequate arrangements shall be made for the cleaning and disinfection of the can after it is emptied of its contents. The excrement from the can shall be disposed of by burial in isolated spots far from habitation or by incineration, where feasible. The can shall be fitted with a tight fitting lid for use when it is carried for emptying. 4.5.14.3 Trench or pit latrines Trench or pit latrines shall be used only where soil and subsoil conditions favour their use. Whenever they are used, they shall not be closer than 18 m from any source of drinking water, such as well, to eliminate the possibility of bacterial pollution of water. 4.5.14.4 Chemical toilets For the successful functioning of chemical toilets, they shall preferably be installed in heated rooms or enclosures. NOTE — Chemical toilet essentially consists of small cylindrical tanks with a water-closer seat for the use of 8 to 10 persons. A ventilation pipe is fitted to the seat. A strong solution of caustic soda is used as a disinfectant. It kills bacteria, liquefies the solids and thus checks the decomposition of organic matter. The tank is provided with a drain plug for which liquid runs to a soak pit at the time of disposal. 4.5.14.5 Water-borne sanitation systems Water-borne sanitation systems shall be used, where practicable. Sanitation systems for the collection of sewage should be constructed in such a manner that maximum heat is retained by insulation, if necessary. 4.5.14.5.1 Sewerage laying Under normal circumstances, sewers shall be laid below the frost line. Manholes shall be made of air-tight construction so as to prevent the cold air from gaining access inside and freezing the contents. The trenches for sewers shall be loosely filled with earth after laying sewers, since loose soil is a better insulator than compacted soil. Consequently, sewers laid under traffic ways and other places where soil compaction may be FIG. 13 DETAILS OF SUBSOIL DRAINAGE SYSTEM Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 104. 56 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 expected are required to be given adequate insulation. Where feasible, sewers shall be so located that the trench line is not in shadow, when the sun is shining. Concrete, cast iron and stoneware pipes conduct heat relatively rapidly and as such should be adequately insulated. 4.5.14.5.2 Septic tanks Septic tanks can function only when it can be ensured that the contents inside these do not freeze at low temperature. For this purpose, the septic tanks shall be located well below the frost line. The location of manhole openings shall be marked by staves. Fencing around the septic tanks shall be provided for discouraging traffic over them. As the rate of biological activity is reduced by 50 percent for every 10°C fall in temperature, the capacity of septic tanks shall be increased by 100 percent for operation at 10°C over that for operation at 20°C. The construction of septic tanks is preferred in rural and fringe areas of suburban and isolated buildings where underground system may neither be feasible nor economical. Septic tanks are only recommended for small communities and institutions whose contributory population does not exceed 300. For other details, see good practice [9-2(9)]. 4.5.14.5.3 Seepage pits Seepage pits can function only when the soil and subsoil conditions are favourable. Frozen soil extending to a great depth would preclude the use of such disposal devices in view of the lower water absorption capacity. The discharge of effluent should be made below the frost line. 4.5.14.5.4 Sewage treatment plants Suitable design modifications for sedimentation, chemical and biological processes shall be applied to sewage treatment plants for satisfactory functioning (see also 4.13). NOTE — Lavatories and bathrooms shall be kept heated to avoid freezing of water inside traps and flushing cisterns. 4.6 Construction Relating to Conveyance of Sanitary Wastes 4.6.1 Excavation 4.6.1.1 General The safety precautions as given in Part 7 ‘Construction Management, Practices and Safety’ of the Code shall be ensured. 4.6.1.2 Turf, topsoil or other surface material shall be set aside, turf being carefully rolled and stacked for use in reinstatement. All suitable broken surface material and hard-core shall be set on one side for use in subsequent reinstatement. 4.6.1.3 Excavated material shall be stacked sufficiently away from the edge of the trench and the size of the spoil bank shall not be allowed to become such as to endanger the stability of the excavation. Spoil may be carried away and used for filling the trench behind the work. 4.6.1.4 Excavation shall proceed to within about 75 mm of the finished formation level. This final 75 mm is to be trimmed and removed as a separate operation immediately prior to the laying of the pipes or their foundations. 4.6.1.5 Unless specified otherwise by the Authority, the width at bottom of trenches for pipes of different diameters laid at different depths shall be as given below: a) For all diameters, up to an average depth of 1 200 mm, Width of trench, in mm = Diameter of pipe + 300 mm; b) For all diameters for depths above 1 200 mm, Width of trench, in mm = Diameter of pipe + 400 mm; and c) Notwithstanding (a) and (b), the total width of trench at the top should not be less than 750 mm for depths exceeding 900 mm. 4.6.1.6 Excavation in roads shall be so arranged, in agreement with the proper authority, as to cause the minimum obstruction to traffic. The methods to be adopted shall depend on local circumstances. 4.6.1.7 All pipes, ducts, cables, mains or other services exposed in the trench shall be effectively supported by timber and/or chain or rope-slings. 4.6.1.8 All drainage sumps shall be sunk clear of the work outside the trench or at the sides of manholes. After the completion of the work, any pipes or drains leading to such sumps or temporary subsoil drains under permanent work shall be filled in properly with sand and consolidated. 4.6.2 Laying of Pipes Laying of pipes shall be done in accordance with good practice [9-2(19)]. 4.6.3 Jointing All soil pipes, waste pipes, vent pipes and other such pipes above ground shall be gas-tight. All sewers and drains laid below the ground shall be water-tight. Jointing shall be done in accordance with good practice [9-2(19)]. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 105. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 57 SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION 4.6.4 Support or Protection for Pipes 4.6.4.1 General It may be necessary to support or surround pipe sewers or drains by means of concrete in certain circumstances. Some of the suggested methods are given in 4.6.4.2 to 4.6.4.4. 4.6.4.2 Bedding Bedding (see Fig. 14) shall be rectangular in section and shall extend laterally at least 150 mm beyond and on both sides of the projection of the barrel of the pipe. The thickness of the concrete below the barrel of the pipe shall be not less than 100 mm for pipes under 150 mm diameter and 150 mm for pipes 150 mm and over in diameter. Where bedding is used alone, the concrete shall be brought up at least to the invert level of the pipe to form a cradle and to avoid line contact between the pipe and the bed. FIG. 14 BEDDING 4.6.4.3 Haunching Concrete haunching (see Fig. 15) shall consist of, a) a concrete bed as described for bedding (see 4.6.4.2); b) the full width of the bed carried up to the level of the horizontal diameter of the pipe; and c) splays from this level carried up on both sides of the pipe, from the full width of the bed to meet the pipe barrel tangentially. FIG. 15 HAUNCHING 4.6.4.4 Surround or encasing The surround or encasing (see Fig. 16) shall be similar to haunching up to the horizontal diameter of the pipe and the top portion over this shall be finished in a semicircular form to give a uniform encasing for the top half of the pipe. FIG. 16 SURROUND OR ENCASING Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 106. 58 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 4.6.5 Connection to Existing Sewers The connection to an existing sewer shall, as far as possible, be done at the manholes. Where it is unavoidable to make connection in between two manholes, the work of breaking into the existing sewer and forming the connection shall be carried out by the Authority or under its supervision. 4.6.5.1 Breaking into the sewer shall be effected by the cautious enlargement of a small hole and every precaution shall be taken to prevent any material from entering the sewer. No connection shall be formed in such a way as to constitute a projection into the sewer or to cause any diminution in its effective size. 4.6.6 Back Filling 4.6.6.1 Filling of the trench shall not be commenced until the length of pipes therein has been tested and passed (see 4.10.2). 4.6.6.2 All timber which may be withdrawn with safety shall be removed as filling proceeds. 4.6.6.3 Where the pipes are unprotected by concrete haunching, the first operation in filling shall be carefully done to hand-pack and tamp selected fine material around the lower half of the pipes so as to buttress them to the sides of the trench. 4.6.6.4 The filling shall then be continued to 150 mm over the top of the pipe using selected fine hand-packed material, watered and rammed on both sides of the pipe with a wooden rammer. On no account shall material be tipped into the trench until the first 150 mm of filling has been completed. The process of filling and tamping shall proceed evenly so as to maintain an equal pressure on both sides of the pipeline. 4.6.6.5 Filling shall be continued in layers not exceeding 150 mm in thickness, each layer being watered and well rammed. 4.6.6.6 In roads, surface materials previously excavated shallbereplacedasthetoplayerofthefilling,consolidated and maintained satisfactorily till the permanent reinstatement of the surface is made by the Authority. 4.6.6.7 In gardens, the top soil and turf, if any, shall be carefully replaced. 4.7 Construction Relating to Conveyance of Rain or Storm Water 4.7.1 Roof Gutters Roof gutters shall be of any material of suitable thickness. All junctions and joints shall be water-tight. 4.7.2 RainWater Pipes Rainwater pipes shall conform to the accepted standards [9-2(20)]. 4.7.3 Subsoil Drain Pipes 4.7.3.1 Field drain pipes Suitable pipes for this purpose are plain cylindrical glazed water pipes, or concrete porous pipes, though the latter may prove unsuitable where subsoil water carries sulphates or is acidic owing to the presence of peat. Trenches for these pipes need be just wide enough at the bottom to permit laying the pipes, which shall be laid with open joints to proper lines and gradients. It is advisable to cover the pipes with clinker free from fine ash, brick ballast or other suitable rubble, or a layer of inverted turf, brush-wood or straw before refilling the trench, in order to prevent the infiltration of silt through the open joints. Where the subsoil drain is also to serve the purpose of collecting surface water, the rubble shall be carried up to a suitable level and when required for a lawn or playing field, the remainder of the trench shall be filled with pervious top soil. When refilling the trenches, care shall be taken to prevent displacement of pipes in line of levels. When they pass near trees or through hedges, socket pipes with cement or bitumen joints shall be used to prevent penetration by roots. 4.7.3.2 French drain A shallow trench is excavated, the bottom neatly trimmed to the gradient and the trench filled with broken stone, gravel or clinker, coarse at the bottom and finer towards the top. 4.8 Selection and Installation of Sanitary Appliances Selection, installation and maintenance of sanitary appliances shall be done in accordance with good practice [9-2(21)]. 4.9 Refuse Chute System The refuse chute system provided shall be in accordance with Part 9 ‘Plumbing Services, Section 3 Solid Waste Management’ of the Code. 4.10 Inspection and Testing 4.10.1 Inspection 4.10.1.1 All sanitary appliances and fitments shall be carefully examined for defects before they are installed and also on the completion of the work. 4.10.1.2 Pipes are liable to get damaged in transit and, not withstanding tests that may have been made before despatch, each pipe shall be carefully examined on arrival on the site. Preferably, each pipe shall be rung with a hammer or mallet and those that do not ring true and clear shall be rejected. Sound pipes shall be carefully stored to prevent damage. Any defective pipes shall be segregated, marked in a conspicuous manner and their use in the works prevented. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 107. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 59 SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION 4.10.1.3 Cast iron pipes shall be carefully examined for damage to the protective coating. Minor damage shall be made good by painting over with hot tar or preferably bitumen. But if major defects in coating exist, the pipes shall not be used unless recoated. Each pipe shall be carefully re-examined for soundness before laying. 4.10.1.4 Close inspection shall be maintained at every stage in the work, particularly as to the adequacy of timber supports used in excavation and the care and thoroughness exercised in filling. 4.10.1.4.1 Careful note shall be kept of the condition of any sewer, manhole or other existing work which may be uncovered and any defects evident shall be pointed out immediately to the Authority. 4.10.1.4.2 No work shall be covered over or surrounded with concrete until it has been inspected and approved by the Authority. 4.10.2 Testing 4.10.2.1 Comprehensive tests of all appliances shall be made by simulating conditions of use. Overflow shall be examined for obstructions. 4.10.2.2 Smoke test All soil pipes, waste pipes, and vent pipes and all other pipes when above ground shall be approved gas-tight by a smoke test conducted under a pressure of 25 mm of water and maintained for 15 min after all trap seals have been filled with water. The smoke is produced by burning only waste or tar paper or similar material in the combustion chamber of a smoke machine. Chemical smokes are not satisfactory. 4.10.2.3 Water test 4.10.2.3.1 For pipes other than cast iron Glazed and concrete pipes shall be subjected to a test pressure of at least 1.5 m head of water at the highest point of the section under test. The tolerance figure of 2 litre/cm of diameter/km may be allowed during a period of 10 min. The test shall be carried out by suitably plugging the low end of the drain and the ends of connections, if any, and filling the system with water. A knuckle bend shall be temporarily jointed in at the top end and a sufficient length of the vertical pipe jointed to it so as to provide the required test head, or the top end may be plugged with a connection to a hose ending in a funnel which could be raised or lowered till the required head is obtained and fixed suitably for observation. Subsidence of the test water may be due to one or more of the following causes: a) Absorption by pipes and joints; b) Sweating of pipes or joints; c) Leakage at joints or from defective pipes; and d) Trapped air. Allowance shall be made for (a) by adding water until absorption has ceased after which the test proper should commence. Any leakage will be visible and the defective part of the work should be cut out and made good. A slight amount of sweating which is uniform may be overlooked, but excessive sweating from a particular pipe or joint shall be watched for and taken as indicating a defect to be made good. A slight amount of sweating which is uniform may be overlooked, but excessive sweating from a particular pipe or joint shall be watched for and taken as indicating a defect to be made good. NOTE — This test will not be applicable to sanitary pipe work above ground level. 4.10.2.3.2 For cast iron pipes Cast iron sewers and drains shall be tested as for glazed and concrete pipes. The drain plug shall be suitably strutted to prevent their being forced out of the pipe during the test. 4.10.2.4 Tests for straightness and obstruction The following tests shall be carried out: a) By inserting at the high end of the sewer or drain a smooth ball of a diameter 13 mm less than the pipe bore. In the absence of obstruction, such as yarn or mortar projecting through the joints, the ball should roll down the invert of the pipe, and emerge at the lower end; and b) By means of a mirror at one end of the line and lamp at the other. If the pipeline is straight, the full circle of light may be observed. If the pipe line is not straight, this will be apparent. The mirrorwillalsoindicateobstructioninthebarrel. 4.10.2.5 Test records Complete records shall be kept of all tests carried out on sewers and drains both during construction and after being put into service. 4.11 Maintenance 4.11.1 General Domestic drainage system shall be inspected at regular intervals. The system shall be thoroughly cleaned out at the same time and any defects discovered shall be made good. 4.11.2 Cleaning of Drainage System 4.11.2.1 Sewer maintenance crews, when entering a deep manhole or sewer where dangerous gas or oxygen deficiencies may be present, shall follow the following procedures: a) Allow no smoking or open flames and guard against parks. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 108. 60 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 b) Erect warning signs. c) Use only safety gas-proof, electric lighting equipment. d) Test the atmosphere for noxious gases and oxygen deficiencies (presence of hydrogen sulphide is detected using lead acetate paper and that of oxygen by safety lamps). e) If the atmosphere is normal, workmen may enter with a safety belt attached and with two men available at the top. For extended jobs, the gas tests shall be repeated at frequent intervals, depending on circumstances. f) If oxygen deficiency or noxious gas is found, the structure shall be ventilated with pure air by keeping open at least one manhole cover each on upstream and downstream side for quick exit of toxic gases or by artificial means. The gas tests shall be repeated and the atmosphere cleared before entering. Adequate ventilation shall be maintained during this work and the tests repeated frequently. g) If the gas or oxygen deficiency is present and it is not practicable to ventilate adequately before workers enter, a hose mask shall be worn and extreme care taken to avoid all sources of ignition. Workers shall be taught how to use the hose equipment. In these cases, they shall always use permissible safety lights (not ordinary flash lights), rubber boots or non-sparking shoes and non-sparking tools; h) Workmen descending a manhole shaft to inspect or clean sewers shall try each ladder step or rung carefully before putting the full weight on it to guard against insecure fastening due to corrosion of the rung at the manhole wall. When work is going on in deep sewers, at least two men shall be available for lifting workers from the manhole in the event of serious injury; and j) Portable air blowers, for ventilating manhole, are recommended for all tank, pit or manhole work where there is a question as to the presence of noxious gas, vapours or oxygen deficiency. The motors for these shall be of weather proof and flame-proof types; compression ignition diesel type (without sparking plug) may be used. When used, these shall be placed not less than 2 m away from the opening and on the leeward side protected form wind, so that they will not serve as a source of ignition for any inflammable gas which might be present. Provision should be made for ventilation and it should be of the forced type which can be provided by a blower located at ground level with suitable flexible ducting to displace out air from the manhole. 4.11.2.2 The following operations shall be carried out during periodical cleaning of a drainage system: a) The covers of inspection chambers and manholes shall be removed and the side benching and channels scrubbed; b) The interceptive trap, if fitted, shall be adequately cleaned and flushed with clean water. Care shall be taken to see that the stopper in the rodding arm is securely replaced; c) All lengths of main and branch drains shall be rodded by means of drain rods and a suitable rubber or leather plunger. After rodding, the drains shall be thoroughly flushed with clean water. Any obstruction found shall be removed with suitable drain cleaning tools and the system thereafter shall be flushed with clean water; d) The covers of access plates to all gullies shall be removed and the traps plunged and flushed out thoroughly with clean water. Care shall be taken not to flush the gully deposit into the system; e) Any defects revealed as a result of inspection or test shall be made good; f) The covers or inspection chambers and gullies shall be replaced, bedding them in suitable grease or other materials; and g) Painting of ladders/rings in deep manholes and external painting of manhole covers shall be done with approved paints. 4.11.3 All surface water drains shall be periodically rodded by means of drain rods and a suitable rubber or leather plunger. After rodding, they shall be thoroughly flushed with clean water. Any obstruction found shall be removed with suitable drain cleaning tools. 4.11.4 All subsoil drains shall be periodically examined for obstruction at the open joints due to the roots of plants or other growths. 4.12 Pumping of Sewage 4.12.1 In the design of sewerage system, it is necessary to collect the sewage of a low lying area at some convenient point from which it shall be lifted by pumps. At the treatment plant also, lifting of sewage may be necessary to provide head for the flow by gravity of sewage. 4.12.2 Sewage Pump Stations, Sizing of Sumps and Pumps They are required as onsite pump stations to cater to drainage from toilets and kitchen. The stations would Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 109. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 61 SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION be located in basement floors and leading the sewage to onsite treatment plants. Submersible centrifugal pumps are used for pumping the sewage. The sump capacity depends on effective holding capacity considering the flow from drainage fixtures. Usually, retention period of 15 min is adopted. The size of sump depends on the availability of space. Minimum size of discharge pipe may be 80 mm with a velocity of 1 m/s and pumps are sized for 100 percent design flow. NOTE — For other details reference to good practice [9-2(12)] shall be made. 4.13 Sewage Treatment Systems 4.13.1 Sewage treatment is the process of removing contaminants from waste water, primarily from household sewage. It includes physical, chemical and biological processes to remove these contaminants and produce environmentally safe treated waste water (or treated effluent). The by-product of sewage treatment is usually a semisolid waste or slurry, called sewage sludge, that has to undergo further treatment before being suitable for disposal or further application (see Fig. 17). 4.13.2 The main objective of treating waste water is to stabilize decomposable organic matter present in the sewage so as to produce treated effluent and sludge, which can be disposed of in the environment without causing health hazards or nuisance. The microbial population in treatment process can be cultured using the following systems: a) Suspended growth system — In this system, microorganisms remain in suspension and their concentration is related to mixed liquor suspended solids (MLSS). b) Attached growth system — In this system, microorganisms are developed over mobile or immobile solid covered in biomass (slime). c) Combined growth system — In this system, both systems are used to attain the shock loads. Suspended growth system is generally proposed due to its merits and excellent performance. 4.13.3 Technologies Following technologies for sewage treatment shall be considered based on the requirement: a) Extended aeration with activated sludge process (EAASP) — Activated sludge process is the biological process by which non- settleable substances occurring in dissolved and colloidal forms are converted into settleable sludge which is removed from the liquid carrier (water). This process is well suitable for completely populated community and does not require skilled labour for handling the plant. It is time tested and requires more number of units to achieve biological oxygen demand (BOD) less than 10 ppm, like coagulants required for better quality. b) Sequential batch reactor (SBR) — It is an activated sludge process designed to operate under non-steady state conditions. An SBR operates in a true batch mode with aeration and sludge settlement both occurring in the same tank. There is a degree of flexibility associated with working in a time rather than in a space sequence. Plant for this process requires less space due to batch process, well suitable for modular growth. It can handle smallest flows and the desired quality can be achieved without coagulants. It requires good quality of decanters, and skilled labour as the process is timer-based automation. c) Membrane bio-reactor (MBR) — It is a continuous process of activated sludge treatment, but solids separation is done through pressurised system or through media. As there is physical barrier for solid separation, quality of treatment is good. It is suitable for any type of growth pattern and can handle smaller flows. It requires less space, and skilled labours to handle. d) Rotating bio-bed reactor (RBBR) — It is combined growth process. Bacteria are allowed to grow on media, which is exposed to atmospheric air. It is also known as rotating biological contactor (RBC). It is suitable for smaller capacities and does not require skilled labour to handle. The quality of treatment is good. e) Fluidized bio-bed reactor (FBBR) — In this process, cells are immobilized in small particles which move with the fluid. The small particles create a large surface area for cells to stick and enable a high rate of transfer of oxygen and nutrients to the cells. It is also known as moving bed bio reactor (MBBR). It is suitable for all type of communities, does not require skilled labour and requires less space. It can be installed for all capacities and the quality of treatment is good. f) Submerged aerobic fixed film reactor (SAFF) — It is a combined growth process in Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 110. 62 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 which bio-media is fixed and bacteria are allowed to grow on media, which has air supply from below. It does not require skilled labour. Supporting structure for media should be anti-corrosive to enable media fixing. g) Trickling filters — It is an attached growth process where media is used to grow bacteria by trickling sewage over the media. It is an old concept and is not now widely used. FIG. 17 TYPICAL SCHEME FOR SEWAGE TREATMENT h) Oxidation ponds/lagoons — Oxidation ponds, also called lagoons or stabilization ponds are large shallow ponds designed to treat wastewater through the interaction of sunlight, bacteria, and algae. 4.14 Treatment of Waste Water and Usage of Recycled Water See 4.2.4 of Part 9 ‘Plumbing Services, Section 1 Water Supply’ of the Code. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 111. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 63 SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION ANNEX A (Clause 3.2.1) APPLICATION FOR DRAINAGE OF PREMISES I/We hereby make application to the * . . for permission to drain the premises Ward No ..Street No Road/Street known as The sanitary arrangement and drains of the said premises are shown in the accompanying plans and a description of the specification of the work/material used is also appended (see Annex B). I/We undertake to carry out the work in accordance with Part 9 ‘Plumbing services, Section 2 Drainage and sanitation’ of the National Building Code of India. ... Signature of the licensed/registered plumber Signature of the owner Name and address of the Name and address . . Date .. Date NOTE — The application should be signed by the owner of the premises and shall be countersigned by the licensed/registered plumber. * Insert the name of the Authority. ANNEX B (Clause 3.2.3.2) FORM FOR DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF WORK AND SPECIFICATION OF MATERIALS 1) Separation of rainwater and foul water.................................................................................................... 2) Rainwater drains, curbs and points of discharge ..................................................................................... 3) Rainwater gutters, pipes or spouts where discharging............................................................................. 4) Open-full-water drains, materials, sizes, curbs and other means places, verandahs, latrines 5) Silt-catcher and grating, size and position ............................................................................................... 6) Drains ....................................................................................................................................................... a) Main sewage drains: Fall .. Size .. b) Branch drains : Fall .. Size c) Materials d) Method of jointing Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 112. 64 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 ANNEX B — (Continued) 7) Bedding of pipes: a) Method of bedding............................................................................................................................ b) Thickness and width of beds of concrete ......................................................................................... c) Thickness of concrete round pipes ................................................................................................... 8) Protection of drain laid under wall .......................................................................................................... 9) Traps, description and intercepter: a) Lavatory waste pipes ........................................................................................................................ b) Bath waste pipes ............................................................................................................................... c) Sink ................................................................................................................................................... d) Gully-traps ........................................................................................................................................ e) Water closet traps.............................................................................................................................. f) Grease traps ...................................................................................................................................... g) Slop sink ........................................................................................................................................... h) Urinal ................................................................................................................................................ j) Others ................................................................................................................................................ 10) Manholes and inspection chambers: a) Thickness of walls ............................................................................................................................ b) Description of bricks ........................................................................................................................ c) Description of rendering ................................................................................................................... d) Description of invert channels .......................................................................................................... e) Depth of chambers ............................................................................................................................ f) Size and description of cover and manner of fixing......................................................................... 11) Ventilation of drain: a) Position — Height above nearest ground level ................................................................................ b) Outlet shaft position of terminal at top ............................................................................................. 12) Soil pipe, waste pipe and vent pipe connections: a) Lead and iron pipes........................................................................................................................... b) Lead pipe of trap with cast iron pipe ................................................................................................ c) Stoneware pipe or trap with lead pipe .............................................................................................. d) Lead soil pipe or trap with stoneware pipe or trap........................................................................... e) Cast iron pipe with stoneware drain ................................................................................................. f) Stoneware trap with cast iron soil pipe............................................................................................. 13) Ventilation of water closet trap sink, lavatory and other traps material and supports. 14) Water closets (apartments): a) 1) At or above ground level ........................................................................................................... 2) Approached from ....................................................................................................................... 3) Floor material ............................................................................................................................ 4) Floor fall towards door .............................................................................................................. 5) Size of window opening in wall made to open ......................................................................... 6) Position of same ........................................................................................................................ 7) Means of constant ventilation.................................................................................................... 8) Position of same ........................................................................................................................ Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 113. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 65 SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION ANNEX B — (Concluded) b) Water closet apparatus: 1) Description of pan, basin, etc .................................................................................................... 2) Kind ........................................................................................................................................... 3) Flushing cistern.......................................................................................................................... 4) Material of flushing pipe ........................................................................................................... 5) Internal diameter ........................................................................................................................ 6) Union with basin ........................................................................................................................ 15) Sanitary fittings, water storage tank, etc: a) Number and description of sanitary fittings in room and rooms in which they are to be installed . b) Capacity and position of water storage tanks ................................................................................... c) Size and number of draw off taps and whether taken off storage tanks or direct from main supply d) Details of draw off taps, that is, whether they are of plain screw down pattern or ‘waste not’ and description of any other sanitary work to be carried out not included under above headings ........ 16) Depth of sewer below surface of street ... 17) Level of invert of house drain at point of junction: a) With sewer ........................................................................................................................................ b) Level of invert of sewer at point of junction with house drain ........................................................ c) Distance of nearest manhole on sewer from the point at which the drain leaves the premises ....... 18) Schedule of pipes: Description of Pipe/Drain Materials Diameter Weight Method of Jointing Subsoil drains Main sewage drains Branch sewage drains Soil pipes Vent pipes other than soil pipes Waste pipes Rainwater pipes Anti-syphon pipes Signature of the licensed/registered plumber ............................................................................ Name and address of the licensed/registered plumber .............................................................. ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... Date............................................................................................................................................ Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 114. 66 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 ANNEX C (Clause 3.2.5) FORM FOR LICENSED/REGISTERED PLUMBER’S COMPLETION CERTIFICATE Certified that I/we have completed the plumbing work of drainage and sanitation system for the premises as detailed below. This may be inspected, approved and connection given. Ward No ...................................................................... Street ............................................................................ Locality ........................................................................ Block No...................................................................... House No ..................................................................... Details of work ....................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................................................................ The work was sanctioned by the Authority* vide . . . Signature of the owner Signature of the licensed/registered plumber Name and address Name and address . .. Date The Authority’s Report Certified that the plumbing work of drainage and sanitation system for the premises, have been laid, applied, executed in accordance with Part 9 ‘Plumbing services, Section 2 Drainage and sanitation’ of the National Building Code of India. Drainage Connection to the main sewer will be made on ........................................... Date The Authority .................... * Insert the name of the Authority. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 115. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 67 SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION ANNEX D (Clause 4.5.1.4) TYPICAL MOUNTING ARRANGEMENTS FOR VARIOUS PLUMBING FIXTURES, INCLUDING DRAINAGE SYSTEMS AND VENTILATION D-1 ARRANGEMENT FOR RECTANGULAR WASH BASIN All dimensions in millimetres. FIG. 18 RECTANGULAR WASH BASIN Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 116. 68 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 D-2 ARRANGEMENT FOR OVAL WASHBASIN (ABOVE COUNTER) All dimensions in millimetres. FIG. 19 OVAL WASH BASIN (ABOVE COUNTER) D-3 ARRANGEMENT FOR OVAL WASHBASIN (BELOW COUNTER) All dimensions in millimetres. FIG. 20 OVAL WASH BASIN (BELOW COUNTER) Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 117. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 69 SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION D-4 ARRANGEMENT FOR SINK All dimensions in millimetres. FIG. 21 SINK Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 118. 70 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 D-5 ARRANGEMENT FOR EUROPEAN WATER CLOSET (FLOOR MOUNTED WITH FLUSH TANK AND S-TRAP) All dimensions in millimetres. FIG. 22 EUROPEAN WATER CLOSET (FLOOR MOUNTED WITH FLUSH TANK AND S-TRAP) Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 119. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 71 SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION D-6 ARRANGEMENT FOR EUROPEAN WATER CLOSET (WALL HUNG WITH FLUSH VALVE) All dimensions in millimetres. FIG. 23 EUROPEAN WATER CLOSET (WALL HUNG WITH FLUSH VALVE) Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 120. 72 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 D-7 ARRANGEMENT FOR EUROPEAN WATER CLOSET (WALL HUNG WITH FLUSHING CISTERN) All dimensions in millimetres. FIG. 24 EUROPEAN WATER CLOSET (WALL HUNG WITH FLUSHING CISTERN) Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 121. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 73 SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION D-8 ARRANGEMENT FOR ORISSA PAN INDIAN WATER CLOSET All dimensions in millimetres. FIG. 25 ORISSA PAN INDIAN WATER CLOSET Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 122. 74 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 D-9 ARRANGEMENT FOR URINAL All dimensions in millimetres. FIG. 26 URINAL Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 123. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 75 SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION D-10 ARRANGEMENT FOR SHOWER All dimensions in millimetres. FIG. 27 SHOWER Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 124. 76 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 D-11 ARRANGEMENT FOR BATH TUB/SHOWER All dimensions in millimetres. FIG. 28 BATH TUB/SHOWER Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 125. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 77 SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION D-12 ARRANGEMENT FOR SHOWER AND ELECTRIC WATER HEATER (HORIZONTAL MOUNTED TYPE) All dimensions in millimetres. FIG. 29 SHOWER AND ELECTRIC WATER HEATER (HORIZONTAL MOUNTED TYPE) Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 126. 78 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 D-13 ARRANGEMENT FOR WASHING MACHINE NOTE — Manual type washing machine : waste lead into floor trap. Automatic type washing machine : Waste outlet should be 300 mm above FFL (and as per manufacturer’s techinical specifications). All dimensions in millimetres. FIG. 30 WASHING MACHINE Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 127. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 79 SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION D-14 ARRANGEMENT FOR LPG PIPING All dimensions in millimetres. FIG. 31 LPG PIPING Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 128. 80 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 LIST OF STANDARDS The following list records those standards which are acceptable as ‘good practice’ and ‘accepted standards’ in the fulfillment of the requirements of the code. The latest version of a standard shall be adopted at the time of enforcement of the code. The standards listed may be used by the Authority for conformance with the requirements of the referred clauses in the code. In the following list, the number appearing in the first column with in parantheses indicates the number of reference in this Section: IS No. Title (1) 10446 : 1983 Glossary of terms relating to water supply and sanitation (2) 11208 : 1985 Guidelines for registration of plumbers (3) 771 Specification for glazed fire-clay sanitary appliances (Part 1) : 1979 General requirements (second revision) (Part 2) : 1985 Specific requirements of kitchen and laboratory sinks (third revision) (Part 3/Sec 1) : Specific requirements of urinals, 1979 Section 1 Slab urinals (second revision) (Part 3/Sec 2) : Specific requirements of urinals, 1985 Section 2 Stall urinals (third revision) (Part 4) : 1979 Specific requirements of postmortom slabs (second revision) (Part 5) : 1979 Specific requirements of shower trays (second revision) (Part 6) : 1979 Specific requirements of bed-pan sinks (second revision) (Part 7) : 1981 Specific requirements of slop sinks (second revision) 772 : 1973 Specification for general requirements for enamelled cast iron sanitary appliances (second revision) 773 : 1988 Specification for enamelled cast iron water closets railway coaching stock type (fourth revision) 774 : 1984 Specification for flushing cistern for water closets and urinals (other than plastic cistern) (fourth revision) 775 : 1970 Specification for cast iron brackets and supports for wash basins and sinks (secondrevision) 1700 : 1973 Specification for drinking fountains (first revision) IS No. Title 2326 : 1987 Specification for automatic flushing cisterns for urinals (second revision) 2548 Specification for plastic seats and covers for water closets (Part 1) : 1996 Thermoset seats and covers (fifth revision) (Part 2) : 1996 Thermo plastic seats and covers (fifth revision) 2556 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china) (Part 1) : 1994 General requirements (third revision) (Part 2) : 1994 Specific requirements of wash- down water closets (fourth revision) (Part 3) : 1994 Specific requirements of squatting pans (fourth revision) (Part 4) : 1994 Specific requirements of wash basins (third revision) (Part 5) : 1994 Specific requirements of laboratory sinks (third revision) (Part 6) : 1995 Specific requirements of urinals and partition plates (fourth revision) (Part 7) : 1995 Specific requirements of accessories for sanitary appliances (third revision) (Part 8) : 1995 Specific requirements of siphonic wash down water closets (fourth revision) (Part 9) : 1995 Specific requirements of bidets (fourth revision) (Part 14) : 1995 Specific requirements of inte- grated squatting pans (first revision) (Part 15) : 1995 Specific requirements of universal water closets (first revision) (Part 16) : 2002 Specific requirements for wash down wallmounted water closets (Part 17) : 2001 Specific requirements for wall mounted bidets 3489 : 1985 Specification for enamelled steel bath tubs (first revision) 6411 : 1985 Specification for gel-coated glass fibre reinforced polyester resin bath tubs (first revision) 7231 : 1994 Specification for plastic flushing cisterns for water closets and urinals (second revision) Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 129. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 81 SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION 8718 : 1978 Specification for vitreous enamelled steel kitchen sinks 8727 : 1978 Specification for vitreous enamelled steel wash basins 9076 : 1979 Specification for vitreous integrated squatting pans for marine use 11246 : 1992 Specification for glass fibre reinforced polyester resins (GRP) squatting pans (first revision) 13983 : 1994 Specification for stainless steel sinks for domestic purposes (4) 651 : 1992 Specification for salt glazed stoneware pipes and fittings (fifth revision) 3006 : 1979 Specification for chemically resistant salt glazed stoneware pipes and fittings (first revision) (5) 458 : 2003 Specification for precast concrete pipes (with and without reinforcement) (fourth revision) 784 : 2001 Specification for prestressed concrete pipes (including specials) (second revision) 1916 : 1989 Specification for steel cylinder with concrete lining and coating (first revision) 4350 : 1967 Specification for concrete porous pipes for under drainage 7319 : 1974 Specification for perforated concrete pipes (6) 1536 : 2001 Specification for centrifugally cast (spun) iron pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage (fourth revision) 1537 : 1976 Specification for vertically cast iron pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage (first revision) 1538 : 1993 Specification for cast iron fittings for pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage (third revision) 3989 : 2009 Specification for centrifugally cast (spun) spigot and socket soil, waste ventilating and rainwater pipes, fittings and accessories (third revision) 7181 : 1986 Specification for horizontally cast iron double flanged pipes for water, gas and sewage (first revision) (7) 1592 : 2003 Specification for asbestos cement pressure pipes and joints (fourth revision) 1626 Specification for asbestos cement building pipes and pipe fittings, gutters and gutter fittings, and roofing fittings (Part 1) : 1994 Pipes and pipe fittings (second revision) (Part 2) : 1994 Gutters and gutter fittings (second revision) (Part 3) : 1994 Roofing accessories (second revision) 6908 : 1991 Specification for asbestos cement pipes and fittings for sewerage and drainage (first revision) (8) 13592 : 2013 Specification for UPVC pipes for soil and waste discharge systems inside buildings including ventilation and rainwater system (first revision) 14333 : 1996 Specification for high density polyethylene pipe for sewerage 14735 : 1999 Specification for unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (UPVC) injection moulded fittings for soil and waste discharge system for inside and outside buildings including ventilation and rainwater system 15328 : 2003 Unplasticized non-pressure polyvinyl chloride (PVC-U) pipes for use in underground drainage and sewerage systems (9) 2470 Code of practice for installation of septic tanks (Part 1) : 1985 Design criteria and construction (second revision) (Part 2) : 1985 Secondary treatment and disposal of septic tank effluent (second revision) (10) 1536 : 2001 Specification for centrifugally cast (spun) iron pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage (fourth revision) (11) 5329 : 1983 Code of practice for sanitary pipe work above ground for buildings (first revision) (12) SP 35 : 1987 Handbook on water supply and drainage with special emphasis on plumbing (13) 2212 : 1991 Code of practice for brickwork (first revision) (14) 5455 : 1969 Specification for cast iron steps for manholes (15) 1726 : 1991 Specification for cast iron manhole covers and frames (third revision) IS No. Title IS No. Title Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 130. 82 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 12592 : 2002 Specification for precast concrete manhole covers and frames (first revision) (16) 4111(Part 1) : Code of practice for ancillary 1986 structures in sewerage system : Part 1 Manholes (first revision) (17) 15792 : 2008 Guidelines for artificial recharge to ground water (18) 14961 : 2001 Guidelines for rainwater harvesting in hilly areas by roof water collection system 15797 : 2008 Guidelines for roof top rainwater harvesting (19) 783 : 1985 Code of practice for laying of concrete pipes (first revision) 1742 : 1983 Code of practice for building drainage (second revision) 3114 : 1994 Code of practice for laying of cast iron pipes (second revision) 4127 : 1983 Code of practice for laying of glazed stoneware pipes (first revision) 6530 : 1972 Code of practice for laying of asbestos cement pressure pipes (20) 2527 : 1984 Code of practice for fixing rainwater gutters and downpipes for roof drainage (first revision) 1729 : 2002 Cast iron/ductile iron drainage pipes and pipe fittings for over ground non-pressure pipeline socket and spigot series (second revision) 1626 (Part 1) : Asbestos cement building pipes 1994 and pipe fittings, gutters and gutter fittings and roofing fittings: Part 1 Pipe and pipe fittings (second revision) 1239 (Part 1) : Steel tubes, tubulars and other 2004 wrought steel fittings: Part 1 Steel tubes (sixth revision) 13592 : 2013 Specification for UPVC pipes for soil and waste discharge systems inside buildings including ventilation and rainwater system (first revision) (21) 2064 : 1993 Code of practice for selection, installation and maintenance of sanitary appliances (second revision) IS No. Title IS No. Title Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 131. NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) Section 3 Solid Waste Management BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 132. 2 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 C O N T E N T S FOREWORD 3 1 SCOPE 5 2 TERMINOLOGY 5 3 GENERAL 6 4 SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS 7 5 ASSESSMENT OF PER CAPITA WASTE QUANTITY 9 6 TREATMENT 10 ANNEX A MUNICIPAL SOLID WASTE GENERATION 12 ANNEX B TREATMENT OF FOOD WASTE 14 LIST OF STANDARDS 14 Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 133. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 3 SECTION 3 SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT National Building Code Sectional Committee, CED 46 FOREWORD This Code (Part 9/Section 3) covers the solid waste management systems, assessment of per capita solid waste quantities and treatment of solid waste within the building, building complexes and their built environments. In the first version of the Code formulated in 1970, three separate sections of Part 9 Plumbing Services, were brought out, namely, Section 1 Water Supply, Section 2 Drainage and Sanitation, and Section 3 Gas Supply. These sections were subsequently revised in 1983 and in 2005. In the second revision in 2005, the Part 9 was renamed as ‘Plumbing Services (Including Solid Waste Management)’ and provisions on solid waste management were included for the first time under Section 1 which contained in it, Water Supply, Drainage and Sanitation. Gas Supply was covered in Section 2 of Part 9 of the Code. In this revision, to comprehensively address the various and distinct features related to the plumbing aspects, this Part 9 has been rearranged as follows: Section 1 Water supply Section 2 Drainage and sanitation Section 3 Solid waste management Section 4 Gas supply Based on the experience gained in the use of the provisions on solid waste management included in last version, the provisions have been modified under this new Section. The significant changes include the following: a) Certain new terminologies have been included. b) References to latest applicable statutory Rules and Regulations have been included. c) Provisions related to solid waste management systems have been elaborated. d) Accessibility provisions for persons with disabilities to enable efficient operation of refuse chutes, have been included. e) Electrically operated dumb-waiters have been recommended for new construction having 5 storeys and above, from the erstwhile 8 storeys. f) New clause on assessment of per capita waste quantity has been included. g) Detailed provisions suggesting treatment methods have been included. h) An informative Annex A relating to municipal solid waste generation has been included, covering quantity, type, description and sources of solid waste generation. j) An Annex B relating to treatment of food waste has been included. Reference may also be made to the Manual on Solid Waste Management, 2000, CPHEEO, Ministry of Urban Development, Governement of India. All Indian Standards, cross-referred to in the main text of this Section, are subject to revision. The parties to agreement based on this Section are encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying the most recent editions of the standards. For the purpose of deciding whether a particular requirement of this Section is complied with, the final value, observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded off in accordance with IS 2 : 1960 ‘Rules for rounding off numerical values (revised)’. The number of significant places retained in the rounded off value should be the same as that of the specified value in this Section. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 134. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 135. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 5 SECTION 3 SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT emissions, slope instability and erosion. 2.11 Leachate — Liquid that seeps through solid wastes or other medium and has extracts of dissolved or suspended material from it. 2.12 Municipal Authority — Municipal Corporation, Municipality, Nagar Palika, Nagar Nigam, Nagar Panchayat, Municipal Council including notified area committee (NAC) or any other local body constituted under the relevant statutes and, where the management and handling of municipal solid waste is entrusted to such agency. 2.13 Municipal Solid Waste — Commercial and residential wastes generated in municipal or notified areas in either solid or semi-solid form, excluding industrial hazardous wastes and construction and demolition waste but including treated bio-medical wastes. 2.14 Operator of a Facility — A person who owns or operates a facility for collection, segregation, storage, transportation, processing and disposal of municipal solid wastes and also includes any other agency appointed as such by the municipal authority for the management and handling of municipal solid wastes in the respective areas. 2.15 Pelletization — A process whereby pellet are prepared which are small cubes or cylindrical pieces made out of solid wastes and includes fuel pellets which are also referred as refuse derived fuel. 2.16 Processing — The process by which solid wastes are transformed into new or recycled products. 2.17 Recycling — The process of transforming segregated solid wastes into raw materials for producing new products, which may or may not be similar to the original products. 2.18 Segregation — To separate the municipal solid wastes into the groups of organic, inorganic, recyclables and hazardous wastes. 2.19 Storage — The temporary containment of municipal solid wastes in a manner so as to prevent littering, attraction to vectors, stray animals and excessive foul odour. 2.20 Transportation — Conveyance of municipal solid wastes from place to place hygienically through 1 SCOPE This Code (Part 9/Section 3) covers the solid waste management systems, assessment of per capita solid waste quantities and treatment of solid waste within the building, building complexes and their built environments. 2 TERMINOLOGY For the purpose of this Section, the following definitions shall apply, and for other terms those given in the accepted standard [9-3(1)] shall apply. 2.1 Anaerobic Digestion — A controlled process involving microbial decomposition of organic matter in the absence of oxygen. 2.2 Authorization — The consent given by the State Pollution Control Board or Pollution Control Committee, as the case may be, to the operator of a facility. 2.3 Biodegradable Substance — A substance that can be degraded by microorganisms into simpler stable compounds. 2.4 Biomethanation — A process which entails enzymatic decomposition of the organic matter by microbial action to produce methane rich biogas. 2.5 Collection — Lifting and removal of solid wastes from collection points or any other location. 2.6 Composting — A controlled process involving microbial decomposition of organic matter. 2.7 Construction and Demolition Waste — Wastes from building materials debris and rubble resulting from construction, re-modelling, repair and demolition operation. 2.8 Disposal — Final disposal of municipal solid wastes in accordance with the specified measures to prevent contamination of groundwater, surface water and ambient air quality. 2.9 Generator of Wastes — Persons or establishments generating municipal solid wastes. 2.10 Landfilling — Disposal of residual solid wastes on land in a facility designed with protective measures against pollution of groundwater, surface water and air fugitive dust, wind-blown litter, bad odour, fire hazard, bird menace, pests or rodents, greenhouse gas NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) Section 3 Solid Waste Management Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 136. 6 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 specially designed transport system so as to prevent foul odour, littering, unsightly conditions and accessibility to vectors. 2.21 Vermi-composting — A process of using earthworms for conversion of biodegradable wastes into compost. 3 GENERAL 3.1 Solid waste is generated from various human activities and which is normally disposed as useless and unwanted. Broadly, depending upon the type of building and built environment, it includes solid or semi-solid domestic waste, such as sanitary waste, commercial waste, office waste, catering and market waste and other non-residential wastes, street sweepings, silt removed or collected from the surface drains, horticulture waste, construction and demolition waste, and treated bio-medical waste. Further, there may be industrial hazardous waste, bio-medical waste and e-waste. The primary objective of solid waste management is to collect, treat and dispose of solid wastes in an environmentally and socially satisfactory manner using the most economical means available. Ideally, solid waste should not contain faecal matter or urine but despite all precautions, some pathogens and chemical residues inevitably may be present in the waste. Uncontrolled or poorly managed intermediate decomposition of organic components of solid waste can contaminate air, water and soil resources. Implementation of integrated solid waste management practices benefits substantially, both the public health and the quality of the environment. 3.2 Based on source of generation, solid waste can be broadly categorized as follows: a) Domestic waste — It is generated in residential units; and consists of food wastes, paper, cardboard, plastics, textiles, leather, yard wastes, wood, glass, metals, ashes, special wastes (for example, bulky items, consumer electronics, white goods, batteries, oil and tyres), and household hazardous wastes. b) Industrial waste — It is generated in manufacturing units, fabrication plants, construction sites, power and chemical plants; and consists of packaging, hazardous wastes, ashes, special wastes, wood, steel, concrete, dirt, etc. c) Institutional and commercial waste — It is generated in schools, hospitals, prisons, government centres, stores, hotels, restaurants, markets, office buildings, etc; and consists of domestic wastes, paper, cardboard, plastics, wood, glass, metals, special wastes and hazardous wastes. d) Horticulture waste — It is generated in landscaping, parks, orchards, dairies, and consists of street sweepings; landscape and tree trimmings; etc. 3.3 Based on suitability for handling and disposal, solid waste can also be categorized as follows: a) Garbage — Garbage is the term applied to animal and vegetable waste resulting from the handling, storage, sale, cooking and serving food. Such wastes contain putrescible organic matter, which produces strong odours and therefore attracts rats, flies and other vermin. It requires immediate attention in its storage, handling and disposal. b) Municipal waste — Municipal waste includes waste resulting from municipal activities and services such as street wastes, dead animals, market wastes and abandoned vehicles. However, the term is commonly applied in a wider sense to incorporate domestic wastes and commercial wastes. c) Hazardous wastes — Hazardous wastes may be defined as wastes of industrial, institutional or consumer origin which because of their physical, chemical or biological characteristics are potentially dangerous to human and the environment. It includes any waste that exhibits one of the hazardous characteristics, such as ignitability, corrosivity, reactivity, or toxicity, whether alone or when in contact with other wastes or substances. In some cases although the active agents may be liquid or gaseous, they are classified as solid waste because they are confined in solid containers. Typical examples are solvents, paints and pesticides whose spent containers are frequently mixed with municipal wastes. Good waste management should ensure that hazardous wastes are stored, collected, transported and disposed of separately, preferably after suitable treatment to render them innocuous. A sub-category of household hazardous waste, is post-consumer utilization waste which qualifies as hazardous waste when discarded. It includes household chemicals and other consumer products used in home care, personal care, automotive care, pest control, etc. These products exhibit characteristics of reactivity, ignitability, corrosivity, toxicity, or persistence d) Bio-medical waste — Bio-medical waste is Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 137. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 7 SECTION 3 SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT any waste, which is generated during the diagnosis, treatment or immunization of human beings or animals or in research activities pertaining thereto or in the production or testing of biologicals. This waste is highly infectious and can be a serious threat to human health if not managed in a scientific and discriminate manner. It may include wastes like sharps, soiled waste, disposables, anatomical waste, cultures, discarded medicines, chemical wastes, etc. It has been estimated that hospitals generate bio- medical waste at a rate of 1 kg per bed day. Generally these wastes are handed over to common bio-medical treatment and disposal facilities for suitable treatment and final disposal. Biological means any preparation made from organisms or microorganisms or product of metabolism and biochemical reactions intended for use in the diagnosis, immunization or the treatment of human beings or animals or in research activities pertaining thereto. Bio-medical waste treatment facility means any facility wherein treatment, disposal of bio- medical waste or processes incidental to such treatment and disposal is carried out, and includes common treatment facilities. The common bio-medical treatment facilities are set up based on the need for ensuring environmentally sound management of bio- medical waste keeping in view the techno- economic feasibility and viable operation of the facility with minimal impacts on human health and environment. All healthcare establishments including hospitals, research facilities and laboratories generate solid waste in course of performing their intended functions. 75 to 90 percent of such solid waste is non-risk healthcare waste, comparable to domestic waste. It requires minimal treatment and is safely handled by housekeeping staff. The remaining 10 to 25 percent of healthcare waste is designated as bio-hazardous waste and is designated bio- medical waste. It carries a variety of health risks in its handling and disposal. It is handled by trained staff and many safety devices and apparels are deployed. In addition, bio- medical waste includes the waste originating from minor or scattered sources, such as that produced in the course of healthcare undertaken in the home (dialysis, insulin injections, etc). e) Plastics — Plastics, due to their non- biodegradable nature, versatility in use and impact on environment, can be grouped under a different category of solid waste. More than 50 percent of the plastic waste generated in our country is recycled and used in the manufacture of various plastic products. Careless disposal of plastic in various forms chokes drains, blocks the porosity of the soil, causes problems for groundwater recharge, disturbs the soil microbe activity, contaminates foodstuff and when ingested by animals, it can kill them. 3.4 Efficient collection and disposal of domestic garbage from a building or activity area is of significant importance to public health and environmental sanitation and, therefore, an essential part of the built environment. Notwithstanding the provisions given herein, the solid waste management shall have to comply with relevant statutory Rules and Regulations in force from time-to-time. The provisions of the following shall govern the procedures for handling, treatment, etc, of solid wastes as applicable to the concerned building occupancy: a) The Environment (Protection) Act, 1986. b) The Solid Waste Management Rules, 2016. c) The Bio-Medical Waste Management Rules, 2016. d) The E-Waste (Management) Rules, 2016. e) The Batteries (Management and Handling) Rules, 2001. f) The Hazardous and Other Wastes (Management and Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2016. g) The Plastics Waste Management Rules, 2016. NOTE — Radioactive wastes are covered under the provisions of The Atomic Energy Act, 1962 and rules made thereunder and the enforcement agency for these is Atomic Energy Regulatory Commission (AERC). 3.5 The provisions relating to solid waste management given in 4 are applicable to municipal solid waste and specifically exclude the hazardous chemical wastes, bio-medical waste and radioactive waste. 4 SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS 4.1 ln designing a system dealing with collection of domestic garbage for a built premises/community/ environment, the aim shall be to provide speedy and efficient conveyance as an essential objective for design of the system. The various available systems may be employed in accordance with 4.2 to 4.4, which may be adopted individually or in combination as appropriate in specific situations. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 138. 8 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 4.1.1 The basic stages of the municipal solid waste management system include the following: a) Waste sorting at source, collection and transportation; b) Resource recovery through centralized sorting and recycling; c) Resource recovery through waste processing, that is, recovery of energy; and d) Waste transformation without recovery. 4.1.2 The functional elements of municipal solid waste management system include the following: a) Waste generation — Activity in which the waste gets generated as material no longer having any value. b) Waste handling, sorting, storage and processing at site — Waste handling and sorting involves the activities associated with management of waste until they are placed in storage container for collection. c) Collection — Gathering of solid wastes including transportation. d) Transfer and transport — Transfer of waste from smaller collection vehicle to larger transport equipment and subsequent transport of wastes over long distances to a processing or disposal site. 4.2 Sorting at Source Sorting shall be planned based on the existing markets for recyclable materials. It is preferable to have coloured-bin system based on the usage of the facility and the types of the waste likely to be generated in the facility (such as red, green, blue, yellow). Common sorting methods involve sorting into, a) dry recyclable materials, for example, glass, paper, plastics, metals, etc; b) bio-waste and garden waste; c) bulky waste; d) hazardous material in household waste; e) construction and demolition waste; and f) mingled MSW (mixed waste). In case of sorting not done at source, it is required to plan centralized sorting. The types of sorting that may be adopted, are: 1) Hand sorting from a raised picking belt. 2) Mechanized sorting facilities using magnetic and electric field separation, density separation, etc. Sorting at source normally recovers most of the recyclable materials for reuse. However, a small fraction of such materials may escape the sorting process. Sorting may therefore be also undertaken just prior to waste processing, waste transformation or landfilling to recover such recyclable materials. Wherever manual sorting is adopted, care shall be taken to ensure that sorters are protected from all disease pathways and work in hygienic conditions. The movement of waste shall be planned by suitable mechanism and building shall be planned for easy movement of waste by means of garbage/material lift, ramps, etc, meeting the good engineering practices. 4.3 Refuse Chute System 4.3.1 General Refuse chute system is a convenient and safe mode of transportation and collection of domestic solid wastes from buildings exceeding 5 storeys from floors at different heights. The refuse is received from the successive floor through the inlets located on the vertical system of pipes that convey refuse through it and discharge it into the collecting chamber, located at ground level, from where the refuse is cleared at suitable intervals. This system has got four functionally important components, namely, the chutes, the inlet hopper, the collection chamber and the cleaning and disinfecting arrangements. The chute may be carried through service shafts meant for carrying drainage pipes. However, the location shall be mostly determined by the position of the inlet hopper and the collecting chamber that is most convenient for the user. It should also be considered to locate the chute away from living rooms in order to avoid noise and smell nuisance. The internal diameter of the chute shall be at least 300 mm. In individual chute system, the inlet hopper shall be located in the passage near the kitchen and in the common chute system towards the end of the common passage. Natural ventilation should be adequate to prevent any possible odour nuisance. There should be adequate lighting at this location. For ground floor (floor 1), the inlet hoppers may be placed at a higher level, but should be easily accessible. The access to the refuse chute shall be provided from well ventilated and well illuminated common corridor or lobby and preferably it should not be located opposite or adjacent to entry of individual flats or lift. 4.3.2 Opening for Feeding of Refuse Chute Opening, with top or bottom hinged shutters with appropriate lockable latch, shall be provided for convenient accessing of the refuse chute by users. It facilitates total building garbage collection at one single point and provides separate collection for dry and wet garbage. Chute system shall have the following features: Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 139. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 9 SECTION 3 SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT a) Sanitation system for internal cleaning of chutes, with sprinklers at every floor intake level, with disinfectant cleaning, which may preferably be automatic in operation; b) Exhaust system with 25 to 35 air changes per hour; c) Discharge end fire resistant door; d) Chute may be of masonry, R.C.C. pipe, asbestos cement pipe or suitable non-corrosive material, preferably stainless steel. It should be rigid with smooth internal finish, high ductility and alkali/acid resistant properties {see also good practice [9-3(2)]}; e) Fire rating shall comply with 3.4.8.3 of Part 4 ‘Fire and Life Safety’ of the Code; f) Fire sprinklers shall be provided inside chute; g) Vent shall be installed at roof level to remove foul smell and gases generated; h) Chute should discharge to trolley directly; j) Necessary automation of the system may be planned to avoid malfunction by manual operation; and k) All care shall be taken for ensuring accessibility to the chute for persons with disabilities. The opening of the chute shall not be higher than 700 mm and there shall be a clear space of minimum 1 500 mm × 1 500 mm in front of the chute opening to gain easy access even for persons using wheelchairs. There may be high colour contrast provided around the chute opening to make it easy to identify it. The flooring in front of the chute opening may be texturally highly different from the rest of the floor. 4.3.3 Refuse Collection Chamber The collection chamber may be located in ground floor or basement level, provided appropriate arrangement is made for drainage of the collection pit by gravity flow to ensure its dryness, an appropriate ramp access is provided for convenient removal of garbage from the collection pit, and satisfactory ventilation is provided for escape of gas and odour. The floor of the chamber shall be provided with drainage through a 100 mm diameter trap and screen to prevent any solid matters flowing into the drain and the drain shall be connected to the sewer line. The floor shall be finished with smooth hard surface for convenient cleaning. The height of the collection chamber and vertical clearance under the bottom level of garbage chute shall be such that the garbage trolley can be conveniently placed. The collection chamber shall be provided with appropriate shutter to prevent access of scavenging animals like cattle, dogs, cats and rats. 4.3.4 Refuse Collection Room The refuse collection room should be planned in ground or basement level with appropriate ventilation and proper drainage. The room should have access for vehicle or trolley transfer of garbage. 4.3.5 See also accepted standards [9-3(3)]. 4.4 Dumb-Waiter or Service Lift In high rise buildings with more than 5 storeys, electrically operated dumb-waiters may be used for carrying domestic garbage in packets or closed containers. For handling of garbage by dumb-waiters in a building, a garbage chamber shall have to be provided either at ground floor or basement level and the provisions of garbage collection chamber for chute as given in 4.3 shall apply. 5 ASSESSMENT OF PER CAPITA WASTE QUANTITY 5.1 For purposes of this Section, the following municipal refuse generation rates are recommended: a) Residential refuse : 0.3 to 0.6 kg/capita/day b) Commercial refuse : 0.1 to 0.2 kg/capita/day c) Street sweepings : 0.05 to 0.2 kg/capita/ day d) Institutional refuse : 0.05 to 0.2 kg/capita/ day Out of the total solid waste generated, 40 percent may be taken as organic waste and 60 percent as inorganic waste. The knowledge of chemical characteristics of waste is important for selecting and designing the waste processing and disposal facilities. 5.2 These generation rates are subject to considerable site-specific factors and are required to be supported by field data. The waste contains a high percentage of ash and fine earth. The calorific value of Indian solid waste varies between 800 and 1 000 kcal/kg and the density varies between 300 and 500 kg/m3 . 5.3 Other than municipal solid waste, the following types of waste may also be generated in urban centers: a) Industrial waste — Hazardous and non- hazardous waste from industrial areas within municipal limits. b) Bio-medical waste — Waste from hospitals, slaughter houses, etc. c) Thermal power plant waste — Fly ash from coal-based electricity generating plant within municipal limits. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 140. 10 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 d) Effluent treatment plant waste — Sludge from sewage treatment plants and industrial effluent treatment plants. e) Other wastes — Special wastes from non- conforming areas or special units. All waste streams shall be managed by their own waste management system. 6 TREATMENT 6.1 Garbage collected at one location may be treated for organic portion, and inorganic portion shall be handed over to vendors carrying out recycling. Organic waste generated in building/premises/community/ environment may be treated and reused as manure. The norms prescribed by the pollution board authorities shall be followed, keeping hygiene and safe operation for the working/operating people. Biological or thermal treatment of waste can result in recovery of useful products such as compost or energy. 6.2 Biological Processes Biological treatment involves using microorganisms to decompose the biodegradable components of waste. The following two types of processes may be typically used, the former being used more commonly: a) Aerobic processes — It may comprise composting, aerated static pile composting and in-vessel composting; vermi-culture, etc. In the aerobic process the utilizable product is compost. b) Anaerobic processes — It may comprise low- solids anaerobic digestion (wet process), high solids anaerobic digestion (dry process) and combined processes. In the anaerobic process the utilizable product is methane gas (for energy recovery). 6.2.1 Composting Decomposition and stabilization of organic waste matter is a natural phenomenon. Composting is an organized method of producing compost manure by adopting this natural phenomenon. a) Manual composting — It is an anaerobic method conventionally carried out in pits. Initially the waste is anaerobically stabilized in pits where alternate layers of solid waste and night soil are laid. The pit is completely filled and a final soil layer is laid to prevent fly breeding, entry of rain water into the pit and for conservation of the released energy. The material is allowed to decompose for 4 to 6 months after which the stabilized material is taken out and used as compost. b) Mechanical composting — Mechanical processes are preferred where higher labour costs and limitations of space exist. It is the process using a combination of aerobic and anaerobic decomposition in enclosed containers. Organic wet waste composter is used where raw refuse is composted in large vessel, which are turned at intervals by mobile pedals or plates. Several other processes have now been developed, using different methods of processing of solid waste, using different designs of digester. Latest technology uses electrically operated rapid processing organic waste convertor with different capacities as mechanical composters. The organic wet and dry waste is separated and shredder is used to homogenize the materials and blenders are used under controlled temperature and bio-enzyme addition in closed containers. These output manure may be used for horticultural/ agriculture works. c) Vermi-composting — Vermi-compost treatment shall be provided to the organic wastes in composting pits located in shade. The pits shall be used to receive the garbage in a predetermined (periodic) cyclic order (for example, 5 pits to receive garbage in 5 days and these 5 pits together accepting daily load of garbage). The gross area of the composting pits may be about 0.1 m2 per person. The site for vermi-composting shall be enclosed from all sides with appropriate fencing (for keeping scavenging animals away) and provided with a small door for accessing the enclosed premises. Composting pits shall be constructed either under the shade of trees (except Neem tree) or created under sheeting or shade-net, so as to keep the pits under shade. The pits shall be easily accessible for convenience of receiving of garbage through trolleys. The composting pits shall be made in a manner that the pits do not have the risk of inundation by water. This may be achieved by appropriately raising the base level of the pit and providing weep holes from sides. Height of side walls of compost pits shall be 0.6 m to 0.75 m high. It is preferable to have the bottom of the pit without any lining. Initiation of composting pits shall be done by providing a 75 mm thick layer of cow dung (fresh or partially decomposed), spreading 1 kg of vermi-compost and covering it with 75 mm to 100 mm thick layer of dry leaves/grass, etc, and sprinkling of water and allowing to decompose naturally for about 10 to 15 days. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 141. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 11 SECTION 3 SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT Sorted garbage free from inert and toxic matters shall be applied in the composting pit in layers of 75 mm and spread, and covered with a layer of 75 mm thick dry leaves, followed by sprinkling of water. The compost may be removed from the bottom of the compost pit after intervals of 3 to 6 months. The compost so made may be used in appropriate horticultural and related applications. See also accepted standard [9-3(4)] for manure grade municipal solid waste compost. 6.3 Thermal Processes Thermal treatment involves conversion of waste into gaseous, liquid and solid conversion products with concurrent or subsequent release of heat energy. Three types of systems can be adopted, namely: a) Combustion systems (Incinerators) — Thermal processing with excess amounts of air. b ) Pyrolysis systems — Thermal processing in complete absence of oxygen (low temperature). c) Gasification systems — Thermal processing with less amount of air (high temperature). 6.4 Land Filling 6.4.1 Disposal of waste on lands identified for the purpose is typical of this method of waste disposal. The depth of filling depends upon the site topography and location and varies from deep to shallow filling. A municipal solid waste landfill plant is an engineered facility used for disposal of solid waste. Landfills in which municipal waste is placed are designated as ‘MSW landfills’. The main considerations in respect of landfill sites are: a) Specifications for landfill sites, b) Site selection, c) Facilities at site, and d) Specification of land filling. 6.4.2 Improper landfill generally impacts the environment in the following ways: a) Groundwater contamination by the leachate generated by the waste dump; b) Surface water contamination by the run-off from the waste dump; c) Bad odour, pests, rodents and wind-blown litter in and around the waste dump; d) Generation of inflammable gas (for example, methane) within the waste dump; e) Bird menace above the waste dump which affects flight of aircraft; f) Fires within the waste dump; g) Erosion and stability problems relating to slopes of the waste dump; h) Epidemics through stray animals; j) Acidity to surrounding soil; and k) Release of greenhouse gas. 6.5 Some recycling/treatment methods for food waste are given in Annex B for guidance. 6.6 See also accepted standards [9-3(5)] for solid waste management, and for analysis and testing of solid wastes. 6.7 Other/special wastes shall be dealt with in accordance with the statutory provisions in respect of the same (see 3.4). Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 142. 12 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 ANNEX A (Foreword) MUNICIPAL SOLID WASTE GENERATION A-1 WASTE GENERATION A-1.1 The typical type of wastes generated may be as follows: Types of Solid Waste Description Sources Food waste (garbage) Wastes from the preparation, cooking, and serving of food. Market refuse, waste from the handling, storage, and sale of produce and meats and vegetable Households, institutions and commercial such as hotels, stores, restaurants, markets, etc Rubbish a) Combustible (primary organic) — Paper, cardboard, cartons wood, boxes, plastics, rags, cloth, bedding, leather, rubber, grass, leaves, yard trimmings b) Non-combustible (primary inorganic) — Metals, tin cans, metal foils dirt, stones, bricks, ceramics, crockery, glass bottles, other mineral refuse -do- Ashes and residues Residue from fires used for cooking and for heating buildings, cinders, clinkers, thermal power plants -do- Bulky waste Large auto parts, tyres, stoves refrigerators, others large, appliances, furniture, large crates, trees, branches, palm fronts, stumps -do- Street waste Street sweepings, dirt, leaves, catch basin dirt, animal droppings, contents of litter receptacles, dead animals Streets, sidewalks, alleys, vacant lots, etc Dead animals a) Small animals — Cats, dogs, poultry, etc b) Large animals — Horses, cows, etc -do- Construction and demolition waste Lumber, roofing and sheathing scraps, crop residues, rubble, broken concrete, plaster, conduit pipe, wire, insulation, etc Construction and demolition sites, remodelling, repairing sites Industrial waste and sludge Solid wastes resulting from industry processes and manufacturing operations, such as food processing wastes and boiler House cinders, wood, plastic and metal scraps and shaving, etc. Effluent treatment plant sludge of industries and sewage treatment plant sledges, coarse screening, grit and septic tank Factories, power plants, treatment plants, etc Hazardous wastes Pathological waste, explosives, radioactive material, toxic waste, etc Households, hospitals, institution, stores, industry, etc Horticulture wastes Tree-trimmings, leaves, waste from parks and gardens, etc Parks, gardens, roadside trees, etc Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 143. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 13 SECTION 3 SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT A-1.2 The typical quantity of waste generated measured per capita in urban areas may be as follows: Population Range (Million) Average Per Capita Value (kg/capita/day) 0.1-0.5 0.21 0.5-1.0 0.25 1.0-2.0 0.27 2.0-5.0 0.35 More than 5.0 0.50 A-2 INDUSTRIAL WASTE The major generators are thermal power plants, integrated iron and steel mills, non-ferrous industries, pulp and paper industries and fertilizer and allied industries. Following are the source and quantum of generation of some major industrial wastes. Name of Industry Quantity (Million tonne per annum) Steel and blast 35.0 Brine mud 0.02 Copper slag 0.016 4 Fly ash 30.0 Kiln dust 1.6 Lime sludge 3.0 Mica scraper waste 0.005 Phospho-gypsum 4.5 Red mud/Bauxite 3.0 A-3 SLAUGHTER HOUSE WASTE Slaughtering of animals generates consisting of non- edible offal (lungs, large intestines, etc), stomach/ intestinal contents, dung, sludge from waste water and bones, etc. These have to be disposed of by methods like rendering/controlled incineration/burial/compos- ting/anaerobic digestion, etc. The estimated waste generation may be as per the following: Type of Slaughter House Annual Capacity Dry Waste Generated (tonne per day) Large Large animals more than 40 000 Small animals more than 600 000 6 to 7 Medium Large animals – 10 001 to 40 000 Small animals – 100 001 to 600 000 2 to 6 Small Large animals up to 10 000 Small animals up to 100 000 0.5 to 1.0 A-4 BIO-MEDICAL WASTE The waste generated from medical activities can be hazardous, toxic and even lethal because of their high potential for disease transmission. The components of bio-medical waste include, a) human anatomical waste (tissues, organs, body parts, etc); b) animal waste (as above, generated during research/experimentation, from veterinary hospitals, etc); c) microbiology and biotechnology waste, such as, laboratory cultures, microorganisms, human and animal cell cultures, toxins, etc; d) waste sharps, such as hypodermic needles, syringes, scalpels, broken glass, etc; e) discarded medicines and cyto-toxic drugs; f) soiled waste, such as dressing, bandages, plaster casts, material contaminated with blood, etc; g) solid waste (disposable items like tubes, catheters, etc, excluding sharps); h) liquid waste generated from any of the infected areas; j) incineration ash; and k) chemical waste. The estimated generation of total waste is 1.5 kg/bed and the estimated generation of bio-medical waste at 25 percent of total waste generation. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 144. 14 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 ANNEX B (Foreword and Clause 6.5) TREATMENT OF FOOD WASTE B-1 FOOD WASTE Food waste represents a large percentage of the solid waste. For establishments that serve food, there is an average of 400 g of food waste generated per meal served; when both pre-service and post-service waste is considered. The organic nature of food waste makes it unsuitable for disposal by landfills, though it is bio- degradable. In order to use the nutrient and calorific value of the food waste, it is collected, stored and then recycled. When collecting, it should be ensured that food waste does not enter the drainage system. When providing temporary storage, the risk of physical contamination of kitchen working areas should be avoided. It should be a separate ventilated room with 6 total air changes per hour. In hot climates, it shall be cooled to a temperature of 24°C to minimize odour generation. The storage area should be cleaned at least once everyday. A brief overview of some of the ways of food waste recycling/treatment is given in B-2 to B-4. Before recycling/treatment, it requires non-organic materials to be removed from food waste. B-2 FEEDING ANIMALS Food discards can be made available for feeding animals. This may involve provisions for farmers, zoos and many other applications. Converting food discards to animal feed and pet food is common and a suitable option for recycling food scraps. B-3 INDUSTRIAL USES Food waste can be used in the rendering industry for converting these materials to soaps, cosmetics and biodiesel fuel. B-4 ANAEROBIC DIGESTION This process involves breaking down organic matter in an oxygen-free environment in order to generate biogas, which is a combination of methane and carbon dioxide. The methane is burned for energy. The material that remains after digestion (digestate) should then be composted aerobically to complete the process and produce a valuable soil amendment. Food waste drying system can provide a fast, simple and user friendly onsite process for decomposing and dehydrating food scraps into rich soil sediments. These systems do not require microorganisms, enzymes, fresh water or other additives. Food cycler sterilizes, deodorizes and turns potentially harmful food scraps into safe, sterilized compost that can be reused as a soil amendment. It is a multi-phase, onsite organic food waste recycling machine that dehydrates and converts daily food waste into a sterile biomass. The sterilization process takes place at 82°C and reduces the waste volume by 85 to 93 percent. After sterilization, the food waste is converted into compostable humus-rich, high-carbon organic particles. The by-products of the process can be reused as soil amendment, compost accelerant, biofuels, animal feed, pet food, etc. Further benefits can be obtained by mixing the water produced from the food cycler units with potable or non-potable supplies to reduce the amount of water used from mains for use in gardens, landscaping and cooling towers. LIST OF STANDARDS The following list records those standards which are acceptable as ‘good practice’ and ‘accepted standards’ in the fulfillment of the requirements of the Code. The latest version of a standard shall be adopted at the time of enforcement of the Code. The standards listed may be used by the Authority for conformance with the requirements of the referred clauses in the code. In the following list, the number appearing in the first column within parantheses indicates the number of the reference in this Section. IS No. Title (1) 9569 : 1980 Glossary of terms relating to solid wastes (2) 6924 : 1973 Code of practice for the construction of refuse chutes in multi-storeyed buildings (3) 12402 Mobile containers for solid waste: (Part 1) : 1988 General characteristics (Part 2) : 1988 Methods of test Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 145. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — 15 SECTION 3 SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT 12647 : 1989 Guidelines for solid waste management system — Collection equipment 12662 Guidelines for use of vehicles for collection of municipal solid wastes: (Part 1) : 1989 Selection of vehicles (Part 2) : 2002 Guidelines for maintenance (4) 16556 : 2016 Specification for municipal solid waste compost, manure grade (5) 9234 : 1979 Methods for preparation of solid waste sample for chemical and IS No. Title IS No. Title microbiological analysis 9235 : 1979 Physical analysis and deter- mination of moisture in solid wastes (Excluding industrial solid wastes) 10158 : 1982 Methods of analysis of solid wastes (Excluding industrial solid wastes) 16557 : 2016 Guidelines for solid waste management — Segregation, collection and utilization at household/community level Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 146. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 147. NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) Section 4 Gas Supply BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 148. 2 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 C O N T E N T S FOREWORD 3 1 SCOPE 5 2 TERMINOLOGY 5 3 PRESSURE REGULATIONS 5 4 SERVICE SHUT-OFF VALVES 6 5 EXISTING WORK 6 6 RULES FOR TURNING GAS ON 6 7 RULES FOR SHUTTING OFF THE GAS 6 8 INSTALLATION OF GAS PIPES 7 9 INSPECTION OF SERVICES 8 10 LEAKAGE CHECK 9 11 USE OF LIQUEFIED PETROLEUM GAS (LPG) 9 12 USE OF PIPED NATURAL GAS (PNG) 14 13 USE OF MEDICAL GAS PIPELINE SYSTEM (MGPS) 16 LIST OF STANDARDS 17 Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 149. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — SECTION 4 GAS SUPPLY 3 National Building Code Sectional Committee, CED 46 FOREWORD This Code (Part 9/Section 4) covers the safe use of gases for purposes like fuel, lighting and medical in buildings. The use of gases for fuel and lighting purposes in buildings is becoming more and more common in different parts of the country, and with the advent of new petroleum complexes and piped gas system, community gas supply is bound to become one of the important services like electricity and water supply in buildings. The use of liquefied petroleum gas supplied in containers and cylinders is already quite popular. On release of pressure, by opening the valve, they readily convert into the gaseous phase. In this state they present a hazard comparable to any inflammable natural or manufactured gas, except that being heavier than air, low level ventilation is necessary to avoid inflammable concentration of gas. Similarly, a series of precautions and regulations are necessary for laying of natural gas pipelines from city gas distribution entity to building premises and finally in the use location. Of late, the use of medical gases in hospitals through pipelines has become quite prevalent due to associated advantages; however, this needs to be supplemented with required care and precautions. A minimum set of safety provisions are, therefore, laid down to safeguard the gas piping installation and the mode of operation in the interest of public safety. In the first version of the Code formulated in 1970, three separate Sections of Part 9 Plumbing services, were brought out, namely, Section 1 Water supply, Section 2 Drainage and sanitation, and Section 3 Gas supply. These Sections were subsequently revised in 1983. In the first revision, in 1983, the safe distance between gas piping and electrical wiring system was modified as well as between gas piping and steam piping was incorporated. Additional information regarding the handling, use, storage and transportation of LPG in cylinders exceeding 500 ml water capacity were included. Provisions relating to LPG cylinders, installations regarding some aspects, such as jointing compound used at joints, painting of gas piping, details of fire extinguishers, total quantity of LPG at stationary and portable installations in proportion to the floor area were added. Also, some provisions of LPG bulk storage installations were introduced. In the second revision in 2005, the Part 9 was renamed as ‘Plumbing Services (Including Solid Waste Management)’ and provisions on solid waste management were included for the first time under Section 1 which contained in it, Water Supply, Drainage and Sanitation. Gas Supply was covered in Section 2 of Part 9 of the Code. In this second revision, provisions with regard to pressure regulations were modified; in the provision of service shut-off valves, number of additional shut-off valves were specified; in the provision of installation of gas pipe, new materials for pipes were mentioned; the minimum diameter for gas pipe was reduced to 8 mm; the colour for pipe line for supplying natural gas was specified; the provisions regarding protection against the corrosion were modified; the process of installation of meters were clarified; and additional method for detection of leakage of gas was recommended. In this third revision of the Code, to comprehensively address the various and distinct features related to the plumbing aspects, this Part 9 has been rearranged as follows: Section 1 Water supply Section 2 Drainage and sanitation Section 3 Solid waste management Section 4 Gas supply Based on the experience gained in the use of this Section, the provisions have been modified in this revision. The significant changes incorporated in this revision include the following: a) Certain terminologies have been included and others have been updated. b) Provision of use of fire stops/sleeves at openings has been included. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 150. 4 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 c) Clause on use of use of liquefied petroleum gas has been completely revised. d) A new detailed clause on use of piped natural gas has been included. e) A new clause on medical gas pipeline system has been included. f) Cross-referred standards have been updated. It may also be noted that the following Indian Standards have also been formulated on design and installation of natural gas pipelines: IS 15663 Code of practice for design and installation of natural gas pipelines: (Part 1) : 2006 Laying of pipelines (Part 2) : 2006 Laying of pipelines in crossings (Part 3) : 2006 Pre-commissioning and commissioning of pipelines While implementing this standard, compliance with statutory regulations shall be ensured. The information regarding the use of liquefied petroleum gas has been largely based on the following Indian Standards: IS 6044 Liquefied petroleum gas storage installations — Code of practice: (Part 1) : 2013 Residential, commercial and industrialcylinder installations (second revision) (Part 2) : 2001 Commercial, industrial and domestic bulk storage installations (first revision) All standards, whether given herein above or cross-referred to in the main text of this Section, are subject to revision. The parties to agreement based on this Section are encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying the most recent editions of the standards. For the purpose of deciding whether a particular requirement of this Section is complied with, the final value, observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded off in accordance with IS 2 : 1960 ‘Rules for rounding off numerical values (revised)’. The number of significant places retained in the rounded off value should be the same as that of the specified value in this Section. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 151. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — SECTION 4 GAS SUPPLY 5 1 SCOPE 1.1 This Code (Part 9/Section 4) covers the requirements regarding safety of persons and property for all piping uses and for all types of gases for purposes like fuel, lighting and medical in buildings. 1.2 This Section does not cover safety rules for gas burning appliances. 2 TERMINOLOGY For the purpose of this Section, the following definitions shall apply. 2.1 Appliance Valve — A device that will shut-off the gas supply to the burner(s). 2.2 Approved Agency — Person or agency or a corporate body approved by competent authority or distribution company to execute the job of designing, erection and maintenance of multi cylinder installation. 2.3 Authority Having Jurisdiction — The Authority which has been created by a statute and which, for the purpose of administering the Code/Part, may authorize a committee or an official to act on its behalf; hereinafter called the ‘Authority’. 2.4 Competent Authority — The Authority designated or otherwise recognized under Gas Cylinder Rules, 2004 for approving LPG cylinders, valves and regulators. 2.5 Customer’s/Consumer’s Connection — Piping tapped on riser to supply each individual customer/ consumer. 2.6 Distribution/Distributing Company — The company which is in the field of marketing LPG and PNG, and is the owner of LPG cylinders. 2.7 Gas Fitter — A qualified personnel of the authorized gas supplying organization. 2.8 Installation — A designated premises in an establishment where the complete multi-cylinder- system comprising cylinder, piping manifold, vaporizers, etc, is installed. 2.9 Manifold — A pipe header provided with several opening to which the cylinders are connected by using suitable pipe fittings. 2.10 Pilot — A small flame which is utilized to ignite the gas at the main burner(s). NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) Section 4 Gas Supply 2.11 Pressure Regulator — A device designed to lower the pressure of gas coming from the distribution main and to maintain it practically constants downstream. This normal operation pressure shall be practically in all cases that of the gas appliances used. 2.12 Purge — To free a gas conduit of air or gas or a mixture of gas and air. 2.13 Qualified Installing Agency — An individual, firm or agency which either in person or through a representative is engaged in and is responsible for the installation or replacement of gas piping on the outlet side of the gas meter, or the connection, installation or repair of gas supply piping and appliances within a building, and who is experienced in such work, familiar with all precautions required, and who has complied with all the requirements as to qualification, registration, licensing, etc, of the Authority. 2.14 Riser — Piping usually vertical on most of its length that supplies gas from the service to the various storeys of the building. 2.15 Service Pipe — Pipe that runs between the distribution main in the street and the riser in the case of multi-storeyed building or the meter in the case of an individual house. 2.16 Service Shut-Off Valve (Isolation Valve) — A device installed outside the premises to cut-off the main supply of gas from pipeline by the supplier. 2.17 Vent Pipe — A safety device to which certain regulators are connected to evacuate outside gas that may escape from the normal circuit when some part of system gets damaged or malfunctions or a safety valve is open. 3 PRESSURE REGULATIONS 3.1 Pressure regulation is required to economize the sizing of piping system. Where the pressure of gas supplied to domestic system or other low pressure gas piping system in buildings is in excess of the pressure to be used in the appliance, a gas pressure regulator of suitable specification shall be installed in service pipe of each system to prevent excess pressure reaching the appliance. The pressure regulators to be used can be from 400 kN/m2 upstream pressure to 2.1 kN/m2 for domestic consumers and 10 kN/m2 , 30 kN/m2 , 200 kN/m2 for commercial consumers, as the case may be. 3.1.1 In some place the reduction of pressure from main Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 152. 6 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 distribution source of 400 kN/m2 to intermediate pressure (say 7 kN/m2 ) and then to operating pressure of 2.1 kN/m2 is achieved. 3.1.2 Whereas in most of the other places the reduction of pressure from main distribution source of 400 kN/m2 to directly operating pressure (say 2.1 kN/m2 , 10 kN/m2 , 30 kN/m2 , 200 kN/m2 ) is achieved in single stage pressure reduction. 3.2 If located inside a building, the required regulator shall comply with the following: a) If any of the diaphragms of the regulator ruptures, the gas shall be sent to an outlet vent pipe made of brass or plastic in order to ventilate or drain the gas out of the building. The vent pipe will, however, lead to outer air about 1 m above the topmost storey of the building. Means shall be employed to prevent water from entering this pipe and also to prevent stoppage of it by insects or other foreign bodies. b) If the gas pressure at the outlet of the regulator falls below 50 percent of the operating gas pressure or rises above twice the operating gas pressure, the gas input to the pressure regulator shall be cut off. c) In the event of malfunctioning of this safety device, a supplementary device shall connect the low pressure circuit to the outlet circuit (vent pipe) as soon as the exit pressure reaches 7 kN/m2 . 3.3 It shall also be ensured by the supply authority that the calorific value and supply pressure of gas shall not exceed the values for the type of gas used. 4 SERVICE SHUT-OFF VALVES 4.1 Service shut-off valves shall be installed on all new services including replacements in a readily accessible location. 4.2 Service shut-off valves shall be located upstream of the meter if there is no regulator or upstream of the regulator, if there is one. 4.2.1 Service shut-off valves shall be located in the upstream of the meter, if a single regulator is supplying more than one consumer and each such stream shall have one additional shut-off valve upstream of regulator. 4.3 All gas services operating at pressure greater than 7 kN/m2 shall be equipped with an approved service shut-off valve located on the service pipe outside the building. 4.4 Underground shut-off valves shall be located in a covered durable curb box, manhole, vault or stand pipe which is designed to permit ready operation of the valve and the covers of which shall be clearly marked ‘Gas’. 5 EXISTING WORK Nothing herein shall prohibit the continued use of existing system of the gas piping without further inspection or test, unless the Authority has reason to believe that defects which make the system dangerous to life or property exist. 6 RULES FOR TURNING GAS ON 6.1 No person, unless is the employ of the gas company or having permission from the gas company, shall turn on the gas at a service shut-off valve or at any valve that controls the supply of gas to more than one consumer. 6.2 Gas shall not be turned on at any meter valve without specific permission from the gas company or other authority if any of the following conditions exists: a) If the gas piping appliances or meter supply through the meter valve are known to leak or otherwise to be defective (see 10). b) If required inspection of the piping or appliance has not been made. c) If the gas company or other authority has requested that the gas be left turned off. d) If the meter valve is found shut-off for some reason not known to the gas fitter. The gas shall not be turned on in the event of fire. 6.3 Gas shall not be turned on at any branch line valve if any of the conditions specified in 6.2 prevails. Where a branch line valve is found closed, a gas fitter shall again turn the gas on at such valve only if proper precautions to prevent leakage are taken and no other unsafe conditions are created thereby. 6.4 Gas shall not be turned on at either the meter valve or service line unless all gas keys or valves provided on all outlets in the piping system are closed or all outlets in the piping system are capped or plugged. 7 RULES FOR SHUTTING OFF THE GAS 7.1 The gas fitter shall put the gas off to any appliance, pipe or piping system and shall leave the gas turned off, until the causes for interrupting the supply has been removed in any one of the following cases: a) If ordered to do so by the Authority. b) If leakage of gas is noted, which appears to be sufficient to cause fire, explosion or asphyxiation. c) If an installation of some gas appliance is found to be such as to cause a serious hazard to persons or property. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 153. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — SECTION 4 GAS SUPPLY 7 d) If any condition exists which threatens interruption of gas supply which may cause burner outage or otherwise prove dangerous. 7.2 It shall be the duty of the installing agency when the gas supply is to be turned off to notify all affected consumers. 7.3 Before turning off the gas at the meter, for the purpose of installation, repair, replacement or maintenance of piping or appliance, all burner and pilot valves on the premises supplied with gas through the meter shall be turned off and the meter test hand observed for a sufficient length of time to ascertain that there is no gas passing through the meter. Where there is more than one meter on the premises, precaution shall be exercised to ensure that the concerned meter is turned off. 8 INSTALLATION OF GAS PIPES 8.1 Installation, repair and replacement of gas piping or appliances shall be performed only by a qualified installing agency. 8.2 Piping 8.2.1 Piping shall be of wrought iron, steel, copper, stainless steel or cast iron when the gas pressure is less than 7 kN/m2 ; with higher gas pressure use of cast iron shall be prohibited. 8.2.1.1 SS 316/304/321 and flexible PE coated flexible pipe in rolls shall be permitted in low pressure system provided the pipe meets the required standard, to avoid the bends, fittings and leakages from the joint which are potential leakage points. Also, reference may be made to accepted standard [9-4(1)]. Heavy rubber flexible tube shall be permitted only as direct connection to burner from appliance valve. 8.2.1.2 For details regarding medical gas pipeline systems, a reference may be made to good practice [9-4(2)]. 8.2.2 Size of Gas Piping Gas piping shall be of such size and so installed as to provide supply of gas sufficient to meet the maximum demand without undue loss of pressure between the meter or service regulator when a meter is not provided, and the appliance(s). 8.2.2.1 The size of gas piping depends upon the following factors: a) Allowable loss in pressure from meter or service regulator, when a meter is not provided, to appliance; b) Maximum consumption to be provided; c) Length of piping and number of fittings; and d) Specific gravity of gas. 8.2.2.2 No gas pipe smaller than 8 mm shall be used. 8.2.3 As far as possible, straight lengths of piping should be used. Where there are bends in the pipe line, these should have a radius of at least five times the diameter of the pipe. 8.2.4 For any thread joint proper sealant shall be used on male threads only. 8.3 The gas piping shall be of the colour stipulated by explosive authority to distinguish it from other piping and the piping shall be painted silver grey with red band of 150 mm width. The gas pipeline shall be painted canary yellow in case of natural gas. 8.4 Piping Underground 8.4.1 Protection of Piping Piping shall be buried to a minimum depth of 1 m or covered in a manner so as to protect the piping from physical damage. 8.4.2 Protection Against Corrosion Generally all the piping within the premises where it has to run on the wall shall be exposed and should not be in contact with wall to ensure that no corrosion takes place. Epoxy sealant or polyethylene conduit shall be used to ensure no contact of pipe with the wall in the situation of pipe crossing the wall. Underground or concealed gas pipeline in contact with earth or other materials which may corrode the piping shall be protected against corrosion by application of adequate corrosion resistant coating backed up by cathodic protection system. 8.5 The building shall not be weakened by the installation of any gas piping. 8.6 Gas piping in building shall be supported with pipe hooks, metal pipe straps, bonds or hangers suitable for the size of piping and of adequate strength and quality and located at proper intervals so that the piping may not be moved accidentally from the installed position. 8.7 Pipe Entrance to Buildings Where gas pipe enters a building through a wall or floor of masonry or concrete, any gas piping or other piping entering the walls or floors shall be suitably sealed against the entrance of water/moisture or gas. The openings or imperfection of fit or design are also source of possible fire and smoke passing through them. Fire stops shall be provided to fill the openings around penetrating items such as gas pipes, etc, through the wall or floor openings. Non-combustible sleeving may Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 154. 8 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 also be used as an alternative to proprietary seals for penetration of pipes of lead, aluminium, aluminium alloy, fibre cement or uPVC up to a specified nominal internal diameter. Proprietary fire stopping and sealing systems which have been shown by test to maintain the fire resistance of the wall or other elements, are available and may be used. Other fire stopping materials include cement mortar; gypsum-based plaster; cement or gypsum vermiculite/perlite mixes; glass fibre, crushed rock, blast furnace slag, or ceramic based products (with or without resin binders), and intumescent mastics. These may be used in situations appropriate to the particular material. Not all of them will be suitable in every situation. When sleeving is used, its length should be greater than the thickness of wall or floor. The sleeve shall be properly grouted to maintain fire/smoke separation. Regarding protection of openings in walls or floors, from fire, reference shall be made to Part 4 ‘Fire and Life Safety’ of the Code. 8.7.1 Piping in Floors Piping in solid floors, such as concrete, shall be laid in channels in the floor suitably covered to permit access to the piping with a minimum damage to the building. 8.7.2 Single pipe without joint shall be used for wall crossing in any building. 8.8 Gas pipe shall not be bent. Fittings shall be used when making turns in gas pipe. 8.9 Generally concealed piping shall not be allowed. However, if it is necessary then it shall be under the 8.4 of underground piping and all protection such as coating, cathodic protection shall be done. 8.10 A drip shall be provided in the gas distribution system, if the moisture contents in the gas is likely to reach saturation point at any stretch of pipe line in the system; a drip shall, however, be provided at any suitable point in the line of the pipe where condensate may collect and from where it can be easily removed. This drip should be so installed as to constitute a trap where in an accumulation of condensate will shut-off the flow of gas before it will run back into the meter. 8.10.1 Drip has to be provided in the case of gas consisting moisture content. 8.11 Prohibited Devices No device shall be placed inside the gas piping or fittings that will reduce the cross-sectional area or otherwise obstruct the free flow of gas. 8.12 Piping shall be electrically continuous throughout its length and properly earthed except in stretches where cathodic protection system is used for protection against corrosion. It shall not, however, be used to earth any electrical equipment. 8.12.1 The distance between gas piping and electrical wiring system shall be at least 60 mm and, where necessary, they shall be securely fixed to prevent contact due to movement. The gas piping should run above the electrical wiring. In this type of installation in the event of any leakage of natural gas, the gas would move up (natural gas being lighter than air) and would not come directly in contact with the electrical wiring. If the gas to be supplied is heavier than the air then the gas piping should run below the electrical wiring. 8.13 The distance between the gas piping and steam piping, if running parallel, shall be at least 150 mm. The gas piping should preferably run below the steam piping. 8.14 Piping installation shall be thoroughly gastight. 8.15 Smoking shall not be permitted when working on piping which contains or has contaminated gas. 8.16 Meters shall be installed in such a way that there shall be no load transfer from the pipeline to the inlet/ outlet of the meter and shall be easily accessible. 9 INSPECTION OF SERVICES 9.1 No person shall use or permit the use of a new system or an extension of an old system of gas piping in a building or structure before the same has been inspected and tested to ensure the tightness of the system, and a certificate has been issued by the Authority. 9.1.1 Test of Piping for Tightness Before any system of gas piping is finally put in service, it shall be carefully tested to ensure that it is gastight. Where any part of the system is to be enclosed or concealed, this test should precede the work of closing in. To test for tightness the piping may be filled with city gas, air or inert gas but not with any other gas or liquid. In no case shall oxygen be used. The piping shall stand a pressure of at least 20 kN/m2 measured with a manometer or slope gauge, for a period of not less than 10 min without showing any drop in pressure. 9.1.2 When the gas pressure exceeds 7 kN/m2 , the piping shall withstand a pressure of 0.6 MN/m2 for 4 h (this test is for piping designed for working pressure less than 0.4 MN/m2 ). 9.2 The Authority shall, within a reasonable time after being requested to do so, inspect and test a system of gas piping that is ready for such inspection and test, and if the work is found satisfactory and test requirements are complied with, it shall issue the certificate. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 155. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — SECTION 4 GAS SUPPLY 9 10 LEAKAGE CHECK 10.1 Before turning gas under pressure into any piping, all openings from which gas may escape shall be closed. 10.2 Checking for Gas Leakage No matches, flame or other sources of ignition shall be employed to check for gas leakage from meters, piping or appliances. Checking for gas leakage with soap and water solution is recommended. 10.3 Use of Lights Artificial illumination used in connection with a search of gas leakage shall be restricted to electric hand flash lights (preferably of the safety type) or approved safety lamps. In searching for leaks, electric switches should not be operated. If electric lights are already turned on, they should not be turned off. 10.4 Checking for Leakage with Meter Immediately after turning gas into the piping, the system shall be checked to ascertain that no gas is escaping. This may be done by carefully watching the test dial of the meter to determine whether gas is passing through the meter. In no case should a leakage test be made using a gas meter unless immediately prior to the test it has been determined that the meter is in operating condition. 10.5 Checking of Leakage Without Using a Meter This may be done by attaching to an appliance, orifice or a manometer or equivalent device and momentarily turning on the gas supply and deserving the gauging device for pressure drop with the gas supply shut-off. No discernible drop in pressure shall occur during a period of 3 min. 10.6 After piping has been checked, all gas piping shall be fully purged. Piping shall not be purged into the combustion chamber of an appliance. A suggested method for purging the gas piping to an appliance is to disconnect the pilot piping at the outlet of the pilot valve. 10.7 After the gas piping has been effectively purged, all appliances shall be purged and the pilots lighted. 10.8 In addition to the checking of gas leakage with soap and water solution, a suitable gas detector is also recommended for use. 11 USE OF LIQUEFIED PETROLEUM GAS (LPG) 11.1 The cylinders used for the storage and transportation of liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) shall conform to accepted standards [9-4(3)] approved by the statutory authority. 11.2 The handing, use, storage and transportation of liquefied petroleum gas in cylinders exceeding 500 ml water capacity shall be done in accordance with good practice [9-4(4)]. 11.3 LPG Cylinder Installation The following recommendations apply to installation in commercial, industrial, educational and institutional premises. 11.3.1 General Recommendations 11.3.1.1 Those responsible for the installation of cylinders, equipment and piping should understand the characteristics of LPG and be trained in good practice of handling, installing and maintaining installations. 11.3.1.2 The jointing compound used at different joints in the system shall be decided by the Qualified Installing Agency. Hemp and similar materials shall not be used at the joint. In any joint in which the thread provides a gastight seal, jointing compound shall be used only on the male thread. 11.3.1.3 Fire extinguishers of dry powder type or carbon dioxide type conforming to accepted standards [9-4(5)] shall be provided in places where LPG cylinder installations are situated and shall be located near such installations. Two buckets filled with sand and two with water shall also be installed nearby. The number, type and size of the fire extinguishers shall be as follows: Number Type Capacity a) For installations with LPG 40 kg to 200 kg 2 Dry powder 9 kg b) For installations with LPG more than 200 kg and up to 320 kg 3 Dry powder 9 kg c) For installations with LPG more than 320 kg and up to 1 000 kg 4 Dry powder 9 kg NOTE — For electrical installations, one number CO 2 fire extinguisher (4.5 kg capacity) shall be provided. 11.3.1.4 Liquefied petroleum gas shall not be transferred from the cylinders in which it is received to any other container. 11.3.2 Cylinder Location 11.3.2.1 Stationary installations a) Stationary installation not exceeding 50 kg of LPG may be installed indoors on any floor. It is recommended to have a minimum floor area of 5 m2 for such an installation. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 156. 10 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 b) Stationary installations each not exceeding 50 kg of LPG may be installed indoors on any floor and within the same workspace provided the minimum distance between two such installations is 3 m, the proportion of such installations to floor area is one installation per 5 m2 and the aggregate quantity of gas of all such installations does not exceed 200 kg. c) Stationary installation not exceeding 100 kg of LPG may be installed indoors on any floor provided the floor area for such an installation is not less than 12 m2 . d) Stationary installations each not exceeding 100 kg of LPG may be installed indoors on any floor and within the same workspace provided the minimum distance between two such installations is 3 m, the proportion of such installations to floor area is one installation per 12 m2 and the aggregate quantity of gas of all such installations does not exceed 200 kg. e) Stationary installation not exceeding 400 kg of LPG may be installed indoors in an enclosed section of a building or a room reserved exclusively for this purpose and ventilated at low level directly to the outside air. f) Stationary installations above 400 kg [200 kg in case provision as in (e) is not possible] but not exceeding 1 000 kg shall be installed outdoors on ground floor level only. A minimum distance of 3 m shall be maintained between an installation and any building, public place, roadways, and other surroundings. The installation shall be protected from excessive weathering by sun, rain, etc, and from tampering by unauthorized persons. A lean-to roof with expanded metal on angle-iron framework on the sides is considered suitable for this purpose. In any case, adequate ventilation at ground level to the outside air shall be provided. g) If the storage per installation is more than 1 000 kg, installations in multiples of 1 000 kg with manifold, safety devices, change over mechanism may be provided with minimum inter distance of 3 m from all sides. Total number of such installations shall not exceed 4 including stand by installation. If more than two installations are used, then number of cylinders per installations should not exceed 30. h) For storage installations of 1 000 kg or installations in multiple of 1 000 kg the number of cylinders to be connected per manifold shall not exceed 15 and for each 1 000 kg installation two such manifolds shall be provided. j) Cylinders shall be installed upright with the valves uppermost. k) Cylinder containing more than 20 kg of gas shall not be located on floors above ground level. m) Cylinders shall be located on a concrete or brick floor, preferably raised in case of outdoor installations. n) In order to prevent the hazardous collection of gas, cylinders shall be placed at least 1 m away from culverts, depressions, or openings leading to below ground level compartment and drains. p) Cylinders which have safety relief valves or similar devices incorporated in them shall be so positioned so that if the relief device operates, escaping gas is not hazardous. q) Cylinder installation for commercial/ industrial/domestic/residential complexes, etc, or at any public place shall meet the following requirements: 1) For commercial and industrial cylinder installation for any public places like mall, buildings, industries, hotels, etc, the sum total of all stationery installations inside the building shall not exceed 400 kg of LPG in any case. In case sum total of net weight of all the cylinders installed indoors exceed 400 kg provision for outdoor installations shall be made. For installations where the sum total is less than 400 kg of LPG provisions of (b) to (e) shall apply. 2) For commercial and industrial cylinder installation for any public place, industry, etc, if the net weight of all the cylinders installed is more than 400 kg but less than 1 000 kg, than the installation shall be provided outdoors in line with (f). The cylinder installation shall be provided in a covered industrial shed but open from all sides for proper ventilation. In case the installed capacity increases more than 1 000 kg, than the installation shall be provided in line with (g). Two separate installations shall be provided and distance between each of the installations shall be minimum 3 m (this distance shall be between the outer edge of the two sheds). 3) For multi-storeyed buildings, flats housing society the reticulated installation of any capacity shall be provided at a safe Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 157. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — SECTION 4 GAS SUPPLY 11 place especially earmarked for this purpose. The installation shall not be provided by the side of road where there is continuous movement of vehicles or is approachable to residents especially children. The installation should be secured and should be provided in a covered shed open from all sides for ventilation. The area shall be demarcated by 1.5 m high chain link fencing having one gate. There should be minimum 3 m clear space all around the fencing and the space between the fencing and the edge of the shed should be minimum 2 m all around. 4) If the requirement is more than 1 000 kg, installations in multiples of 1 000 kg with manifold, safety devices, change over mechanism, not exceeding 4 such installations (including stand by) may be provided with minimum distance of 3 m from all sides. The number of cylinders per installations should not exceed 30. 5) Location of cylinder bank: i) The site for LPG cylinder manifold shall be located away from the kitchen/LPG utility area/residential building. Installation shall be slightly raised minimum 100 mm from surrounding ground level. ii) Cylinders installation should not be located in inaccessible location, under a stairway, basements, cellars, where air movement across cylinders is very low/not present, to prevent the cylinders from getting inadequate latent heat and unapproachable during emergency. iii) Cylinders installation should not be close to steam pipes, boilers, transformers, DG sets, etc, to prevent cylinders from getting affected due to radiant heat. iv) Cylinders shall not be installed at a place where they are likely to cause obstruction, suffer damage or be exposed to conditions likely to affect safety. v) Cylinders installation should not be located along the drive way. Under unavoidable conditions, minimum distance of 3 m from drive way shall be maintained. Brick masonry (minimum 230 mm thick)/concrete (minimum 100 mm thick) walls or metallic shields/barriers (minimum 1.63 mm sheet) and of minimum 2 m height should be erected between drive way and cylinder installation for the safety and security of the installation. vi) Cylinders shall be located on a concrete or brick floor that is firm, at level, smooth, drained in case of outdoor installation. vii) The cylinder shall be installed in upright position with the valve pointing upwards and minimum 1 m away from any combustible materials. r) Cylinder storage room: 1) The cylinder storage room shall be made out of non-flammable material that is concrete (minimum 100 mm thick) or brick masonry walls (minimum 230 mm thick) or steel structures made out of minimum 5 mm thick MS angle iron structure and 1.63 mm MS wire mesh of size minimum 11. 2) Since LPG is heavier than air, ventilation shall be provided at floor level, that is 100 mm above inside cylinder bank room, open to atmosphere. The ventilators shall be provided with 2 layers copper or non- corroding metal wire mesh not less than 11 to the linear centimetre. The size of the ventilators should be minimum 500 mm long and 300 mm height. 3) The storage room shall be well ventilated, that is openings/ventilators shall be provided in the walls of cylinder storage covering minimum 25 percent of wall area. It should also have adequate lighting. Both exteriors and interiors should be painted with weather proof paints. FLP fittings, approved by statutory authorities shall be provided for electrical use. 4) The doors of the room where cylinders are installed shall open outwards and shall have louvers/wire mesh to ensure visibility and ventilation. 5) Flammable materials like wood and plastic shall not be used. The cylinder bank storage room shall not used for storing any other materials. 11.3.2.2 Portable installations When portability of cylinders is necessary, the following requirements shall be fulfilled: Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 158. 12 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 a) The sum total of capacity of the cylinders connected to each manifold shall not exceed 100 kg of LPG. The total quantity of gas thus installed in a workspace shall not exceed 200 kg. b) If cylinders are mounted on a trolley, the trolley shall be stable. Where necessary, the cylinders shall be secured to prevent them from falling. c) The regulator shall be connected directly to the cylinder valve or to a manifold which shall be connected to the cylinder valves by means of rigid connections to give adequate support to the regulator. The only exception to this requirement is where cylinders are mounted on a trolley and the manifold is rigidly supported on the trolley. In such a case flexible or semi-flexible connections may be used between the cylinder valves and the manifold but not between the manifold and the regulator. d) Anytime the total quantity of gas at portable installations shall be in proportion to the floor area as specified in 11.3.2.1 (a) to (f). e) At any time the provisions at 11.3.2.1 (a) to (r) shall be ensured for all installations. 11.3.3 Cylinder Manifolds 11.3.3.1 All materials, fittings, etc, used in cylinder manifold systems shall comply with the statutory provisions or relevant Indian Standards. In absence of any such provisions or Indian Standards, equivalent international norms shall be followed. 11.3.3.2 The individual component parts of manifolds, that is piping, fittings, pigtails, etc, which are subject to cylinder pressure shall be capable of withstanding a test pressure without bursting of 2.5 N/mm2 or one and a half times the developed pressure at 65o C, whichever is more. 11.3.3.3 Where cylinder installations are made up with service and reserve batteries of cylinders, suitable change-over devices or valves shall be incorporated in the manifold header to prevent undue escape of the gas when cylinders are changed. 11.3.3.4 In case pressure regulators, manifold headers and automatic change-over devices are connected to cylinder by semi-flexible connectors, these shall be rigidly supported. Copper tube pigtails are considered to be semi-flexible for this purpose. 11.3.3.5 It is recommended that joints in manifold headers which do not have to be broken in normal use should be welded or brazed using a material which shall have a melting point of at least 540°C. 11.3.3.6 All joints between manifold headers and cylinder connectors shall be readily accessible. 11.3.3.7 All joints in the manifold should be welded (except for valve fixation) and be easily accessible for inspection/repairs, etc. 11.3.3.8 Each manifold arm shall be fabricated in such a way that minimum joints are provided. Only seamless pipes are recommended for use in manifolds. There should be a minimum gap of 300 mm between the manifold and valve protection ring of the LPG cylinders. 11.3.3.9 The cylinders connected to a manifold shall be safely spaced for easy and safe replacement of cylinder when empty. A minimum distance of 400 mm shall be maintained between two nipples provided on the manifold for connecting the cylinders to the manifold. In case the diameter of the cylinder is higher than 400 mm then the distance between the two nipples shall be diameter of the cylinder plus 100 mm. 11.3.3.10 A pressure gauge of 100 mm dial shall be provided in the manifold to indicate the gas pressure in the manifold. The pressure gauge shall be suitable for a pressure range 0 to 1.0 N/mm2 . 11.3.4 Pressure Regulators 11.3.4.1 Pressure regulators and other devices used to control the gas shall comply with the distributing company’s stipulations and accepted standards [9-4(6)]. 11.3.4.2 Pressure regulator fitted with a safety valve shall be either, a) installed in the open air; or b) vented to the open by means of a metal vent pipe connected to the safety valve outlet. 11.3.4.3 Care shall be taken that safety valve outlets do not become choked with dust or other foreign matter. 11.3.4.4 If the regulator is fitted with a relief valve, care should be taken in positioning the regulator to avoid unnecessary hazards if the relief valve functions. 11.3.4.5 Pressure regulators and other control devices shall be adequately supported. 11.3.5 Instructions to Consumers Consumers shall be instructed by the distribution company on the following, through appropriate written instructions: a) Operation of the whole system; b) How to recognize gas leaks; c) Action to be taken in case of leakage; d) Action to be taken in case of fire; and e) Action to be taken in case of damage to, or failure of, any part of the installation. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 159. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — SECTION 4 GAS SUPPLY 13 11.3.6 For detailed information regarding installation of LPG cylinders in commercial, industrial, educational and institutional premises, reference may be made to good practice [9-4(7)]. 11.4 LPG Bulk Storage Installations The following recommendations apply to LPG bulk storage installations where storage tanks over 450 litre water capacity are used at industrial, commercial and domestic consumers’ premises. The maximum capacity of an individual tank and group of tanks at industrial, commercial and domestic premises shall be as follows: Premises Maximum Water Capacity of an Individual Tank Maximum Water Capacity of Group of Tanks Industrial 130 000 260 000 Commercial 40 000 80 000 Domestic 20 000 80 000 11.4.1 Location and Spacing of Storage Tanks 11.4.1.1 Storage tanks shall be located outside the buildings and shall not be installed one above the other. 11.4.1.2 Each individual tank shall be located with respect to the nearest important building or group of buildings or line of adjoining property which may be built in accordance with Table 1. The distances given refer to the horizontal distance in plan between the nearest point of the storage tank and building/property line. 11.4.1.3 In heavily populated or congested areas the authority may determine the need for other reasonable protective methods to be taken, such as provision of fire walls, etc. If fire walls are to be provided, the authority may determine the extent to which the safety distances for above ground tanks may be reduced. 11.4.1.4 No LPG tank(s) shall be located within the bunded enclosures of any petroleum installation. The minimum distance of separation between LPG storage tanks and any petroleum installation shall be as prescribed under the Petroleum Rules, 1976 or as specified in Table 1, whichever is more. 11.4.1.5 The number of storage tanks in one storage installation shall not exceed six. In case there are more than one storage installations, the safety distance between two installations shall be the same as the distance between the tanks and the property line in accordance with Table 1. 11.4.2 Bunding Since LPG is heavier than air, storage tank shall not be enclosed within bund walls. The accumulation of flammable liquid under LPG tanks shall be prevented by suitably slopping the ground. 11.4.3 Protection 11.4.3.1 To prevent trespassing or tampering, the area which includes tanks, direct fired vapourisers, pumping equipment and loading and unloading facilities shall be enclosed by an industrial type fence at least 2 m high along the perimeter of the safety zone. Any fence shall have at least two means of exit. Gates shall open outwards and shall not be self-locking. 11.4.3.2 When damage to LPG systems from the LPG tank lorry is a possibility, precautions against such damage shall be taken. Table 1 Minimum Safety Distances (Clauses 11.4.1.2, 11.4.1.4 and 11.4.1.5) Distance from Building/ Property Line Distance between Tanks Sl No. LPG Storage Water Capacity of Individual Tank Above Ground m Under Ground m Above Ground m Under Ground m (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) i) Up to 2 000 5 5 1 1.5 ii) Above 2 000 and up to 10 000 10 7.5 1 1.5 iii) Above 10 000 and up to 20 000 15 10 1.5 1.5 iv) Above 20 000 and up to 40 000 adjacent 20 15 2 0.25 × diameter of vessel or 1.5 m (Min) v) Above 40 000 and above adjacent 30 15 2 0.25 × diameter of vessel or 1.5 m (Min) NOTE — If the aggregate water capacity of a multi-tank installation is 40 000 litre or greater, the above minimum safety distances shall apply to the aggregate storage capacity rather than the capacity per individual storage tank. l l l Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 160. 14 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 11.4.3.3 Underground tanks shall be protected from above ground loading by providing a suitable curb to prevent a possible accidental damage to the tank and its fittings by LPG tank lorry. 11.4.4 Grass and Weed Removal Road ignitable material, such as weeds, long grass or any combustible material shall be removed from an area within 3 m from the shell of any LPG tank of up to 2 000 litre water capacity, and within 6 m from the shell of larger tanks. If weed killers are used, chemicals which are a potential source of fire hazard shall not be selected for this purpose. 11.4.5 Warning Signs No smoking or naked flames shall be permitted within the safety zone of the installation. Prominent notices to this effect shall be posted at access point. From accessibility point of view, the signs shall be in accordance with 13 of Part 3 ‘Development Control Rules and General Building Requirements’ of the Code. 11.4.6 Fire Protection The possibility of a major fire outbreak, leading to direct flame impingement of the storage tank, shall be minimized by sound engineering in plant design and layout, good operating practice, and proper education and training of personnel on both routine operations and on action to be taken in an emergency. 11.4.6.1 Water supply Provision shall be made for an adequate supply of water and fire protection in the storage area according to the local hoses and mobile equipment, fixed monitors or by fixed spray systems which may be automatic. Control of water flow should be possible from outside any danger area. 11.4.6.2 Fire extinguishers At least two dry chemical powder type fire extinguishers of 9 kg capacity each, conforming to the quality requirements in accordance with the accepted standards [9-4(5)], shall be installed at points of access to the storage installations. The fire extinguishers shall be mounted keeping in view the ease of accessibility in accordance with good practice [9-4(8)] and Part 4 ‘Fire and Life Safety’ of the Code. 11.4.7 For detailed information regarding LPG bulk storage installations reference may be made to good practice [9-4(9)]. 12 USE OF PIPED NATURAL GAS (PNG) 12.1 The PNG infrastructure shall be in complete compliance with all the requirements of Petroleum and Natural Gas Regulatory Board (Technical Standards and Specifications including Safety Standards for City or Local Natural Gas Distribution Network) Regulations, 2008. 12.1.1 The user-group/housing society concerned (referred hereinafter in these clauses as ‘society’) should contact the local city gas distribution (CGD) entity at the stage of the design of the building. This ensures that all the adequate provisions are incorporated in the design itself, as also the compliance with all the safety standards stipulated/required by the regulations/ gas entities, as applicable from time-to-time. This ensures avoidance/mitigation of any rework at a later stage, or even situations where incorporation of any changes may become impractical or not possible, thereby rendering the building devoid of PNG infrastructure. 12.1.2 The entire gas pipeline infrastructure proposed to be laid in the premises of the society shall be easily accessible in future by the representatives of the CGD entity. Provision should be made by the builder for the same. Builder/society should ensure communication of the same to the future customer and should incorporate it in their agreements with the customer. 12.1.3 No permanent/temporary structure shall be erected on the ground along the paths where gas pipeline exists underground. 12.2 The PNG infrastructure inside the premises of societies primarily comprises the following: a) Underground medium pressure (MP) pipeline networks, comprising mainly polyethylene pipes and fittings; b) Underground low pressure (LP) pipeline networks, comprising mainly polyethylene (PE) pipes and fittings; c) Service regulator modules; d) Above ground riser and lateral system, comprising mainly ERW GI pipes and fittings; and e) Pipeline inside premise and/or kitchen of individual customer, comprising various components like meter regulator, diaphragm gas meter, copper pipe, brass fittings, brass valves, etc. The guidelines mentioned under 12.3 to 12.6 give the minimum requirements to be complied with. 12.3 Guidelines for MP and LP Pipeline Networks 12.3.1 Gas pipelines are required to be laid at a minimum top cover of 1 m from the finished surface level. Underground PE pipeline shall not be laid through the basement. 12.3.2 A minimum clearance of at least 300 mm is Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 161. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — SECTION 4 GAS SUPPLY 15 required to be maintained between the gas pipelines and any other obstacles/services. 12.3.3 Gas pipelines should not be laid closer to properties than as stipulated below: Pressure Minimum Proximity Up to 0.01 N/mm2 0.25 m Up to 0.4 N/mm2 3.00 m 12.3.4 If required, provision of underground ducts may be provided by the society within their premises at the time of construction of the building, to facilitate inserting of gas pipelines at a later stage. The duct through which gas pipeline is to be laid should not be shared with pipeline of any other utility, for safety reasons. 12.3.5 The ducts/sleeves should be 150 mm of PVC. The top cover of the sleeve should be at least 1 m below finish ground level. The material of ducts, sleeves and fittings to be used for construction shall be of high quality and in compliance with the concerned Indian Standards. In some cases, if applicable, there may be multiple number of ducts required to be laid. 12.3.6 Service chambers should be provided at 15 m to 20 m centre-to-centre (in case of straight sections) and also at bends, tees, and before and after slopes. Size of the service chamber shall be 1.0 m × 0.6 m (inside dimensions) and top of the cover of the duct should be at least 1.0 m high. Cover of the chamber should be capable of sustaining expected vehicular load. The service chamber should be filled with sand after MGL PE gas pipe is laid through the ducts provided. 12.3.7 The ducts for gas pipeline should be maintained at offset distance of at least 1.0 m from electrical services and 1.5 m from any other structure. Crossing with other utilities/services should be at a difference in level of at least 300 mm. 12.3.8 During the period between laying of ducts and insertion of gas pipeline, all the ends/entries of the ducts laid shall be temporarily closed to avoid the entry of mud, debris, rodents, etc, inside the ducts. 12.3.9 After the insertion of gas pipeline through ducts, the annular space between the duct and the gas pipe at all the ends (which creates possibility of entering undesired objects) should be plugged using a RCC half round pieces and plastered with cement. 12.3.10 The ducts and other elements of the duct system should be properly maintained subsequent to their installation and till the time of insertion of gas pipeline through the same. 12.4 Guidelines for Service Regulator Modules The user-group/society should provide adequate open spaces in the premises for installation of gas equipment like regulating stations, which will be required to facilitate supply of PNG to the residents of the building/ premise. The identified location shall be such that it does not obstruct any vehicular movement and is at a safe location in the premise. 12.5 Guidelines for Above Ground Riser and Lateral System 12.5.1 The riserandlateralsystemsupplyinggastomulti- storeyed residential buildings shall be in compliance with the requirements of the PNGRB regulations. 12.5.2 Multi-occupancy buildings having eight floors or more should have purpose-built utility shafts/ducts foraccommodatingriserandlateralsystem,which should be preferred route for constructing/locating the riser. 12.5.3 Provision shall be made for safe access to the riser and lateral system by the representatives of the CGD entity for future maintenance and repair. In the case of a continuous shaft, a concrete slab or similar flooring shall be provided for maintenance work at each floor. 12.5.4 Ventilation 12.5.4.1 Adequate provision for natural ventilation shall be provided in the building where PNG infrastructure is laid, so as to prevent any potential gas leaks from accumulating in the atmosphere to an unsafe level. Mechanical ventilation shall not be used to achieve the required ventilation levels. The minimum levels of ventilation in risers ducts/shafts shall be as given below: Cross Sectional Area (CSA) of Riser Duct Minimum Free Area of Each High and Low Level Ventilation (Open Ventilator) Typical Air Duct Size Typical Ventilator Size m2 m2 mm mm Less than 0.01 0.002 Ø50 Ø70 0.01 to 0.375 0.010 Ø100 100 × 100 0.375 to 0.5 0.02 Ø150 100 × 200 0.5 to 7.5 0.05 Ø250 200 × 250 More than 7.5 1 percent CSA of the duct – – 12.5.4.2 Where the duct has a single ventilator that is part of the architectural design of the building, the free area of the ventilator to outside area shall be a minimum of 0.04 m2 or 4 percent of the CSA of the duct, whichever is greatest. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 162. 16 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 12.5.4.3 Pipe work shall be installed in an unventilated void. 12.5.4.4 The pipe may enter the building to gain access to the riser shaft via a basement or car parking area, provided the area is well ventilated. 12.5.4.5 Any duct containing a riser or lateral shall be ventilated either directly to outside air, or indirectly to outside air via an area that is normally occupied and is itself ventilated to outside. 12.5.4.6 The provision of ventilation should be via permanent ventilators within the area/duct containing pipe-work. 12.5.4.7 All flammable release sources shall be at a lower elevation than the bottom of the highest ventilation opening. 12.5.4.8 Pipes may run in the same duct (subject to availability of adequate clearance from other utilities and ventilation) as most other services, including hot and cold water services, heating pipes, electrical conduits and cables and pipes containing other fuels. However, the following services shall not be installed in the same duct as gas pipes: a) Ventilation ducts and vacuum pipes that operate at sub-atmospheric pressure and that are not of all-welded or all-brazed construction; and b) Services containing oxidizing or corrosive fluids. 12.5.5 There shall be provision for installing risers and laterals such that a minimum distance of 300 mm is ensured from any electrical equipment or installations and associated excess current control boxes of fuse boxes, and 25 mm is ensured from the electricity supply and distribution cables and other metal piped services. 12.5.6 In case where the gas pipeline is required to cross through a wall, provisions (like core cutting) or holes of adequate size drilled through the wall/building structure, to accommodate an easy passage of the gas pipelines through them, shall be made. The elevation of these provisions/holes shall be near the roof and not near the floor of the room. 12.6 Guidelines for Pipeline Inside Premise and/or Kitchen of Individual Customer 12.6.1 Meters will normally be located inside the property on an outside wall with a minimum length of inlet pipe-work inside the property. Kitchen is the preferred room to locate the meter, thereby minimizing the length of the outlet pipe work. 12.6.2 The gas meter shall be installed in an area with adequate ventilation and at a proper location to facilitate safe and convenient meter reading and maintenance activities in future. A minimum ventilation area of 2 percent of the internal floor area of the room shall be provided in the room where the gas meter is located. The gas pipeline inside the kitchen shall be laid along the walls of the kitchen and in a ventilated area. 12.6.3 In case pipe work is required to be laid in solid floors inside the kitchen, adequate provisions (in the shortest possible route and a minimum of 75 mm screed to provide an approximate cover of at least 50 mm over the gas pipe) shall be provided to protect the pipeline against corrosion and failure caused by movement. This method of construction consists of a base concrete raft foundation onto which a cement screed is subsequently laid in order to obtain a satisfactory surface to accept the floor finish. Provision of preformed ducts with protective covers should be made to facilitate laying of gas pipeline. It is advisable to contact the CGD entity at the designing stage so that adequate provisions are incorporated in the design of the kitchen/floor plan to facilitate easy and safe installation of PNG system. 12.6.4 Installation pipe work shall not be placed within the cavity of a cavity wall. Every pipe passing through a cavity wall shall take the shortest possible practicable route and shall be sleeved. 12.6.5 In case of provision of sleeve, the same should be of a diameter that provides a sliding fit to the pipe allowing normal pipe expansion/contraction. 13 USE OF MEDICAL GAS PIPELINE SYSTEM (MGPS) 13.1 General A medical gas pipeline system (MGPS) is installed to provide a safe, convenient and cost effective system for the provision of medical gases to the clinical and nursing staff at the point of use. It reduces the problems associated with the use of gas cylinders such as safety, porterage, storage and noise. MGPS generally handles distribution of oxygen, nitrous oxide, medical air, surgical air, medical vacuum only; and sometimes provides anaesthetic gas scavenging systems. All other gases used in hospitals have low volume use and are provided through cylinders at the point of use. It is essential to ensure that there is no possibility of a cross-connection between any system and that all parts of each system to which connections can be made by users are gas specific. Separate installations are provided for pathology, general laboratories and special laboratories. These are designated Laboratory Gases (Pipeline) Supply System (LGSS). LGSS is provided with valve controlled outlets and shall never be provided with medical gas terminal units. Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up
- 163. PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT) — SECTION 4 GAS SUPPLY 17 Use and storage of medical gases is governed by Indian Drugs and Cosmetics Act, 1940. 13.2 Design and Installation 13.2.1 Pipelines Systems for Compressed Medical Gases and Vacuum The design, installation, performance, documentation, testing and commissioning of pipeline systems for compressed medical gases, gases for driving surgical tools and vacuum in healthcare facilities to ensure continuous delivery of the correct gas and the provision of vacuum from the pipeline system, shall be in accordance with the good practice [9-4(10)]. This is inclusive of the requirements for supply systems, pipeline distribution systems, control systems, monitoring and alarm systems and non-interchangeability between components of different gas systems. 13.2.2 Anaesthetic Gas Scavenging Disposal Systems The design, installation, performance, documentation, testing and commissioning of anaesthetic gas scavenging disposal systems to ensure patient safety and to minimize exposure of the operator and other persons to anaesthetic gases and vapours, shall be in accordance with the good practice [9-4(11)]. This is inclusive of requirements for the power device, pipeline system, performance, non-interchangeability between key components and avoidance of cross connections between anaesthetic gas scavenging (AGS) disposal systems and medical gas and vacuum pipeline systems. LIST OF STANDARDS The following list records those standards which are acceptable as ‘good practice’ and ‘accepted standards’ in the fulfillment of the requirements of the Code. The latest version of a standard shall be adopted at the time of enforcement of the Code. The standards listed may be used by the Authority for conformance with the requirements of the referred clauses in the Code. In the following list, the number appearing in the first column within parantheses indicates the number of the reference in this Section. IS No. Title (1) 14885 : 2001 Specification for polyethylene pipe for the supply gaseous fuel (2) IS/ISO 7396-1 : Medical gas pipelines systems : 2007 Pipelines systems for compressed medical gases and vacuum IS/ISO 7396-2 : Anaesthetic gas scavenging 2007 disposal systems (3) 3196 (Part 1) : Specification for welded low 2013 carbon steel cylinders exceeding 5 litres water capacity for low pressureliquefiablegases:Part 1 Cylindersforliquefiedpetroleum gases (LPG) (sixth revision) 7142 : 1995 Specification for welded low carbon steel cylinders for low pressure liquefiable gases not exceeding 5 litre water capacity (first revision) (4) 8198 (Part 5) : Code of practice for steel 1984 cylinders for compressed gases: Part 5 Liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) (first revision) (5) 15683 : 2006 Specification for portable fire extinguishers — Performance and construction (6) 9798 : 2013 Low pressure regulators for use with liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) mixtures 4786 : 2014 Specification for variable high pressure regulators for use with liquefied petroleum gas (7) 6044 (Part 1) : Liquefied petroleum gas 2013 storage installations — Code of practice: Part 1 Residential, commercial and industrial cylinder installations (second revision) (8) 2190 : 2010 Code of practice for selection, installation and maintenance of first-aid fire extinguishers (fourth revision) (9) 6044 (Part 2) : Code of practice for liquefied 2001 petroleum gas storage install- ations : Part 2 Commercial, industrial and domestic bulk storage installations (first revision) (10) IS/ISO 7396-1 : Medical gas pipelines systems : 2007 Pipelines systems for compressed medical gases and vacuum (11) IS/ISO 7396-1 : Anaesthetic gas scavenging 2007 disposal systems IS No. Title Supplied by Book Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid upto31-12-2017 ook Supply Bureau Under the License from BIS for LARSEN AND TOUBRO CONSTRUCTION - MANAPAKKAM, CHENNAI ON 17-03-2017 09:00:59 (123.63.24.35) valid up